Table of Contents

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

FORM 20-F

 

(Mark One)

 

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

OR

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the fiscal year ended 31 December 2011

 

OR

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

For the transition period from                      to                     

 

OR

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

Date of event requiring this shell company report                     

 

Commission file number 0-16350

 

WPP plc

(Exact Name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Jersey

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

 

6 Ely Place

Dublin 2, Ireland

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

Andrea Harris, Esq.

Group Chief Counsel

6 Ely Place Dublin 2, Ireland

011-353-1-669-0333

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act.

 

Title of each class

 

Name of each exchange on which registered

Not applicable   Not applicable

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act.

 

Ordinary Shares of 10p each

 

(Title of Class)

 

American Depositary Shares, each representing five Ordinary Shares (ADSs)

 

(Title of Class)


Table of Contents

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act.

 

None

 

(Title of Class)

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

At December 31, 2011, the number of outstanding ordinary shares was 1,266,373,821 which includes at such date ordinary shares represented by 9,715,724 ADSs.

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

YES   x     NO   ¨

 

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

YES   ¨     NO   x

 

Note – Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

YES   x     NO   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

YES   ¨     NO   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer   x                     Accelerated filer   ¨                     Non-accelerated filer   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   ¨    International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board   x    Other   ¨

 

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.

 

Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

 

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

YES   ¨     NO   x

 

 

 


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

FORWARD – LOOKING STATEMENTS

     1   

Part I

     1   

Item 1

  

IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

     1   

Item 2

  

OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     1   

Item 3

  

KEY INFORMATION

     1   
  

A

  

Selected Financial Data

     1   
  

B

  

Capitalization and Indebtedness

     4   
  

C

  

Reasons for the Offer and Use of Proceeds

     4   
  

D

  

Risk Factors

     5   

Item 4

  

INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     7   
  

A

  

History and Development of the Company

     7   
  

B

  

Business Overview

     8   
  

C

  

Organizational Structure

     13   
  

D

  

Property, Plant and Equipment

     15   

Item 4A

  

UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     15   

Item 5

  

OPERATING FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     16   
  

A

  

Operating Results

     16   
  

B

  

Liquidity and Capital Resources

     23   
  

C

  

Research and Development, Patents and Licenses

     25   
  

D

  

Trend Information

     25   
  

E

  

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

     26   
  

F

  

Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations

     26   

Item 6

  

DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     36   
  

A

  

Directors and Senior Management

     36   
  

B

  

Compensation

     38   
  

C

  

Board Practices

     54   
  

D

  

Employees

     58   
  

E

  

Share Ownership

     59   

Item 7

  

MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     60   
  

A

  

Major Shareholders

     60   
  

B

  

Related Party Transactions

     60   
  

C

  

Interests of Experts and Counsel

     60   

Item 8

  

FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     61   
  

A

  

Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information

     61   
  

B

  

Significant Changes

     62   

Item 9

  

THE OFFER AND LISTING

     63   
  

A

  

Offer and Listing Details

     63   
  

B

  

Plan of Distribution

     64   
  

C

  

Markets

     64   
  

D

  

Selling Shareholders

     64   
  

E

  

Dilution

     64   
  

F

  

Expenses of the Issue

     64   


Table of Contents
       Page  

Item 10

  

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     65   
   A    Share Capital      65   
   B    Memorandum and Articles of Association      65   
   C    Material Contracts      72   
   D    Exchange Controls      75   
   E    Taxation      75   
   F    Dividends and Paying Agents      83   
   G    Statements by Experts      83   
   H    Documents on Display      83   
   I    Subsidiary Information      83   

Item 11

   QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK      84   

Item 12

   DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES      84   
   A    Debt Securities      84   
   B    Warrants and Rights      84   
   C    Other Securities      84   
   D    American Depositary Shares      85   

Part II

     87   

Item 13

   DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES      87   

Item 14

  

MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     87   

Item 15

   CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES      87   

Item 16A

   AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT      89   

Item 16B

   CODE OF ETHICS      89   

Item 16C

   PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES      90   

Item 16D

   EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES      90   

Item 16E

  

PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     90   

Item 16F

   CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT      91   

Item 16G

   CORPORATE GOVERNANCE      91   

Part III

     92   

Item 17

   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS      92   

Item 18

   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS      92   

Item 19

   EXHIBITS      92   


Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements

 

In connection with the provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 (the ‘Reform Act’), the Company (as defined below) may include forward-looking statements (as defined in the Reform Act) in oral or written public statements issued by or on behalf of the Company. These forward-looking statements may include, among other things, plans, objectives, projections and anticipated future economic performance based on assumptions and the like that are subject to risks and uncertainties. As such, actual results or outcomes may differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. Important factors which may cause actual results to differ include but are not limited to: the unanticipated loss of a material client or key personnel, delays or reductions in client advertising budgets, shifts in industry rates of compensation, regulatory compliance costs or litigation, natural disasters or acts of terrorism, the Company’s exposure to changes in the values of major currencies other than the UK pound sterling (because a substantial portion of its revenues are derived and costs incurred outside of the United Kingdom) and the overall level of economic activity in the Company’s major markets (which varies depending on, among other things, regional, national and international political and economic conditions and government regulations in the world’s advertising markets). In addition, you should consider the risks described in Item 3D, captioned “Risk Factors,” which could also cause actual results to differ from forward-looking information. In light of these and other uncertainties, the forward-looking statements included in this document should not be regarded as a representation by the Company that the Company’s plans and objectives will be achieved.

 

The Company undertakes no obligation to update or revise any such forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

PART I

 

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

 

Overview

 

WPP plc and its subsidiaries (WPP) comprise one of the largest communications services businesses in the world. At 31 December 2011, the Group had 113,615 employees. Including all employees of associated companies, this figure was approximately 158,000. For the year ended 31 December 2011, the Group had revenue of £10,022 million and operating profit of £1,192 million.

 

Unless the context otherwise requires, the terms “Company”, “Group” and “Registrant” as used herein shall also mean WPP plc and its subsidiaries.

 

A. Selected Financial Data

 

The selected financial data should be read in conjunction with, and is qualified in its entirety by reference to, the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company, including the notes thereto.

 

The selected income statement data for each of the three years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009 and the selected balance sheet data as at 31 December 2011 and 2010 are derived from the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company that appear elsewhere in this Form 20-F. The selected financial data for prior periods

 

1


Table of Contents

is derived from the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company previously filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) as part of the Company’s Annual Reports on Form 20-F. The Consolidated Financial Statements were prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

 

The reporting currency of the Group is the UK pound sterling and the selected financial data has been prepared on this basis.

 

Selected Consolidated Income Statement Data

 

       Year ended 31 December  
     2011     2010     2009     2008     2007  
       £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Revenue

     10,021.8        9,331.0        8,684.3        7,476.9        6,185.9   

Operating profit

     1,192.2        973.0        761.7        876.0        804.7   

Profit for the year

     916.5        661.0        506.9        513.9        515.1   

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

     840.1        586.0        437.7        439.1        465.9   

Earnings per ordinary share:

          

Basic

     67.6  p      47.5  p      35.9  p      38.4  p      39.6  p 

Diluted

     64.5  p      45.9  p      35.3  p      37.6  p      38.0  p 

Earnings per ADS 1 :

          

Basic

     338.0  p      237.5  p      179.5  p      192.0  p      198.0  p 

Diluted

     322.5  p      229.5  p      176.5  p      188.0  p      190.0  p 

Dividends per ordinary share

     19.28  p      16.25  p      15.47  p      14.32  p      11.93  p 

Dividends per ADS (US dollars) 2

     151.2  ¢      126.7  ¢      135.9  ¢      139.5  ¢      113.3  ¢ 

1     Basic and diluted earnings per American Depositary Share (ADS) have been calculated using the same method as earnings per share, multiplied by a factor of five.

2     These figures have been translated for convenience purposes only, using the approximate average rate for the year shown in the exchange rate table on page 4. This conversion should not be construed as a representation that the pound sterling amounts actually represent, or could be converted into, US dollars at the rates indicated.

        

         

 

Selected Consolidated Balance Sheet Data

 

       At 31 December  
     2011      2010      2009      2008      2007  
       £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  

Total assets

     24,694.9         24,345.1         22,351.5         24,463.3         17,252.0   

Net assets

     6,894.3         6,647.9         6,075.7         5,959.8         4,094.8   

Called-up share capital

     126.6         126.4         125.6         125.5         119.2   

Number of shares (in millions)

     1,266.4         1,264.4         1,256.5         1,255.3         1,191.5   

 

Dividends

 

Dividends on the Company’s ordinary shares, when paid, are paid to share owners as of a record date, which is fixed by the Company.

 

2


Table of Contents

The table below sets forth the amounts of interim, second interim and total dividends paid on the Company’s ordinary shares in respect of each fiscal year indicated. In the United States, the Company’s ordinary shares are represented by ADSs, which are evidenced by American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) or held in book-entry form. The Group uses the terms ‘ADS’ and ‘ADR’ interchangeably. The dividends are also shown translated into US cents per ADS using the average closing exchange rate for pounds sterling, as shown on page 4, for each year presented.

 

             Pence per ordinary share               US cents per ADS  
In respect of the year ended 31 December:    First
Interim
     Second
Interim 1
     Total      First
Interim
     Second
Interim 1
     Total  

2007

     4.32         9.13         13.45         43.24         91.39         134.63   

2008

     5.19         10.28         15.47         48.07         95.21         143.28   

2009

     5.19         10.28         15.47         40.66         80.53         121.19   

2010

     5.97         11.82         17.79         46.15         91.37         137.52   

2011

     7.46         17.14         24.60         59.80         137.39         197.19   

1     Income access share arrangements have been put in place by the Company. The mechanics of the income access share arrangements mean that the Company will declare a second interim rather than a final dividend. The Board has no plans to announce any additional dividend in respect of the year ended 31 December 2011.

         

 

The 2011 first interim dividend was paid on 14 November 2011 to share owners on the register at 14 October 2011. The 2011 second interim dividend will be paid on 9 July 2012 to share owners on the register at 8 June 2012.

 

Exchange rates

 

Fluctuations in the exchange rate between the pound sterling and the US dollar will affect the dollar equivalent of the pound sterling prices of the Company’s ordinary shares on The London Stock Exchange Limited (The London Stock Exchange) and, as a result, are likely to affect the market price of the ADSs in the United States. US dollar amounts paid to holders of ADSs also depend on the sterling/US dollar exchange rate at the time of payment.

 

The following table sets forth for each of the most recent six months, the high and low exchange rates between the pound sterling and the US dollar. As at 20 April 2012, the closing exchange rate was 1.6124.

 

Month ended    High      Low  

31 October 2011

     1.6129         1.5392   

30 November 2011

     1.6083         1.5436   

31 December 2011

     1.5702         1.5399   

31 January 2012

     1.5749         1.5295   

29 February 2012

     1.5937         1.5664   

31 March 2012

     1.5991         1.5635   

 

3


Table of Contents

The annual average exchange rates between the pound sterling and the US dollar for each of the five years ended 31 December were:

 

Year ended 31 December    Average  

2007

     2.0019   

2008

     1.8524   

2009

     1.5667   

2010

     1.5461   

2011

     1.6032   

 

B. Capitalization and Indebtedness

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Reasons for the Offer and Use of Proceeds

 

Not applicable.

 

4


Table of Contents

D. Risk Factors

 

The Company is subject to a variety of possible risks that could adversely impact its revenues, results of operations or financial condition. Some of these risks relate to the industries in which the Company operates while others are more specific to the Company. The table below sets out principal risks the Company has identified that could adversely affect it. See also the discussion of Forward-Looking Statements preceding Item 1.

 

Risk      Potential impact
Clients       
The Group competes for clients in a highly competitive industry and client loss may reduce market share and decrease profits.     

Competitors include large multinational advertising and marketing communication companies and regional and national marketing services companies.

 

New market participants include database marketing and modelling companies, telemarketers and internet companies.

 

Service agreements with clients are generally terminated by the client on 90 days’ notice and many clients put their advertising and communications business up for competitive review from time to time. The ability to attract new clients and to retain existing clients may also in some cases be limited by clients’ policies about conflicts of interest.

The Group receives a significant portion of its revenues from a limited number of large clients and the loss of these clients could adversely impact the Group’s prospects, business, financial condition and results of operations.      A relatively small number of clients contribute a significant percentage of the Group’s consolidated revenues. The Group’s 10 largest clients accounted for almost 17.2% of revenues in the year ended 31 December 2011. Clients generally are able to reduce advertising and marketing spend or cancel projects on short notice. The loss of one or more of the Group’s largest clients, if not replaced by new client accounts or an increase in business from existing clients, would adversely affect the Group’s financial condition.
Sustainability issues         
Damage to WPP’s reputation from undertaking controversial client work.      The operating companies may undertake controversial client accounts and may not always consider the impact on the Group.
Marketing ethics, compliance with marketing standards, and increasing transparency about our marketing practices.      Failure to comply with all laws and industry codes governing marketing material could impact the Group’s reputation or its relationship with clients.
Compliance with privacy and data protection regulations.      Failure to adequately protect data could impact the Group’s reputation and create risk of litigation. Increased regulation unless the operating companies meet best practice standards, contribute to the debate on privacy, increase transparency for consumers on how their data are obtained and used.
Climate change, including the emissions from energy used in our offices and during business travel.      Negative cost and reputational impact if the Group failed to meet target to reduce per head carbon intensity to 1.2 tonnes by 2020 (from 3.3 tonnes in 2006).
Economic       
The Group’s businesses are subject to economic and political cycles. Many of the economies in which the Group operates (including the Eurozone) have significant economic challenges.      Reduction in client spending or postponing spending on the services offered by the Group or switching of client expenditure to non-traditional media and renegotiation of contract terms leading to reduced profitability and cash flow.
Financial       
Currency exchange rate fluctuations could adversely impact the Group’s consolidated results.      The Company’s reporting currency is pounds sterling. Given the Group’s significant international operations, changes in exchange rates cause fluctuations in the Company’s results when measured in pounds sterling.
Changes to the Group’s debt issue ratings by the rating agencies Moody’s Investor Services and Standard and Poor’s Rating Service may affect the Group’s access to debt capital.      If the Company’s financial performance and outlook materially deteriorate, a ratings downgrade could occur and the interest rates and fees payable on certain of the Company’s revolving credit facilities and certain of our bonds could be increased.

 

5


Table of Contents
Risk      Potential impact
Financial (continued)         
The Group may be unable to collect balances due from any client that files for bankruptcy or becomes insolvent.     

The Group is generally paid in arrears for its services. Invoices are typically payable within 30 to 60 days.

 

The Group commits to media and production purchases on behalf of some of its clients as principal or agent depending on the client and market circumstances. If a client is unable to pay sums due, media and production companies may look to the Group to pay such amounts to which it committed as an agent on behalf of those clients.

Mergers & Acquisitions       
The Group may be unsuccessful in evaluating material risks involved in completed and future acquisitions and may be unsuccessful in integrating any acquired operations with its existing businesses.      The Group regularly reviews potential acquisitions of businesses that are complementary to its operations and clients needs. If material risks are not identified prior to acquisition or the Group experiences difficulties in integrating an acquired business, it may not realise the expected benefits from such acquisition and the Group’s financial condition could be adversely affected.
Goodwill and other intangible assets recorded on the Group’s balance sheet with respect to acquired companies may become impaired.      The Group has a significant amount of goodwill and other intangible assets recorded on its balance sheet with respect to acquired companies. The Group annually tests the carrying value of goodwill and other intangibles for impairment. The estimates and assumptions about results of operations and cash flows made in connection with impairment testing could differ from future results of operations and cash flows. Future events could cause the Group to conclude that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired which could have a material impact on the Group’s financial condition.
Operational         
The Group operates in 107 countries and is exposed to the risks of doing business internationally.      The Group’s international operations are subject to exchange rate fluctuations, restrictions and/or taxation on repatriations of earnings, social, political and economic instability, conflicts of laws and interpretation of contracts.
People       
The Group’s performance could be adversely affected if it were unable to attract and retain key talent or had inadequate talent management and succession planning for key management roles.      The Group is highly dependent on the talent, creative abilities and technical skills of our personnel as well as their relationships with clients. The Group is vulnerable to the loss of personnel to competitors and clients leading to disruption to the business.
Employment practices, including diversity and equal opportunities, business ethics, employee development, remuneration, communication and health and safety.      Failing to meet standards on diversity and gender would impact the perception of the Group and quality of work.
Regulatory/Legal       
The Group may be subject to regulations affecting its activities.      Governments, government agencies and industry self-regulatory bodies from time to time adopt statutes and regulations that directly or indirectly affect the form, content and scheduling of advertising, public relations and public affairs and market research or otherwise limit the scope of the activities of the Group and its clients which could have a material adverse impact on our financial position. Changes in tax laws or their application may also adversely affect the Group’s reported results.
The Group may be exposed to liabilities from allegations that certain of its clients’ advertising claims may be false or misleading or that its clients products may be defective.      The Group may be, or may be joined as a defendant, in litigation brought against its clients in respect of services provided by the Group.
The Group operates in 107 countries and is subject to increased anti-corruption legislation and enforcement not only in the US and UK.      The Group may be exposed to liabilities in the event of breaches of anti-corruption legislation.
Civil liabilities or judgements against the Company or its directors or officers based on U.S. federal or state securities laws may not be enforceable in the U.S. or in England and Wales or in Jersey.      The Company is a public limited company incorporated under the laws of Jersey. Some of the Company’s directors and officers reside outside of the United States. In addition, a substantial portion of the directly owned assets of the Company are located outside of the United States. As a result, it may be difficult or impossible for investors to effect service of process within the United States against the Company or its directors and officers or to enforce against them any of the judgements, including those obtained in original actions or in actions to enforce judgements of the U.S, courts, predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal or state securities laws of the United States.

 

6


Table of Contents

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

 

The Company operates through a number of established global, multinational and national advertising and marketing services companies that are organised into four business segments. Our largest segment is Advertising and Media Investment Management where we operate the well-known advertising networks Ogilvy & Mather Advertising, JWT, Y&R, Grey, bates and the United Network, as well as Media Investment Management companies such as MediaCom, MEC, Mindshare, Maxus and tenthavenue. Our other segments are Consumer Insight, where our operations are conducted through Kantar; Public Relations & Public Affairs, where we operate through well-known companies such as Burson-Marsteller, Cohn & Wolfe, Hill & Knowlton and Ogilvy Public Relations; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications, where our operations are conducted by B to D Group, ghg, Wunderman, Sudler & Hennessey, OgilvyOne Worldwide, Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide, G2, OgilvyAction, 24/7 Media and other companies.

 

The Company’s ordinary shares are admitted to the Official List of the UK Listing Authority and trade on The London Stock Exchange and American Depositary Shares (which are evidenced by ADRs or held in book-entry form) representing deposited ordinary shares are quoted on the NASDAQ Global Select Market (NASDAQ). At 19 April 2012 the Company had a market capitalisation of £10,833 million.

 

The Company’s executive office is located at 6 Ely Place, Dublin 2, Ireland, Tel: 011-353-1-669-0333 and its registered office is located at 22 Grenville Street, St Helier, Jersey, JE4 8PX.

 

A. History and Development of the Company

 

WPP plc was incorporated in Jersey on 12 September 2008.

 

On 19 November 2008, under a scheme of arrangement between WPP 2008 Limited (formerly WPP Group plc), (Old WPP), the former holding company of the Group, and its share owners under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006, and as sanctioned by the High Court, all the issued shares in that company were cancelled and the same number of new shares were issued to WPP plc in consideration for the allotment to share owners of one ordinary share in WPP plc for each ordinary share in WPP 2008 Limited held on the record date, 18 November 2008. Citibank, N.A., depositary for the ADSs representing Old WPP ordinary shares, cancelled Old WPP ADSs held in book-entry uncertificated form in the direct registration system maintained by it and issued ADSs representing ordinary shares of the Company in book entry uncertificated form in the direct registration system maintained by it to the holders. Holders of certificated ADSs, or ADRs, of Old WPP were entitled to receive Company ADSs upon surrender of the Old WPP ADRs to the Depositary. Each Old WPP ADS represented five ordinary shares of Old WPP and each Company ADS represents five ordinary shares of the Company.

 

As part of the scheme of arrangement noted above, 1,252,652,646 ordinary shares were issued at a price of 340.75 pence each. On 24 November 2008 the entire balance standing to the credit of the share premium account was transferred to retained earnings as sanctioned by The Royal Court of Jersey. As a result £4,143.1 million was added to retained earnings for both WPP plc and the Group. For the Company this amount is distributable.

 

Pursuant to Rule 12g-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the Exchange Act), WPP plc succeeded to Old WPP’s registration and periodic reporting obligations under the Exchange Act.

 

Old WPP became the holding company of the WPP Group on or about 25 October 2005 when the company now known as WPP 2005 Limited, the original holding company of the WPP Group, completed a reorganisation of its capital and corporate structure. WPP 2005 Limited (formerly WPP Group plc) was incorporated and registered in England and Wales in 1971 and is a private limited company under the Companies Act 1985, and until 1985 operated as a manufacturer and distributor of wire and plastic products. In 1985, new investors acquired a significant interest in WPP and changed the strategic direction of the Company from being a wire and plastics manufacturer and distributor to being a multinational communications services organisation. Since then, the

 

7


Table of Contents

Company has grown both organically and by the acquisition of companies, most significantly the acquisitions of JWT Group, Inc. in 1987, The Ogilvy Group, Inc. in 1989, Young & Rubicam Inc. (Young & Rubicam or Young & Rubicam Brands, as the group is now known) in 2000, Tempus Group plc (Tempus) in 2001, Cordiant Communications Group plc (Cordiant) in 2003, Grey Global Group, Inc. (Grey) in 2005, 24/7 Real Media Inc (TFSM) in 2007 and Taylor Nelson Sofres plc (TNS) in 2008.

 

The Company spent £633.8 million (excluding cash and cash equivalents acquired), £295.9 million and £196.6 million for acquisitions and investments in 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively, including payments in respect of loan note redemptions and earnout consideration resulting from acquisitions in prior years. For the same periods, cash spent on purchases of property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets was £253.2 million, £217.5 million and £253.3 million, respectively, and cash spent on share repurchases and cancellations was £182.2 million, £46.4 million and £9.5 million, respectively.

 

B. Business Overview

 

The Company’s business comprises the provision of communications services on a national, multinational and global basis. It operates from over 2,500 offices in 107 countries including associates. The Company organises its businesses in the following areas: Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications (including direct, digital, promotion and relationship marketing).

 

Approximately 41% of the Company’s reported revenues in 2011 were from Advertising and Media Investment Management, with the remaining 59% of its revenues being derived from the business segments of Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications.

 

The following table shows, for the last three fiscal years, reported revenue attributable to each business segment in which the Company operates.

 

Revenue    2011      2010      2009  
       £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

     £m     

% of

total

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

     4,157.2         41.5         3,733.3         40.0         3,420.5         39.3   

Consumer Insight

     2,458.0         24.5         2,430.2         26.0         2,297.1         26.5   

Public Relations & Public Affairs

     885.4         8.8         844.5         9.1         795.7         9.2   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

     2,521.2         25.2         2,323.0         24.9         2,171.0         25.0   

Total

     10,021.8         100.0         9,331.0         100.0         8,684.3         100.0   

 

The following table shows, for the last three fiscal years, reported revenue attributable to each geographic area in which the Company operates and demonstrates the Company’s regional diversity.

 

Revenue   2011     2010     2009  
      £m    

% of

total

    £m    

% of

total

    £m    

% of

total

 

North America 1

    3,388.2        33.8        3,299.8        35.3        3,010.0        34.7   

United Kingdom

    1,183.5        11.8        1,087.6        11.7        1,029.0        11.8   

Western Continental Europe 2

    2,505.1        25.0        2,325.3        24.9        2,327.8        26.8   

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe

    2,945.0        29.4        2,618.3        28.1        2,317.5        26.7   

Total

    10,021.8        100.0        9,331.0        100.0        8,684.3        100.0   
1    

North America includes the US with revenues of £3,149.9 million (2010: £3,097.9 million, 2009: £2,835.8 million).

2    

Western Continental Europe includes Ireland with revenues of £40.3 million (2010: £37.4 million, 2009: £43.4 million).

 

8


Table of Contents

The Company’s principal disciplines within each of its business segments are described below. Item 4C sets forth the Group brands operating within each discipline.

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

 

Advertising – The principal functions of an advertising agency are the planning and creation of marketing and branding campaigns and the design and production of advertisements for all types of media such as television, cable, the internet, radio, magazines, newspapers and outdoor locations such as billboards.

 

Media Investment Management – GroupM is WPP’s global media investment management operation, with its agencies, GroupM has capabilities in business science, consumer insight, communications and media planning implementation, interactions, content development, and sports and entertainment marketing. The primary purpose of GroupM is to maximise the performance of WPP’s media agencies, operating not only as a parent company but as a collaborator on performance-enhancing activities, such as trading, content creation, sports, digital, finance, tool development and other business-critical capabilities, in order to leverage the combination of GroupM’s core and talent resources. Our offering in this discipline includes also the network tenthavenue, which integrates some of the Group’s key specialist media offerings in online, mobile, experiential and out of home (OOH).

 

Consumer Insight

 

To help optimise its worldwide research offering to clients, the Company’s separate global research and strategic marketing consultancy businesses are managed on a centralised basis under the umbrella of the Kantar Group. In 2009 the Kantar Group announced a major re-organisation to strengthen its position as the world’s leading consumer insight business and streamline its offer for clients. The re-organisation simplified the Group’s overall offering through a series of structural changes, building on the acquisition of TNS in October 2008. The Kantar Group offering includes: custom research in a wide range of business sectors and areas of marketplace information including strategic market studies; brand positioning; equity research; customer satisfaction surveys; product development; international research; advanced modeling; advertising research; pre-testing, tracking and sales modeling; and trends and futures research and consultancy.

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs companies advise clients who are seeking to communicate with consumers, governments and/or the business and financial communities. Public Relations & Public Affairs activities include national and international corporate, financial and marketing communications, crisis management, reputation management, public affairs and government lobbying.

 

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

 

Branding & Identity – consumer, corporate and employee branding and design services, covering identity, packaging, literature, events, training and architecture.

 

Healthcare Communications – provide integrated healthcare marketing solutions from advertising to medical education and online marketing.

 

Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing – the full range of general and specialist customer, channel, direct, field, retail, promotional and point-of-sale services.

 

Specialist Communications – a comprehensive range of specialist services, from custom media and multicultural marketing to event, sports, youth and entertainment marketing; corporate and business-to-business; and media, technology and production services.

 

9


Table of Contents

WPP Digital – Through WPP Digital, WPP makes acquisitions and strategic investments in companies that bolster the Group’s presence in digital marketing & media and provide access for WPP companies and their clients to a portfolio of digital experts. Services provided by WPP Digital full-service interactive agencies include: digital marketing solutions for advertisers and publishers; integrated digital marketing strategy services; mobile solutions for handset manufacturers and wireless operators; creating measurable interactive marketing; and proprietary platforms which enable advertisers to engage with global audiences across the universe of digital media.

 

Manufacturing

 

The original business of the Group remains as the manufacturing division, which operates through subsidiaries of Wire and Plastic Products Limited. The division produces a wide range of products for commercial, industrial and retail applications.

 

WPP Head Office

 

WPP, the parent company, with its offices in Dublin, London, New York, Tokyo, Hong Kong, Shanghai and São Paulo develop the professional and financial strategy of the Group, promote operating efficiencies, coordinate cross referrals of clients among the Group companies and monitor the financial performance of its operating companies. The principal activity of the Group continues to be the provision of communications and marketing services worldwide. WPP acts only as the parent company and does not trade. The parent company complements the operating companies in three distinct ways.

 

   

First, the parent company relieves them of much administrative work. Financial matters (such as planning, budgeting, reporting, control, treasury, tax, mergers, acquisitions, investor relations, legal affairs and internal audit) are co-ordinated centrally. For the operating companies, every administrative hour saved is an extra hour to be devoted to the pursuit of professional excellence.

 

   

Second, the parent company encourages and enables operating companies of different disciplines to work together for the benefit of clients. Such collaborations have the additional benefit of enhancing the job satisfaction of the Company’s people. The parent company also plays an across-the-Group role in the following functions: the management of talent, including recruitment and training; in property management; in procurement and information technology; in knowledge sharing and practice development with an increasing emphasis on corporate responsibility and sustainability.

 

   

And, finally, the parent company itself can function as the 21 st century equivalent of the full-service agency. For some clients, predominantly those with a vast geographical spread and a need for marketing services ranging from advertising through design and website construction to research and internal communications, the parent company can act as a portal to provide a single point of contact and accountability.

 

The parent company operates with a limited group of approximately 400 people.

 

WPP Strategy

 

Our reason for being, the justification for WPP’s existence, continues to be to add value to our clients’ businesses and our people’s careers. Our goal remains to be the world’s most successful provider of communications services to multinational and local companies, not just the largest.

 

The Group has three key strategic priorities.

 

   

First, with the financial crisis of 2008 now hopefully behind us, and with margins now equal to historic pro-forma (the term defined on page 27) highs, our immediate goal is to deliver annual EPS (Earnings

 

10


Table of Contents
 

per Share) growth of 10-15% through organic revenue growth of up to 5%, margin improvement of 0.5 margin points or more, and productive use of our cash flow. Compared with the last downturn, our people are stronger: they are better resourced, better motivated and incentivised than when we exited the last recessions in the early 1990s and 2000s. The Company is also more profitable, more liquid and better structured. In the most recent economic cycle, Headline PBIT margins (the term defined on page 28) peaked at 15.0% (pre-TNS) and bottomed at 11.7%, as opposed to 10.5% and 5.6% in the early 1990s.

 

   

Second, in the medium term, to build upon the successful base we have established whilst integrating our most recent acquisitions effectively. At TNS the integration has gone well, particularly from a margin and operating profit point of view, and the focus has now to be on revenue and gross profit growth, capturing greater market share – an opportunity heightened by the recent lpsos/Synovate takeover.

 

   

Our third priority, in the long-term or over the next five to 10 years, is to: increase the combined geographic share of revenues from the faster-growing markets of Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East, and Central and Eastern Europe, from over 29% to 35-40%; increase the share of revenues of new media from 30% to 35-40%; and increase the share of more measurable marketing services – such as Consumer Insight and direct, digital and interactive – to be more than 50% of revenues, with a focus on digital and consumer insight, data analytics and the application of new technology.

 

Sustainability

 

Paul Richardson is the Board director responsible for sustainability and chairs WPP’s Sustainability Committee, established in 2003. WPP’s five most significant issues are:

 

   

The impact of our work for clients. Our goal is for WPP to be a centre of excellence for sustainability communication, giving our clients the best advice and enhancing consumers’ understanding of sustainability issues. The value of client business supported by our sustainability credentials is worth at least $1 billion.

 

   

Marketing standards, including ethical decision-making, privacy and data protection, and compliance with marketing standards and our Code of Conduct.

 

   

Employment practices, including diversity and inclusion, training and development. Women currently account for 54% of our total employees and 31% of our Board members and executive leaders. In 2011, WPP invested £58.3 million on training and wellbeing.

 

   

Environmental performance. WPP was ranked 41 in Newsweek ’s Green Rankings of the 500 largest global companies. We have reduced our carbon footprint per person by 26% since 2006. Our target is a 63% reduction by 2020.

 

   

Social investment including pro bono work. Our total social investment was worth £15.3 million in 2011, the equivalent of 1.5% of reported profit before tax.

 

Clients

 

The Group services 344 of the Fortune Global 500, all 30 of the Dow Jones 30, 63 of the NASDAQ 100, 33 of the Fortune e-50. More than 730 national or multinational clients are served in three or more disciplines. More than 470 clients are served in four disciplines, and these clients account for over 57% of Group revenues. This reflects the increasing opportunities for co-ordination and co-operation or ‘horizontality’ between activities, both nationally and internationally and at a client and country level. The Group also works with almost 360 clients across six or more countries.

 

The Company’s 10 largest clients in 2011, measured by revenues and in alphabetical order, were, British American Tobacco p.l.c., Colgate Palmolive, Dell Inc., Ford Motor Company, Johnson & Johnson, Microsoft

 

11


Table of Contents

Corporation, Nestlé S.A., The Procter & Gamble Company, Unilever PLC and Volkswagen. Together, these clients accounted for approximately 17% of the Company’s revenues in 2011. No client of the Company represented more than 5% of the Company’s aggregate revenues in 2011. The Group’s companies have maintained long-standing relationships with many of its clients, with an average length of relationship for the top 10 clients of approximately 50 years.

 

Government Regulation

 

From time to time, governments, government agencies and industry self-regulatory bodies in the United States, European Union and other countries in which the Company operates have adopted statutes, regulations, and rulings which directly or indirectly affect the form, content, and scheduling of advertising, public relations and public affairs, and market research, or otherwise limit the scope of the activities of the Company and its clients. Some of the foregoing relate to privacy and data protection and general considerations such as truthfulness, substantiation and interpretation of claims made, comparative advertising, relative responsibilities of clients and advertising, public relations and public affairs firms, and registration of public relations and public affairs firms’ representation of foreign governments.

 

In addition, there is an increasing trend towards expansion of specific rules, prohibitions, media restrictions, labeling disclosures and warning requirements with respect to advertising for certain products, such as over-the-counter drugs and pharmaceuticals, cigarettes, food and certain alcoholic beverages, and to certain groups, such as children. Proposals have been made for the adoption of additional laws and regulations that could further restrict the activities of advertising, public relations and public affairs, and market research firms and their clients. Though the Company does not expect any existing or proposed regulations to materially adversely impact the Company’s business, the Company is unable to estimate the effect on its future operations of the application of existing statutes or regulations or the extent or nature of future regulatory action.

 

12


Table of Contents

C. Organizational Structure

 

The Company’s business comprises the provision of communications services on a national, multinational and global basis. It operates out of over 2,500 offices in 107 countries including associates. For a list of the Company’s principal subsidiary undertakings and their jurisdictions of incorporation see note 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Company organises its businesses in the following segments: Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare & Specialist Communications. These business segments are comprised of the following principal disciplines: Advertising; Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Branding & Identity; Healthcare Communications; Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing; Specialist Communications; WPP Digital; WPP Digital partner companies; and WPP knowledge community. A listing of the Group brands operating within these disciplines as at April 2012 is set forth below.

 

Advertising

ADK 1

bates

CHI & Partners 1

Dentsu Y&R 1, 2, 4

Grey

HS Ad 1

JWT

Ogilvy & Mather Advertising

Santo

Scangroup 1

Scholz & Friends

Soho Square

TAXI 4

Team Detroit

The Jupiter Drawing Room & Partners 1

United Network

Y&R 4

 

Media Investment Management

GroupM:

Maxus

MediaCom

MEC

Mindshare

Outrider

Catalyst

Xaxis

Other media agencies

KR Media

tenthavenue:

Joule

Kinetic Worldwide

Quisma

Spafax

 

Consumer Insight

Kantar:

Added Value

Center Partners

IMRB International

Kantar Health

Kantar Japan

Kantar Media

Kantar Operations

Kantar Retail

Kantar Worldpanel

Lightspeed Research

Millward Brown

  

Consumer Insight (continued)

The Futures Company

TNS

Other marketing consultancies

ohal

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs

Blanc & Otus 8

Buchanan Communications

Burson-Marsteller 4

Chime Communications PLC 1

Clarion Communications

Cohn & Wolfe 4

Dewey Square Group

Glover Park Group

Hering Schuppener

Hill+Knowlton Strategies

Ogilvy Government Relations

Ogilvy Public Relations

PBN Hill+Knowlton Strategies

Penn Schoen Berland 4

Prime Policy Group

Quinn Gillespie

RLM Finsbury

Wexler & Walker Public Policy Associates 7

 

Branding & Identity

Addison 6

BDG architecture + design

Coley Porter Bell

Dovetail

FITCH 6

Lambie-Nairn 6

Landor Associates 4, 6

PeclersParis 6

The Brand Union 6

The Partners 6

VBAT 6

 

Healthcare Communications

Feinstein Kean Healthcare 8

GCI Health

ghg

Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide

Sudler & Hennessey 4

 

13


Table of Contents

Direct, Digital, Promotion & Relationship Marketing

A. Eicoff & Co

Actis Systems 5

AGENDA 5

Aqua 5

Barrows 1

Blast Radius 5

Brierley & Partners 1

Designkitchen 5

Dialogue

Digit

EWA

FullSIX 3

Grass Roots 1

G2

- G2 Branding & Design

- G2 Interactive

- G2 Direct & Digital

- G2 Promotional Marketing

Headcount Worldwide Field Marketing

High Co 1

Iconmobile 4

Kassius 5

KBM Group 5

Mando

Maxx Marketing

OgilvyAction

OgilvyOne Worldwide

OOT 2

RTCRM 4

Smollan Group 1

Studiocom 4

These Days 5

Vice Media 3

VML 4

Wunderman 4

 

Specialist Communications

Corporate/ B2B

    Ogilvy Primary Contact

Custom media

    Forward

Demographic marketing

    Bravo 4

    Kang & Lee 4

    MosaicaMD

    UniWorld 1

    Wing 4

Employer branding/recruitment

    JWT Inside

Event/face-to-face marketing

    MJM

    Metro

Foodservice marketing

    The Food Group

  

Specialist Communications (continued)

Sports marketing

    9ine Sports & Entertainment

    JMI 3

    PRISM Group

Entertainment marketing

    Alliance

Youth marketing

    The Geppetto Group

Real estate marketing

    Pace

Technology marketing

    Banner Corporation 4

Media & production services

    The Farm Group

    Hogarth Worldwide

    Imagina 3

    MRC 3

    United Visions

    The Weinstein Company 3

 

WPP Digital

24/7 Media

Blue State Digital

Deliver

Fabric Worldwide 1

F. biz

Johannes Leonardo 1

Possible Worldwide

Rockfish Interactive

Syzygy 1

The Media Innovation Group

ZAAZ

 

WPP Digital partner companies

Ace Metrix 3

Buddy Media 3

eCommera 3

HDT Holdings Technology 3

In Game Ad Interactive 3

Invidi 3

Jumptap 3

Moment Systems 3

nPario 1

Proclivity Systems 3

Say Media 3

Visible Technologies 1

Visible World 3

WildTangent 3

 

WPP knowledge community

The Store

 

 

Notes

1     Associate

2     Joint venture

3      Investment

4     A Young & Rubicam Group company

5     Part of the Wunderman network

6     A member of B to D Group

7     A Hill+Knowlton Strategies company

8     An Ogilvy company

 

14


Table of Contents

D. Property, Plant and Equipment

 

The majority of the Company’s properties are leased, although certain properties which are used mainly for office space are owned. In the United States owned properties include the 370,000 net square foot Young & Rubicam headquarters office building located at 285 Madison Avenue in New York, New York and the 152,000 square foot TNS property located near Toledo, Ohio. Other owned properties are in Latin America (principally in Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Mexico, Peru and Puerto Rico), Asia (India and China) and in Europe (Spain, France, UK and Italy). In Europe owned properties include the 135,626 square foot TNS office located at 2 Rue Francis Pedron, Chambourcy, Paris, France and the 101,592 square foot TNS House at Westgate, Hangar Lane, London. Manufacturing facilities are owned in the United Kingdom. Principal leased properties, which are accounted for as operating leases, include office space at the following locations:

 

Location    Use     
 
Approximate
square footage
 
  

636 Eleventh Avenue, New York, NY

   Ogilvy & Mather      554,800   

498 Seventh Avenue, New York, NY

   GroupM, Mindshare,
Maxus, Mediacom
     358,000   

200 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY

   Grey Global Group, Cohn &
Wolfe
     343,000   

500/550 Town Center Drive, Dearborn, MI

   Team Detroit, JWT, Ogilvy
& Mather, Y&R
Advertising, PRISM,
Burrows, ZAAZ
     282,900   

466 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY

   JWT      270,300   

230 Park Avenue South, New York, NY

   Burson-Marsteller,

Landor, Sudler & Hennessey

     270,000   

 

The Company considers its properties, owned or leased, to be in good condition and generally suitable and adequate for the purposes for which they are used. At 31 December 2011, the fixed asset value (cost less depreciation) representing land, freehold buildings and leasehold buildings as reflected in the Company’s consolidated financial statements was approximately £426.8 million.

 

In 2011 the Company was able to reduce the core property portfolio. Although square footage rose by 1.7% from 22.8 million sq ft to 23.2 million sq ft at the end of the year, this increase was less than the 3.1% of revenue growth attributable to acquisitions and considerably less than constant currency revenue growth of 8.4%, meaning the Company’s core portfolio (excluding the impact of acquisitions) reduced. Consequently average square foot per head dropped to 211 sq ft, well ahead of the Company’s target of 220 sq ft.

 

As a result of this improvement in space utilisation the establishment cost-to-revenue ratio dropped to 6.7%, ahead of the Company’s long term 7% run rate and in spite of a 3% increase in cost per square foot. For 2012 the Company will continue to focus on the key drivers of space per head, particularly in the US where it runs above the Company’s average, and the cost per square foot on lease renewals, particularly in the faster-growing markets where the rental markets are rising fastest. The Company’s aim is to maintain the establishment cost-to-revenue ratio at 7% or even reduce it.

 

See note 3 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a schedule by years of future minimum rental payments to be made and future sublease rental payments to be received, as at 31 December 2011, under non-cancelable operating leases of the Company.

 

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

 

Not applicable.

 

15


Table of Contents

ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Introduction

 

Certain Non GAAP measures included in this operating and financial review and prospects have been derived from amounts calculated in accordance with IFRS but are not themselves IFRS measures. They should not be viewed in isolation as alternatives to the equivalent IFRS measure, rather they should be read in conjunction with the equivalent IFRS measure. These include constant currency, pro-forma (‘like-for-like’), headline PBIT (Profit Before Interest and Taxation), headline PBIT margin, headline PBIT margin on gross profit, headline PBT (Profit Before Taxation), headline EBITDA, billings, estimated net new billings, free cash flow, and net and average net debt, which we define, explain the use of and reconcile to the nearest IFRS measure on pages 27 to 30.

 

A. Operating Results

 

Overview

 

The Company is one of the world’s most comprehensive marketing communications groups. It operates through a large number of established national, multinational and global advertising and marketing services companies. The Company offers services in four reporting segments:

 

   

Advertising and Media Investment Management;

 

   

Consumer Insight;

 

   

Public Relations & Public Affairs; and

 

   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications.

 

In 2011, approximately 41% of the Company’s consolidated revenues were derived from Advertising and Media Investment Management, with the remaining 59% of its revenues being derived from the remaining three segments.

 

The following objectives represent the Group’s key performance indicators.

 

1.   First, to continue to raise operating margins to the levels of the best-performing competition. In 2011, we achieved headline PBIT margin of 14.3%, equal to our historic pro-forma high. We continue to believe a headline PBIT margin of 18.3% is a tough, but realistic objective given that our best-performing companies in each services sector have already demonstrated they can perform at a combined Group margin of 17%. It may well be that headline PBIT margin on gross profit is a more accurate competitive comparison and we achieved 15.5% in 2011, significantly up on 2010 and at the top levels of industry performance.

 

2.   Second, to continue to increase flexibility in the cost structure. In 2011, flexible staff costs (including incentives, freelance and consultants) were maintained at close to historic highs of around 7% of revenues and continue to position the Group extremely well, if current market conditions change.

 

3.   Third, to improve total share owner return by maximising the return on investment on the Company’s substantial free cash flow across the alternative uses of funds: capital expenditure; mergers and acquisitions; and dividends or share buy-backs.

 

4.   Fourth, we will continue to enhance the value added by the parent company and build unique integrated marketing approaches for clients. WPP is not just a holding company focused on planning, budgeting, reporting and financial issues, but a parent company that can add value to our clients and our people in the areas of human resources, property, procurement, information technology and practice development including sustainability. This does not mean that we seek to diminish the strength of our operating brands, but rather to learn from one another. Our objective is to maximise the added value for our clients in their businesses and our people in their careers.

 

5.   Fifth, to continue to place greater emphasis on revenue growth through our practice development activities, aimed at helping us position our portfolio in the faster-growing functional and geographic areas.

 

16


Table of Contents
6.   Sixth, to improve still further the quality of creative work throughout the Group by stepping up our training and development programs; by recruiting the finest external talent; by celebrating and rewarding outstanding creative success tangibly and intangibly; by acquiring strong creative companies; and by encouraging, monitoring and promoting our companies’ achievements in winning creative awards.

 

The following discussion is based on the Company’s audited Consolidated Financial Statements beginning on page F-1 of this report. The Group’s consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB.

 

2011, the Company’s twenty-sixth year, was a record year in almost all respects. Revenue, profit before tax and earnings per share all reached new highs. Yet, as pleasing as these financial results are, perhaps the Company’s most satisfying achievement in 2011 was the first ever award of a Cannes Lion to a Holding Company, in recognition of the Company’s collective creative excellence. 2011 demonstrated once again that outstanding creativity and financial success go hand in hand.

 

This record performance was achieved in difficult circumstances, particularly in the second half of the year, when the Eurozone crisis triggered uncertainty amongst consumers and corporates across the globe, resulting in a slowdown of economic activity in most geographic regions and functional sectors. Total share owner return was enhanced by a 38% increase in dividends to 24.6p, a record level, and included a 45% increase in the second interim dividend to 17.14p, moving more rapidly towards the Company’s new dividend payment ratio target of 40%.

 

Billings were up almost 5% to £44.8 billion. Revenues were up over 7% to £10.0 billion, the first time the Group has exceeded £10 billion. Revenues exceeded all of the Company’s competitors for the fourth consecutive year and by an increasing amount.

 

Reported profit before interest and tax rose over 22% to £1.258 billion from £1.028 billion. Headline PBIT was up over 16% to £1.429 billion against £1.229 billion in 2010. Headline PBIT margin was 14.3% in 2011 against 13.2% last year, well ahead of target and equal to the pro-forma high pre-Lehman. The headline PBIT margin on gross profit was 15.5%, up 1.1 margin points on 2010.

 

Headline EBITDA increased by 14% to £1.640 billion. Headline PBT was up almost 19% to £1.229 billion and reported profit before tax was up over 18% to £1.008 billion, above £1 billion for the first time. Diluted earnings per share were up over 40% to 64.5p.

 

Free cash flow strengthened to £1.013 billion in the year, over £1 billion for the first time. Net debt averaged £2.8 billion in 2011, down £0.2 billion at 2011 exchange rates, and net debt at 31 December 2011 was £2.5 billion, £0.6 billion higher than 2010, reflecting stronger acquisition and share buy-back activity in the latter half of the year.

 

Estimated net new business billings of £3.2 billion ($5.2 billion) were won in 2011, up over 7% on 2010.

 

17


Table of Contents

Segment performance

 

Performance of the Group’s businesses is reviewed by management based on headline PBIT. A table showing these amounts by sector and geographical area for each of the three years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009 is presented in note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. To supplement the reportable currency segment information presented in note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the tables below give details of revenue growth by geographical area and sector on a reported, constant currency, and like-for-like basis.

 

Geographical area

 

       Reported
revenue
growth %+/(-)
   

Constant
currency
revenue

growth %+/(-)

     Like-for-like
revenue
growth %+/(-)
 
       2011      2010     2011      2010      2011      2010  

North America

     2.7         9.6        6.3         7.7         2.9         7.6   

United Kingdom

     8.8         5.7        8.8         5.7         6.7         5.9   

Western Continental Europe 1

     7.7         (0.1     6.3         2.7         2.2         1.9   

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe

     12.5         13.0        12.6         5.6         10.5         5.6   

Total Group

     7.4         7.4        8.4         5.6         5.3         5.3   

1    Western Continental Europe includes Ireland.

                

 

North America continued to show good growth throughout the year, with constant currency revenues up 6.3%. The UK, against market trends, showed even stronger growth, with constant currency revenues up almost 9% and gross profit even stronger up almost 11%, accelerating in the second half. Western Continental Europe, although relatively more difficult, grew constant currency revenues by over 6%, partially reflecting acquisition activity. Austria, Germany, Switzerland and Turkey all showed strong like-for-like growth for the year, but France and especially Greece, Portugal and Spain remained affected by the Eurozone debt crisis.

 

In Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East and Central and Eastern Europe, revenue growth was strongest, up well over 12%, principally driven by Latin America and the BRICs 1 and Next 11 2 parts of Asia Pacific and the CIVETS 3 and the MIST 4 . Like-for-like growth was up well over 10%. Latin America showed the strongest growth of all of our sub-regions in the year, with constant currency revenues up over 14% and up over 18% like-for-like. The Middle East remained the most challenged sub-region. In Central and Eastern Europe, constant currency revenues were up over 6% and up almost 6% like-for-like, with strong growth in Russia, Ukraine, Kazakhstan, Poland and Romania, but Hungary and the Czech Republic were more challenging. Growth in the BRICs, which account for almost $2 billion of revenue, was over 17%, on a like-for-like basis, with Next 11 and CIVETS up 13% and well over 9% respectively on the same basis. The MIST was up almost 14%.

 

In 2011, over 29% of the Group’s revenues came from Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East and Central and Eastern Europe – over one percentage point more compared with the previous year and against the Group’s strategic objective of 35-40% over the next three to four years. Markets outside North America now account for over 66% of our revenues, up from 62% five years ago.

 

1     Brazil, Russia, India and China
2     Bangladesh, Egypt, Indonesia, Mexico, Nigeria, Pakistan, the Philippines, South Korea, Turkey and Vietnam (the Group has no operations in Iran)
3     Colombia, Indonesia, Vietnam, Egypt, Turkey and South Africa
4     Mexico, Indonesia, South Korea and Turkey

 

18


Table of Contents

Sector

 

       Reported
revenue
growth %+/(-)
    

Constant
currency
revenue

growth %+/(-)

     Like-for-like
revenue
growth %+/(-)
 
       2011      2010      2011      2010      2011      2010  

Advertising and Media Investment Management

     11.4         9.1         12.2         7.0         7.4         7.1   

Consumer Insight

     1.1         5.8         1.7         4.4         0.8         3.9   

Public Relations & Public Affairs

     4.8         6.1         6.2         4.3         4.6         3.7   

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

     8.5         7.0         10.1         5.0         6.9         4.5   

Total Group

     7.4         7.4         8.4         5.6         5.3         5.3   

 

In constant currencies, Advertising and Media Investment Management revenues grew by 12.2%, with like-for-like growth of 7.4%. Of the Group’s advertising networks, Ogilvy & Mather, Grey and United finished the year strongly, with particularly strong growth in the UK, Latin America and Africa.

 

Growth in the Group’s Media Investment Management businesses was very consistent throughout the year, with constant currency revenues up almost 19% for the year and like-for-like growth up almost 13%. tenthavenue, the ‘engagement’ network focused on out-of-home media, was established towards the end of 2010 and in 2011 showed strong revenue growth, with like-for-like revenues up over 14%. The strong revenue growth across most of the Group’s businesses, together with good cost control, resulted in the combined headline PBIT margin of this sector improving by 0.8 margin points to 16.1%.

 

In 2011, Ogilvy & Mather Advertising, JWT, Y&R, Grey and United generated estimated net new billings of £909 million ($1.455 billion). GroupM (the Group’s Media Investment Management arm, which includes Mindshare, MEC, MediaCom, Maxus, GroupM Search and Xaxis) together with tenthavenue, generated net new business billings of £1.587 billion ($2.539 billion).

 

Consumer Insight revenues grew 1.7% on a constant currency basis, with gross profit up 2.2% on the same basis. On a like-for-like basis revenues were up 0.8% with gross profit growth stronger at 1.9% on the same basis. Headline PBIT margins improved 0.8 margin points to 10.5%, while headline PBIT margin on gross profit improved 1.1 margin points to 14.3% – reflecting the benefit of continued cost focus. As a result, headline PBIT was up over 10% to £259 million.

 

The Group’s Public Relations & Public Affairs businesses had another good year with full-year growth in constant currencies of 6.2%, with like-for-like revenues up 4.6%. Headline PBIT margins rose by 0.3 margin points to 16.1%.

 

At the Group’s Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications businesses (including direct, digital and interactive), constant currency revenues grew strongly at 10.1% with like-for-like growth of 6.9%. Like-for-like revenue growth slipped slightly in quarter four but remained above 6%. The Group’s global direct, digital and interactive agencies showed continuing strong growth, with like-for-like revenues up well over 7% for the year. This sector showed strong margin improvement, with headline PBIT margins up 1.9 margin points to 14.3%. Over 30% of the Group’s 2011 revenues came from direct, digital and interactive, up over one percentage point from the previous year.

 

Marketing services comprised almost 60% of our revenues in 2011, a similar proportion to 2010. We are no longer an advertising agency, we really are a communications services company.

 

19


Table of Contents

2011 compared with 2010

 

Revenues

 

Reported revenues were up 7.4% in 2011 to £10,021.8 million from £9,331.0 million in 2010. The Group’s reported revenue growth for the year of over 7% reflected the strength of sterling, primarily against the US dollar. On a constant currency basis, which excludes the impact of currency movements, revenues were up over 8%. On a like-for-like basis, excluding the impact of acquisitions and currency, revenues were up 5.3%, with gross profit up 5.9%. In the fourth quarter, like-for-like revenues were up 4.5%, down slightly on the third quarter, primarily due to stronger comparatives.

 

Despite the slowdown in economic activity resulting from the uncertainty triggered by the Eurozone crisis, advertising and marketing services expenditures continued to rise and there seem to have been some significant changes, particularly in corporate behaviour, to explain why. In 2009, post-Lehman, all bets were off. Consumers and corporates were focused almost totally on rapidly reducing costs and de-leveraging. In 2010 and 2011, however, the situation seemed to change. The financial world did not come to an end as some had predicted. Western-based multinational companies, which today are reputed to be sitting on as much as $2 trillion net cash with relatively un-leveraged balance sheets, were still fearful of making mistakes but prepared to invest in capacity and behind brands in fast-growing markets. At the same time, they were also prepared to invest in brands to maintain or increase market share even in slow-growth Western markets, such as the US and Western Europe. This approach has the virtue of not increasing fixed costs, although we in the communications services business naturally regard brand spending as a fixed investment and not a discretionary cost.

 

On a combined basis, over the last two years, there has been a sequential improvement in like-for-like quarterly revenue growth, with 6.7% for the first quarter, 10.3% in the second, 12.2% for the third and 13.1% for the fourth. This two-year combined sequential quarterly growth continues to reflect increased client advertising and promotional spending – with the former tending to grow faster than the latter, which from our point of view is more positive – across most of the Group’s major geographic markets and functional sectors despite tougher comparatives. Nonetheless, clients understandably continue to demand increased effectiveness and efficiency, i.e. better value for money.

 

Operating costs

 

Operating costs increased by 6.0% in 2011 to £8,046.3 million from £7,587.5 million in 2010 on a reported basis and by 7.1% on a constant currency basis. During 2011, the Group continued to reap the benefits of containing operating costs, with improvements across most cost categories, particularly direct, property, commercial and office costs.

 

On a like-for-like basis the average number of people in the Group increased by 4.6% in 2011. On the same basis, the number of people in the Group at 31 December 2011 was 4.3% higher than at the end of 2010. Also on a like-for-like basis, revenues increased by 5.3% and gross profit 5.9%.

 

Reported staff costs, excluding incentives, rose by 8.6% and by 9.6% in constant currency. Incentive payments amounted to £338 million (or over $500 million) which was almost 20% of headline PBIT before incentives and income from associates and represented close to maximum achievement of agreed performance targets. The Group’s reported staff cost to revenue ratio, including incentives, increased by 0.3 margin points to 58.6% compared with 58.3% in 2010. Following intentional containment in 2009 and 2010 post-Lehman, the Group continued to increase its investment in human capital in 2011, particularly in the faster-growing geographic and functional markets as like-for-like revenues and gross profit increased significantly. However, the Group’s more representative staff costs to gross profit ratio remained flat at 63.6% compared with the prior year, as gross profit grew faster than revenues.

 

20


Table of Contents

In 2011, the ratio of variable staff costs (incentives, freelance and consultants costs) to total staff costs was 12.2%, compared with 13.4% in 2010. As a proportion of revenue, variable staff costs were 7.2% in 2011 compared with 7.8% in 2010.

 

In 2011 we were able to reduce our core property portfolio. Although square footage rose by 1.7% from 22.8 million sq ft to 23.2 million sq ft at the end of the year, this increase was less than the 3.1% of revenue growth attributable to acquisitions and considerably less than constant currency revenue growth of 8.4%, meaning our core portfolio (excluding the impact of acquisitions) reduced. As a result of this improvement in space utilisation the establishment cost-to-revenue ratio in 2011 dropped to 6.7% (in spite of a 3% increase in cost per square foot) from 7.1% in 2010.

 

Operating profit

 

As a result of the above, reported PBIT rose over 22% to £1.258 billion from £1.028 billion, up over 23% in constant currencies. Headline PBIT rose over 16% to £1.429 billion from £1.229 billion, up over 17% in constant currencies.

 

Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income increased to £97.3 million in 2011 from £81.7 million in 2010. Finance costs increased to £297.2 million in 2011 from £276.8 million in 2010. Therefore, net finance costs were £199.9 million, up from £195.1 million last year, reflecting lower average net debt, offset by higher funding costs. Revaluation of financial instruments resulted in a charge of £50.0 million in 2011 and income of £18.2 million in 2010. The 2011 charge is predominantly attributable to revaluation of put options over non-controlling interests.

 

Taxes

 

The Company’s effective tax rate on reported profit before tax in 2011 was 9.1%, compared to 22.4% in 2010. The difference was primarily due to the release of prior year corporate tax provisions following the resolution of a number of open tax matters, together with deferred tax credits in relation to amortisation of acquired intangible assets.

 

Profit for the year

 

Profit for the year increased by 38.7% to £916.5 million in 2011 from £661.0 million in 2010 on a reported basis and increased by 40.2% in constant currency, reflecting higher profit margins and a lower effective tax rate. In 2011, £840.1 million of profit for the year was attributable to equity holders of the parent and £76.4 million attributable to non-controlling interests.

 

2010 compared with 2009

 

Revenues

 

Reported revenues were up 7.4% in 2010 to £9,331.0 million from £8,684.3 million in 2009. Our reported revenue growth for the year of 7.4% reflected the comparative weakness of sterling against most currencies, other than the euro. On a constant currency basis, which excludes the impact of currency movements, revenues were up 5.6%. On a like-for-like basis, excluding the impact of acquisitions and currency, revenues were up 5.3%, reflecting sequential quarterly improvement throughout the year. Revenue grew by 8.5% in the final quarter, the fastest rate of like-for-like quarterly growth since the fourth quarter of 2000. The month of December saw the first monthly double-digit growth rate since January 2001.

 

Throughout 2010 we have seen continued sequential improvement in our like-for-like quarterly revenue growth, with the final two quarters of the year at 7.5% and 8.5% respectively. This followed zero like-for-like growth in the first quarter and 4.7% in quarter two.

 

This significant turnaround was directionally in line with our earlier forecasts (we anticipated like-for-like growth in the second quarter of 2010 as early as the third quarter trading update of 2009), but was considerably

 

21


Table of Contents

more violent than anticipated. In 2009, our budgets were optimistic anticipating like-for-like growth of -2%. In fact we came in at -8%. In 2010, on the other hand, we proved too pessimistic, budgeting like-for-like growth of zero and coming in at over 5%.

 

Operating costs

 

Reported operating costs increased by 5.1%. Reported staff costs, excluding incentives, were up 3.2%. Incentive payments (including the cost of share-based compensation) increased 92.1% to £342 million from £178 million. On a reported basis, despite the almost doubling of incentive payments, the Group’s staff cost-to-revenue ratio fell to 58.3% compared with 58.9% in 2009.

 

Together with the improved top-line growth, the Group has benefited from the cost actions taken, particularly towards the end of 2009, to adjust headcount and staff costs. On a like-for-like basis, average headcount has fallen by over 4%, compared with 2009, although given the substantial increase in like-for-like revenues of 8.0% in the second half of the year, our operating companies have begun to invest in more talent.

 

Revenue conversion post-incentives, that is incremental profit as a proportion of incremental revenue, was very strong at 33%, as our operating companies benefited from the actions to reduce both staff costs and other operating costs in 2009 and during 2010.

 

Part of the Group’s strategy is to continue to ensure that variable staff costs (incentives, freelance and consultants costs) are a significant proportion of total staff costs and revenue, as this provides flexibility to deal with volatility in revenues and recessions or slow-downs. In 2010, the ratio of variable staff costs to total staff costs increased significantly to 13.4%, compared with 9.7% in 2009. As a proportion of revenue, variable staff costs were 7.8% in 2010 compared with 5.7% in 2009. These represent the highest ratios in the last 10 years. The business is, therefore, even better protected against economic downturns.

 

Operating profit

 

Reported PBIT rose over 25% to £1.028 billion in 2010 from £819 million in 2009 as a result of the above and reflecting a lower charge for goodwill impairment and amortisation of intangibles, partly offset by higher investment write-downs.

 

Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income decreased to £81.7 million in 2010 from £150.4 million in 2009. Finance costs decreased to £276.8 million in 2010 from £355.4 million in 2009. Therefore, net finance costs were £195.1 million, down from £205.0 million last year, reflecting lower debt, partly offset by higher funding costs. Revaluation of financial instruments resulted in £18.2 million of income in 2010 and £48.9 million in 2009. The 2010 income is attributable to gains from movements in the fair value of treasury instruments.

 

Taxes

 

The Company’s effective tax rate on reported profit before tax in 2010 was 22.4%, a reduction of 1.1 percentage points from 2009, as a result of utilisation and recognition of losses and other temporary differences not previously recognised.

 

Profit for the year

 

Profit for the year increased by 30.4% to £661.0 million in 2010 from £506.9 million in 2009 on a reported basis and increased by 23.7% in constant currency, reflecting higher profit margins and lower effective tax rate. In 2010, £586.0 million of profit for the year was attributable to equity holders of the parent and £75.0 million attributable to non-controlling interests.

 

22


Table of Contents

Inflation

 

As in 2010, in management’s opinion inflation did not have a material impact on the Company’s results for the year or financial position at 31 December 2011.

 

Foreign currency fluctuations

 

See Item 11 for a discussion of the impact of currency exchange rate fluctuations on the Group’s consolidated results.

 

B. Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

General —The primary sources of funds for the Group are cash generated from operations and funds available under its credit facilities. The primary uses of cash funds in recent years have been for debt service and repayment, capital expenditures, acquisitions, share repurchases and cancellations and dividends. For a breakdown of the Company’s sources and uses of cash and for the Company’s liquidity risk management see the “Consolidated Cash Flow Statement”, which is included as part of the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 18 of this Report.

 

The Company spent £633.8 million (excluding cash and cash equivalents acquired) and £295.9 million for acquisitions and investments in 2011 and 2010, respectively, including payments on loan note redemptions and earnout consideration resulting from acquisitions in prior years. For the same periods, cash spent on purchases of property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets was £253.2 million and £217.5 million, respectively, cash spent on share repurchases and buy-backs was £182.2 million and £46.4 million, respectively, and dividends paid were £218.4 million and £200.4 million, respectively.

 

There are broadly three alternative uses of funds.

 

   

Capital expenditure, which usually approximates the depreciation cost. Pressure here has eased as technology pricing has fallen, although we have increased investment in our digital and technology-based service offering, in line with our strategic goals. We have also invested significantly more in real estate following lease renewals to secure greater efficiencies.

 

   

Mergers and acquisitions, which have historically taken the lion’s share of free cash flow. Here the Group has raised the hurdle rate on capital employed so that return on capital may be increased. There is a very significant pipeline of reasonably priced small and medium sized potential acquisitions, with the exception of Brazil and India and digital in the US, where prices seem to have got ahead of themselves because of pressure on our competitors to catch up. This is clearly reflected in some of the operational and governance issues that are starting to surface elsewhere at our competitors, particularly in fast growing markets like China.

 

The Group’s acquisition focus in 2011 was again on the triple opportunities of faster-growing geographic markets, new media and consumer insight, including data analytics and the application of technology, totally consistent with the Group’s strategic priorities in the areas of geography, new communication services and measurability. In 2011, the Group spent £381 million on initial acquisition payments, net of cash acquired and disposal proceeds. Net acquisition spend is currently targeted at around £300 million per annum and the Group will continue to seize opportunities in line with its strategy.

 

   

Dividends or share buy-backs. The Group has increasingly come to the view, based on co-operative research with leading investment institutions, that, currently, the markets favour consistent increases in dividends and higher maintainable pay-out ratios, along with anti-dilutive buy-backs and, of course, sensibly-priced strategic acquisitions. Following the strong first half results in 2011, the Board raised the dividend by 25%, a pay-out ratio in the first half of 33%. The second interim dividend has been increased by 45%, bringing the total dividend for the year to 24.60p per share, up 38%. As indicated in the Annual General Meeting (AGM) statement in June 2011, the Board’s objective remains to increase the dividend pay-out ratio to approximately 40% as soon as possible compared to the 2010 ratio of 31%.

 

23


Table of Contents
 

Dividends to be paid in respect of 2011 will total over £300 million for the year. Share buy-backs will continue to be targeted to absorb any share dilution from scrip dividends, issues of options or restricted stock, although the Company does also have considerable free cash flow to take advantage of any anomalies in market values, as it did last year. Share buy-backs in 2011 cost £182 million, representing 2.1% of issued share capital.

 

The Group’s liquidity is affected primarily by the working capital flows associated with its media buying activities on behalf of clients. The working capital movements relate primarily to the Group’s billings. Billings comprise the gross amounts billed to clients in respect of commission-based/fee-based income together with the total of other fees earned. In 2011, billings were £44.8 billion, or 4.5 times the revenue of the Group. The inflows and outflows associated with media buying activity therefore represent significant cash flow within each month of the year and are forecast and re-forecast on a regular basis throughout the year by the Group’s treasury staff so as to ensure that there is continuing coverage of peak requirements through committed borrowing facilities from the Group’s bankers and other sources.

 

Liquidity risk management —The Group manages liquidity risk by ensuring continuity and flexibility of funding even in difficult market conditions. Undrawn committed borrowing facilities are maintained in excess of peak net borrowing levels and debt maturities are closely monitored. Targets for debt and cash position are set on an annual basis and, to assist in meeting this, working capital targets are set for all the Group’s major operations. See additional discussion on liquidity risk in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Debt

 

The Company’s borrowings consist of bonds and revolving credit facilities, details on the Company’s borrowings are provided in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility are governed by certain financial covenants based on the results and financial position of the Group, including requirements that (i) the interest coverage ratio for each financial period equal or exceed 5.0 to 1 and (ii) the ratio of borrowed funds to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation at 30 June and 31 December in each year shall not exceed 3.5 to 1, both covenants as defined in the relevant agreement. The Group is in compliance with both covenants.

 

Hedging of financial instruments —The Group’s policy on interest rate and foreign exchange rate management sets out the instruments and methods available to hedge interest and currency risk exposures and the control procedures in place to ensure effectiveness. The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce exposure to foreign exchange risk and interest rate movements. The Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.

 

In 2011, net cash inflow from operating activities was £665.2 million. Free cash flow available for debt repayment, acquisitions, share buy-backs and dividends was £1,012.7 million. This free cash flow was partially absorbed by £532.4 million in net acquisitions and disposals, by £182.2 million in share repurchases and buy-backs and by £218.4 million in dividends, leaving £79.7 million.

 

At 31 December 2011, the Group’s net debt was £2.5 billion, up £0.6 billion from £1.9 billion in 2010, reflecting stronger acquisition and share buy-back activity in the latter half of the year. Net debt averaged £2.8 billion in 2011, down £0.2 billion at 2011 exchange rates. The Group’s average net debt, which was around 1.7 times headline EBITDA in 2011 compared with 2.1 times in 2010, and well within the Group’s current target range of 1.5-2.0 times. Interest (finance cost net of finance income, excluding revaluation of financial instruments) cover based on headline PBIT in 2011 was 7.1 times. So far, in the first three months of 2012, average net debt was up approximately £0.4 billion at £2.6 billion against £2.2 billion for the same period in 2011, at 2012 exchange rates.

 

With a current equity market capitalisation of approximately £10.8 billion, the total enterprise value of the Company is approximately £13.6 billion, a multiple of 8.3 times 2011 headline EBITDA.

 

24


Table of Contents

The Company’s borrowings are evenly distributed between fixed and floating rate debt. Given the strong cash generation of the business, its debt maturity profile and available facilities, the directors believe the Company has sufficient liquidity to match its requirements for the foreseeable future.

 

Refer to Item 5F for details on the Company’s material commitments for capital expenditures at 31 December 2011.

 

C. Research and Development, Patents and Licenses

 

Not applicable.

 

D. Trend Information

 

The discussion below and in the rest of this Item 5 includes forward-looking statements regarding plans, objectives, projections and anticipated future performance based on assumptions that are subject to risks and uncertainties. As such, actual results or outcomes may differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. See “Forward-Looking Statements” preceding Item 1 in this annual report.

 

In the first quarter of 2012, reported revenues were up 7.6% at £2.392 billion. Revenues in constant currency were up 7.4%, reflecting the slight weakness of the pound sterling against the US dollar partly offset by its slight strength against the Euro. On a like-for-like basis, excluding the impact of acquisitions and currency fluctuations, revenues were up 4.0%.

 

The pattern of revenue growth in 2012 has started similarly to the full year of 2011, with continuing improvement across all sectors and geographies. Advertising and Media Investment Management and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications (including direct, digital and interactive), as in 2011, were the strongest by sector, with Consumer Insight also improving, particularly against the last quarter. Our budgets for 2012 indicated like-for-like growth of around 4% over last year and for the first three months actual performance was in line with those projections. A preliminary look at our quarter one revised forecasts, indicates revenue growth slightly better than budget at over 4% and a slightly better second half. In 2011, the mature markets of the United States and Western Continental Europe slowed, although the United Kingdom, against market trends grew strongly. This pattern has mostly continued into the first quarter of 2012 and as indicated in the budgets for this year, the faster growing markets of Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and the Middle East and Central and Eastern Europe were strongest in the first quarter, followed by the United Kingdom and Western Continental Europe.

 

The Group gained a total of £1.159 billion ($1.855 billion) in net new business wins in the first quarter, compared to £841 million ($1.346 billion) in the same period last year.

 

Following the Group’s record year in 2011, 2012 has started well with all geographies and sectors growing revenues. Our operating companies are hiring cautiously and responding to any geographic, functional and client changes in revenues – positive or negative.

 

Concerns about the Eurozone crisis, The Middle East, a Chinese hard-landing and rising commodity prices certainly affected consumer and corporate confidence globally in the second half of 2011 and was reflected in a slowdown in economic activity in most geographic regions and functional sectors. Despite this, advertising and marketing services expenditures continued to rise as Western based multi-national companies and increasingly new-market based companies are prepared to invest in both capacity and behind brands in fast growing markets. At the same time, they are also prepared to invest in brands to maintain or increase market share even amongst slower growth Western markets, such as the United States and Western Europe.

 

The pattern of 2012 looks very similar to 2010 and 2011. Forecasts of worldwide real GDP growth still hover around 2.5-3.5%, with inflation of 2% giving nominal GDP growth of 4.5-5.5%. Advertising as a proportion of GDP should at least remain constant, although it is still at relatively depressed historical levels, particularly in mature markets, post-Lehman and advertising should grow at least at a similar rate as GDP. The three maxi-quadrennial events of 2012, the UEFA Football Championships in Central and Eastern Europe, the Summer

 

25


Table of Contents

Olympics and Paralympics in London and last, but not least, the US Presidential Elections in November should underpin industry growth by 1% alone this year. Both consumers and corporates are likely to continue to be cautious and risk averse, but should continue to purchase or invest in brands in both fast and slow growth markets. Some worry about Chinese growth rates and hard landings, although we see little let-up in Mainland China (up almost 17% like-for-like in the first quarter) and believe the worst case is a soft landing, following the strategies laid out in the 12th Five-Year Plan, which are good for us, as they focus on consumption, a social security safety net and the service industries.

 

One of the clouds on the horizon, may, however be 2013. There will be no maxi- or mini- quadrennial events in that year. It now seems more likely that President Obama will be re-elected and will have to confront the intimidating US budget deficit, whilst dealing with a Republican-controlled House of Representatives and/or Senate. 2014 looks a better prospect, however, with the World Cup in Brazil, the Winter Olympics in Sochi and the mid-term Congressional elections in America.

 

E. Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

 

None.

 

F. Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations

 

The following summarises the Company’s estimated contractual obligations at 31 December 2011, and the effect such obligations are expected to have on its liquidity and cash flows in the future periods. Certain obligations presented below held by one subsidiary of the Company may be guaranteed by another subsidiary in the ordinary course of business.

 

                Payments due in  
(£m)    Total      2012      2013      2014      2015      2016      Beyond
2016
 

Debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes 1

  

Eurobonds

     1,545.9         —           501.4         —           417.8        626.7         —     

Sterling and convertible bonds

     1,050.0         —           —           450.0        —           —           600.0   

US$ bonds

     1,148.4         —           —           624.6        —           —           523.8  

Other

     115.2         19.3         —           16.2        —           79.7        —     

Subtotal

     3,859.5         19.3        501.4         1,090.8         417.8         706.4         1,123.8   

Interest payable

     978.7         221.5         220.8         168.5         106.9         80.7         180.3   

Total

     4,838.2         240.8         722.2         1,259.3         524.7         787.1         1,304.1   

Operating leases 2

     2,335.0         361.4         316.9         278.5         245.0         202.5         930.7   

Capital commitments 3

     127.4         123.9         3.5         —           —           —           —     

Investment commitments 3

     40.0         39.7         0.3         —           —           —           —     

Estimated obligations under acquisition earnouts and put option agreements

     402.4         176.0         34.2         28.2         72.5         30.3         61.2   

Total contractual obligations

     7,743.0         941.8         1,077.1         1,566.0         842.2         1,019.9         2,296.0   

 

1    

In addition to debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes, the Company had short-term overdrafts at 31 December 2011 of £518.4 million. The Group’s net debt at 31 December 2011 was £2,464.8 million and is analysed in Item 5B.

2    

Operating leases are net of sub-let rentals of £40.5 million.

3    

Capital and investment commitments include commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of property, plant and equipment and in respect of interests in associates and other investments, respectively.

 

The Company expects to make annual contributions to its funded defined benefit plans, as determined in line with local conditions and practices. Contributions in respect of unfunded plans are paid as they fall due. The total contributions (for funded plans) and benefit payments (for unfunded plans) paid for 2011 amounted to £66.8 million (2010: £53.3 million, 2009: £47.7 million). Employer contributions and benefit payments in 2012 are expected to be in the range of £60 million to £80 million depending on the performance of the assets. Projections for years after 2012 are subject to a number of factors, including future asset performance and changes in assumptions which mean the Company is unable to make sufficiently reliable estimations of future contributions.

 

26


Table of Contents

NON-GAAP INFORMATION

 

Constant currency

 

The Company’s reporting currency is the UK pound sterling. However, the Company’s significant international operations give rise to fluctuations in foreign exchange rates. To neutralise foreign exchange impact and to better illustrate the underlying change in revenue and profit from one year to the next, the Company has adopted the practice of discussing results in both reportable currency (local currency results translated into pounds sterling at the prevailing foreign exchange rate) and constant currency.

 

The Group uses US dollar-based, constant currency models to measure performance. These are calculated by applying budgeted 2011 exchange rates to local currency reported results for the current and prior year. This gives a US-dollar denominated income statement and balance sheet which exclude any variances attributable to foreign exchange rate movements.

 

Pro-forma (‘like-for-like’)

 

Management believes that discussing like-for-like provides a better understanding of the Company’s performance and trends because it allows for more meaningful comparisons of current period to that of prior periods.

 

Pro-forma comparisons are calculated as follows: current year, constant currency actual results (which include acquisitions from the relevant date of completion) are compared with prior year, constant currency actual results, adjusted to include the results of acquisitions for the commensurate period in the prior year. The Group uses the terms ‘pro-forma’ and ‘like-for-like’ interchangeably.

 

The following table reconciles reported revenue and gross profit growth for 2011 and 2010 to like-for-like revenue and gross profit growth for the same period.

 

       Revenue        Gross profit  
       £m                £m          

2009 Reportable

     8,684                   7,981           

Impact of exchange rate changes

     159        1.8%            149        1.9%    

Changes in scope of consolidation

     26        0.3%            16        0.2%    

Like-for-like growth

     462        5.3%            415        5.2%    

2010 Reportable

     9,331        7.4%            8,561        7.3%    

Impact of exchange rate changes

     (93     (1.0%)           (94     (1.1%)   

Changes in scope of consolidation

     289        3.1%            267        3.1%    

Like-for-like growth

     495        5.3%            505        5.9%    

2011 Reportable

     10,022        7.4%            9,239        7.9%    

 

Headline PBIT

 

Management uses headline PBIT to assess the performance of the business. Management believes that it is both useful and necessary to report headline PBIT because this measure is used by management for internal performance analysis; the presentation of this measure facilitates comparability with other companies who may use similar titled measures, although management’s measure may not be calculated in the same way as similarly titled profit measures reported by other companies; and it is useful in connection with discussion with the investment community.

 

Headline PBIT is calculated as profit before finance income/costs and revaluation of financial instruments, taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets and share of exceptional gains/losses of associates.

 

27


Table of Contents

A tabular reconciliation of profit before interest and taxation to headline PBIT is provided in note 31 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Headline PBIT margin

 

Calculated as headline PBIT (defined above) as a percentage of revenue.

 

Headline PBIT margin on gross profit

 

Given the significance of Consumer Insight revenues to the Group, with none of the direct competitors present in that sector, gross profit and headline PBIT margin on gross profit are a more meaningful measure of comparative, competitive revenue growth and margin performance. This is because consumer insight revenues include pass-through costs, principally for data collection, on which no margin is charged.

 

Calculated as headline PBIT (defined above) as a percentage of gross profit.

 

Headline PBT

 

Management uses headline PBT to assess the performance of the business. Management believes that it is both useful and necessary to report headline PBT because this measure is used by management for internal performance analysis; the presentation of this measure facilitates comparability with other companies who may use similar titled measures, although management’s measure may not be calculated in the same way as similarly titled profit measures reported by other companies; and it is useful in connection with discussion with the investment community.

 

Headline PBT is calculated as profit before taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets, share of exceptional losses/gains of associates and revaluation of financial instruments.

 

A tabular reconciliation of profit before taxation to headline PBT is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Profit before taxation

     1,008.4        851.3        662.6   

Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets

     172.0        170.5        172.6   

Goodwill impairment

     —          10.0       44.3  

Gains on disposal of investments

     (0.4     (4.1     (31.1

Gains on re-measurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest

     (31.6     (13.7     —     

Investment write-downs

     32.8        37.5        11.1   

Share of exceptional (gains)/losses of associates

     (2.1     0.3        1.6   

Revaluation of financial instruments

     50.0        (18.2     (48.9

Headline PBT

     1,229.1        1,033.6        812.2   

 

Headline EBITDA

 

Headline EBITDA is a key metric that private equity firms, for example, use for valuing companies.

 

Headline EBITDA is calculated as profit before finance income/costs and revaluation of financial instruments, taxation, investment gains/losses and write-downs, goodwill impairment and other goodwill write-downs, amortisation and impairment of intangible assets, share of exceptional losses/gains of associates and depreciation of property, plant and equipment.

 

28


Table of Contents

A tabular reconciliation of profit for the year to headline EBITDA is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Profit for the year

     916.5        661.0        506.9   

Taxation

     91.9        190.3        155.7   

Finance income, finance cost and revaluation of financial instruments, net

     249.9        176.9        156.1   

Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets

     172.0        170.5        172.6   

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

     185.8        184.9        195.3   

Amortisation of other intangible assets

     25.7        25.4        30.5   

Goodwill impairment

     —          10.0       44.3  

Gains on disposal of investments

     (0.4     (4.1     (31.1

Gains on re-measurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest

     (31.6     (13.7     —     

Investment write-downs

     32.8        37.5        11.1   

Share of exceptional (gains)/losses of associates

     (2.1     0.3        1.6   

Headline EBITDA

     1,640.5        1,439.0        1,243.0   

 

Billings

 

Billings comprise the gross amounts billed to clients in respect of commission-based/fee-based income together with the total of other fees earned.

 

Estimated net new billings

 

Management uses estimated net new billings to assess the performance of the business.

 

Estimated net new billings represent the estimated annualised impact on billings of new business gained from both existing and new clients, net of existing client business lost. The estimated impact is based upon initial assessments of the clients’ media budgets, which may not necessarily result in actual billings of the same amount.

 

Free cash flow

 

The Group bases its internal cash flow objectives on free cash flow. Management believes free cash flow is meaningful to investors because it is the measure of the Company’s funds available for acquisition related payments, dividends to shareowners, share repurchases and debt repayment. The purpose of presenting free cash flow is to indicate the ongoing cash generation within the control of the Group after taking account of the necessary cash expenditures of maintaining the capital and operating structure of the Group (in the form of payments of interest, corporate taxation and capital expenditure). Net working capital movements are excluded from this measure since these are principally associated with our media buying activities on behalf of clients and are not necessarily within the control of the Group. This computation may not be comparable to that of similarly titled measures presented by other companies.

 

29


Table of Contents

A tabular reconciliation of net cash inflow from operating activities to free cash flow is shown below.

 

       Year ended 31 December  
      

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

     665.2        1,361.2        818.8   

Share option proceeds

     28.8        42.7        4.1   

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     13.2        7.6        9.2   

Movement in working capital and provisions

     620.9        (225.5     102.1   

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     (216.1     (190.5     (222.9

Purchase of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     (37.1     (27.0     (30.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     (62.2     (66.7     (63.0

Free cash flow

     1,012.7        901.8        617.9   

 

Net debt and average net debt

 

Management believes that net debt and average net debt are appropriate and meaningful measures of the debt levels within the Group. This is because of the seasonal swings in our working capital generally, and those resulting from our media buying activities on behalf of our clients in particular, together with the fact that we choose for commercial reasons to locate the debt of the Group in particular countries and leave cash resources in others—though our cash resources could be used to repay the debt concerned.

 

Average net debt is calculated as the average daily net bank borrowings of the Group, derived from the Group’s automated banking system. Net debt at a period end is calculated as the sum of the net bank borrowings of the Group, derived from the cash ledgers and accounts in the balance sheet.

 

The following table is an analysis of net debt:

 

       At 31 December  
      

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Debt financing

     (4,411.4     (3,853.6     (4,307.1

Cash and short-term deposits

     1,946.6        1,965.2        1,666.7   

Net debt

     (2,464.8     (1,888.4     (2,640.4

 

30


Table of Contents

Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates, judgements and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingencies at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ materially from those estimates.

 

Critical Accounting Policies

 

The Company’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. A summary of the Group’s principal accounting policies is provided in the Accounting Policies section of the Financial Statements. The Company believes certain of these accounting policies are particularly critical to understanding the more significant judgements and estimates used in the preparation of its consolidated financial statements. Therefore, we have prepared the following supplemental discussion of critical accounting policies, which should be read together with our financial statements and notes thereto.

 

Goodwill and other intangibles

 

The Company has a significant amount of goodwill and other intangible assets. The Company initially tests the carrying value of goodwill and other indefinite lived intangible assets for impairment annually at 30 June of each year, and then updates the review at 31 December or whenever there is an indication of impairment.

 

Under IFRS, an impairment charge is required for both goodwill and other indefinite lived assets when the carrying amount exceeds the ‘recoverable amount’, defined as the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. Our approach in determining the recoverable amount utilises a discounted cash flow methodology, which necessarily involves making numerous estimates and assumptions regarding revenue growth, operating margins, appropriate discount rates and working capital requirements. These estimates will likely differ from future actual results of operations and cash flows, and it is possible that these differences could be material. In addition, judgements are applied in determining the level of cash-generating unit we identify for impairment testing and the criteria we use to determine which assets should be aggregated. A difference in testing levels could affect whether an impairment is recorded and the extent of an impairment loss. Changes in our business activities or structure may also result in changes to the level of testing in future periods. Further, future events could cause the Company to conclude that impairment indicators exist and that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired. Any resulting impairment loss could have a material impact on the Company’s financial condition and results of operations.

 

Historically our impairment losses have resulted from a specific event, condition or circumstance in one of our companies, such as the loss of a significant client. As a result, changes in the assumptions used in our impairment model have not had a significant effect on the impairment charges recognised. The carrying value of goodwill and other intangible assets will continue to be reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

 

The most significant assumptions employed by the Company in determining recoverable amounts are as follows:

 

   

Future cash flows derived from each cash-generating unit are based on a projection period of up to five years. These projections utilise the latest budget information available for each cash-generating unit covering one or more twelve month periods from the balance sheet date. These budgets have been prepared by management;

 

   

After the projection period, there is an assumed annual long-term growth rate of 3% (2010: 3.0%), with no improvements in operating margins. Management have made the judgement that this long-term growth rate does not exceed the long-term growth rate for the industry; and

 

   

The net present value of the future cash flows was calculated using a pre-tax discount rate of 9.50% (2010: 9.58%).

 

31


Table of Contents

Acquisition accounting

 

The Group accounts for acquisitions in accordance with IFRS 3 (revised) ‘Business Combinations’. IFRS 3 (revised) requires the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities (other than non-current assets or disposal groups held for sale) to be recognised at fair value at acquisition date. In assessing fair value at acquisition date, management make their best estimate of the likely outcome where the fair value of an asset or liability may be contingent on a future event. In certain instances, the underlying transaction giving rise to an estimate may not be resolved until some years after the acquisition date. IFRS 3 (revised) requires the release to profit of any acquisition reserves which subsequently become excess in the same way as any excess costs over those provided at acquisition date are charged to profit. At each period end management assess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions for their continued probability of occurrence and amend the relevant value accordingly through the consolidated income statement or as an adjustment to goodwill as appropriate under IFRS 3 (revised). In 2011, operating profit includes credits totaling £14.0 million (2010: £16.5 million, 2009: £19.4 million) relating to the release of excess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions completed prior to 2010.

 

Future anticipated payments to vendors in respect of contingent consideration (earnout agreements) are initially recorded at fair value which is the present value of the expected cash outflows of the obligations. The obligations are dependent on the future financial performance of the interests acquired (typically over a four to five year period following the year of acquisition) and assume the operating companies improve profits in line with directors’ estimates. The directors derive their estimates from internal business plans together with financial due diligence performed in connection with the acquisition. Subsequent adjustments to the fair value are recorded in the consolidated income statement within revaluation of financial instruments. For acquisitions completed prior to 1 January 2010, such adjustments are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet within goodwill. A summary of earnout related obligations included in creditors is shown in note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

WPP has also entered into option agreements that allow the Group’s equity partners to require the Group to purchase the non-controlling interest. These agreements are treated as derivatives over equity instruments and are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value and the valuation is remeasured at each period end. Fair value is based on the present value of expected cash outflows and the movement in the fair value is recognised as income or expense within revaluation of financial instruments in the consolidated income statement.

 

Actual performance may differ from the assumptions used resulting in amounts ultimately paid out with respect to these earnout and option agreements at more or less than the recorded liabilities.

 

Revenue recognition

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management revenue is typically derived from commissions on media placements and fees for advertising services. Revenue may consist of various arrangements involving commissions, fees, incentive-based revenue or a combination of the three, as agreed upon with each client.

 

Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. Incentive-based revenue typically comprises both quantitative and qualitative elements; on the element related to quantitative targets, revenue is recognised when the quantitative targets have been achieved; on the element related to qualitative targets, revenue is recognised when the incentive is received or receivable.

 

The Group receives volume rebates from certain suppliers for transactions entered into on behalf of clients that, based on the terms of the relevant contracts and local law, are either remitted to clients or retained by the Group. If amounts are passed on to clients they are recorded as liabilities until settled or, if retained by the Group, are recorded as revenue when earned.

 

In applying the proportional performance method of revenue recognition for both market research and other long-term contracts, management is required to make significant judgements, estimates and assumptions. In

 

32


Table of Contents

assessing contract performance, both input and output criteria are reviewed. Costs incurred are used as an objective input measure of performance. The primary input of all work performed under these arrangements is labour. As a result of the relationship between labour and cost, there is normally a direct relationship between costs incurred and the proportion of the contract performed to date. Costs incurred as a proportion of expected total costs is used as an initial proportional performance measure. The indicative proportional performance measure is subsequently validated against other more subjective criteria (i.e. relevant output measures) such as the percentage of interviews completed, percentage of reports delivered to a client and the achievement of any project milestones stipulated in the contract. In the event of divergence between the objective and more subjective measures, the more subjective measures takes precedence since these are output measures.

 

Since project costs can vary from initial estimates, the reliance on total project cost estimate represents an uncertainty inherent in the revenue recognition process. Individual project budgets are reviewed regularly with project leaders to ensure that cost estimates are based upon up to date and as accurate information as possible, and take into account any relevant historic performance experience. Also, the majority of contracted services subject to proportional performance method revenue recognition are in relation to short term projects, averaging approximately 3 months. Due to this close and frequent monitoring of budgeted costs and the preponderance of short term projects, the impact of variances between actual and budgeted project costs has historically been minimal. The Company does not believe that the effect of these uncertainties, taken as a whole, will significantly impact their results of operations in the future.

 

Pension costs

 

Pension costs are assessed in accordance with the advice of local independent qualified actuaries. The latest full actuarial valuations for the various plans were carried out at various dates in the last three years. These valuations have generally been updated by the local independent qualified actuaries to 31 December 2011.

 

The Group’s policy is to close existing defined benefit plans to new members. This has been implemented across a significant number of pension plans. As a result, these plans generally have an ageing membership population. In accordance with IAS 19, the actuarial calculations have been carried out using the projected unit credit method. In these circumstances, use of this method implies that the contribution rate implicit in the current service cost will increase in future years.

 

The Group’s pension deficit was £280.8 million at 31 December 2011, compared to £239.9 million at 31 December 2010. The increase in the deficit is primarily due to lower discount rates as well as a lower return on pension assets. These factors are partially offset by actions taken by WPP to curtail and settle plans.

 

There are a number of areas in the pension accounting that involve judgements made by management. These include establishing the long-term expected rates of investment return on pension assets, mortality assumptions, discount rates, inflation, rate of increase in pensions, in payment and salary increases.

 

Most of the Group’s pension plan assets are held by its plans in the UK and North America. In the UK, the forecasted weighted average return on assets decreased to 4.6% at 31 December 2011 from 5.4% at 31 December 2010, and in North America, the forecasted weighted average return decreased to 5.9% from 6.4%, broadly in line with the yields available in both markets. Management reviews the expected long-term rates of return on an annual basis and revises them as appropriate.

 

Management periodically commission detailed asset and liability studies performed by third-party professional investment advisors and actuaries that generate probability-adjusted expected future returns on those assets. These studies also project the estimated future pension payments and evaluate the efficiency of the allocation of the pension plan assets into various investment categories.

 

33


Table of Contents

At 31 December 2011, the life expectancies underlying the value of the accrued liabilities for the main defined benefit pension plans operated by the Group were as follows:

 

Years life expectancy after age 65    All
Plans
     North
America
     UK     

Western
Continental

Europe

    

Other 1

 

Current pensioners – male

     20.9         19.7         22.5         20.3         19.3   

Current pensioners – female

     22.8         21.6         24.0         23.5         24.7   

Future pensioners (current age 45) – male

     22.4         21.2         23.7         22.7         19.3   

Future pensioners (current age 45) – female

     24.0         22.5         25.1         25.4         24.7   

1     Includes Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe.

       

 

In the determination of mortality assumptions, management uses the most up-to-date mortality tables available in each country.

 

For a 0.25% increase or decrease in the discount rate at 31 December 2011, the effect on the year-end 2011 pension deficit would be a decrease or increase, respectively, of approximately £27 million.

 

Taxation

 

Corporate taxes are payable on taxable profits at current rates. The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

 

The Group is subject to corporate taxes in a number of different jurisdictions and judgement is required in determining the appropriate provision for transactions where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. In such circumstances, the Group recognises liabilities for anticipated taxes based on the best information available and where the anticipated liability is both probable and estimable. Such liabilities are classified as current when the Group expects to settle the liability within 12 months and the remainder as non-current. Any interest and penalties accrued are included in income taxes both in the consolidated income statement and balance sheet. Where the final outcome of such matters differs from the amount recorded, any differences may impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the final determination is made.

 

We record deferred tax assets and liabilities using tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on enacted, or substantively enacted legislation, for the effect of temporary differences between book and tax bases of assets and liabilities. Currently we have deferred tax assets resulting from operating loss carryforwards and deductible temporary differences, all of which could reduce taxable income in the future. Based on available evidence, both positive and negative, we determine whether it is probable that all or a portion of the deferred tax assets will be realised. The main factors that we consider include:

 

   

future earnings potential determined through the use of internal forecasts;

 

   

cumulative losses in recent years;

 

   

the various jurisdictions in which the potential deferred tax assets arise;

 

   

history of loss carryforwards and other tax assets expiring;

 

   

the timing of future reversal of taxable temporary differences;

 

   

the expiry period associated with the deferred tax assets; and

 

   

the nature of the income that can be used to realise the deferred tax asset.

 

If it is our belief that it is probable that some portion of these assets will not be realised, then no asset is recognised in relation to the portion not considered to be realisable. At 31 December 2011 no deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of gross tax losses and other temporary differences of £4,557.0 million.

 

34


Table of Contents

If market conditions improve and future results of operations exceed our current expectations, our existing recognised deferred tax assets may be adjusted, resulting in future tax benefits. Alternatively, if market conditions deteriorate further or future results of operations are less than expected, future assessments may result in a determination that some or all of the deferred tax assets are not realisable. As a result, we may need to reverse all or a portion of the deferred tax assets, which may have a significant effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

 

New IFRS Accounting Pronouncements

 

See page F-7 of the consolidated financial statements for a description of new IFRS accounting pronouncements.

 

35


Table of Contents

ITEM 6. DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

 

A. Directors and Senior Management

 

The directors and executive officers of the Company are as follows:

 

Philip Lader, age 66: Non-executive chairman. Philip Lader was appointed chairman in 2001. The US Ambassador to the Court of St James’s from 1997 to 2001, he previously served in several senior executive roles in the US Government, including as a Member of the President’s Cabinet and as White House Deputy Chief of Staff. Before entering government service, he was executive vice president of the company managing the late Sir James Goldsmith’s US holdings and president of both a prominent American real estate company and universities in the US and Australia. A lawyer, he is also a Senior Advisor to Morgan Stanley, a director of Marathon Oil, AES and Rusal Corporations, a trustee of the Smithsonian Museum of American History and the Atlantic Council and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations.

 

Sir Martin Sorrell, age 67: Chief executive. Sir Martin Sorrell joined WPP in 1986 as a director, becoming Group chief executive in the same year. He is a non-executive director of Formula One and Alcoa Inc.

 

Paul Richardson, age 54: Finance director. Paul Richardson became Group finance director of WPP in 1996 after four years with the Company as director of treasury. He is responsible for the Group’s worldwide functions in finance, information technology, procurement, property, treasury, taxation, internal audit and sustainability. He is a chartered accountant and fellow of the Association of Corporate Treasurers. He is a non-executive director of CEVA Group plc, Chime Communications PLC and STW Communications Group Limited in Australia, the last two being companies associated with the Group.

 

Mark Read, age 45: Strategy director and CEO, WPP Digital. Mark Read was appointed a director in March 2005. He has been WPP’s director of strategy since 2002 and is also chief executive of WPP Digital. He is a member of the Supervisory Board of HighCo and a director of CHI & Partners. He worked at WPP between 1989 and 1995 in both parent company and operating company roles. Prior to rejoining WPP in 2002, he was a principal at the consultancy firm of Booz-Allen & Hamilton and founded and developed the company WebRewards in the UK.

 

Colin Day, age 57: Non-executive director. Colin Day was appointed a director in July 2005. He is the chief executive of Filtrona plc and a non-executive director of Amec. He was the group finance director of Reckitt Benckiser plc, until April 2011, having been appointed to its board in September 2000. Prior to joining Reckitt Benckiser he was group finance director of Aegis Group plc and previously held a number of senior finance positions with ABB Group plc and De La Rue Group plc. He was a non-executive director of Vero Group plc until 1998, Bell Group plc until 2004, Imperial Tobacco plc until February 2007, easyJet plc until 30 September 2005 and Cadbury plc until 2010.

 

Esther Dyson, age 60: Non-executive director. Esther Dyson was appointed a director in 1999. In 2004 she sold her company, EDventure Holdings, to CNET Networks, the US-based interactive media company now owned by CBS. She left CNET at the end of 2006 and now operates as an independent investor and writer, again under the name of EDventure. She has been highly influential for the past 25 years on the basis of her insights into online/information technology markets and their social impact worldwide, including the emerging markets of Central and Eastern Europe and Asia. An active investor as well as an analyst/observer, she participated in the sale of Flickr to Yahoo! and of Medstory and Powerset to Microsoft. She sits on the boards of Russia’s leading search company Yandex (YNDX) and also of non-listed start-ups including Evernote, 23andMe, Airship Ventures, Eventful.com, Meetup Inc., NewspaperDirect (Canada), Voxiva (US) and XCOR Aerospace (US). She is also active in public affairs and was founding chairman of ICANN, the domain name policy agency, from 1998 to 2000. She currently sits on the board of the Sunlight Foundation, which advocates transparency in government, and writes a monthly column for Project Syndicate which is distributed worldwide.

 

36


Table of Contents

Orit Gadiesh, age 61: Non-executive director. Orit Gadiesh was appointed a director in April 2004. She is chairman of Bain & Company Inc., and a world-renowned expert on management and corporate strategy. She holds an MBA from Harvard Business School, was a Baker Scholar and was also presented the Brown Award. Ms. Gadiesh is a member of the Foundation Board for the World Economic Forum as well a member of the International Business Council of the World Economic Forum. She is on the Board of Directors of The Peres Institute for Peace, sits on the International Advisory Board of The Atlantic Council of the United States, and the Advisory Board for the British-American Business Council. She is the Chairman of the International Business Leaders’ Advisory Council for the Mayor of Shanghai (IBLAC) and sits on the International Advisory Board at HEC School of Management in France.

 

Ruigang Li, age 42: Non-executive director. Ruigang Li was appointed a director in October 2010. He is Chairman of China Media Capital (CMC). CMC is the first and only sovereign private equity fund dedicated to the media sector in China and abroad. In 2010, CMC forged a strategic partnership with News Corporation’s Star China to jointly develop growth opportunities on operational and investment platforms within China and beyond. Li was president of Shanghai Media Group (SMG) between 2002 and 2011. Under Li’s Leadership, Shanghai Media Group, a multimedia conglomerate based in Shanghai, built the most complete portfolio of media and related businesses and became one of the world’s largest providers and distributors of Chinese language media contents and services. SMG’s business scope spans multiple platforms and disciplines of television, radio, print media, digital media, content distribution, e-commerce, live theatre entertainment and education.

 

Stanley (Bud) Morten, age 68: Non-executive director. Bud Morten was appointed a director in 1991. He is a consultant and private investor. From 2003 to 2009 he was the Independent Consultant to Citigroup/Smith Barney with responsibility for its independent research requirements. Previously he was the chief operating officer of Punk, Ziegel & Co., a New York investment banking firm with a focus on the healthcare and technology industries. Before that he was the managing director of the equity division of Wertheim Schroder & Co. Inc., in New York. He is a former non-executive of Register.com, which was sold to a private equity firm in November 2005, and of The Motley Fool, Inc., a private company in the financial content business. He is also a non-executive director of Darien Rowayton Bank, a private company.

 

Koichiro Naganuma, age 67: Non-executive director. Koichiro Naganuma was appointed a director in February 2004. He is chairman of the Board of Asatsu-DK Inc., also known as ADK. He is also vice chairman of Japan Advertising Association and chairman of Japan Advertising Industry Pension Fund. Joining the agency in 1981, he was president and Group CEO from 1991-2010. ADK is Japan’s third largest advertising and communications company, and 15 th largest in the world.

 

Lubna Olayan, age 56: Non-executive director. Lubna Olayan was appointed a director in March 2005. Ms Olayan is the deputy chairperson and chief executive officer of the Olayan Financing Company, a subsidiary and the holding entity for the Olayan Group’s operations in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and the Middle East. Ms Olayan is a Board Member of two publicly listed companies, the Saudi Hollandi Bank and Schlumberger, and sits on the International Advisory Board of Akbank, Rolls-Royce and the National Bank of Kuwait. She is on the Board of Trustees of Cornell University, INSEAD and KAUST (King Abdullah University of Science and Technology) and on the Board of DSCA (Down Syndrome Charitable Association) and Al Fanar, the first Arab venture philanthropy organisation in the Arab region.

 

John Quelch, age 60: Non-executive director. John A. Quelch was appointed a director in 1988. He is the Dean, Vice President and Distinguished Professor of International Management at China Europe International Business School in Shanghai. Between 2001 and 2011 he was the Lincoln Filene Professor of Business Administration and Senior Associate Dean at Harvard Business School. Between 1998 and 2001 he was Dean of London Business School. Between 2002 and 2011 he served as chairman of the Massachusetts Port Authority, honorary consul general of the Kingdom of Morocco in New England and as honorary chairman of the British American Business Council of New England. Professor Quelch’s writings focus on global business practice in emerging as well as developed markets, international marketing and the role of the multinational corporation and the nation states. He

 

37


Table of Contents

is a non-executive director of Alere, Inc and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations. He served previously on the boards of Blue Circle Industries plc, easyJet plc, Pentland Group plc, Pepsi Bottling Group and Reebok International Limited. In the 2011 Honours List he was awarded a CBE for services to the promotion of British business.

 

Jeffrey A. Rosen, age 64: Non-executive director. Jeffrey Rosen was appointed a director in December 2004. He is a deputy chairman and managing director of Lazard, with over 30 years’ experience in investment banking. He is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and is President of the Board of Trustees of the International Center of Photography in New York.

 

Timothy (Tim) Shriver, age 52: Non-executive director. Tim Shriver was appointed a director in August 2007. He is a social leader, educator, activist, film producer and business entrepreneur. As chairman and CEO of Special Olympics, he serves nearly four million Special Olympics athletes in 180 countries all working to promote health, education, and unity through the joy of sports. Before joining Special Olympics in 1995, Shriver was and remains a leading educator focusing on the social and emotional factors in learning. He co-founded and currently chairs the Collaborative for Academic, Social, and Emotional Learning (CASEL), the leading research organization in the field of social and emotional learning. He is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, and is a non-executive director of Neogenix Oncology and Fisker Automotive.

 

Paul Spencer, age 62: Non-executive director. Paul Spencer was appointed a director in April 2004. He is a financier with 20 years’ experience in the financial management of a number of blue-chip companies, including British Leyland PLC, Rolls-Royce PLC, Hanson PLC and Royal & Sun Alliance PLC. He has held a number of non-executive directorships including until 2009 chairman of NS and I (National Savings). He is currently chairman of State Street Managed Pension Funds and chairs audit at TR Property Investment Trust PLC. He is the independent Trustee of BT, BA and Rolls-Royce Pension Funds. He is Chairman of Hermes Asset Managers Ltd. In the 2010 Honours List he was awarded a CBE for services to the financial services industry. He is a governor of the charity Motability.

 

Sol Trujillo, age 60: Non-executive director. Sol Trujillo was appointed a director in October 2010. He is an international business executive with three decades’ experience as CEO of large market cap global companies in the US, the EU and Asia Pacific, including US West (now CenturyLink), Orange (now France Telecom) and Telstra, the Australian communications company. A digital pioneer operating in the telecommunications, technology, and media space, he has been a long-time champion of high-speed broadband and a pioneer and innovator of smartphone and the mobile internet to stimulate productivity and innovation across all sectors of the economy. He has managed operations in more than 25 countries – including developed and emerging markets from the EU and North America to China, South Asia, Africa and the Middle East. He currently sits on corporate boards in the US, EU, and China – including Target and ProAmerica Bank in the US and, in Asia, Silk Road Technologies in China, where he is board chairman. In the public sector, Mr Trujillo served as trade policy advisor to the Clinton and Bush administrations and remains active on public policy issues related to immigration, trade, productivity and fiscal affairs.

 

The board of directors has determined that all of the non-executive directors are independent under NASDAQ Rule 5605(a)(2).

 

B. Compensation

 

Review of compensation

 

2011 has been another strong year, indeed a record year, for WPP, building on growth in 2010. The Company’s compensation policy has long been linked to the performance of the Group, with a particular focus on delivering strong relative returns over the longer term to share owners. The use of performance-driven compensation ensures the continued alignment of share owner and executive interests and is essential to enable the Company to attract, retain and motivate the most gifted talent in the industry.

 

38


Table of Contents

In 2011 the Group delivered excellent performance. Highlights included billing of almost £45 billion, profit before tax breaking the £1 billion barrier for the first time and a 38% increase in dividends per share. This strong performance is reflected in the rewards received under the Company’s incentive plans by our executive directors.

 

Following the 2011 AGM the Company recognised that a number of share owners had issues with some aspects of the Group’s executive compensation arrangements. The Compensation Committee took into account the feedback from share owners in its continuing review of the Company’s long-term incentive plan, Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan (LEAP), and as part of the ongoing review of the Group chief executive’s compensation, consideration of which began in 2010, and factored this feedback into the final decisions.

 

While details of all elements of compensation and any changes made to these matters are set out in the following pages, highlights of the key decisions and changes are as follows:

 

   

As part of the Company’s culture of leading in matters of corporate governance, the Company already sought to adopt some of the disclosure measures currently being proposed by the UK Government including greater transparency on short-term incentive measures and a table showing a single figure for executive directors’ total compensation.

 

   

The LEAP III comparator group has been expanded, effective 2011, to include Nielsen, to reflect the greater significance of the consumer insight business within WPP and the emergence of Nielsen as a major public company.

 

   

The revisions in the Group chief executive’s compensation structure (which, along with the compensation structures of the other executive directors and senior management, are reviewed every two years) mark only the second time in the last ten years that salary and incentive compensation have been adjusted. The revisions incorporate constructive input from share owners and their representatives during the consultation process. The committee recognises that the subject of executive compensation is particularly contentious in the current political and governance environment. The committee is sensitive to all the related issues and to its fiduciary obligation to make decisions, sometimes difficult and challenging, believed to be in the best interests of both share owners and the Group. The new package has been shaped by WPP’s guiding principles on compensation, among them the Company’s commitment to provide fully competitive remuneration opportunities, including the potential for superior rewards for exceptional performance. The changes are also designed to reflect the substantial increases in the Group’s size and complexity since the last review in 2007, and to provide an overall level of opportunity that is commensurate with the importance of Sir Martin Sorrell’s contributions to the Group’s success. The committee is of the view that the revisions ensure that the Group chief executive’s compensation is clearly linked to and supports the Group’s strategic objectives, and that the reward levels are properly calibrated to challenging performance conditions.

 

In summary, the other matters dealt with by the committee in 2011 were:

 

   

supervising the Group’s equity incentive plans that are critical to the attraction and retention of talent;

 

   

overseeing the Group’s cash incentive programs and approval of the awards to the most senior business leaders below the Board; and

 

   

reviewing developments in areas of corporate governance and ensuring the Company’s compliance with regulatory changes.

 

The link between compensation and business objectives

 

WPP competes on the basis of its intellectual capital and services. This intellectual capital is created entirely by its people, and the committee endeavours to strike the right balance of fairness between its people and share owners. For this reason, the design of all executive compensation at WPP is governed by three guiding principles: performance-driven reward, competitiveness and alignment with share owner interests.

 

These three principles are themselves derived from both our mission statement: to develop and manage talent; to apply that talent, throughout the world, for the benefit of clients; to do so in partnership; to do so with profit and our six business objectives (see pages 16 to 17).

 

39


Table of Contents

The Compensation Committee regularly reviews fixed and variable compensation against appropriate benchmarks both internal and external. When making decisions on executive compensation, the committee is briefed on the remuneration levels within the Group. This includes, for example, the consideration of salary increases across the organisation when determining executive salary increases. In addition, the committee approves the design of incentive plans and reviews all awards made under those incentive plans.

 

WPP is committed to aligning executive performance and reward with share owner interests. From a compensation perspective, this is encouraged in a number of ways:

 

   

Total Shareholder Return (TSR) has been chosen as the performance measure for the LEAP plans as it represents a strong objective measure of the success of the Company as far as share owners are concerned;

 

   

share ownership is encouraged for the WPP Leaders (approximately the top 230 executives), all of whom have stretching ownership goals;

 

   

all eligible employees, approximately 47,000, are given a share ownership opportunity through participation in the Worldwide Ownership Plan; and

 

   

the majority of the compensation package of executive directors is paid in the form of shares comprised of deferred share bonus and long-term incentive awards under the LEAP plans.

 

The charts below show the breakdown of total target remuneration for the executive directors in 2011 and 2012, illustrating both the significant element of pay linked to performance, and the alignment of interests with share owners through the proportion of compensation payable in WPP shares.

 

LOGO

 

In relation to 2011, while the target bonus was to be split half in cash and half in deferred shares, the Compensation Committee determined that, for Sir Martin only, 40% of the bonus achieved would be paid in cash and 60% in deferred shares (ESA) further increasing alignment with share owner interests.

 

The role of the Compensation Committee in improving risk management

 

The Compensation Committee is always sensitive to the requirement that the decisions that it makes and the compensation programs the Group has in place serve to improve the management of risk in the Group. In particular:

 

   

incentive plans take into account performance across a broad range of financial and non-financial measures;

 

   

committee meetings are generally held at the time of Board meetings, at which the committee members are usually given a comprehensive briefing on issues and risks facing each of the business units as well as the Group as a whole;

 

   

incentive plans are designed to be attractive in the marketplace to enable WPP to attract and retain key talent that is critical to achieving business success. The plans are designed to motivate, reward and provide as much retention value as possible. The use of deferred share bonuses that normally vest after two years, and the use of restricted share awards that vest after three years, support the business need for employee retention; and

 

40


Table of Contents
   

clawback provisions have been added into key share incentive plans (i.e. those other than the all-employee plans) to give the committee the right to cancel or reduce unvested share awards should this be justified by a participant’s acts or omissions.

 

TSR Performance

 

The Company’s TSR for the period from 31 December 2006 to April 2012 is shown on the graph below. The FTSE 100 is the Index the Board considers most relevant for the purpose of comparison as WPP is a mid-ranking FTSE 100 company. WPP considers its key competitors to be Omnicom, Interpublic and Publicis and it is the performance of these companies with which the Company’s own performance is most commonly compared. For that reason, values for those three companies are also displayed.

 

Relative TSR Rebased to 31 December 2006

Measured on a common currency basis

LOGO

 

The committee thought that share owners would benefit from seeing the effect that foreign exchange rates have had on relative TSR. The following graph (measured on a local currency basis) illustrates the distorting effect of foreign exchange rates on relative TSR performance for the same period.

 

Relative TSR Rebased to 31 December 2006

Measured on a local currency basis

LOGO

 

These graphs have been calculated on a daily return basis and do not reflect the TSR measures used in the LEAP performance calculations.

 

41


Table of Contents

Key elements of short and long-term remuneration

 

The design of compensation policy at WPP ensures a clear and direct link between the performance of the Group and executive compensation. Substantial use of performance-driven compensation not only ensures the continued alignment of share owner and executive interests but also enables the Group to attract, retain and motivate the talented people upon whom our success depends.

 

In light of this policy, the principal elements of WPP executive compensation currently comprise the following:

 

   

base salaries and fees (fixed);

 

   

short-term incentives paid in cash and shares which vest after two years (variable); and

 

   

long-term incentives paid in shares under LEAP, which are subject to a stretching performance test with participation linked to a significant co-investment requirement over the five-year performance period.

 

Executive directors are also entitled to receive a pension contribution (or a cash allowance in lieu), life assurance, healthcare and other benefits.

 

Compensation packages for executive directors and the most senior people at WPP below Board level are normally reviewed every 24 months. These reviews consider the mix of fixed and variable elements of the compensation package, general market conditions and internal factors such as the performance of the Group or relevant business unit and pay and employment conditions elsewhere in the Group or relevant business function.

 

In determining suitable benchmarks, the Compensation Committee looks at the compensation of executives holding similar roles in competitor organisations and, if appropriate, media industry or general industry data for organisations of comparable size and complexity.

 

Base salary and fees

 

       Current salary and fees    Effective date  

Sir Martin Sorrell

   £1,300,000      1 Jan 2011   

Paul Richardson

   $925,000 and £100,000      1 Jan 2011   

Mark Read

   £425,000      1 Jan 2011   

 

As reported in previous years, fees of £100,000 are paid to each of the executive directors in respect of their directorships of WPP plc and are included in the numbers above.

 

The committee undertook an extensive review of the executive directors’ compensation at the end of 2010 and considered that increases to the base salaries of the executive directors were appropriate.

 

The consideration in respect of Sir Martin’s base salary continued during 2011, and the committee consulted share owners in the summer with regard to quantum and the structure for Sir Martin’s remuneration arrangements. Having adjusted the proposals following that consultation, the arrangements were finalised towards the end of 2011. The decision was made to increase Sir Martin’s base salary and fee from £1,000,000 to £1,300,000. That was the first increase to Sir Martin’s base salary since 1 January 2007 (which was the only increase since September 1999). Since 2007, the Group has continued to grow in scale and complexity, with worldwide headcount increasing from fewer than 80,000 people in 2,000 offices to over 113,500 people in over 2,500 offices, and significant revenue and earnings per share increases. The level of the increase in compensation was determined by several factors including business and personal performance, competitive pay levels and the extended time period since the last review.

 

Paul Richardson’s and Mark Read’s base salaries were reviewed during 2010 and no further review was undertaken in 2011.

 

42


Table of Contents

Retirement benefits

 

All pension benefits for the Company’s executive directors are provided on either a defined contribution or a cash allowance basis. Only the aggregate of base salary and director fees is pensionable. As part of the committee’s review of the chief executive’s compensation, the allowance for Sir Martin was increased from 40% to 45% of base salary and fee, effective from 1 January 2011. Paul Richardson’s cash allowance and Mark Read’s pension contributions remained unchanged at 30% and 10% respectively. Details of pension contributions or allowances for executive directors for the period under review are set out on page 49.

 

Short-term incentives

 

WPP sets stretching performance targets for each operating company on an annual basis. Performance against these targets determines the size, if any, of the incentive pool for that business unit. In aggregate, incentive payments in 2011 were £338.2 million, reflecting strong Group financial performance. That strong performance is reflected in the bonuses paid to executive directors.

 

Individual targets (both financial and strategic) for the operating company CEOs are set by WPP and in turn, these CEOs set similar targets for employees who report directly to them. Payment is in the form of both cash bonuses and deferred shares which vest a further two years after grant. The grant of those deferred share awards typically occurs within three months of the end of the financial year.

 

In a similar way, the committee sets objectives for the executive directors. The extent to which these objectives are met will determine the size of both annual cash bonuses (under the short-term incentive plan, or STIP) and Executive Share Awards (ESAs, the portion of the annual bonus paid in shares which normally vest a further two years after grant). Since 2010 unvested ESAs are subject to clawback provisions, which give the committee the right to cancel or reduce unvested share awards should this be justified by a participant’s acts or omissions.

 

Effective 2011 the committee adjusted the bonus opportunity for all executive directors. These adjustments provide for a better balance of the cash and share incentive elements of their remuneration. As explained last year, the decision regarding adjustments to Sir Martin’s incentive opportunities was unconfirmed, as the committee was keen to engage with share owners on that subject. Following the share owner consultation process, the committee decided to adjust the target and maximum bonus opportunity, effective 2011, from 167% to 250% at target and from 300% to 500% at maximum (with at least half being delivered in the form of deferred shares), as shown in the table below. As noted above, these adjustments reflect the fact that WPP is now a considerably larger and more complex organisation than in 2007, when Sir Martin’s compensation was last reviewed. The rapid growth of the organisation and the increasing complexity of the sector have resulted in Sir Martin’s role becoming significantly more demanding and the committee believes that there should be greater reward opportunity available for success. These adjustments strengthen further the direct and clear link between reward and performance and are better aligned to the incentive opportunities available at our direct competitors.

 

       Cash      ESA  
% of base salary and fees    Target %      Max %      Target %      Max %  

Sir Martin Sorrell

     125         250         125         250   

Paul Richardson

     100         150         100         150   

Mark Read

     67         100         67         100   

 

The STIP seeks to incentivise the executive directors to achieve specific goals over a one-year period, while continuing to contribute to the on-going and sustainable success of WPP and demonstrating the core values of ownership and alignment of interests with share owners. Consistent with previous years, the plan rewards for performance in three equally weighted areas shown in the following tables (financial, strategic and business performance). Except for the Group financial objectives, the exact measures differ for each individual executive director.

 

43


Table of Contents

In 2011 the Group achieved double-digit growth in all the core measures including revenue, profit before tax and earnings per share. In addition, our profit margin improved strongly while we increased the number of employees by 9.2% to over 113,500 across the Group. The Group was also recognised at Cannes for its creative leadership. The following tables summarise the measures in place for 2011, along with the committee’s assessment of the level of performance.

 

Sir Martin Sorrell    2011 target performance range    Achievement    Actual bonus (% of salary)  

Group financial objectives

   Headline PBT growth; headline PBT margin improvement and revenue growth.    Above Maximum      167%   

Individual strategic objectives

   Relative financial performance of WPP against key competitors.    Target      83%   

Key business achievements

   Creative reputation recognition; succession planning; capital effectiveness and acquisition success.    Target to Maximum      135%   

Total

     385%   

In 2011 the committee decided that a greater portion (60%) of the achieved total bonus be delivered in the form of deferred shares (ESA)

  

Paul Richardson    2011 target performance range    Achievement    Actual bonus (% of salary)  

Group financial objectives

   Headline PBT growth; headline PBT margin improvement and revenue growth.    Above Maximum      100%   

Individual strategic objectives

   Cost reduction in IT, Finance and Establishment; property management.    Target to Maximum      90%   

Key business achievements

   Development of sustainability strategy and practice; finance talent development.    Target to Maximum      85%   

Total

     275%   

To be delivered as 50% deferred shares (ESA) and 50% cash

  

Mark Read    2011 target performance range    Achievement    Actual bonus (% of salary)  

Group financial objectives

   Headline PBT growth; headline PBT margin improvement and revenue growth.    Above Maximum      67%   

Individual strategic objectives

   Digital performance and improvement of the Group’s digital assets and capability through acquisition and development of data and technology strategy; successfully integrate acquisitions.    Target to Maximum      60%   

Key business achievements

   Develop WPP Digital through the launch of Possible Worldwide, Xaxis and other initiatives.    Target to Maximum      63%   

Total

     190%   

To be delivered as 50% deferred shares (ESA) and 50% cash

  

 

The committee has determined that deferred shares (ESAs) will, subject to continued employment, vest after two years.

 

The executive directors are eligible to participate (although, in 2011, have chosen not to participate) in a cash bonus deferral plan whereby they can defer receipt of part of their bonus for four years, and receive a 25% match in the form of WPP shares (subject to continuous employment).

 

Bonus opportunity for the executive directors will be unchanged for 2012, but the measures and ranges will be assessed in light of expectations and the business strategy, meaning that they may change depending on the strategic imperatives for 2012.

 

44


Table of Contents

Long-term incentives

 

During the latter part of 2011, the committee reviewed the long-term incentive plans to assess whether they continued to meet the strategic objectives of the Company. The conclusion of the review was that the plan design, grant levels and vesting schedules remained appropriate and well suited to the nature of the business. While the committee believes that the relative TSR measure used in LEAP for a number of years continues to be the most appropriate performance measure, the committee periodically reviews whether the Plan would be strengthened by the addition of one or two further non-market measures in order to balance TSR.

 

Other than share options, it is intended that all awards will be satisfied out of WPP shares held in treasury or one of the Company’s employee share ownership plans (ESOPs).

 

Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III

 

In 2011, awards under LEAP III were made to 15 of the Group’s key executives. Details of the awards made to the executive directors can be found on page 51.

 

LEAP III is a co-investment plan under which participants must make and retain an investment in WPP shares (investment shares) in order to be eligible to receive awards. The committee may also extend the invitation to participate in the Plan to include options over WPP shares as part of the co-investment commitment. In 2011, participants were not given this opportunity.

 

LEAP III awards provide participants with the opportunity to earn additional WPP shares to match their investments (matching shares). The number of matching shares that a participant can receive at the end of the investment and performance period depends on the Company’s TSR performance measured over five years and compared with a peer group.

 

Following the end of a performance period, the Plan rules require the committee to perform a ‘fairness review’ dependent upon which it may, in exceptional circumstances, decide to vary the number of matching shares that will vest.

 

As previously reported in the 2010 Compensation Committee report, the 2006 award vested in March 2011 with a match of 4.14 shares for each investment share committed.

 

Vesting of the 2007-2011 LEAP award

 

In undertaking the fairness review described above for the 2007-2011 LEAP award, the committee considered a broad range of factors when determining whether the relative TSR result was representative of Group performance over the five-year performance period from January 2007 to December 2011, and the extent to which there were factors that required the result to be adjusted. For the vesting of the 2007 award the committee considered the following factors:

 

   

the impact of major exchange rate shifts on the common currency TSR calculation (as illustrated by the TSR graphs shown on page 41);

 

   

the underlying financial performance of the Company relative to its peers, covering a range of measures including EPS, PBIT, margin and revenue growth; and

 

   

the constituents of the comparator group and whether there were any extraordinary events that could have had a positive or negative impact on their TSR performance.

 

On review, the committee determined that there had been no significant events at any of the comparator group companies during the performance period and, therefore, no adjustment was required.

 

45


Table of Contents

In respect of the first factor, during the performance period sterling dropped sharply against the other currencies that feature in our peer group, falling 45% against the yen, 22% against the euro and 16% against the US dollar. This dramatic currency shift is a factor that the committee has previously had to consider when determining the vesting for prior awards, once adjusting the match upwards from the common currency result and once adjusting the match downwards. These significant currency movements meant that, while on a local currency basis WPP’s TSR ranked between second and third place (above both Omnicom and Interpublic and equating to a match of 4.62), on a common currency basis WPP ranked below median, equating to zero vesting.

 

The committee was of the view that the unprecedented turmoil in the currency markets during the financial crisis was an extraordinary event. Given the very international focus of the comparator group, (with all but one of our comparators listed outside the UK) and the five-year investment and performance period, this event has impacted several award cycles under the Plan including some awards that are yet to vest. While the committee has previously considered and adjusted for the impact of currency fluctuations, this is the most significant impact that has been observed to date.

 

The committee determined that this factor of currency, which was outside management control, had materially affected WPP’s relative TSR ranking and meant that the common currency TSR result was not a fair reflection of the Company’s true performance relative to its peers. This was supported by a review of the Company’s financial performance relative to the comparator group. Therefore, the committee’s judgement was to use the average of the common and local currency results, resulting in a match of 2.31 for the 2007 awards (which was also consistent with the underpinning measures considered by the committee). This implies a ranking between fourth and fifth out of nine companies, which the committee felt to be more representative of the Company’s underlying performance over the five-year performance period.

 

Management share incentive plans

 

The Company uses share-based compensation methods across the workforce, which not only helps the Company to incentivise, retain and recruit talent, but also encourages a strong ownership culture among employees. Share awards are granted under the Restricted Stock Plan, and share option awards are granted to employees under either the Executive Stock Option Plan or the Worldwide Ownership Plan.

 

   

The Restricted Stock Plan is used to satisfy awards under the short-term incentive plans (including the ESAs) as well as to grant awards under the WPP Leaders, Partners and High Potential program. This program is used to reward, retain and align the interests of about 1,250 of our key executives with the interests of share owners. In the program, awards are made to participants that vest three years after grant, provided the participant is still employed within the Group. Executive directors are ineligible to participate in the WPP Leaders, Partners and High Potential program, although they are eligible to receive ESAs under the Restricted Stock Plan.

 

   

The Executive Stock Option Plan is used to make special grants of options in order to attract or retain key talent. One award was granted to an employee in 2011 (none were granted in 2010).

 

   

The Worldwide Ownership Plan is an all-employee plan that makes annual grants of stock options to employees with two years of service who work in wholly-owned subsidiaries. During 2011, awards were made to over 47,000 employees. By 31 December 2011, options under this plan had been granted to approximately 110,400 employees over 49.2 million shares since March 1997. Executives who participate in one of the other share plans described above are ineligible to participate in this plan.

 

Share incentive dilution for 2001 to 2011

 

The share incentive dilution level, measured on a 10-year rolling basis, has remained constant at 4.4% at 31 December 2011 (2010: 4.4%). It is intended that awards under all plans, other than share options, will all be satisfied with purchased shares held either in the ESOPs or in treasury.

 

46


Table of Contents

Compensation in 2012

 

Having set out the Compensation Committee’s decisions and the changes to compensation during 2011, the Committee wishes to keep share owners informed of the policy that it intends to apply in 2012. This policy can be summarised as:

 

   

the base salary and fees of all executive and non-executive directors will be unchanged;

 

   

pension contributions and cash allowances for the executive directors will be unchanged;

 

   

executive directors’ entitlement to STIP and ESA opportunity will be unchanged;

 

   

executive directors’ entitlement to participate in LEAP will be unchanged; and

 

   

LEAP performance measures will be reviewed and if changes are thought appropriate, share owners will be consulted.

 

The Committee will also continue to monitor the UK Government’s proposed changes in the area of executive pay and the consequential implications on disclosure and future pay policy.

 

47


Table of Contents

Key elements of short and long-term remuneration

 

      Objective   Participation   Performance
period
  Conditions   Change of control

Short-term

                   
Base salary   To maintain package competitiveness at all levels within the Group.   All employees.   n/a   Salary levels are determined by taking a number of relevant factors into account, including individual and business unit performance, level of experience, scope of responsibility and the competitiveness of total remuneration.   n/a
Cash bonus   To incentivise delivery of value at all levels within the Group.   Approximately 10% of employees are eligible to receive a performance bonus.   1 year   Achievement of challenging performance goals (financial and non- financial) at the individual and business unit level.   The cash bonuses of executive directors do not crystallise on a change of control.
Performance share awards   To incentivise delivery of value and to align with interests of share owners.   Key operating company executives.   1 year   Achievement of challenging performance goals (financial and non- financial) at operating company level. Further two-year retention period.   See note below for Restricted Stock Plan.
Executive share awards   To incentivise delivery of value and to align with interests of share owners.   Key head office executives and executive directors.   1 year   Achievement of challenging individual annual bonus objectives. Further two- or three-year retention period.   See note below for Restricted Stock Plan.
Long-term                    
LEAP III and Renewed LEAP   To incentivise long-term performance by comparing WPP’s TSR against the TSR of key comparators (which are weighted by market capitalisation in the case of LEAP III), and to maximise alignment with share owner interests through a high level of personal financial commitment.  

Participation offered only to those key executives (currently no more than 20

people) whose contributions transcend their day-to-day role, including executive

directors.

  5 years  

Relative TSR

performance against a group of key communication

services comparator

companies, (weighted by market capitalisation in the case of LEAP III), subject to a fairness review by the Compensation Committee.

  On a change of control, the investment period for all outstanding awards ends, the number of vesting shares is determined at that date (pro-rated in the case of LEAP III) and any other rights cease. The number of shares that vest may be reduced to prevent adverse US tax provisions applying. The Compensation Committee may determine that outstanding awards are exchanged for equivalent awards.
Restricted Stock Plan   To encourage a share ownership culture and long-term retention as well as supporting recruitment.   Directors and senior executives of the operating companies and senior head office executives.   n/a   Typically three-year retention period.   The vesting period for all outstanding awards is deemed to end. The Compensation Committee may determine that outstanding awards are exchanged for equivalent awards or that outstanding awards are unaffected by the change of control.
Executive Stock Option Plan   To provide a tool to promote retention and recruitment.   Occasional use only to deal with special situations.   3 years   Conditions, if any, are determined at the time of grant of the award.   The number of shares or ADRs is pro-rated down in accordance with the change of control date. The Compensation Committee may determine that outstanding awards are unaffected by the change of control.

Worldwide

Ownership Plan

  To develop a stronger ownership culture.   Employees with at least two years’ employment. Not offered to those participating in other share programs or to executive directors.   n/a   Three-year vesting period.   The number of shares or ADRs is pro-rated down in accordance with the change of control date. The Compensation Committee may determine that outstanding awards are unaffected by the change of control.

 

48


Table of Contents

Directors’ remuneration

 

For the fiscal year ended 31 December 2011 the aggregate compensation paid by WPP to all directors and officers of WPP as a group for services in all capacities was £23.6 million. Such compensation was paid by WPP and its subsidiaries primarily in the form of salaries, performance-related bonuses, other benefits and deferred share awards. The sum of £0.9 million was set aside and paid in the last fiscal year to provide pension benefits for directors and officers of WPP.

 

Executive directors’ emoluments

 

The value of salary and fees, benefits, pension contributions and annual incentives paid both in cash (under the STIP) and shares (ESAs) for the year ending 31 December 2011 are set out in the table below. The table also shows comparative numbers for 2010. In the case of the STIP and ESAs, the figures shown are the value of the awards in respect of the year in question (although they were received in the following year). Benefits include such items as healthcare, life assurance, spouse travel and allowances for cars and housing. Both Sir Martin Sorrell and Paul Richardson currently receive part of their remuneration in pounds sterling and part in US dollars. Any US dollar amounts received in 2011 have been converted into sterling at an exchange rate of $1.6032 to £1 ($1.5461 for 2010).

 

                 

Short-term incentives

               
     

Salary and

fees

    

Other

benefits

    

Annual cash
bonus

(STIP)

    

Deferred

share bonus
(ESA)

    

Total

annual
remuneration

     Pension
contributions
 
   

2011

    

2010

    

2011

    

2010

    

2011

    

2010

    

2011

    

2010

    

2011

    

2010

    

2011

    

2010

 
      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000      £000  

Executive directors

                                                                                                          

Sir Martin Sorrell 1, 2, 3

    1,306         1,009         459         374         2,002         1,900         3,003         950         6,770         4,233         585         400   

Paul Richardson

    677         637         100         106         930         682         930         757         2,637         2,182         198         191   

Mark Read

    425         325         3         2         404         219         404         293         1,236         839         43         33   

Total remuneration

    2,408         1,971         562         482         3,336         2,801         4,337         2,000         10,643         7,254         826         624   
1    

During 2011 an amount of approximately £7,402 was paid to Sir Martin Sorrell in respect of tax liabilities incurred by him on expenditure on various items considered by the UK Tax authorities as benefits in kind but which the committee consider to be essential to his ability to deliver his services successfully to the Group (£6,813 in 2010).

2    

Payments made in accordance with the approval granted by share owners of amounts equal to the dividends that would be payable (totalling £1,339,364) were made to Sir Martin Sorrell during 2011 (£1,081,172 during 2010) in respect of the shares reflected in the UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements (which are the agreements that now comprise the awards granted under the Capital Investment Plan in 1995).

3    

Benefits include other items such as healthcare, life assurance, spouse travel, allowances for cars and housing.

 

Non-regulatory information on executive directors’ compensation

 

There are often differences between the compensation amounts which our executive directors are granted in any particular year and the amounts they actually receive. This is because, in addition to cash (base salary and fees, pension and STIP), executive directors (and other senior management in the Group) are also awarded deferred shares (ESAs) as part of their annual bonus. ESA awards usually vest two years after grant, and can only be sold once vested.

 

In the case of LEAP awards, as is described elsewhere in this report, executive directors are annually invited to participate in LEAP. Such invitation requires the executive director to make and retain an investment in shares as determined by the committee. At the end of a five-year performance period (which begins in the year of grant of a LEAP award), the committee determines the number of matching shares to which participants are entitled, using criteria which are explained on pages 45 to 46. The matching shares, if any, are not received (and cannot be sold) by the participant until the performance period has ended and the committee has made that determination.

 

49


Table of Contents

The committee believes that it is more transparent, and in the spirit of the UK government’s current proposed changes in the area of executive pay, to disclose the value of amounts received by each executive director (based on the timing differences described above) in addition to the previous emoluments table (which is required by statute). The information contained in the below table is not required by statute.

 

Benefits include such items as healthcare, life assurance, spouse travel and allowances for cars and housing. Both Sir Martin Sorrell and Paul Richardson currently receive part of their remuneration in pounds sterling and part in US dollars. Any US dollar amounts received in 2011 have been converted into sterling at an exchange rate of $1.6032 to £1.

 

Amounts received by executive directors in 2011

 

           Short-term incentives              
       Salary
and fees
   

Other

benefits 1

   

Annual cash

bonus
(STIP) 2

   

Deferred share

bonus (ESA) 3

    Pension
contributions
   

Dividend

equivalents 4

   

Deferred

bonus 5

     LEAP
award 6
    Total annual
remuneration
 
       £000     £000     £000     £000     £000     £000     £000      £000     £000  

Executive directors

                                                                         

Sir Martin Sorrell

     1,306        459        2,002        1,694        585        1,340                5,575        12,961   

Paul Richardson

     677        100        930        1,237        198                       2,484        5,626   

Mark Read

     425        3        404        517        43               98         621        2,111   

Total received

    remuneration

     2,408        562        3,336        3,448        826        1,340        98         8,680        20,698   
1  

Benefits include items such as healthcare, life assurance, spouse travel, allowance for cars and housing.

2  

The annual cash bonus (STIP) is in respect of 2011 performance (paid in April 2012).

3  

The deferred share bonus (ESA) is in respect of 2008 performance (granted in March 2009 and vested in March 2011).

4  

Payments made in accordance with the approval granted by share owners of amounts equal to the dividends that would be payable were made to Sir Martin Sorrell during 2011 in respect of the shares reflected in the UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements (which are the agreements that now comprise the awards granted under the Capital Investment Plan in 1995).

5  

The deferred bonus is an ABDP award in respect of 2006 performance (granted in April 2007 and vested in March 2011).

6  

The value of the 2006-2010 LEAP award on vesting is the market value of the matching shares associated with the 2006 LEAP awards on the date of vesting (March 2011).

 

The following table shows the number and value (as at 31 December 2011) of WPP shares required to be held by the executive directors for five years, as an investment in WPP, to entitle them to receive any matching shares on vesting of their awards under LEAP. In addition to retaining such significant investments in WPP, the vesting of any matching shares is conditional on WPP’s relative TSR performance against the comparator group (as explained on pages 45 to 46).

       Aggregate number of shares
committed to LEAP at
31 December 2011
  

Value of investment

at 31 Dec 2011 1
£000

 

Sir Martin Sorrell

   1,861,041      12,571   

Paul Richardson

   473,530      3,199   

Mark Read

   119,586      808   
1    

Share price at 31 December 2011: £6.755

 

50


Table of Contents

ESAs and Restricted Stock Awards held by executive directors

 

All awards made under the Restricted Stock Plan are made on the basis of satisfaction of previous performance conditions and are subject to continuous employment until the vesting date. The table does not include grants in relation to the 2011 ESA as these were not granted at the time of going to print.

 

            Award
date
    Share
plan
  Share/ADR
price on
grant
date
    No. of
shares/ADRs
originally
awarded
    Value
on
grant
day
000
    Additional
shares
granted
in lieu of
dividends
    Total
shares
vesting
    Vesting
date
    Share
price on
vesting
    Value
on
vesting
000
 

Sir Martin Sorrell

  2008 ESA Award     09.03.09      ESA     £3.83625        196,285        £753        11,730        208,015        06.03.11        £8.145      £ 1,694   
    2009 ESA Award     04.05.10      ESA     £6.7775        80,560        £546        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     
    2010 ESA Award     31.03.11      ESA     £7.6825        123,657        £950        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     

Paul Richardson

  2008 ESA Award     09.03.09      ESA     £3.83625        143,369        £550        8,567        151,936        06.03.11        £8.145      £ 1,237   
    2009 ESA Award 1     04.05.10      ESA     $51.59        11,813        $609        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     
    2010 ESA Award 1     31.03.11      ESA     $61.76        19,121      $ 1,181        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     

Mark Read

  Def Bonus 2006     27.04.07      Deferred bonus     £7.4775        9,526        £71        3,472 2       12,998        16.03.11      £ 7.575        £98   
    2008 ESA Award     09.03.09      ESA     £3.83625        59,954        £230        3,582        63,536        06.03.11        £8.145        £517   
    2009 ESA Award     04.05.10      ESA     £6.7775        23,164        £157        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     
    2010 ESA Award     31.03.11      ESA     £7.6825        38,138        £293        —          —          06.03.13        —          —     
1    

Paul Richardson’s 2009 and 2010 ESA Awards were granted in respect of ADRs.

2    

Represents the combined total of matching shares and shares granted in lieu of dividends.

 

Long-Term Incentive Plan Awards — Leadership Equity Acquisition Plans

 

Name   Grant /
award
date
 

Investment

and performance

period

    Number of
investment
shares
  Share
price on
grant
date
    Maximum
number of
matching
units at  1
Jan 2011
    During 2011    

Maximum
number of
matching
units at 31

Dec 2011

    Share
price
on vest/
deferral
date
    Value
on vest/
deferral
date
000
 
            Granted/
(lapsed)
units
    Additional
dividend
shares
    Vested or
deferred
shares
       

Sir Martin Sorrell

  15.11.06     01.01.06 –31.12.10      156,536     £6.84        782,680        (134,621     74,188        722,247        782,680        £7.72      £ 5,575   
    11.12.07     01.01.07 –31.12.11      148,742     £6.23        743,710        —          —          —          743,710        —          —     
    31.10.08     01.01.08 –31.12.12      218,596     £3.749        1,092,980        —          —          —          1,092,980        —          —     
    15.12.09     01.01.09 –31.12.13      365,878     £6.1025        1,829,390        —          —          —          1,829,390        —          —     
    24.11.10     01.01.10 –31.12.14      416,666     £7.2475        2,083,330        —          —          —          2,083,330        —          —     
    07.12.11     01.01.11 –31.12.15      711,159     £6.6475        —          3,555,795        —          —          3,555,795        —          —     

Paul Richardson

  15.11.06     01.01.06 –31.12.10      66,102     £6.84        330,510        (56,848     31,328        304,990        330,510        £8.145      £ 2,484   
    11.12.07     01.01.07 –31.12.11      59,497     £6.23        297,485        —          —          —          297,485        —          —     
    31.10.08     01.01.08 –31.12.12      109,298     £3.749        546,490        —          —          —          546,490        —          —     
    15.12.09     01.01.09 –31.12.13      103,423     £6.1025        517,115        —          —          —          517,115        —          —     
    24.11.10     01.01.10 –31.12.14      100,968     £7.2475        504,840        —          —          —          504,840        —          —     
    07.12.11     01.01.11 –31.12.15      100,344     £6.6475        —          501,720        —          —          501,720        —          —     

Mark Read

  15.11.06     01.01.06 –31.12.10      16,525     £6.84        82,625        (14,212     7,832        76,246        82,625      £ 8.145        £621   
    11.12.07     01.01.07 –31.12.11      14,874     £6.23        74,370        —          —          —          74,370        —          —     
    31.10.08     01.01.08 –31.12.12      21,859     £3.749        109,295        —          —          —          109,295        —          —     
    15.12.09     01.01.09 –31.12.13      27,406     £6.1025        137,030        —          —          —          137,030        —          —     
    24.11.10     01.01.10 –31.12.14      25,281     £7.2475        126,405        —          —          —          126,405        —          —     
    07.12.11     01.01.11 –31.12.15      30,166     £6.6475        —          150,830        —          —          150,830        —          —     

 

Awards granted in 2006, 2007 and 2008 were granted under the Renewed Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan. Awards granted in 2009, 2010 and 2011 were granted under the Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III.

 

51


Table of Contents

Vesting Schedules

 

The vesting schedules used for the various awards under both plans are shown in the following tables. In respect of awards granted in 2007 and 2008, when actual performance falls between these positions, the match is calculated on a proportionate basis. In respect of awards granted in 2009, 2010 and 2011, when actual performance is not exactly equal to a percentile in the table below, but is more than 50% and less than 90%, the percentage of matching shares will be determined on a straight-line basis between the relevant figures.

 

Awards granted in 2007         
Rank compared to comparator group    Number of matching shares  

1

     5   

2

     5   

3

     4.5   

4

     3.5   

5

     2.5   

Median

     1.5   

Below median

     0   

 

Awards granted in 2008         
Rank compared to comparator group    Number of matching shares  

1

     5   

2

     5   

3

     4   

4

     3   

Median

     1.5   

Below median

     0   

 

Awards granted in 2009, 2010 and 2011         
Aggregate market capitalisation percentile    Number of matching shares  

90th percentile

     500%   

80th percentile

     420%   

70th percentile

     330%   

60th percentile

     240%   

50th percentile

     150%   

40th percentile

     0%   

30th percentile

     0%   

20th percentile

     0%   

10th percentile

     0%   

Bottom

     0%   

 

52


Table of Contents

Comparator Groups

 

The comparator groups used for the awards under Renewed LEAP (2007 and 2008) and LEAP III (2009, 2010 and 2011) are shown in the following table. Where a company that delists during a performance period has an undisturbed share price for less than 40% of that performance period, the Compensation Committee would usually exclude that company from the comparator group for the award in question. Otherwise, the company would usually be deemed to be disposed of and the proceeds reinvested, in respect of LEAP III, in a market capitalisation weighted index, and in respect of Renewed LEAP, in a non-market capitalisation weighted index, both of which track the TSR of the remaining comparator companies.

 

Grant year    Comparator group
2007    Aegis, Arbitron, Dentsu, Gfk, Havas Advertising, Interpublic, Ipsos, Omnicom Group, Publicis and Taylor Nelson Sofres
2008    Aegis, Arbitron, Dentsu, Gfk, Havas Advertising, Interpublic, Ipsos, Omnicom Group and Publicis
2009    Aegis, Arbitron, Dentsu, Gfk, Havas, Interpublic, Ipsos, Omnicom Group and Publicis
2010    Aegis, Arbitron, Dentsu, Gfk, Havas, Interpublic, Ipsos, Omnicom Group and Publicis
2011    Aegis, Arbitron, Dentsu, Gfk, Havas, Interpublic, Ipsos, Nielsen, Omnicom Group and Publicis

 

Non-executive directors’ remuneration

 

The fee structure used to compensate the non-executive directors (NEDs) is as follows:

 

Position/role    2011 fees  

Chairman

   £ 425,000   

Senior independent director

   £ 20,000   

Non-executive director

   £ 65,000   

Chairmanship of Audit or Compensation Committee

   £ 40,000   

Chairmanship of Nomination and Governance Committee

   £ 15,000   

Member of Audit and Compensation Committee

   £ 20,000   

Member of Nomination and Governance Committee

   £ 5,000   

 

The fees paid to NEDs are normally reviewed every two years and any changes are approved by the Board. UK-based NEDs who are required to travel outside the UK to consider Company-related matters at meetings called at short notice will be paid £1,000 for attendance at each of those meetings. The fees detailed above are the only payments receivable by NEDs. Mr Morten will also be paid a fee of £20,000 for additional services that he provides to the Board. NEDs receive no other payments or benefits other than those fees detailed in the table below.

 

53


Table of Contents

The table below shows actual fees paid for the year 2011. The notice period for all NEDs is two months.

 

Director   Date of
original
contract
    Expiry
of
current
contract
    Committee membership   2011
£000
    2010
£000
 
P Lader 1     26.02.01        05.10.14      Chairman of the Company, chairman of Nomination and Governance Committee and member of Compensation Committee     425        315   
C Day     25.07.05        05.10.14      Member of Audit Committee and member of Compensation Committee     112        65   
E Dyson     29.06.99        05.10.14      Member of Compensation Committee and member of Nomination and Governance Committee     90        70   
O Gadiesh     28.04.04        05.10.14      Member of Nomination and Governance Committee     70        65   
R Li     11.10.10        11.10.13            65        14   
S W Morten 2     02.12.91        05.10.14      Ex officio member of all committees     85        70   
K Naganuma 3     23.01.04        05.10.14            —          —     
L Olayan 4     18.03.05        05.10.14      Member of Nomination and Governance Committee     70        —     
J A Quelch 5     10.07.91        05.10.14            70        94   
J Rosen     20.12.04        05.10.14      Chairman of Compensation Committee, member of Audit Committee and senior independent director     145        82   
T Shriver     06.08.07        05.10.14      Member of Compensation Committee     85        65   
P Spencer     28.04.04        05.10.14      Chairman of Audit Committee     106        80   
S Trujillo     11.10.10        11.10.13      Member of the Audit Committee     85        15   

 

1    

From 1 January 2011, the chairman is not entitled to any further fees or salary for either chairmanship or membership of any of the Company’s committees.

2    

Fee includes ex officio payment of £20,000 (£6,000 in 2010).

3    

Received no fees in 2010 and 2011.

4    

Waived fee in 2010.

5    

Fee includes £4,680 (£34,038 in 2010) for consulting services.

 

C. Board Practices

 

In accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, the directors will submit themselves for annual re-election at each Annual General Meeting. Directors may be appointed by share owners by ordinary resolution or by the Board on the recommendation of the Nomination and Governance Committee and must then stand for re-election at the next Annual General Meeting where they may be re-elected by ordinary resolution of the share owners.

 

Information regarding the period during which each director has served is set forth in Item 6A.

 

All directors are fully briefed on important developments in the various business activities which the Group carries out worldwide and regularly receive extensive information concerning the Group’s operations, finances, risk factors and its people, enabling them to fulfil their duties and obligations as directors. The directors are also frequently advised on regulatory and best practice requirements which affect the Group’s businesses on a global basis.

 

During 2011, the Board met seven times formally and held 17 committee meetings throughout the year. With the exception of Lubna Olayan, Tim Shriver, Colin Day, John Quelch, Paul Spencer, Sol Trujillo and Orit Gadiesh (each absent for one meeting) and Ruigang Li (absent for four meetings) and Koichiro Naganuma (who was only able to attend one meeting), there was full attendance at all formal meetings of the Board during 2011.

 

The shareholdings of non-executive directors are set out on page 59. Non-executive directors do not participate in the Company’s pension, share option or other incentive plans, but may receive a part of their fees in ordinary shares of the Company and may participate in the Company’s deferred compensation program.

 

The Board considers that the non-executive directors’ remuneration conforms with the requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

54


Table of Contents

The fees payable to non-executive directors represent compensation in connection with Board and Board committee meetings and where appropriate for devoting additional time and expertise for the benefit of the Group in a wider capacity.

 

Details of directors’ remuneration and service contracts are provide in Item 6B.

 

The Company’s Articles of Association permit the Board to consider and, if it sees fit, to authorise situations where a director has an interest that conflicts, or may possibly conflict, with the interests of the Company (Situational Conflicts). The Board has a formal system in place for directors to declare Situational Conflicts to be considered for authorisation by those directors who have no interest in the matter being considered. In deciding whether to authorise a Situational Conflict, the non-conflicted directors must act honestly and in good faith with a view to the best interests of the Company and they may impose limits or conditions when giving the authorisation, or subsequently, if they think this is appropriate.

Any Situational Conflicts considered, and any authorisations given, are recorded in the relevant minutes. The prescribed procedures have been followed in deciding whether, and on what terms, to authorise Situational Conflicts and the Board believes that the systems it has in place for reporting and considering Situational Conflicts continue to operate effectively.

 

Policy on directors’ service contracts, notice periods, termination payments and external appointments

 

The Company’s policy is that contracts should be on a rolling basis and will not include either a fixed term or liquidated damages provisions. Sir Martin Sorrell’s service contract may be terminated by the Company or by Sir Martin without, in either case, notice needing to be given — a so-called ‘contract at will’. This means that the Company may terminate Sir Martin’s service contract without the need to pay compensation for any notice period.

 

       Effective from    Notice period

Sir Martin Sorrell

   19 Nov 2008    ‘At will’

Paul Richardson

   19 Nov 2008    12 months

Mark Read

   19 Nov 2008    6 months

 

Executive directors are permitted to serve as non-executives on the boards of other organisations. If the Company is a share owner in that organisation, non-executive fees for these roles are waived. However, if the Company is not a share owner in that organisation, any non-executive fees can be retained by the office holder.

 

Composition of the Compensation Committee

 

During 2011, the Compensation Committee comprised the following:

 

   

Jeffrey Rosen (chairman of the committee);

 

   

Colin Day;

 

   

Esther Dyson;

 

   

Philip Lader; and

 

   

Tim Shriver.

 

No member of the committee has any personal financial interest (other than as a share owner as disclosed on page 59) in the matters to be decided by the committee, potential conflicts of interest arising from cross-directorships or day-to-day involvement in running the Group’s businesses.

 

The terms of reference for the Compensation Committee are available on the Company’s website and will be on display at the AGM, as set out in the Notice of AGM. This Annual Report on Form 20-F does not incorporate by reference information on the Company’s website.

 

55


Table of Contents

The committee’s principal responsibilities under its terms of reference include:

 

   

reviewing and approving the Company’s compensation strategy;

 

   

determining appropriate remuneration for executive directors;

 

   

approving the service agreements and severance arrangements for executive directors and other senior executives of the Company;

 

   

maintaining appropriate procedures for evaluation of executive performance;

 

   

overseeing succession planning and management development for senior executives in the Group who are not members of the Board;

 

   

reviewing, approving and administering the Company’s executive long-term incentive plans, employee share schemes and other equity-related incentive plans;

 

   

reviewing proposed special incentive awards to senior executives;

 

   

monitoring prohibitions on personal loans to directors and officers;

 

   

determining targets for performance-related pay schemes;

 

   

advising on any major changes in employee benefit structures;

 

   

overseeing the provisions for selecting, appointing and setting the terms of reference for any remuneration consultants to the Company;

 

   

overseeing the preparation of and recommending to the board the approval of the annual report of the committee in compliance with the disclosure requirements of the Code of Best Practice and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002;

 

   

overseeing the adequacy of disclosures throughout the year regarding director compensation, stock transactions and benefits;

 

   

approving the policy for authorising claims for expenses from directors and senior executives; and

 

   

ensuring that procedures are in place concerning compliance with the employee welfare provisions of the Company’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics and the Company’s Policy Manual.

 

Advisors to the Compensation Committee

 

The Compensation Committee regularly consults with Group executives, particularly the Group chief executive (who is not present when matters relating to his own compensation or contracts are discussed and decided), the Company Secretary, the chief talent officer and the worldwide director of compensation and benefits. The latter two individuals provide a perspective on information reviewed by the committee and are a conduit for requests for information and analysis from the Company’s external advisors. Towers Watson are the committee’s appointed compensation advisors; they did not provide any other material services to the Group.

 

The committee receives external advice on all matters pertaining to the determination of fair and appropriate compensation packages for the executive directors including competitive practices in comparator companies.

 

Review of the Audit Committee

 

During 2011, the Audit Committee comprised Paul Spencer, Jeffrey Rosen, Colin Day and Sol Trujillo.

 

Meetings of the Audit Committee, of which there were seven during 2011, were also attended (by invitation for all or part of any meeting) by the external auditors, the Company’s chairman, the Group finance director, Bud

 

56


Table of Contents

Morten, the director of internal audit, the Group chief counsel, deputy Group chief counsel and the Company Secretary. Preparatory meetings were also held with the internal and external auditors as well as members of the Company’s senior management including the heads of the tax, treasury, legal and group reporting teams. The committee received presentations from the heads of internal audit, finance and treasury. The committee also received reports from the Disclosure Committee in relation to the Disclosure Committee’s review and work on financial reports. The Board received regular reports on all matters of particular significance arising at the committee meetings.

 

The committee’s terms of reference, which are reviewed with the Board annually and most recently in April 2012, are available for inspection on the Company’s website at www.wpp.com and at all general meetings of the Company. This Annual Report on Form 20-F does not incorporate by reference information on the Company’s website.

 

During the year, the committee and its members were formally assessed by the chairman of the Company for their technical suitability to be members and also for its overall effectiveness. The Board has designated Paul Spencer as the committee’s financial expert for Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) purposes and as having recent and relevant financial experience for the purposes of the Combined Code and the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

The committee has once again overseen the progress towards compliance with Section 404 of SOX for 2011, through regular status reports submitted by the internal and external auditors.

 

The committee received and reviewed regular reports on both the Company’s Right to Speak helpline, which is made available to employees to enable them to communicate confidentially on matters of concern and the actions taken in response to those calls.

 

The committee has established a policy regarding non-audit services that may be provided by the external auditors, which prohibits certain categories of work in line with relevant guidance on independence, such as ethical standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board and SOX. Other categories of work may be provided by the auditors if it is appropriate for them to do so. The provision of such services and associated fees are pre-approved by the committee, either as individual assignments or as aggregate amounts for specified categories of services. All fees are summarised periodically for the committee to assess the aggregate value of non-audit fees against audit fees. The level of fees for 2011 is shown in note 3 to the financial statements and in Item 16C.

 

In line with the committee’s responsibility to review and appoint the external auditors and approve their remuneration and terms of engagement, in 2011 the committee monitored Deloitte’s independence, objectivity and performance with reference to frequent reports from Deloitte during the year covering the overall audit strategy and the progress and results of the audit.

 

Other work carried out by the committee in 2011 included:

 

   

monitoring the integrity of the Company’s financial statements and reviewing significant financial reporting judgements;

 

   

reviewing internal financial control and internal audit activities;

 

   

assisting the Board in meeting its responsibilities in respect of reviewing and reporting on the systems and key elements of risk management as they affect the Group;

 

   

reviewing the Group Treasury policy with particular focus on debtors, funding foreign exchange and cash management and the continued ability of the Group to adopt the going concern basis in preparing financial statements;

 

   

reviewing reports on any material litigation or regulatory reviews involving Group companies;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s mergers and acquisitions strategy, any significant acquisitions, due diligence procedures and integration processes and the debt financing by the Group;

 

57


Table of Contents
   

reviewing new business models proposed by Group companies;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s Code of Business Conduct and supporting training programs;

 

   

reviewing the Group’s tax strategy and domicile;

 

   

monitoring the accounting and legal reporting requirements, including all relevant regulations of the UK Listing Authority, the SEC and NASDAQ and the Jersey Financial Services Commission with which the Company must comply;

 

   

reviewing the procedures and supporting training programs being implemented by the Group in response to the UK Bribery Act and US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and increased regulatory focus; and

 

   

reviewing the Group’s reporting systems and back office integration initiatives.

 

D. Employees

 

The assets of communications services businesses are primarily their employees, and the Company is highly dependent on the talent, creative abilities and technical skills of its personnel and the relationships its personnel have with clients. The Company believes that its operating companies have established reputations in the industry that attract talented personnel. However, the Company, like all communications services businesses, is vulnerable to adverse consequences from the loss of key employees due to the competition among these businesses for talented personnel. On 31 December 2011, the Group, including all employees of associated undertakings, had approximately 158,000 employees located in over 2,500 offices in 107 countries compared with 146,000 and 138,000 as at 31 December 2010 and 2009, respectively. Excluding all employees of associated undertakings, this figure is 113,615 (2010: 104,052, 2009: 98,759). The average number of employees in 2011 was 109,971 compared to 101,387 and 105,318 in 2010 and 2009, respectively, including acquisitions.

 

Their geographical distribution was as follows:

 

             
      2011   2010   2009

North America

  27,540   25,546   25,004

United Kingdom

  10,555   9,620   9,704

Western Continental Europe

  22,504   21,154   22,230

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa and Middle East
and Central & Eastern Europe

  49,372   45,067   48,380
    109,971   101,387   105,318

 

Their operating sector distribution was as follows:

 

     
             
      2011   2010   2009

Advertising and Media Investment Management

  47,252   42,424   42,906

Consumer Insight

  29,204   28,167   28,325

Public Relations & Public Affairs

  7,869   7,364   7,325

Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

  25,646   23,432   26,762
    109,971   101,387   105,318

 

58


Table of Contents

E. Share Ownership

 

Directors’ Interests

 

Directors’ interests in the Company’s ordinary share capital, all of which were beneficial (unless otherwise stated), are shown in the following table. Save as disclosed in this table and in the rest of Item 6, no director had any interest in any contract of significance with the Group during the year. Each executive director has a technical interest as an employee and potential beneficiary in shares in the Company held under the ESOPs. As at 31 December 2011, the Company’s ESOPs (which are entirely independent of the Company and have waived their rights to receive dividends) held in total 20,599,871 shares in the Company (22,083,378 in 2010). Further details of the long-term incentive plans are given in Item 6B.

 

    At 1 Jan
2011 or
appointment
date
    Shares acquired
through long-
term incentive
plan awards
in 2011
    Movement
during
2011 inc.
shares
purchased
in 2011
    At 31 Dec
2011
    Shares acquired
through long-
term incentive
plan awards
in 2012
    Other
movements
since 31
Dec 2011
    At 20 Apr
2012
          Shares
contributed
to charity
2007-2011
(and no  longer
beneficially
owned)
 
        Vested     (Sold)         Vested     (Sold)          

C Day

    15,240        —          —          —          15,240        —          —          —          15,240            —     

E Dyson

    35,000        —          —          —          35,000        —          —          —          35,000            —     

O Gadiesh

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —              —     

P Lader

    11,950        —          —          —          11,950        —          —          —          11,950            —     

R Li

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —              —     

S W Morten

    20,000        —          —          —          20,000        —          —          —          20,000            —     

K Naganuma 1

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —              —     

L Olayan

    —          —          —          10,000        10,000        —          —          —          10,000            —     

J A Quelch

    12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —          —          —          12,000            —     

M Read 2

    97,126        139,782        (139,782     7,605        104,731        38,633        (38,633     —          104,731            —     

P W G Richardson 2,3

    494,790        456,926        (415,926     —          535,790        154,538        (77,273     —          613,055            —     

J Rosen

    12,000        —          —          —          12,000        —          —          —          12,000            —     

T Shriver

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000            —     

P Spencer

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000            —     

S Trujillo

    10,000        —          —          —          10,000        —          —          —          10,000            —     

Sir Martin Sorrell 2,4,5,6

    16,857,601        930,262        —          (264,000     17,523,863        386,344        —          —          17,910,207            805,936 7  
1    

K Naganuma is a director of Asatsu-DK, which at 20 April 2012 had interests in 31,295,646 shares representing 2.48% of the issued share capital of the Company.

2    

Interests include investment shares committed to the 2008, 2009, 2010 and 2011 awards under the LEAP plans but do not include matching shares from these awards, if any.

3    

In March 2012, Mr Paul Richardson agreed to charge 15,453 WPP ADRs to Bank of America, N.A. as security for existing bank facilities made available to him. The total number of WPP ADRs charged by Mr Paul Richardson to Bank of America, N.A. after that transaction is 115,611.

4    

Includes 4,176,833 shares pursuant to the vesting of the 2004 and 2005 awards, part of the 2006 award and the 2007 award granted under LEAP. The receipt of these awards has been deferred until November 2017.

5    

Includes 3,636,950 shares which originally formed part of the Capital Investment Plan (an award in respect of 4,691,392 shares in total, some of which have been received by Sir Martin Sorrell) and comprised the UK and US Deferred Stock Units Awards Agreements.

6    

In March 2011, Sir Martin Sorrell gifted 264,000 ordinary shares to the JMMRJ Sorrell Charitable Foundation.

7    

The JMMRJ Sorrell Charitable Foundation, of which Sir Martin Sorrell is a joint trustee, has an interest of 805,936 WPP plc shares. Sir Martin has no beneficial interest in these shares.

 

Options held by executive directors

 

The options held by Mark Read at 31 December 2011 were granted prior to him becoming a director of the Company.

 

       Grant/
award date
     End of
exercise
period
     Exercise
price
     At 1 Jan
2011
(no. of
shares)
     Granted/
(lapsed)
2011
(no. of
shares)
     Exercised
2011
(no. of
shares)
     Share
price on
exercise
     Value on
exercise
     At 31 Dec
2011
(no. of
shares)
     Share
price 31  Dec
2011 1
 

Mark Read

     17.11.2003         17.11.2013       £ 5.595         10,615         —           —           —           —           10,615       £ 6.755   
       29.10.2004         29.10.2014       £ 5.535         9,879         —           —           —           —           9,879       £ 6.755   
1    

Share price 12-month high/low: £8.465/£5.78.

 

59


Table of Contents

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

A. Major Shareholders

 

As of the dates shown below, the Company is aware of the following interests of 3% or more in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company:

 

               20 April
2012
             18 April
2011
             16 April
2010
 

Legal & General

     3.55     44,960,433         3.78     47,884,647         3.99     50,154,226   

BlackRock Inc.

     *        *                          5.10     64,106,906   

AXA S.A.

     *        *                          4.95     62,221,408   

Massachusetts Financial Services Company

     *        *                          4.84     60,838,710   
*   No interests in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company in excess of 3.0% have been notified to the Company.

 

The disclosed interests refer to the respective combined holdings of those entities and to interests associated with them. The Company has not been notified of any other holdings of ordinary share capital of 3% or more. None of these shareholders has voting rights that are different from those of the holders of the Company’s ordinary shares generally. As far as WPP is aware, it is neither directly nor indirectly owned or controlled by one or more corporations or by any government, or by any other natural or legal persons severally or jointly.

 

The number of outstanding ordinary shares at 31 December 2011 was 1,266,373,821 which includes the underlying ordinary shares represented by 9,715,724 ADSs. 222 share owners of record of WPP ordinary shares were US residents at 31 December 2011.

 

The geographic distribution of our share ownership as at 31 December 2011 is presented below:

 

United Kingdom

     36%      

United States

     35%      

Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East,
Canada and Continental Europe

     29%      

Total

     100%      

 

B. Related Party Transactions

 

From time to time the Group enters into transactions with its associated undertakings. These transactions were not material for any of the years presented.

 

C. Interests of Experts and Counsel

 

Not applicable.

 

60


Table of Contents

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

A. Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information

 

See Item 18.

 

Outstanding legal proceedings

 

The Company has claims against others and there are claims against the Company in a variety of matters arising from the conduct of its business. In the opinion of the management of the Company, the ultimate liability, if any, that is likely to result from these matters would not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position, or on the results of its operations.

 

Dividend distribution policy

 

ADS holders are eligible for all stock dividends or other entitlements accruing on the underlying WPP plc shares and receive all cash dividends in US dollars. These are normally paid twice a year. Dividend cheques are mailed directly to the ADS holder on the payment date if ADSs are registered with WPP’s US Depositary, Citibank N.A. Dividends on ADSs that are registered with brokers are sent to the brokers, who forward them to ADS holders.

 

Dollar amounts paid to ADR holders depend on the sterling/dollar exchange rate at the time of payment.

 

Dividend Access Trust

 

Following the scheme of arrangement on 19 November 2008, WPP put in place a dividend access plan (the “Dividend Access Plan”) under which share owners may elect to be paid dividends from WPP DAS Limited (a subsidiary of WPP formed in 2008 and resident for tax purposes in the UK) rather than from WPP (a company resident for tax purposes in Ireland). The Dividend Access Plan is primarily designed to ensure that share owners may continue to receive UK dividends, meaning in particular that under the Dividend Access Plan, no Irish tax is required to be withheld from the payment of dividends to share owners. The tax consequences of receiving dividends under the Dividend Access Plan or directly from WPP are described in Item 10E.

 

Share owners who hold more than 100,000 ordinary shares and who wish to receive their dividend from a United Kingdom source must make an election and should contact Computershare Investor Services (Computershare) for the relevant forms. Share owners who held 100,000 or fewer WPP ordinary shares on the date of admission of the Company’s shares to the London Stock Exchange, or (if later) on the first dividend record date after they became share owners in the Company, will be automatically deemed to have elected to receive a United Kingdom-sourced dividend. All elections remain in force indefinitely unless revoked. Unless share owners have made, or are deemed to have made, an election under the Dividend Access Plan, their dividends will be paid from an Irish source and be taxed accordingly.

 

In 2009 WPP DAS Limited issued one dividend access share to Computershare, which acts as trustee pursuant to a dividend access trust that has been constituted pursuant to a trust deed. The trust deed provides that:

 

  (a)   the dividend access trust will hold any dividends paid (not just declared) on the dividend access share in trust for share owners who have elected (or are deemed to have elected) to receive dividends pursuant to this arrangement; and

 

  (b)   each registered share owner on a dividend record date who has made a valid election (or is deemed to have made a valid election) under the Dividend Access Plan will, assuming WPP DAS Limited has sufficient distributable reserves as at the time of the distribution to the trustee, be entitled to receive from the trustee an amount equal to the dividend it would have received from WPP, to the extent that the trustee has actually received an amount by way of dividend from WPP DAS Limited.

 

To ensure compliance with UK trust law rules, the period during which the dividend access trust may continue is restricted. However, the dividend access trust under current law is able to continue for 80 years.

 

61


Table of Contents

Share owners will not have any interest in the dividend access share and will not have any rights against WPP DAS Limited as the issuer of the dividend access share. The only assets held in trust for the benefit of share owners will be dividends paid to the trustee in respect of the dividend access share.

 

Shortfall in dividend payment

 

To the extent that dividends paid to the dividend access trust are insufficient to fund an amount equal to the dividend paid on the relevant ordinary shares, any dividend on the dividend access share received by the dividend access trust will be allocated pro rata to the relevant share owners and WPP will pay the balance of the dividend due to those share owners by way of a dividend on the ordinary shares. Any such dividend paid on ordinary shares will have an Irish source and will generally be subject to Irish dividend withholding tax at such rate as may be applicable under Irish law or the exemptions from Irish dividend withholding tax contained in Irish law or any applicable double tax treaty. In such circumstances, there will be no grossing up by WPP nor will WPP DAS Limited or WPP compensate share owners for any adverse consequences including any Irish dividend withholding tax.

 

Termination

 

WPP and WPP DAS Limited reserve the right to suspend or terminate the Dividend Access Plan arrangements at any time, in which case, any dividends will be paid directly to all share owners (including share owners who have made or are deemed to have made) an election to participate in the Dividend Access Plan.

 

ADSs

 

In accordance with the provisions of the Deposit Agreement by and among WPP, Citibank, N.A., as Depositary, and the holders and beneficial owners of WPP’s ADSs, the Depositary has made an election on behalf of all holders of ADSs to receive dividends from WPP DAS Limited under the Dividend Access Plan. If a holder of ADSs does not wish to receive dividends from WPP DAS Limited under the Dividend Access Plan, the holder must withdraw his or her ordinary shares from the ADS program prior to the dividend record date set by the Depositary and request delivery of the ordinary shares. This will enable the holder to receive dividends from WPP (if necessary, by making an election to that effect).

 

WPP DAS Limited 2011 financial statements are presented on page F-45.

 

Scrip Dividend

 

Following share owner approval at the 2011 Company’s General Meeting, the Board has put in place a Scrip Dividend Scheme which enables share owners to elect to receive new fully paid ordinary shares in the Company instead of cash dividends, this scheme commenced with the second interim dividend for 2010.

 

The Scrip Dividend Scheme does not extend to ADR holders and any ADR holder wishing to receive New Shares instead of cash dividends would first need to withdraw from the Company’s ADR programme prior to the dividend record date set by the ADR depositary and request delivery of WPP Shares.

 

The operation of the Scrip Dividend Scheme is always subject to the Directors’ decision to make an offer of New Shares by way of scrip dividend alternative in respect of any particular dividend. Should the directors decide not to offer New Shares in respect of any dividend, cash will be paid instead.

 

The Scrip Dividend Scheme is governed by, and its terms and conditions are to be construed in accordance with, English law.

 

B. Significant Changes

 

None.

 

62


Table of Contents
ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

 

A. Offer and Listing Details

 

Share price history

 

The Company’s ordinary shares have been traded on The London Stock Exchange since 1971.

 

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the reported high and low middle-market quotations for the Company’s ordinary shares on The London Stock Exchange, based on its Daily Official List.

 

       £ per Ordinary Share  
           High              Low      

2007

     7.88         5.77   

2008

     6.48         3.10   

2009

     6.15         3.53   

2010

     

First Quarter

     6.83         5.73   

Second Quarter

     7.40         6.08   

Third Quarter

     7.30         6.15   

Fourth Quarter

     7.95         6.97   

2011

     

First Quarter

     8.47         7.38   

Second Quarter

     7.90         7.21   

Third Quarter

     7.86         5.79   

October

     6.88         5.78   

November

     6.74         6.17   

December

     6.76         6.38   

Fourth Quarter

     6.88         5.78   

2012

     

January

     7.58         6.69   

February

     8.17         7.61   

March

     8.80         7.99   

First Quarter

     8.80         6.69   

 

63


Table of Contents

The ordinary shares have traded in the United States since 29 December 1987 in the form of ADSs, which are evidenced by ADRs or held in book entry form. The Depositary for the ADSs is Citibank, N.A. in New York. The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the reported high and low sales prices of the ADSs as reported by NASDAQ.

 

       US dollars per ADS  
           High              Low      

2007

     77.93         59.47   

2008

     63.19         23.28   

2009

     49.99         24.54   

2010

     

First Quarter

     51.55         44.30   

Second Quarter

     57.03         44.48   

Third Quarter

     57.07         46.97   

Fourth Quarter

     61.97         55.23   

2011

     

First Quarter

     68.78         58.74   

Second Quarter

     65.29         58.95   

Third Quarter

     62.87         45.40   

October

     55.38         45.04   

November

     54.17         47.32   

December

     52.52         49.01   

Fourth Quarter

     55.38         45.04   

2012

     

January

     59.04         52.14   

February

     64.64         59.92   

March

     70.03         62.60   

First Quarter

     70.03         52.14   

 

The Depositary held 48,578,623 ordinary shares as at 31 December 2011, approximately 3.84% of the outstanding ordinary shares, represented by 9,715,724 outstanding ADSs.

 

B. Plan of Distribution

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Markets

 

See the discussion under “Share price history” in Item 9A.

 

D. Selling Shareholders

 

Not applicable.

 

E. Dilution

 

Not applicable.

 

F. Expenses of the Issue

 

Not applicable.

 

64


Table of Contents

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

 

A. Share Capital

 

Not applicable.

 

B. Memorandum and Articles of Association

 

WPP is a public limited company incorporated under the name “WPP plc” in Jersey with registered number 101749.

 

The following summarises certain provisions of our memorandum and articles of association and applicable Jersey law. This summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Jersey Companies Law and our memorandum and articles of association. A copy of our memorandum and articles of association in the form adopted by Special Resolution on 30 September 2008 and amended by Special Resolution on 2 June 2011 is filed as an exhibit to this Form 20-F.

 

Objects and Purposes

 

Under the Jersey Companies Law, the capacity of a Jersey company is not limited by anything contained in its memorandum or articles of association. Accordingly, the memorandum of association of a Jersey company does not contain an objects clause.

 

Rights attaching to WPP ordinary shares

 

Voting rights of share owners – subject to disenfranchisement in the event of: (A) non-payment of any call or other sum due and payable in respect of any ordinary share; or (B) any non-compliance with any statutory notice requiring disclosure of the beneficial ownership of any ordinary shares and subject to any special rights or restrictions as to voting for the time being attached to any ordinary shares (as to which there are none at present), on a show of hands every qualifying person (i.e. share owner, proxy or authorised corporate representative) present has one vote and on a poll every share owner present in person or by proxy has one vote for every ordinary share of which he or she is a holder, except that any proxy who has been appointed by the Depositary shall have such number of votes as equals the number of ordinary shares in relation to which such proxy has been appointed. In the case of joint holders, the vote of the person whose name stands first in the register of members and who tenders a vote is accepted to the exclusion of any votes tendered by any other joint holders.

 

Return of capital – the liquidator may, with the sanction of a special resolution of WPP and any other sanction required by the Statutes: (A) divide among the WPP share owners in specie the whole or any part of the assets of WPP; or (B) vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees on such trusts for the benefit of share owners as the liquidator shall think fit, but no share owner shall be compelled to accept any assets upon which there is any liability. The “Statutes” means the Jersey Companies Law and every other statute, statutory instrument, regulation or order, for the time being in force, concerning companies registered under the Jersey Companies Law, including the Electronic Communication (Jersey) Law 2000 and the Companies (Uncertificated Securities) (Jersey) Order 1999.

 

Capitalisation of reserves

 

The board of directors may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP: (A) resolve to capitalise any sum standing to the credit of any reserve account of WPP (including share premium account and capital redemption reserve) or any sum standing to the credit of profit and loss account not required for the payment of any preferential dividend (whether or not it is available for distribution); and (B) appropriate that sum as capital to the share owners in proportion to the nominal amount of the ordinary shares held by them respectively and apply that sum on their behalf in paying up in full any unissued ordinary shares or debentures of WPP of a nominal amount equal to that sum and allot the ordinary shares or debentures credited as fully paid to those share

 

65


Table of Contents

owners, or as they may direct, in those proportions or in paying up the whole or part of any amounts that are unpaid in respect of any issued ordinary shares held by them respectively, or otherwise deal with such sum as directed by the resolution, provided that the share premium account and the capital redemption reserve and any sum not available for distribution in accordance with the Statutes may only be applied in paying up unissued ordinary shares to be allotted credited as fully paid up.

 

Transfer of ordinary shares

 

Subject to any restrictions in the articles of association, a share owner may transfer all or any of his ordinary shares in any manner that is permitted by the Statutes and is from time to time approved by the board of directors. WPP shall register the transfer of any ordinary shares held in uncertificated form by means of a relevant system in accordance with the Statutes. The board of directors may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any transfer of an uncertificated share where permitted by articles of association and the Statutes.

 

A share owner may transfer all or any of his certificated ordinary shares by an instrument of transfer in any usual form, or in such other form as the board of directors may approve. The instrument of transfer shall be signed by or on behalf of the transferor and, except in the case of a fully paid share, by or on behalf of the transferee. The board of directors may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any transfer of any certificated ordinary share that is not fully paid up (but not so as to prevent dealings in ordinary shares admitted to official listing by the United Kingdom Listing Authority (UKLA) from taking place on an open and proper basis) or on which WPP has a lien. The board of directors may also refuse to register any instrument of transfer of a certificated ordinary share unless it is lodged at the registered office, or such other place as the board of directors may decide, for registration, accompanied by the share certificate for the ordinary shares to be transferred and such other evidence as the board of directors may reasonably require to prove title of the intending transferor or his right to transfer the ordinary shares and it is in respect of only one class of WPP shares. If the board of directors refuses to register a transfer of a certificated ordinary share it shall, as soon as practicable and in any event within two months after the date on which the instrument of transfer was lodged or the operator-instruction was received, give to the transferee notice of the refusal. The board of directors must provide the transferee with such further information about the reasons for the refusal as the transferee may reasonably request. Unless otherwise agreed by the board of directors in any particular case, the maximum number of persons who may be entered on the register as joint holders of an ordinary share is four.

 

Changes in capital

 

Subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may by special resolution:

 

   

increase its share capital;

 

   

consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into ordinary shares of a larger amount;

 

   

sub-divide all or part of its share capital into ordinary shares of a smaller amount;

 

   

cancel any ordinary shares that have not, at the date of the special resolution, been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its authorised share capital by the amount of the ordinary shares so cancelled; or

 

   

alter its share capital in any other manner permitted by the Jersey Companies Law.

 

Subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may by special resolution:

 

   

purchase ordinary shares, including any redeemable ordinary shares; and

 

   

reduce its share capital and any capital redemption reserve or share premium account.

 

66


Table of Contents

Authority to allot securities and disapplication of pre-emption rights

 

WPP may from time to time pass an ordinary resolution authorising the board of directors to exercise all the powers of WPP to allot relevant securities up to the nominal amount specified in the resolution. The authority shall expire on the day specified in the resolution, not being more than five years after the date on which the resolution is passed.

 

On the passing of a special resolution, the board of directors shall have power to allot equity securities for cash but that power shall be limited: (A) to the allotment of equity securities in connection with a rights issue; and (B) to the allotment (other than in connection with a rights issue) of equity securities having a nominal amount not exceeding in aggregate the sum specified in the special resolution (i.e. the articles of association do not contain any pre-emption rights).

 

Variation of rights

 

Whenever the share capital of WPP is divided into different classes of ordinary shares (which it is not as at the date of this document), all or any of the rights for the time being attached to any class of ordinary shares in issue may, subject to the Statutes, be varied, either in such manner as those rights may provide or with the consent in writing of the holders of two-thirds in nominal value of the issued ordinary shares of that class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of those ordinary shares. At any separate general meeting, the necessary quorum is two persons holding or representing by proxy at least one-third in nominal amount of the issued ordinary shares of the class in question (but at any adjourned meeting, one person holding ordinary shares of the class or his proxy is a quorum).

 

Disclosure of interests in ordinary shares

 

WPP may give a disclosure notice to any person whom it believes is either:

 

   

interested in the ordinary shares; or

 

   

has been so interested at any time during the three years on which the disclosure notice is issued.

 

The disclosure notice may require the person:

 

   

to confirm that fact or (as the case may be) to state whether or not it is the case; and

 

   

if he holds, or has during that time held, any such interest, to give such further information as may be required.

 

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where either:

 

   

his interest is a present interest and another interest in the ordinary shares subsists; or

 

   

another interest in the ordinary shares subsisted during that three year period at a time when his interest subsisted, to give, so far as lies within his knowledge, such particulars with respect to that other interest as may be required by the notice including:

 

   

the identity of persons interested in the ordinary shares in question; and

 

   

whether persons interested in the same ordinary shares are or were parties to either an agreement to acquire interests in a particular company, or an agreement or arrangement relating to the exercise of any rights conferred by the holding of the ordinary shares.

 

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where his interest is a past interest, to give (so far as lies within his knowledge) particulars of the identity of the person who held that interest immediately upon his ceasing to hold it.

 

67


Table of Contents

Failure to provide the information within 14 days after the notice has been given means that the holder of the relevant ordinary shares shall not be entitled to vote either personally or by proxy at a shareholders’ meeting or to exercise any other right confirmed by membership in relation to shareholder meetings for so long as the default continues (and, if those ordinary shares represent at least 0.25 percent of the issued ordinary shares of the class, the holder shall not be entitled to receive any payment by way of dividend or to transfer any rights in the ordinary shares).

 

Register of members

 

The register of members of WPP must be kept and maintained in Jersey.

 

Uncertificated ordinary shares – general powers

 

Subject to the Jersey Companies Law and the Uncertificated Securities Order (as defined in the articles of association), the board of directors may permit any class of ordinary shares to be held in uncertificated form and to be transferred by means of a relevant system and may revoke such permission. In relation to any uncertificated ordinary share, WPP may utilise the relevant system in which it is held to the fullest extent available from time to time in the exercise of any of its powers or functions under the Statutes or the articles of association or otherwise in effecting any actions. Any provision in the articles of association in relation to uncertificated ordinary shares that is inconsistent with any applicable statutory provision shall not apply. WPP may, by notice to the holder of an uncertificated share, require the holder to change the form of that ordinary share to certificated form within such period as may be specified in the notice. For the purpose of effecting any action by WPP, the board of directors may determine that holdings of the same share owner in uncertificated form and in certificated form shall be treated as separate holdings but ordinary shares of a class held by a person in uncertificated form shall not be treated as a separate class from ordinary shares of that class held by that person in certificated form.

 

Directors

 

The WPP directors (other than alternate directors) shall not, unless otherwise determined by an ordinary resolution of WPP, be fewer than six in number.

 

A director need not be a share owner.

 

There is no age limit for directors.

 

At each Annual General Meeting every director shall retire from office. A retiring director shall be eligible for re-election and a director who is re-elected will be treated as continuing in office without a break.

 

The directors shall be paid fees not exceeding in aggregate £2,000,000 per annum (or such larger sum as WPP may, by ordinary resolution, determine) as the board of directors may decide to be divided among them. Such fee shall be divided among them in such proportion and manner as they may agree or, failing agreement, equally.

 

The board of directors may grant special remuneration to any director who performs any special or extra services to, or at the request of, WPP. Special remuneration may be payable to a director in addition to his ordinary remuneration (if any) as a director.

 

The directors shall also be paid out of the funds of WPP all expenses properly incurred by them in and about the discharge of their duties, including their expenses of travelling to and from the meetings of the board of directors, committee meetings and general meetings.

 

The board of directors may exercise all the powers of WPP to pay, provide or procure the grant of pensions or other retirement or superannuation benefits and death, disability or other benefits, allowances or gratuities to any person who is or has been at any time a director or in the employment or service of WPP or of any company that

 

68


Table of Contents

is or was a subsidiary of or associated with WPP or of the predecessors in business of WPP or any subsidiary or associated company or the relatives or dependants of any such person. For that purpose, the board of directors may procure the establishment and maintenance of, or participate in, or contribute to any non-contributory or contributory pension or superannuation fund, scheme or arrangement or pay any insurance premiums.

 

Subject to any applicable statutory provisions and to declaring his interests in accordance with the articles of association, a director may enter into or be interested in any transaction or arrangement with WPP, either with regard to his tenure of any office or position in the management, administration or conduct of the business of WPP, or as vendor, purchaser or otherwise. A director may hold and be remunerated in respect of any other office or place of profit with WPP (other than the office of auditor of WPP) in conjunction with his office as a director and he (or his firm) may also act in a professional capacity for WPP (except as auditor) and may be remunerated for it.

 

A director who, to his knowledge, is in any way, whether directly or indirectly, interested in a transaction or arrangement or a proposed transaction or arrangement with WPP or any of its subsidiaries, or if any situation exists in which a director has or can have a direct or indirect interest that conflicts with or may conflict with the interests of WPP, shall disclose to WPP the nature and extent of the interest or situation in accordance with the articles of association.

 

Board meetings and committee meetings shall not take place in the United Kingdom and no director may participate in any meeting if he is physically present in the United Kingdom at any time during the meeting. Any decision reached or resolution passed by the directors at any meeting that is held in the United Kingdom or any meeting in respect of which any director participating in the meeting is physically present in the United Kingdom during the meeting shall be invalid and of no effect. The place of the board meeting shall be deemed to be at the place at which the chairman of the meeting is physically present.

 

A director shall not vote or be counted in the quorum at a meeting in respect of any resolution concerning his own appointment (including fixing and varying its terms), or the termination of his own appointment, as the holder of any office or place of profit with WPP or any other company in which WPP is interested but, where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying its terms), or the termination of the appointment, of two or more directors to offices or places of profit with WPP or any company in which WPP is interested, those proposals may be divided and considered in relation to each director separately, and in such case each of the directors concerned (if not otherwise debarred from voting under the articles of association) shall be entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum in respect of each resolution except that concerning his own appointment or the termination of his own appointment.

 

A director shall not vote (or be counted in the quorum at a meeting) in respect of any transaction or arrangement or other proposal in which he has an interest that (together with any interest of a connected person) is to his knowledge a direct or indirect interest and as may reasonably be required as likely to give rise to a conflict. Notwithstanding the above, a director shall be entitled to vote (and be counted in the quorum) on: (A) any transaction or arrangement in which he is interested by virtue of an interest in ordinary shares, debentures or other securities of WPP or otherwise in or through WPP; (B) the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of, or for the benefit of, WPP or any of its subsidiaries; or a debt or obligation of WPP or any of its subsidiaries for which he himself has assumed responsibility under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security; (C) (subject to the Statutes) indemnification (including loans made in connection with it) by WPP in relation to the performance of his duties on behalf of WPP or any of its subsidiaries; (D) any issue or offer of ordinary shares, debentures or other securities of WPP or any of its subsidiaries in respect of which he is or may be entitled to participate in his capacity as holder of any such securities or as an underwriter or sub-underwriter; (E) any transaction or arrangement concerning another company in which he and any connected person do not to his knowledge hold, directly or indirectly as shareholders, or through their direct or indirect holdings of financial instruments (within the meaning of Chapter 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules) voting rights representing one percent or

 

69


Table of Contents

more of any class of ordinary shares in the capital of such company; (F) any arrangement for the benefit of employees of WPP or any of its subsidiaries that does not accord to him any privilege or benefit not generally accorded to the employees to whom the arrangement relates; and (G) the purchase or maintenance of insurance for the benefit of the directors or for the benefit of persons including the directors. “Disclosure and Transparency Rules” means the rules and regulations made by the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority under Part VI of the UK Financial Services and Markets Act of 2000, as amended, and contained in the UK Listing Authority’s publication of the same name.

 

WPP shall not make a payment for loss of office to a director unless the payment has been approved by an ordinary resolution of WPP.

 

General meetings

 

The board of directors shall convene, and WPP shall hold, an Annual General Meeting in accordance with the Statutes. Other general meetings shall be held whenever the board of directors thinks fit or on the requisition of WPP share owners in accordance with the Statutes or the articles of association.

 

An Annual General Meeting shall be called by not less than 21 days’ written notice and any other general meeting shall be called by not less than 14 clear days’ written notice.

 

The requisite quorum for general meetings of WPP shall be two qualifying persons, entitled to vote on the business to be transacted at the meeting.

 

Borrowing powers

 

The board of directors may exercise all the powers of WPP to borrow money and to mortgage or charge all or any part of its undertaking, property and assets (both present and future) and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligations of WPP or of any third party. The board of directors shall restrict the borrowings of WPP and exercise all voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by WPP in relation to its subsidiaries (if any) so as to secure (as regards subsidiaries only so far as by such exercise it can secure) that the aggregate principal amount outstanding at any time in respect of all borrowings by the WPP Group (exclusive of any borrowings that are owed by one WPP Group company to another WPP Group company) after deducting the amount of cash deposited will not, without the previous sanction of WPP in general meeting, exceed an amount equal to 2.5 times the adjusted capital and reserves (as defined in the articles of association) or any higher limit fixed by ordinary resolution of WPP that is applicable at the relevant time. “WPP Group” means WPP and its subsidiaries, subsidiary undertakings and associated undertakings.

 

To date, no resolution of the type referred to in this paragraph has been passed.

 

Dividends

 

Declaration of dividends – subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, WPP may, by ordinary resolution, declare a dividend to be paid to the share owners, according to their respective rights and interests in the profits, and may fix the time for payment of such dividend, but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the board of directors.

 

Fixed and interim dividends – subject to the provisions of the Jersey Companies Law, the board of directors may pay such interim dividends as appear to the board of directors to be justified by the financial position of WPP and may also pay any dividend payable at a fixed rate at intervals settled by the board of directors whenever the financial position of WPP, in the opinion of the board of directors, justifies its payment. If the board of directors acts in good faith, none of the directors shall incur any liability to the share owners conferring preferred rights for any loss such share owners may suffer in consequence of the lawful payment of an interim dividend on any ordinary shares having non-preferred or deferred rights.

 

70


Table of Contents

Calculation and currency of dividends – except insofar as the rights attaching to, or the terms of issue of, any shares otherwise provide: (A) all dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up on the ordinary shares in respect of which the dividend is paid, but no amount paid up on an ordinary share in advance of calls shall be treated as paid up on the ordinary share; (B) all dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up on the ordinary shares during any portion or portions of the period in respect of which the dividend is paid; (C) any amount paid by WPP by way of dividend will be deemed to include any amount that WPP may be compelled by law to withhold or deduct; and (D) dividends may be declared or paid in any currency. The board of directors may agree with any share owner that dividends that may at any time or from time to time be declared or become due on his ordinary shares in one currency shall be paid or satisfied in another, and may agree the basis of conversion to be applied and how and when the amount to be paid in the other currency shall be calculated and paid and for WPP or any other person to bear any costs involved.

 

Dividends not to bear interest – no dividend or other moneys payable by WPP on or in respect of any ordinary share shall bear interest as against WPP unless otherwise provided by the rights attached to the ordinary share.

 

Calls or debts or amounts required by law may be deducted from dividends – the board of directors may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable to any person (either alone or jointly with another) on or in respect of an ordinary share all such sums as may be due from him (either alone or jointly with another) to WPP on account of calls or otherwise in relation to ordinary shares.

 

Dividends in specie – with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP and on the recommendation of the board of directors, payment of any dividend may be satisfied wholly or in part by the distribution of specific assets and in particular of paid up ordinary shares or debentures of any other company.

 

Scrip dividends – the board of directors may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of WPP, offer any share owners the right to elect to receive further ordinary shares (whether or not of that class) credited as fully paid, by way of scrip dividend instead of cash in respect of all (or some part) of any dividend specified by the ordinary resolution.

 

Unclaimed dividends – any dividend unclaimed for a period of 12 years after having become due for payment shall be forfeited and cease to remain owing by WPP.

 

Forfeiture of ordinary shares

 

If the whole or any part of any call or installment remains unpaid on any ordinary share after the due date for payment, the board of directors may serve a written notice on the share owner requiring him to pay so much of the call or installment as remains unpaid, together with any accrued interest.

 

The written notice shall state a further day, being not less than 14 clear days from the date of the notice, on or before which, and the place where, payment is to be made and shall state that, in the event of non-payment on or before the day and at the place appointed, the ordinary share in respect of which the call was made or installment is payable will be liable to be forfeited.

 

If the requirements of a notice are not complied with, any ordinary share in respect of which it was given may (before the payment required by the notice is made) be forfeited by a resolution of the board of directors. The forfeiture shall include all dividends declared and other moneys payable in respect of the forfeited ordinary share and not actually paid before the forfeiture.

 

Every ordinary share that is forfeited or surrendered shall become the property of WPP and (subject to the Statutes) may be sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of, upon such terms and in such manner as the board of directors shall decide either to the person who was before the forfeiture the share owner or to any other person and whether with or without all or any part of the amount previously paid up on the ordinary share being credited as so paid up.

 

71


Table of Contents

Website communication with share owners

 

The articles of association enable WPP to use its website as a means of sending or supplying documents or information to share owners. Before communicating with a share owner by means of its website, WPP must have asked the share owner, individually, to agree (generally or specifically) that WPP may send or supply documents or information to him by means of a website. A member shall be deemed to have agreed that WPP may send or supply a document or information by means of a website if no response to the request is received within 28 days. When communicating with share owners by means of website communications, WPP will notify the share owners (by post or other permitted means) of the presence of a document or information on the website.

 

Directors’ indemnity, insurance and defence

 

As far as the legislation allows, WPP may:

 

(i) indemnify any director (or of an associated body corporate) against any liability;

 

(ii) indemnify a director of a company that is a trustee of an occupational pension scheme for employees (or former employees) of WPP (or of an associated body corporate) against liability incurred in connection with WPP’s activities as trustee of the scheme;

 

(iii) purchase and maintain insurance against any liability for any director referred to in paragraph (i) or (ii) above; and

 

(iv) provide any director referred to in paragraph (i) or (ii) above with funds (whether by loan or otherwise) to meet expenditure incurred or to be incurred by him in defending any criminal, regulatory or civil proceedings or in connection with an application for relief (or to enable any such director to avoid incurring such expenditure).

 

C. Material Contracts

 

The following is a summary of each contract (not being a contract entered into in the ordinary course of business) that has been entered into by any member of the WPP Group: (a) within the two years immediately preceding the date of this Form 20-F which are, or may be, material to the WPP Group; or (b) at any time which contain obligations or entitlements which are, or may be, material to the WPP Group as at the date of this Form 20-F:

 

(i) on 3 August 1998, WPP 2005 Limited entered into an agreement with Asatsu pursuant to which WPP 2005 Limited subscribed for approximately 23% (at that time) of the share capital of Asatsu for approximately £139 million and Asatsu subscribed for 31,295,646 ordinary shares in WPP 2005 Limited representing approximately 4% (at that time) of the issued share capital of WPP 2005 Limited. Each party agreed not to transfer any shares held by them in the other for a period of five years and thereafter only to transfer such shares following a procedure set out in the agreement. Each party is further entitled to nominate a non-executive director to the board of the other subject to retaining its shareholding in the other. Due to the disparity of the percentage shareholdings of WPP 2005 Limited in Asatsu and of Asatsu in WPP 2005 Limited, an agreement was also entered into on 3 August 1998 imposing, inter alia , limitations, in certain circumstances, on the voting rights in respect of the shares held by WPP 2005 Limited in Asatsu;

 

(ii) on 23 June 2004, WPP Finance (UK) issued US$650,000,000 of 5.875% notes due 2014 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture both dated as at 23 June 2004 among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP 2005 Limited, as guarantor and Citibank N.A., as Trustee, as supplemented by the First Supplemental Indenture dated as at 23 June 2004 among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP 2005 Limited, as Guarantor and Citibank N.A., as Trustee. The Notes were fully and unconditionally guaranteed by WPP 2008 Limited pursuant to the Second Supplemental Indenture dated 27 June 2006 and by WPP Young & Rubicam US Holdings (a subsidiary of WPP) pursuant to the Third Supplemental Indenture dated 19 December 2006. The Notes were fully and unconditionally guaranteed by WPP and WPP Air 1 Limited (a subsidiary of WPP) pursuant to the Fourth Supplemental Indenture dated 7 October 2008 and the Fifth Supplemental Indenture dated 30 April

 

72


Table of Contents

2009. The Indenture contains events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). It also contains a restriction on the Issuer or any of the guarantors referred to above consolidating or merging with any other person and conveying, transferring or leasing all or substantially all of their properties and assets to any person except where the entity resulting from such consolidation or merger or to whom such properties and assets are transferred becomes a primary obligor of the Notes and gives certain certificates and indemnities. The covenants of the Indenture also contain a negative pledge and a limitation on the sale and leaseback of any assets by the guarantors referred to above and their principal subsidiaries. The Indenture allows for defeasance of these covenants subject to certain conditions. The Indenture also contains a joint and several indemnity from the Issuer and the guarantors referred to above in favour of the Trustee. On 2 December 2011, holders exchanged US$281,369,000 of the foregoing notes for $312,387,000 principal amount of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 issued by WPP Finance 2010 and guaranteed by WPP plc, WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited. The outstanding principal of the 5.875% notes due 2014 is therefore now US$368,631,000;

 

(iii) on 5 December 2006, WPP 2008 Limited issued EUR 600,000,000 4.375% guaranteed bonds due 2013. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 5 December 2006 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The administration of payments to bondholders is provided for in a Paying Agency Agreement dated 5 December 2006 between WPP 2008 Limited, Citibank, N.A., London Branch and others. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and the events of default provisions in the terms and conditions contain a cross-default provision. The Trust Deed also contains an indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds;

 

(iv) on 4 April 2007, WPP 2008 Limited issued £400,000,000 6.0% guaranteed bonds due 2017. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 4 April 2007 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deed also contains an indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds;

 

(v) On 6 November 2007, WPP Finance S.A. issued EUR 500,000,000 5.25% guaranteed bonds due 2015 and £200,000,000 6.375% guaranteed bonds due 2020. Both tranches of bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and WPP 2008 Limited and were constituted respectively by two Trust Deeds dated 6 November 2007 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantors and WPP Finance S.A. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deeds also contain indemnities by WPP Finance S.A. in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds;

 

(vi) On 12 May 2008, WPP 2008 Limited issued EUR 750,000,000 6.625% guaranteed bonds due 2016. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2005 Limited and were constituted by a Trust Deed dated 12 May 2008 between Citicorp Trustee Company Limited, the guarantor and WPP 2008 Limited. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a redemption provision at the option of the bondholders on a Change of Control, a negative pledge provision and events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). The Trust Deed also contains an

 

73


Table of Contents

indemnity by WPP 2008 Limited in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited. Pursuant to a supplemental trust deed dated 14 November 2008, WPP, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited acceded as additional guarantors to the bonds;

 

(vii) effective 19 November 2008, WPP entered into a deposit agreement with Citibank, N.A., as Depositary, and the holders and beneficial owners of ADSs that sets out the terms on which the Depositary has agreed to act as depositary with respect to the WPP ADSs issued in exchange for WPP 2008 Limited ADSs following effectiveness of the Scheme. The deposit agreement contains, amongst other things, customary provisions pertaining to the form of ADR certificates, the deposit and withdrawal of ordinary shares, distributions to holders of ADSs, voting of ordinary shares underlying ADSs, obligations of the Depositary and WPP, charges of the Depositary, and compliance with applicable law;

 

(viii) On 19 May 2009, WPP plc issued £450,000,000 of 5.75% guaranteed convertible bonds due 2014. The bonds are guaranteed by WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited and were constituted by a trust deed dated May 19, 2009. The bonds are listed on the London Stock Exchange and the terms and conditions contain a conversion provision allowing bondholders to convert their bonds into ordinary shares of WPP plc within a specified period. The bonds contain a conversion option upon a Change of Control, a negative pledge and events of default provisions (including a cross default provision). The trust deed contains an indemnity in favour of Citicorp Trustee Company Limited;

 

(ix) On 10 June 2009, WPP Finance (UK) issued US$600,000,000 of 8% guaranteed senior notes due 2014 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture both dated as at 10 June 2009 among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP plc, WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee. The Indenture contains events of default provisions (including a cross-default provision). It also contains a restriction on the Issuer or any of the Guarantors referred to above consolidating or merging with any other person and conveying, transferring or leasing all or substantially all of their properties and assets to any person except where the entity resulting from such consolidation or merger or to whom such properties and assets are transferred becomes a primary obligor of the notes and gives certain certificates and indemnities. The covenants of the Indenture also contain a negative pledge and a limitation on the sale and leaseback of any assets by the Guarantors referred to above and their principal subsidiaries. The Indenture allows for defeasance of these covenants subject to certain conditions. The holders of the notes have the right to require the Issuer to repurchase the notes at a price equal to 101% of the principal amount of the notes in the event that there is a Change of Control of WPP plc and the notes lose their investment grade rating. The Indenture also contains a joint and several indemnity from the Issuer and the Guarantors referred to above in favour of the Trustee;

 

(x) On 2 November 2011, WPP Finance 2010 issued US$500,000,000 of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021. In December 2011 WPP Finance 2010 issued an additional $312,387,000 of 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 in exchange for $281,369,000 of outstanding 5.875% Senior Notes due 2014 of WPP Finance (UK). In total, WPP Finance 2010 issued US$812,387,000 of the 4.75% guaranteed senior notes due November 2021 pursuant to the Indenture and the First Supplemental Indenture, both dated as at 2 November 2011, among WPP Finance 2010 as Issuer, WPP plc, WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee. Aside from the coupon and repayment date, the terms and conditions of the notes are the same as those for the $600,000,000 8% notes due September 2014 described above;

 

(xi) On 30 November 2011, WPP CP Finance PLC, WPP Finance Co. Limited and WPP Group Canada Finance, Inc., as borrowers, entered into an agreement for a five year multi-currency revolving credit facility (with a US Dollar swingline option) of US$1,050,000,000 and £375,000,000 with a syndicate of banks and Citibank International plc as facility agent. The facility is guaranteed by WPP plc, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP CP Finance PLC. The

 

74


Table of Contents

facility is available for drawing by way of multi-currency cash advances on a revolving basis, with an option to draw US Dollar swingline advances up to a sub-limit of US$825,000,000. The initial margin over LIBOR for the facility is 0.85%. It will be 0.55% per annum if WPP’s rating by Standard and Poor’s and Moody’s Investor Service is A-/A3 or higher, 0.65% if the ratings are BBB+/Baa1, 0.75% if the ratings are BBB/Baa2, 0.95% if the ratings are BBB-/Baa3 and 1.25% if the ratings are BB+/Ba1 or lower. The commitment fee payable on undrawn commitments is equal to 35% of the then applicable margin and a utilisation fee is payable at the rate of 0.20% on the outstanding drawings under the facility if the outstandings exceed 33% of the facility but are less than 66% and at the rate of 0.40% if the outstandings exceed 66%. The interest rate for swingline advances is the higher of the US prime commercial lending rate and 0.50% per annum above the federal funds rate.

 

D. Exchange Controls

 

There are currently no Jersey foreign exchange control restrictions on remittances of dividends on the ordinary shares or on the conduct of the Registrant’s operations.

 

E. Taxation

 

The taxation discussion set forth below is intended only as a descriptive summary and does not purport to be a complete technical analysis or listing of all potential tax effects relevant to a decision to purchase, hold or in any way transfer ordinary shares or ADSs. Each investor should seek advice based on their individual particular circumstances from an independent tax adviser.

 

The following summary of the Republic of Ireland, Jersey (UK in relation to dividend distributions) and the United States tax consequences is not exhaustive of all possible tax considerations and should not be considered legal or tax advice. In addition, this summary does not represent a detailed description of the tax consequences applicable to persons subject to special treatment under the Republic of Ireland, Jersey and the United States tax laws. Prospective purchasers of ADSs are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax consequences of their ownership of ADSs and the ordinary shares represented thereby by consulting their own tax advisors. In addition, this summary only addresses holders that hold ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets, and it does not address the taxation of a United States shareholder (either corporate or individual) where that shareholder controls, or is deemed to control, 10% or more of the voting stock of the Company.

 

WPP continues to operate the Dividend Access Plan which allows share owners who have elected (or, by virtue of holding 100,000 or fewer shares, are deemed to have elected) to participate in the plan to receive cash dividends from a UK source without being subject to any Irish or UK withholding taxes. Following share owner approval at the Company’s Annual General Meeting, the Board has put in place a Scrip Dividend Scheme which enables share owners to elect to receive new fully paid ordinary shares in WPP instead of cash dividends, this scheme commenced with the second interim dividend for 2010.

 

The Scrip Dividend Scheme Circular and the rules of the Dividend Access Plan are available to view on WPP’s website www.wpp.com. This Annual Report on Form 20-F does not incorporate by reference information on the Company’s website.

 

Republic of Ireland, United Kingdom, Jersey and the United States taxation

 

General

 

The paragraphs set out below summarise the Irish tax treatment for share owners (or holders of ADSs) of holding or disposing of ordinary shares (or ADSs). They are based on current Irish legislation and an understanding of current Republic of Ireland Revenue Commissioners’ practice as at the date of this document.

 

Tax on chargeable gains

 

Liability for Irish tax on chargeable (taxable) gains will depend on the individual circumstances of share owners.

 

75


Table of Contents

Disposal of ordinary shares

 

Share owners who are not resident or, in the case of individuals, ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland will not be liable for Irish tax on chargeable gains realised on a subsequent disposal of their ordinary shares unless in the case of non-corporate shareholders such ordinary shares are used, held or acquired for the purposes of a trade, profession or vocation carried on in the Republic of Ireland through a branch or agency. Such share owners may be subject to foreign taxation on any gain under local law.

 

A WPP share owner who is an individual and who is temporarily a non-resident of the Republic of Ireland at the time of the disposal may, under anti-avoidance legislation, still be liable to Irish taxation on any chargeable gain realised (subject to the availability of exemptions or reliefs).

 

A disposal or deemed disposal of shares by a share owner who is resident or ordinarily resident in the Republic of Ireland may, depending on individual circumstances (including the availability of exemptions and allowable losses), give rise to a chargeable gain or allowable loss for the purposes of Irish capital gains tax. The current rate of capital gains tax in the Republic of Ireland is 25%.

 

The share register of WPP is held in Jersey and, accordingly, individual share owners who are resident, or ordinarily resident in the Republic of Ireland, but not domiciled in the Republic of Ireland, will be liable to Irish capital gains tax only to the extent that the proceeds of a disposal of shares are remitted or deemed to be remitted to the Republic of Ireland.

 

Irish resident corporate share owners will be liable to Irish capital gains tax irrespective of whether the proceeds of the disposal of the Shares are remitted or deemed to be remitted to the Republic of Ireland.

 

Dividend withholding tax

 

Dividends received from WPP plc

 

Unless a share owner makes, or is deemed to have made, an election to receive dividends from WPP DAS Limited, a company incorporated in the UK, via the Dividend Access Plan, any dividends received will be received from WPP.

 

Dividends paid by WPP will generally be subject to Irish dividend withholding tax (DWT) at the standard rate of income tax (currently 20%) unless the share owner is within one of the categories of exempt shareholders referred to below. Where DWT applies, WPP will be responsible for withholding DWT at source. For DWT purposes, a dividend includes any distribution made by WPP to share owners, including cash dividends, non-cash dividends and additional shares taken in lieu of a cash dividend.

 

Where a share owner opts to take additional fully paid new shares instead of a cash dividend under the Scrip Dividend Scheme, the share owner will be treated as if he had received a distribution of an amount equal to the cash dividend which would have been received if he had not elected to take the new shares. In such circumstances, WPP, when issuing the new shares to each share owner (other than a share owner exempted from DWT and who has complied in advance with the relevant procedural requirements, referred to below), will issue a reduced number of shares equal in value to the net amount of the distribution after deducting DWT tax (which currently applies at the rate of 20%.). WPP will then pay to the Irish Revenue an amount of DWT equal to the amount of DWT which would have been payable had he or she elected to take cash instead of new shares.

 

DWT is not payable where an exemption applies provided that WPP has received all necessary documentation required by the relevant legislation from a WPP Share Owner prior to payment of the dividend.

 

76


Table of Contents

Certain categories of Irish resident share owners are entitled to an exemption from DWT, including in general (but not limited to) Irish resident companies, qualifying employee share ownership trusts, charities and pension funds. Except in very limited circumstances, distributions by WPP to an Irish-resident share owner who is an individual are not exempt from DWT.

 

Certain non-Irish resident share owners (both individual and corporate) are also entitled to an exemption from DWT. In particular, a non-Irish resident share owner is not subject to DWT on dividends received from WPP if the WPP Share Owner is:

 

   

an individual share owner who by virtue of the laws of the relevant country is resident for tax purposes in either a Member State of the European Union (apart from the Republic of Ireland) or in a country with which the Republic of Ireland has a double tax treaty (including the United States), and the individual is neither resident nor ordinarily resident in the Republic of Ireland; or

 

   

a corporate share owner that is not resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland and which is ultimately controlled, directly or indirectly, by persons who by virtue of the laws of the relevant country are resident in either a member state of the European Union (apart from the Republic of Ireland) or in a country with which the Republic of Ireland has a double tax treaty (including the United States); or

 

   

a corporate share owner that is not resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland nor ultimately controlled by persons so resident and which is resident for tax purposes in either a member state of the European Union (apart from the Republic of Ireland) or a country with which the Republic of Ireland has a double tax treaty (including the United States); or

 

   

a corporate share owner that is not resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland and whose principal class of shares (or those of its 75% parent) is substantially and regularly traded on a recognised stock exchange in (i) the Republic of Ireland; (ii) a member state of the European Union (apart from the Republic of Ireland); (iii) a country with which the Republic of Ireland has a double tax treaty (including the United States); or (iv) an exchange approved by the Irish Minister for Finance; or

 

   

a corporate share owner that is not resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland and is wholly owned, directly or indirectly, by two or more companies the principal class of shares of each of which is substantially and regularly traded on a recognised stock exchange in (i) the Republic of Ireland; (ii) a member state of the European Union (apart from the Republic of Ireland); (iii) a country with which the Republic of Ireland has a double tax treaty (including the United States); or (iv) an exchange approved by the Irish Minister for Finance, and provided that, in all cases noted above, the share owner has made the appropriate declaration to WPP prior to payment of the dividend.

 

Taxation of dividends

 

Non-Irish resident share owners are, unless entitled to exemption from DWT, liable to Irish income tax on dividends received from WPP. However, the DWT deducted by WPP discharges such liability to Irish income tax. Where a non-resident share owner is entitled to exemption from DWT, then no Irish income tax arises and, where DWT has been deducted by WPP, a claim may be made for a refund of the DWT.

 

An Irish resident or ordinarily resident share owner, who elects to participate in the Scrip Dividend Scheme will be subject to Irish income tax on the gross cash value (before deduction of applicable DWT) of the distribution to which the share owner is entitled at their marginal rate and, in certain circumstances PRSI (pay related social insurance) and/or the universal social charge. Irish resident individual share owners are generally entitled to credit for DWT deducted against their income tax liability and to have refunded to them any amount by which DWT exceeds such income tax liability.

 

An Irish resident corporate share owner will generally be exempt from Irish tax in respect of new shares received as a result of participating in the Scrip Dividend Scheme. If an Irish resident corporate share owner is a close company for tax purposes, however, it may, in certain circumstances, be liable to a 20% investment income surcharge in respect of dividends received from WPP.

 

77


Table of Contents

Non-Irish resident share owners are, unless entitled to exemption from DWT, liable to Irish income tax on distributions (which would include new shares received as a result of participating in a scrip dividend scheme) received from WPP. However, DWT deducted by the Company discharges such liability to Irish income tax. Where a non-resident share owner is entitled to exemption from DWT, then no Irish income tax arises and, where DWT has been deducted by WPP, a claim may be made for a refund of the DWT.

 

Non-Irish resident share owners, whether individuals or corporate share owners, may be subject to foreign taxation on dividends received under the local law of the jurisdiction of their residence.

 

Stamp duty

 

No Irish stamp duty or capital duty will arise on the issue or transfer for cash of ordinary shares provided such transactions do not relate to Irish stocks or securities of an Irish registered company.

 

United Kingdom taxation

 

Cash Dividends

 

Cash dividends received from WPP plc or from WPP DAS Limited via the Dividend Access Plan, by individual share owners resident in the UK will generally be subject to UK income tax on the gross amount of any dividends paid by WPP before deduction of DWT (if any) with a tax credit equal to one-ninth of the dividend received; tax credits are not repayable to UK holders with no tax liability. Individuals whose income is within the lower or basic tax rate bands are liable to tax at 10% on the dividend income and the tax credit will satisfy their income tax liability on UK dividends. For higher tax rate payers the rate of tax on dividend income for dividends received on or after 6 April 2010 is either 32.5% or 42.5% for individuals with income of £150,000 or more, with relief available for the tax credit referred to above. The gross amount of the cash dividend will be regarded as the top slice of the WPP share owner’s income and will be subject to UK income tax as set out above. Share owners within the charge to UK corporation tax will not generally be subject to UK corporation tax on receipt of a cash dividend from the Company or, in the case of the Dividend Access Plan, from WPP DAS Limited.

 

Dividends paid by WPP plc will generally be subject to DWT at the standard rate of income tax (currently 20%) unless the share owner is within one of the categories of exempt share holders as provided in Irish law or by virtue of a relevant tax treaty. UK resident WPP share owners may be able to apply for an exemption from withholding taxes under Irish domestic law or the UK-Ireland double tax treaty. DWT is not payable where an exemption applies provided that WPP plc has received all necessary documentation required by the relevant legislation from a WPP share owner prior to the payment of the dividend. Share owners are advised to consult their professional advisors on this point. Where a non-Irish resident share owner is entitled to exemption from DWT but DWT has to be deducted from the dividend by WPP, a claim may be made for a refund of the DWT to the Irish tax authorities. Her Majesty’s Revenue & Customs will generally give credit (such credit being limited to the UK-Ireland double tax treaty rate) for any Irish DWT withheld from the payment of a dividend (if any) and not recoverable from the Irish tax authorities against the UK income tax payable in respect of the gross amount of the dividend. If a share owner makes, or is deemed to have made, an election to receive dividends via the Dividend Access Plan, such share owner will receive dividends directly from WPP DAS Limited (unless there is a shortfall in the Dividend Access Trust, in which case some or all of the dividend will be received from WPP). WPP DAS Limited is not required to withhold at source any amount in respect of UK tax from dividend payments it makes under the Dividend Access Plan regardless of who the recipient of the payment is. The Dividend Access Plan is described further in Item 8.

 

Scrip Dividend Scheme

 

In the absence of any Irish dividend withholding tax (DWT) being levied on issues of new shares under the Scrip Dividend Scheme, individual share owners should not be liable to UK income tax on receipt of the new shares and share owners within the charge to UK corporation tax should not be subject to UK corporation tax on receipt of the new shares. For the purposes of UK taxation of chargeable gains, the new shares will be treated as being

 

78


Table of Contents

the same asset as the existing holding of shares (the Original Holding) in respect of which the Scrip Dividend Mandate Form was made and as having been acquired when the Original Holding was acquired (together, the New Holding). The New Holding will have the same base cost for chargeable gains purposes as the Original Holding. On a subsequent disposal of any of the new shares, share owners may (depending upon their individual circumstances, which may include the availability of exemptions or reliefs) be subject to UK capital gains tax or UK corporation tax on chargeable gains.

 

If however DWT is levied on the issue of new shares under the Scrip Dividend Scheme, share owners will receive new shares net of any such withholding (the net amount). The difference between the net amount and the amount of new shares that would have been received by a share owner under the Scrip Dividend Scheme in the absence of that DWT is likely to be treated in the same way as a cash dividend paid by the Company and certain share owners may, subject to the completion of certain procedural formalities, be entitled to reclaim some or all of the DWT or be entitled to relief at source in respect thereof.

 

Jersey taxation

 

General

 

The following summary of the anticipated tax treatment in Jersey of WPP and share owners and holders of ADSs (other than residents of Jersey) is based on Jersey taxation law as it is understood to apply at the date of this document. It does not constitute legal or tax advice. Share owners or holders of ADSs should consult their professional advisers on the implications of acquiring, buying, holding, selling or otherwise disposing of ordinary shares or ADSs under the laws of the jurisdictions in which they may be liable to taxation. Share owners or holders of ADSs should be aware that tax rules and practice and their interpretation may change.

 

Income Tax

 

Holders of ordinary shares

 

WPP will be entitled to pay dividends to holders of ordinary shares without any withholding or deduction for or on account of Jersey tax. Holders of ordinary shares (other than residents of Jersey) will not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of such ordinary shares.

 

WPP will be entitled to issue new shares under the Scrip Dividend Scheme without any withholding or deduction for or on account of Jersey income tax. Share owners (other than residents of Jersey) will not be subject to tax in Jersey in respect of the receipt, holding, sale or other disposition of new shares.

 

Holders of ADSs

 

Under Jersey law and the WPP Articles, WPP is only permitted to pay a dividend to a person who is recorded in its register of members as the holder of an ordinary share. The US Depositary will be recorded in WPP’s register of members as the holder of each ordinary share represented by an ADS. Accordingly, WPP will pay all dividends in respect of each ordinary share represented by an ADS to the US Depositary (as the registered holder of each such ordinary share) rather than to the holder of the ADS.

 

The US Depositary will not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of the ordinary shares held by it. In addition, holders of the ADSs (other than residents of Jersey) should not be subject to any tax in Jersey in respect of the holding, sale or other disposition of such ADSs.

 

Stamp duty

 

No stamp duty is payable in Jersey on the issue or inter vivos transfer of ordinary shares or ADSs.

 

79


Table of Contents

Upon the death of a share owner, a grant of probate or letters of administration will be required to transfer the ordinary shares of the deceased person, except that where the deceased person was domiciled outside of Jersey at the time of death, WPP may (at its discretion) dispense with this requirement where the value of the deceased’s movable estate in Jersey does not exceed £10,000.

 

Upon the death of a share owner, Jersey stamp duty will be payable on the registration in Jersey of a grant of probate or letters of administration, which will be required in order to transfer or otherwise deal with:

 

(a) (where the deceased person was domiciled in Jersey at the time of death) the deceased person’s personal estate wherever situated (including any ordinary shares) if the net value of such personal estate exceeds £10,000; or

 

(b) (where the deceased person was domiciled outside of Jersey at the time of death) the deceased person’s personal estate situated in Jersey (including any ordinary shares) if the net value of such personal estate exceeds £10,000.

 

The rate of stamp duty payable is:

 

(i) (where the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate does not exceed £100,000) 0.50 percent of the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate; or

 

(ii) (where the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate exceeds £100,000) £500 for the first £100,000 plus 0.75 percent of the net value of the deceased person’s relevant personal estate which exceeds £100,000.

 

In addition, application and other fees may be payable.

 

US federal income taxation

 

Introduction

 

TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH TREASURY DEPARTMENT CIRCULAR 230, HOLDERS OF WPP SHARES OR WPP ADSs ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT: (A) ANY DISCUSSION OF US FEDERAL TAX ISSUES IS NOT INTENDED OR WRITTEN TO BE RELIED UPON, AND CANNOT BE RELIED UPON, BY HOLDERS OF ORDINARY SHARES OR ADSs FOR THE PURPOSE OF AVOIDING PENALTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED ON HOLDERS OF ORDINARY SHARES OR ADSs UNDER THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986; AND (B) HOLDERS OF ORDINARY SHARES OR ADSs SHOULD SEEK ADVICE BASED ON THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES FROM AN INDEPENDENT TAX ADVISER.

 

The following is a summary of certain material US federal income tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs by a US Holder (as defined below). The discussion does not cover all aspects of US federal income taxation that may be relevant to, or the actual tax effect that any of the matters described herein will have on, the acquisition, ownership or disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs by particular investors and does not address state, local, foreign or other tax laws. In particular, this summary does not address all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to investors subject to special treatment under the US federal income tax laws (such as financial institutions, insurance companies, investors liable for the alternative minimum tax, investors that own (directly or indirectly) 10% or more of the voting stock of WPP, investors that hold ordinary shares or ADSs through a permanent establishment, individual retirement accounts and other tax-deferred accounts, tax-exempt organisations, dealers in securities or currencies, traders that elect to mark to market, investors that will hold the ordinary shares or ADSs as part of straddles, hedging transactions or conversion transactions for US federal income tax purposes or investors whose functional currency is not the US dollar).

 

This summary deals only with US Holders (as defined below) who elect or are deemed to elect (because they have not withdrawn their ordinary shares from the ADS programme prior to the dividend record date set by the US Depositary) to participate in the Dividend Access Plan.

 

80


Table of Contents

As used herein, the term “US Holder” means a beneficial owner of ordinary shares or ADSs that is, for US federal income tax purposes: (i) a citizen or individual resident of the United States; (ii) a corporation, or other entity treated as a corporation for US federal tax purposes, created or organised in or under the laws of the United States or any State thereof; (iii) an estate the income of which is subject to US federal income tax without regard to its source; or (iv) a trust if a court within the United States is able to exercise primary supervision over the administration of the trust and one or more US persons have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or the trust has elected to be treated as a domestic trust for US federal income tax purposes.

 

This discussion does not address any tax consequences applicable to holders of equity interests in a holder of ordinary shares or ADSs. The US federal income tax treatment of a partner in a partnership that holds ordinary shares or ADSs will depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Holders of ordinary shares or ADSs that are partnerships should consult their tax advisers concerning the US federal income tax consequences to their partners of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs.

 

WPP believes that it is not currently, and it does not expect to become, a passive foreign investment company (a “PFIC”) for US federal income tax purposes and this summary assumes the correctness of this position. WPP’s possible status as a PFIC must be determined annually and therefore may be subject to change. If WPP were to be a PFIC in any year, materially adverse consequences could result for US Holders.

 

The summary is based on the US federal income tax laws, including the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986, its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations thereunder, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect, and all of which are subject to change, perhaps with retroactive effect.

 

The summary of US federal income tax consequences set out below is for general information only. US Holders are urged to consult their own tax advisers as to the particular tax consequences to them of owning the ordinary shares or ADSs, including the applicability and effect of state, local, foreign and other tax laws and possible changes in tax law.

 

Classification of the ADSs

 

US Holders of ADSs should be treated for US federal income tax purposes as owners of the ordinary shares represented by the ADSs. Accordingly, the US federal income tax consequences discussed below apply equally to US Holders of ADSs.

 

Tax on Dividends

 

Distributions paid by WPP or WPP DAS Limited out of current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes) will generally be taxable to a US Holder as foreign source dividend income, and will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction generally allowed to US corporations.

 

A US Holder of ADSs generally will include dividends in gross income in the taxable year in which such holder actually receives the dividend. US Holders that surrender their ADSs in exchange for the underlying ordinary shares should consult their tax advisers regarding the proper timing for including dividends in gross income.

 

Distributions in excess of current and accumulated earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs and thereafter as capital gains. However, WPP does not maintain calculations of its earnings and profits in accordance with US federal income tax accounting principles. US Holders should, therefore, assume that any distribution with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs will constitute ordinary dividend income. US Holders should consult their tax advisers with respect to the appropriate US federal income tax treatment of any distribution received from WPP or WPP DAS Limited.

 

81


Table of Contents

For taxable years that begin before 2013, dividends paid by WPP or WPP DAS Limited will be taxable to a non-corporate US Holder as “qualified dividend income” at the special reduced rate normally applicable to capital gains, provided WPP qualifies for the benefits of the income tax treaty between the United States and the Republic of Ireland (the “Treaty”), which WPP believes to be the case. However, there can be no assurance that WPP will qualify for the benefits of the Treaty going forward. A US Holder will be eligible for this reduced rate only if it has held the ordinary shares or ADSs for more than 60 days during the 121-day period beginning 60 days before the ex-dividend date.

 

Dividends paid in pounds sterling will be included in income in a US dollar amount calculated by reference to the exchange rate in effect on the day the dividends are received by the US Holder in the case of ordinary shares or the US Depositary (in case of ADSs), regardless of whether the pounds sterling are converted into US dollars at that time. If dividends received in pounds sterling are converted into US dollars on the day they are received, the US Holder generally will not be required to recognise a foreign currency gain or loss in respect of the dividend income. Generally, a gain or loss realised on a subsequent conversion of pounds sterling to US dollars or other disposition will be treated as US source ordinary income or loss.

 

Sale or other disposition

 

Upon a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs (other than an exchange of ADSs for ordinary shares), a US Holder generally will recognise a capital gain or loss equal to the difference, if any, between the amount realised on the sale or other disposition and the US Holder’s adjusted tax basis in the ordinary shares or ADSs. This capital gain or loss will generally be US source and will be a long-term capital gain or loss if the US Holder’s holding period in the ordinary shares or ADSs exceeds one year. However, regardless of a US Holder’s actual holding period, any loss may be a long-term capital loss to the extent the US Holder receives a dividend that qualifies for the reduced rate described above under the section entitled “Tax on Dividends”, above, and exceeds 10% of the US Holder’s tax basis in its ordinary shares or ADSs. Deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.

 

A US Holder’s tax basis in an ordinary share or an ADS will generally be its US dollar cost. The US dollar cost of an ordinary share or an ADS purchased with foreign currency will generally be the US dollar value of the purchase price on the date of purchase or, in the case of ordinary shares or ADSs traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable Treasury Regulations, that are purchased by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects), on the settlement date for the purchase. Such an election by an accrual basis US Holder must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be revoked without the consent of the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”).

 

The surrender of ADSs in exchange for ordinary shares (or vice versa) should not be a taxable event for US federal income tax purposes and US Holders should not recognise any gain or loss upon such a surrender. A US Holder’s tax basis in the withdrawn ordinary shares will be the same as the US Holder’s tax basis in the ADSs surrendered, and the holding period of the ordinary shares will include the holding period of the ADSs.

 

The amount realised on a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs for an amount in foreign currency will be the US dollar value of this amount on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, the US Holder will recognise US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, in the case of ordinary shares or ADSs traded on an established securities market that are sold by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects), the amount realised will be determined using the exchange rate in effect on the settlement date for the sale, and no exchange gain or loss will be recognised at that time.

 

Foreign currency received on the sale or other disposition of an ordinary share or an ADS will have a tax basis equal to its US dollar value on the settlement date. Any gain or loss recognised on a sale or other disposition of a foreign currency (including upon exchange for US dollars) will be US source ordinary income or loss.

 

82


Table of Contents

Backup withholding and information reporting

 

Payments of dividends and other proceeds with respect to ordinary shares or ADSs by a US paying agent or other US intermediary will be reported to the IRS and to the US Holder unless the holder is a corporation or otherwise establishes a basis for exemption. Backup withholding may apply to reportable payments if the US Holder fails to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number or certification of exempt status or fails to report all interest and dividends required to be shown on its US federal income tax returns. Any backup withholding tax will be refunded or allowed as a credit against the US Holder’s US federal income tax liability if the US Holder timely gives the appropriate information to the IRS. US Holders should consult their tax advisers as to their qualification for exemption from backup withholding and the procedure for obtaining an exemption.

 

F. Dividends and Paying Agents

 

Not applicable.

 

G. Statements by Experts

 

Not applicable.

 

H. Documents on Display

 

The Company is subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange Act. In accordance with these requirements, the Company files reports and other information with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission. You may read and copy any materials filed with the SEC at the Public Reference Room at 100 F Street N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains a web site at http://www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy statements and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

 

I. Subsidiary Information

 

Not applicable.

 

83


Table of Contents

ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

 

The Company’s principal market risks are changes in interest rates and currency exchange rates. Following evaluation of these positions, the Company selectively enters into derivative financial instruments to manage its risk exposure. The fair value of derivatives held by the Company at 31 December 2011 is estimated to be a net asset of £45.5 million (£121.0 million net asset with respect to interest rate swaps and £75.5 million net liability for currency derivatives). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date.

 

Interest rate and foreign currency risks

 

The Company’s interest rate and foreign currency risks management policies are discussed in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Interest rate derivatives and currency derivatives utilised by the Group are discussed in note 25 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Analysis of fixed and floating rate debt by currency, including the effect of interest rate and cross currency swaps, as at the balance sheet date is provided in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Sensitivity analyses that address the effect of interest rate and currency risks on the Group’s financial instruments is provided in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

Credit risk

 

Our credit risk exposure and management policies are discussed in note 24 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

 

A. Debt Securities

 

Not applicable.

 

B. Warrants and Rights

 

Not applicable.

 

C. Other Securities

 

Not applicable.

 

84


Table of Contents

D. American Depositary Shares

 

Fees and Charges

 

Holders of ADSs and persons depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for cancellation are currently required to pay the following service fees to the Depositary:

 

Service

  

Rate

  

By Whom Paid

(1)    Issuance of ADSs upon deposit of ordinary shares (excluding issuances as a result of distributions described in paragraph (4) below).

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) issued.    Person depositing ordinary shares or person receiving ADSs.

(2)    Delivery of deposited securities against surrender of ADSs.

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) surrendered.    Person surrendering ADSs for purpose of withdrawal of deposited securities or person to whom deposited securities are delivered.

(3)    Distribution of cash dividends or other cash distributions ( i.e ., sale of rights and other entitlements).

   Up to U.S.$2.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) held, unless prohibited by the exchange upon which the ADSs are listed.    Person to whom distribution is made.

(4)    Distribution of ADSs pursuant to (i) stock dividends or other free stock distributions, or (ii) exercise of rights to purchase additional ADSs.

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) issued, unless prohibited by the exchange upon which the ADSs are listed.    Person to whom distribution is made.

(5)    Distribution of securities other than ADSs or rights to purchase additional ADSs ( i.e. , spin-off shares).

   Up to U.S.$5.00 per unit of 100 securities (or fraction thereof) distributed.    Person to whom distribution is made.

(6)    Depositary Services.

   Up to U.S.$2.00 per 100 ADSs (or fraction thereof) held as of the last day of each calendar year, except to the extent of any cash dividend fee(s) charged under paragraph (3) above during the applicable calendar year.    Person of record on last day of any calendar year.

(7)    Transfer of ADRs.

   U.S.$1.50 per certificate presented for transfer.    Person presenting certificate for transfer.

 

Holders of ADSs and persons depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for cancellation and for the purpose of withdrawing deposited securities are also responsible for the payment of certain fees and expenses incurred by the Depositary, and certain taxes and governmental charges, such as:

 

  (i)   Taxes (including applicable interest and penalties) and other governmental charges;

 

  (ii)   Such registration fees as may from time to time be in effect for the registration of ordinary shares on the share register and applicable to transfers of ordinary shares or other securities on deposit to or from the name of the Custodian, the Depositary or any nominees upon the making of deposits and withdrawals, respectively;

 

85


Table of Contents
  (iii)   Such cable, telex and facsimile transmission and delivery expenses as are expressly provided in the deposit agreement to be at the expense of the person depositing or withdrawing ordinary shares or holders of ADSs;

 

  (iv)   The expenses and charges incurred by the Depositary in the conversion of foreign currency;

 

  (v)   Such fees and expenses as are incurred by the Depositary in connection with compliance with exchange control regulations and other regulatory requirements applicable to ordinary shares, ordinary shares on deposit, ADSs and ADRs; and

 

  (vi)   The fees and expenses incurred by the Depositary, the Custodian or any nominee in connection with the servicing or delivery of ordinary shares on deposit.

 

WPP has agreed to pay various other charges and expenses of the Depositary. Please note that the fees and charges that holders of ADSs may be required to pay may vary over time and may be changed by WPP and by the Depositary. Holders of ADSs will receive prior notice of such changes.

 

Depositary Payments—Fiscal Year 2011

 

WPP did not receive any payments from Citibank, N.A., the Depositary for its American Depositary Receipt program, in 2011.

 

86


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

 

None.

 

ITEM 14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

 

None.

 

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

Disclosure Controls and Procedures

 

We performed an evaluation under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Group Chief Executive and our Group Finance Director, of the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Exchange Act) as at 31 December 2011. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a control system, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that it will detect or uncover failures within the Company to disclose material information otherwise required to be set forth in the Company’s periodic reports. Following the evaluation described above, our management, including the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective at that time.

 

Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

 

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rule 13a-15(f) of the Exchange Act). Our management, with the participation of our Group Chief Executive and our Group Finance Director, carried out an assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) as at 31 December 2011. The assessment was performed using the criteria for effective internal control reflected in the Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

 

Based on our assessment of the system of internal control, management concludes that as at 31 December 2011 our internal control over financial reporting (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) was effective.

 

The Company’s internal control over financial reporting, (including those applicable to WPP DAS Ltd) as at 31 December 2011, has been audited by Deloitte LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, who also audited the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Their audit report on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting is presented on page 88.

 

87


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of WPP plc

 

We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as at 31 December 2011, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting, including those controls applicable to the WPP DAS Ltd. (“the Trust”) based on our audit.

 

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting, including those applicable to the Trust, as at 31 December 2011, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

 

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as at and for the year ended 31 December 2011 of the Company and financial statements as at and for the year ended 31 December 2011 of the Trust and our reports dated 30 April 2012 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

 

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2012

 

88


Table of Contents

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

 

There has been no change in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act) that occurred during 2011, that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

 

The audit committee consisted of Paul Spencer, Jeffrey Rosen, Colin Day and Sol Trujillo at 31 December 2011. The board of directors has determined that all members of the audit committee are “independent” as that term is defined in the applicable NASDAQ listing standards and rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

WPP does have an audit committee financial expert, Paul Spencer, serving as Chairman of its audit committee. See the biography of Paul Spencer in Item 6A.

 

ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

 

WPP has in place a Code of Business Conduct that constitutes a “code of ethics” as defined in applicable regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission. The Code of Business Conduct (which is regularly reviewed by the Audit Committee and the Board) and was updated in 2011, sets out the principal obligations of all employees. Directors and senior executives throughout the Group are required each year to sign this Code. A copy of the WPP Code of Business Conduct may be obtained free of charge by contacting the Company’s investor relations department in London or New York at the following addresses or telephone numbers:

 

London:

 

Deputy Group finance director

WPP

27 Farm Street

London W1J 5RL England

Tel: +44 (0)20 7408 2204

Fax: +44 (0)20 7493 6819

 

New York:

 

Investor Relations

WPP

100 Park Avenue

 

New York, New York 10017-5516

Tel: (212) 632-2200

Fax: (212) 632-2222

 

89


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

 

     2011    2010
       £m    £m

Audit fees

   19.8    19.3

Tax fees 1

   3.4    3.9

All other fees 2

   5.2    5.3
     28.4    28.5
  1    

Tax fees comprise tax advisory, planning and compliance services.

  2    

Other fees comprise assurance services, including fees for due diligence, transition support fees and review of earn-out payment calculations.

 

Audit Committee Pre-Approval Policies and Procedures

 

The Audit Committee has adopted a pre-approval policy for the engagement of the external auditors in relation to the supply of permissible non-audit services (including taxation), taking into account relevant ethical and regulatory requirements. WPP’s policy regarding non-audit services that may be provided by the Group’s auditors, Deloitte LLP, prohibits certain categories of work in line with relevant guidance on independence, such as ethical standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board and independence rules of the SEC. Other categories of work may be undertaken by Deloitte LLP subject to an approvals process that is designed appropriately for different categories and values of proposed work.

 

ITEM 16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES.

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS.

 

At the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc on 29 June 2010 a special resolution was passed authorising WPP plc to make market purchases of its own shares up to a maximum number of 125,496,212 ordinary shares. This authority expired at the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc on 2 June 2011 and was replaced by a new authority to purchase up to a maximum number of 126,473,546 ordinary shares until the earlier of the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting of WPP plc in 2012 and 1 September 2012.

 

       Total number of shares
purchased
     Average price      Total number of shares purchased as part
of publicly announced plan
     Maximum number of shares that
may yet be purchased under  plan
 

January

     22,432       £ 7.83         22,432         123,039,005   

February

     —           —           —           123,039,005   

March

     7,827,342       £ 8.12         7,827,342         115,211,663   

April

     600,000       £ 7.82         600,000         114,611,663   

May

     20,239       £ 7.65         20,239         114,591,424   

June

     4,074,490       £ 7.43         4,074,490         122,399,056   

July

     —           —           —           122,399,056   

August

     3,600,000       £ 6.15         3,600,000         118,799,056   

September

     6,292,797       £ 6.13         6,292,797         112,506,259   

October

     1,751,320       £ 6.46         1,751,320         110,754,939   

November

     308,668       £ 6.49         308,668         110,446,271   

December

     1,446,855       £ 6.46         1,446,855         108,999,416   

Total

     25,944,143       £ 7.02         25,944,143            

 

90


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

The Company’s ADSs are listed on the NASDAQ Global Select Market. In general, under NASDAQ’s Rule 5615, foreign private issuers such as WPP listed on NASDAQ are permitted to follow home country corporate governance practices instead of certain provisions of NASDAQ’s Rule 5600 Series, which pertain to corporate governance by listed issuers. A foreign private issuer that elects to follow a home country practice instead of any such provisions of the Rule 5600 Series must submit in advance to NASDAQ a written statement from an independent counsel in such issuer’s home country certifying that the issuer’s practices are not prohibited by the home country’s laws. The Company’s independent Jersey counsel has certified to NASDAQ that the Company’s corporate governance practices are not prohibited by the laws of Jersey.

 

The requirements of the Rule 5600 Series and the corporate governance practices that the Company follows in lieu thereof are described below:

 

   

Rule 5620(c) requires that the quorum for any meeting of stockholders must not be less than 33   1 / 3 % of the outstanding shares of a company’s common voting stock. The Company’s Articles of Association provide that the necessary quorum for a general share owner meeting is a minimum of two persons entitled to vote on the business to be transacted, each being a share owner or a proxy for a share owner or a duly authorised representative of a corporate share owner.

 

   

Rule 5635(c) requires that issuers obtain stockholder approval before a stock option or purchase plan is established or materially amended or other equity compensation arrangement is made or materially amended pursuant to which stock may be acquired by officers, directors, employees or consultants of the issuer, subject to certain exceptions. The Company seeks share owner approval for the adoption or amendment of stock plans or stock purchase plans only as required by the Articles of Association of the Company, the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority (the Listing Rules) and the laws of Jersey. Subject to the exceptions permitted in the Listing Rules, this involves seeking share owner approval to any such plan that falls into either of the following categories (as defined in the Listing Rules):

 

  (a)   an employees’ share scheme if the scheme involves or may involve the issue of new shares or the transfer of treasury shares; and

 

  (b)   a long-term incentive scheme in which one or more directors of the Company is eligible to participate and to material amendments of that scheme to the extent required by the scheme’s rules. In this context, it should be noted that the provisions of the rules relating to whether amendments to the scheme rules must be approved by share owners must themselves be drafted to ensure compliance with the Listing Rules.

 

91


Table of Contents

PART III

 

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Not applicable.

 

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The Consolidated Financial Statements of WPP plc at 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009 are included in this report beginning on page F-1.

 

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

 

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  1.1        Memorandum and Articles of Association of WPP plc, as amended 2 June 2011.*
  2.1        Deposit Agreement dated as of 19 November 2008 among WPP plc, Citibank, N.A. as Depositary, and all holders and beneficial owners from time to time of American Depositary Receipts issued thereunder (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 99(A) to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form F-6EF filed on 18 November 2008).
  2.2        Indenture, dated as of 23 June 2004, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP Group plc, as Guarantor, and Citibank, N.A., as Trustee (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.14 to the Registration Statement on Form F-4 filed by the Registrant on 21 September 2004 (File No. 333-119163)).
  2.3        First Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 23 June 2004, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP Group plc, as Guarantor, and Citibank, N.A., as Trustee, pertaining to the issuance of U.S. $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.15 to the Registration Statement on Form F-4 filed by the Registrant on 21 September 2004 (File No. 333-119163)).
  2.4        Second Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 27 June 2006, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP 2005 Limited and WPP Group plc, as Guarantors, and Citibank, N.A., as Trustee, pertaining to the issuance of U.S. $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.11 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2005).
  2.5        Form of 5.875% Notes Due 2014 (included as part of Exhibit 2.2).
  2.6        Form of Guarantee of 5.875% Notes due 2014 (included as part of Exhibit 2.2).
  2.7        Third Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 19 December 2006, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP Group plc and WPP Spangle, as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, pertaining to the issuance of U.S. $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form F-3 filed by the Registrant on 27 March 2009 (File No. 333-158262)).
  2.8        Fourth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 7 October 2008, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited, in their capacities as partners of WPP Air UK, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings (formerly known as WPP Spangle), WPP 2005 Limited and WPP Group plc, as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, pertaining to the issuance of U.S. $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.5 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form F-3 filed by the Registrant on 27 March 2009 (File No. 333-158262)).

 

92


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  2.9        Fifth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 30 April 2009, among WPP Finance (UK), as Issuer, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited, in their capacities as partners of WPP Air UK, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings, WPP 2005 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited (formerly known as WPP Group plc) and WPP plc, as Guarantors, and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, pertaining to the issuance of U.S. $650,000,000 5.875% Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.9 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.10       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 600 million of 4.375% Bonds due 5 December 2013 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.19 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F filed for the year ended 31 December 2006).
  2.11       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, indenture instruments relating to £400 million of 6% Bonds due 4 April 2017 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.20 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F filed for the year ended 31 December 2006).
  2.12       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 500 million of 5.25% bonds due 2015 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.21 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.13       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to £200 million of 6.375% bonds due 2020 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.22 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.14       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to 750 million of 6.25% Guaranteed Bonds due 2016 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.23 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2007).
  2.15       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a U.S. $1,600,000,000 Revolving Credit Facility Agreement dated 23 August 2005 and Amended and Restated on 17 November 2008 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.15 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.16       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a £600,000,000 Revolving Credit Facility Agreement dated 9 July 2008 and Amended and Restated on 17 November 2008 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.16 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.17       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to a £650,000,000 Term Facility Agreement dated 9 July 2008 and Amended and Restated on 17 November 2008 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.17 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.18       Fifth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of 7 October 2008, among WPP plc, WPP Air 1 Limited and WPP Air 3 Limited, in their capacities as partners of WPP Air UK, WPP Group plc, WPP 2005 Limited, Grey Global Group Inc. and American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC, as Trustee, pertaining to Grey’s 5% Contingent Convertible Subordinated Debentures due 2033 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.18 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  2.19       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $600,000,000 of 8% Senior Notes due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.19 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).

 

93


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  2.20       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to £450,000,000 of 5.75% Guaranteed Bonds due 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.20 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).
  2.21       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $30 million of 6.22% promissory notes due July 10, 2012, and $25 million of 6.34% promissory notes due July 10, 2014 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.21 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2009).
  2.22       Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $812.4 million of 4.75% Senior Notes due 2021.*
  4.1        J. Walter Thompson Company, Inc. Retained Benefit Supplemental Employee Retirement Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.9 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2000).
  4.2        Young & Rubicam Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.26 to Young & Rubicam’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-46929)).
  4.3        Amendment No. 2 to Young & Rubicam Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan effective as of 1 January 1999 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.27 to Young & Rubicam’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended 31 December 1998).
  4.4        Young & Rubicam Inc. 1997 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to Young & Rubicam’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-46929)).
  4.5        Amendment to Young & Rubicam Inc. 1997 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.28 to Young & Rubicam’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-46929)).
  4.6        Amendment No. 2 to Young & Rubicam Inc. 1997 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.23 to Young & Rubicam’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended 31 December 1999).
  4.7        Young & Rubicam Inc. Director Stock Option Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.25 to Young & Rubicam’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended 31 December 1999).
  4.8        Young & Rubicam Inc. Executive Income Deferral Program (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.19 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2000).
  4.9        Ogilvy & Mather ERISA Excess Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.12 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.10       Ogilvy & Mather Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description, in connection with a 25% matching contribution (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.13 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.11       Ogilvy & Mather Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description, in connection with a 50% matching contribution (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.14 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.12       Ogilvy & Mather Deferred Compensation Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.15 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.13       Grey Advertising Inc. amended and restated 1994 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.02 to Grey Global Group Inc. Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended 30 September 1996 (File No. 000-07898)).
  4.14       WPP Executive Stock Option Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.18 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).

 

94


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  4.15       WPP plc Performance Share Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.19 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.16       WPP plc Restricted Stock Plan, as amended through 11 April 2011.*
  4.17       WPP 2005 Executive Stock Option Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.21 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.18       WPP Annual Bonus Deferral Programme (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.22 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.19       2004-2006 Long Term Incentive Plan Participant Guide (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.41 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2005).
  4.20       GroupM Executive Savings Plan Summary Plan Description (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.24 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.21       WPP 2008 Executive Stock Option Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.27 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.22       UK Service Agreement, effective from 19 November 2008, between WPP 2005 Limited, Sir Martin Sorrell and WPP plc (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.28 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.23       Service Agreement in the USA, effective 26 November 2010, between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Sir Martin Sorrell (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.23 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2010).
  4.24       Service Agreement in the USA, dated 30 April 2009, between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul W.G. Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.30 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.25       Director’s appointment agreement, dated 21 November 2008, between WPP plc and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.31 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.26       Service Agreement, dated 12 February 2009, between WPP 2005 Limited and Mark Read (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.32 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.27       Director’s appointment agreement, dated 21 November 2008, between WPP plc and Mark Read (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.33 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.28       Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.34 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.29       Amendment dated 19 November 2008 to Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.35 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.30       Stock Purchase Agreement, dated 3 August 1998, among Asatsu Inc., WPP International Holding B.V. and WPP Group plc (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.36 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.31       24/7 Media, Inc. 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1 of 24/7 Media, Inc. filed on June 4, 2009, File No. 333-56085).
  4.32       24/7 Real Media, Inc. 2002 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to a proxy statement filed by 24/7 Real Media, Inc. on August 9, 2002, File No. 000-29768).

 

95


Table of Contents

Exhibit No.

    

Exhibit Title

  4.33       Amendment No. 2 to the Grey Global Group Inc. 2003 Senior Management Incentive Plan, effective as of January 1, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.39 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008)
  4.34       Grey Advertising Inc. Senior Executive Officer Post-Employment Compensation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.40 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.35       Amendment No. 1 to the Grey Advertising Inc. Senior Executive Officer Post-Employment Compensation Plan, effective as of January 1, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.41 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.36       Amendment No. 1 to the J. Walter Thompson Retained Benefit Supplemental Employee Retirement Plan, effective as of January 1, 2009 (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.42 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.37       Taylor Nelson Sofres 2001 Equity Participation Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.43 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.38       Taylor Nelson Sofres plc 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.44 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.39       Taylor Nelson Sofres New Share Plan (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4.45 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2008).
  4.40       Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III, as amended through 12 November 2011.*
  4.41       Second Amendment, dated 22 June 2011, to Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson.*
  8.1        List of subsidiaries.*
  12.1       Certification of Group Chief Executive.*
  12.2       Certification of Group Finance Director.*
  13.1       Certification of Group Chief Executive under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.*
  13.2       Certification of Group Finance Director under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.*
  14.1       Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP plc and subsidiaries).*
  14.2       Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP DAS Limited).*

 

*   Filed herewith.

 

96


Table of Contents

Signatures

 

The Registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

WPP plc

By:

  /s/    Paul W.G. Richardson
 

Paul W. G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

 

30 April 2012

 

97


Table of Contents

Item 18

 

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Financial
Statement
Number


          Page

 
  A.       Financial Statements of WPP plc as at and for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009         
        

(i)  Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-1   
        

(ii)  Accounting policies

     F-2   
        

(iii)  Consolidated income statement for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-8   
        

(iv)  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the years ended 31  December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-9   
        

(v)  Consolidated cash flow statement for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-10   
        

(vi)  Consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 2011 and 2010

     F-11   
        

(vii)   Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-12   
        

(viii)  Notes to the consolidated financial statements

     F-13   
  B.       Financial Statements of WPP DAS Ltd as at and for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009         
        

(i)  Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-45   
        

(ii)  Cash flow statement for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-46   
        

(iii)  Balance sheet at 31 December 2011 and 2010

     F-46   
        

(iv)  Statement of changes in equity for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

     F-46   
        

(v)  Notes to the financial statements

     F-47   


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of WPP plc

 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as at 31 December 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated cash flow statements, and consolidated statement of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2011. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as at 31 December 2011 and 2010, and the results of its operations and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2011, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2011, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated 30 April 2012 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2012

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Our 2011 financial statements

 

Accounting policies

 

The consolidated financial statements of WPP plc and its subsidiaries (the Group) for the year ended 31 December 2011 have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board as they apply to the financial statements of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2011.

 

Basis of preparation

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except for the revaluation of certain financial instruments. The principal accounting policies are set out below.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 30 April 2012.

 

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the results of the Company and all its subsidiary undertakings made up to the same accounting date. All intra-Group balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated in full on consolidation. The results of subsidiary undertakings acquired or disposed of during the period are included or excluded from the consolidated income statement from the effective date of acquisition or disposal.

 

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Intangible assets comprise goodwill, certain acquired separable corporate brand names, acquired customer relationships, acquired proprietary tools and capitalised computer software not integral to a related item of hardware.

Goodwill represents the excess of fair value attributed to investments in businesses or subsidiary undertakings over the fair value of the underlying net assets, including intangible assets, at the date of their acquisition.

Goodwill impairment reviews are undertaken annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate a potential impairment. The carrying value of goodwill is compared to the net present value of future cash flows derived from the underlying assets using a projection period of up to five years for each cash-generating unit. After the projection period a steady growth rate representing an appropriate long-term growth rate for the industry is applied. Any impairment is recognised immediately as an expense and is not subsequently reversed.

Corporate brand names, customer relationships and proprietary tools acquired as part of acquisitions of businesses are capitalised separately from goodwill as intangible assets if their value can be measured reliably on initial recognition and it is probable that the expected future economic benefits that are attributable to the asset will flow to the Group.

Certain corporate brands of the Group are considered to have an indefinite economic life because of the institutional nature of the corporate brand names, their proven ability to maintain market leadership and profitable operations over long periods of time and the Group’s commitment to develop and enhance their value. The carrying value of these intangible assets is reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

Amortisation is provided at rates calculated to write off the cost less estimated residual value of each asset on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life as follows:

 

Acquired intangibles

 

 

Brand names (with finite lives) – 10-20 years.

 

 

Customer related intangibles – 3-10 years.

 

 

Other proprietary tools – 3-10 years.

 

 

Other (including capitalised computer software) – 3-5 years.

 

Contingent consideration

Contingent consideration is accounted for in accordance with IFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations.

Future anticipated payments to vendors in respect of contingent consideration (earnout agreements) are initially recorded at fair value which is the present value of the expected cash outflows of the obligations. The obligations are dependent on the future financial performance of the interests acquired (typically over a four to five year period following the year of acquisition) and assume the operating companies improve profits in line with directors’ estimates. The directors derive their estimates from internal business plans together with financial due diligence performed in connection with the acquisition.

Subsequent adjustments to the fair value are recorded in the consolidated income statement within revaluation of financial instruments. For acquisitions completed prior to 1 January 2010, such adjustments are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet within goodwill.

 

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are shown at cost less accumulated depreciation and any provision for impairment with the exception of freehold land which is not depreciated. The Group assesses the carrying value of its property, plant and equipment to determine if any impairment has occurred. Where this indicates that an asset may be impaired, the Group applies the requirements of IAS 36 Impairment of Assets in assessing the carrying amount of the asset. This process includes comparing its recoverable amount with its carrying value. Depreciation is provided at rates calculated to write off the cost less estimated residual value of each asset on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful life, as follows:

 

 

Freehold buildings – 50 years.

 

 

Leasehold land and buildings – over the term of the lease or life of the asset, if shorter.

 

 

Fixtures, fittings and equipment – 3-10 years.

 

 

Computer equipment – 3-5 years.

 

Interests in associates and joint ventures

An associate is an entity over which the Group has significant influence. In certain circumstances, significant influence may be represented by factors other than ownership and voting rights, such as representation on the Board of Directors.

The Group’s share of the profits less losses of associate undertakings net of tax, interest and non-controlling interests is included in the consolidated income statement and the Group’s share of net assets is shown within interests in associates in the consolidated balance sheet. The Group’s share of the profits less losses and net assets is based on current information produced by the undertakings, adjusted to conform with the accounting policies of the Group.

The Group assesses the carrying value of its associate undertakings to determine if any impairment has occurred. Where this indicates that an investment may be impaired, the Group applies the requirements of IAS 36 in assessing the carrying amount of the investment. This process includes comparing its recoverable amount with its carrying value.

The Group accounts for joint venture investments under the equity method which is consistent with the Group’s treatment of associates.

 

Other investments

Other investments are designated as ‘available for sale’ and are shown at fair value with any movements in fair value taken to equity.

On disposal the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity is included in the profit or loss for the year.

 

Inventory and work in progress

Work in progress is valued at cost, which includes outlays incurred on behalf of clients and an appropriate proportion of directly attributable costs and overheads on incomplete assignments. Provision is made for irrecoverable costs where appropriate. Inventory is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

 

Trade receivables

Trade receivables are stated net of provisions for bad and doubtful debts.

 

Foreign currency and interest rate hedging

The Group’s policy on interest rate and foreign exchange rate management sets out the instruments and methods available to hedge interest and currency risk exposures and the control procedures in place to ensure effectiveness.

The Group uses derivative financial instruments to reduce exposure to foreign exchange risk and interest rate movements. The Group does not hold or issue derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value at the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value at each balance sheet date. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss immediately unless the derivative is designated and effective as a hedging instrument, in which event the timing of the recognition in profit or loss depends on the nature of the hedge relationship.

At the inception of the hedge relationship the entity documents the relationship between the hedging instrument and hedged item, along with its risk management objectives and its strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. Furthermore, at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, the Group documents whether the hedging instrument that is used in a hedging relationship is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged item.

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

Note 25 contains details of the fair values of the derivative instruments used for hedging purposes.

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in profit or loss immediately, together with any changes in the fair value of the hedged item that is attributable to the hedged risk.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow or net investment hedges is deferred in equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in profit or loss. Amounts deferred in equity are recycled in profit or loss in the periods when the hedged item is recognised in profit or loss. However, when the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or a non-financial liability, the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are transferred from equity and included in the initial measurement of the cost of the asset or liability.

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated, or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. At that time, any cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in equity is retained in equity until the forecast transaction occurs. If a hedged transaction is no longer expected to occur, the net cumulative gain or loss recognised in equity is transferred to net profit or loss for the period.

Derivatives embedded in other financial instruments or other host contracts are treated as separate derivatives when their risks and characteristics are not closely related to those of host contracts and the host contracts are not carried at fair value with unrealised gains or losses reported in the consolidated income statement.

 

Liabilities in respect of option agreements

Option agreements that allow the Group’s equity partners to require the Group to purchase a non-controlling interest are treated as derivatives over equity instruments and are recorded in the consolidated balance sheet at fair value and the valuation is remeasured at each period end. Fair value is based on the present value of expected cash outflows and the movement in the fair value is recognised as income or expense within revaluation of financial instruments in the consolidated income statement.

 

Derecognition of financial liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, a financial liability of the Group is only released to the consolidated income statement when the underlying legal obligation is extinguished.

 

Convertible debt

Convertible debt is assessed according to the substance of the contractual arrangements and is classified into liability and equity elements on the basis of the initial fair value of the liability element. The difference between this figure and the cash received is classified as equity.

The consolidated income statement charge for the finance cost is spread evenly over the term of the convertible debt so that at redemption the liability equals the redemption value.

 

Other debt

Other interest-bearing debt is recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

 

Borrowing costs

Finance costs of borrowing are recognised in the consolidated income statement over the term of those borrowings.

 

Revenue recognition

Revenue comprises commission and fees earned in respect of amounts billed. Direct costs include fees paid to external suppliers where they are retained to perform part or all of a specific project for a client and the resulting expenditure is directly attributable to the revenue earned. Revenue is stated exclusive of VAT, sales taxes and trade discounts.

 

Advertising and Media Investment Management

Revenue is typically derived from commissions on media placements and fees for advertising services. Revenue may consist of various arrangements involving commissions, fees, incentive-based revenue or a combination of the three, as agreed upon with each client.

Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. The amount of revenue recognised depends on whether we act as an agent or as a principal in an arrangement with a client. Where we act as an agent, the revenue recorded is the net amount retained when the fee or commission is earned. Although the Group may bear credit risk in respect of these activities, the arrangements with our clients are such that we consider that we are acting as an agent on their behalf. In such cases, costs

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

incurred with external suppliers (such as media suppliers) are excluded from our revenue. Where the Group acts as a principal and contracts directly with suppliers for media payments and production costs, the revenue recorded is the gross amount billed.

Incentive-based revenue typically comprises both quantitative and qualitative elements; on the element related to quantitative targets, revenue is recognised when the quantitative targets have been achieved; on the element related to qualitative targets, revenue is recognised when the incentive is received or receivable.

The Group receives volume rebates from certain suppliers for transactions entered into on behalf of clients that, based on the terms of the relevant contracts and local law, are either remitted to clients or retained by the Group. If amounts are passed on to clients they are recorded as liabilities until settled or, if retained by the Group, are recorded as revenue when earned.

 

Consumer Insight

Revenue recognised in proportion to the level of service performed for market research contracts is based on proportional performance. In assessing contract performance, both input and output criteria are reviewed. Costs incurred are used as an objective input measure of performance. The primary input of all work performed under these arrangements is labour. As a result of the relationship between labour and cost, there is normally a direct relationship between costs incurred and the proportion of the contract performed to date. Costs incurred as a proportion of expected total costs is used as an initial proportional performance measure. This indicative proportional performance measure is subsequently validated against other more subjective criteria (i.e. relevant output measures) such as the percentage of interviews completed, percentage of reports delivered to a client and the achievement of any project milestones stipulated in the contract. In the event of divergence between the objective and more subjective measures, the more subjective measures take precedence since these are output measures.

While most of the studies provided in connection with the Group’s market research contracts are undertaken in response to an individual client’s or group of clients’ specifications, in certain instances a study may be developed as an off-the-shelf product offering sold to a broad client base. For these transactions, revenue is recognised when the product is delivered. Where the terms of transaction provide for licensing the product on a subscription basis, revenue is recognised over the subscription period on a straight-line basis or, if applicable, based on usage.

Substantially all services are provided on a fixed price basis. Pricing may also include a provision for a surcharge where the actual labour hours incurred in completing a project are significantly above the labour hours quoted in the project proposal. In instances where this occurs, the surcharge will be included in the total revenue base on which to measure proportional performance when the actual threshold is reached provided that collectability is reasonably assured.

 

Public Relations & Public Affairs and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications

Revenue is typically derived from retainer fees and services to be performed subject to specific agreement. Revenue is recognised when the service is performed, in accordance with the terms of the contractual arrangement. Revenue is recognised on long-term contracts, if the final outcome can be assessed with reasonable certainty, by including in the consolidated income statement revenue and related costs as contract activity progresses.

 

Taxation

Corporate taxes are payable on taxable profits at current rates. The tax expense represents the sum of the tax currently payable and deferred tax.

The Group is subject to corporate taxes in a number of different jurisdictions and judgement is required in determining the appropriate provision for transactions where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. In such circumstances, the Group recognises liabilities for anticipated taxes based on the best information available and where the anticipated liability is both probable and estimable. Such liabilities are classified as current when the Group expects to settle the liability within 12 months and the remainder as non-current. Any interest and penalties accrued are included in income taxes both in the consolidated income statement and balance sheet. Where the final outcome of such matters differs from the amount recorded, any differences may impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the final determination is made.

The tax laws that apply to the Group’s subsidiaries may be amended by the relevant tax authorities. Such potential amendments are regularly monitored and adjustments are made to the Group’s tax liabilities and deferred tax assets and liabilities where necessary.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary differences unless specifically excepted by IAS 12 Income Taxes. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or other assets and liabilities (other than in a business combination) in a transaction that affects neither the tax profit nor the accounting profit.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and associates, and interests in joint ventures, except where the Group is able to control the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on enacted or substantively enacted legislation. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited directly to equity, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with in equity.

 

Retirement benefit costs

For defined contribution plans, contributions are charged to the consolidated income statement as payable in respect of the accounting period.

For defined benefit plans the amounts charged to operating profit are the current service costs and gains and losses on settlements and curtailments. They are included as part of staff costs. Past service costs are recognised immediately in the consolidated income statement if the benefits have vested. If the benefits have not vested, the costs are recognised over the period until vesting occurs. The interest cost and the expected return on assets are shown within finance costs and finance income respectively. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Where defined benefit plans are funded, the assets of the plan are held separately from those of the Group, in separate trustee-administered funds. Pension plan assets are measured at fair value and liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit method and discounted at a rate equivalent to the current rate of return on a high-quality corporate bond of equivalent currency and term to the plan liabilities. The actuarial valuations are obtained at least triennially and are updated at each balance sheet date.

Recognition of a surplus in a defined benefit plan is limited based on the economic gain the company is expected to benefit from in the future by means of a refund or reduction in future contributions to the plan, in accordance with IAS 19 Employee Benefits.

 

Finance leases

Assets held under finance leases are recognised as assets of the Group at the inception of the lease at the lower of their fair value and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Depreciation on leased assets is charged to the consolidated income statement on the same basis as owned assets. Leasing payments are treated as consisting of capital and interest elements and the interest is charged to the consolidated income statement as it is incurred.

 

Operating leases

Operating lease rentals are charged to the consolidated income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. Any premium or discount on the acquisition of a lease is spread over the life of the lease on a straight-line basis.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Accounting policies (continued)

 

 

Translation of foreign currencies

Foreign currency transactions arising from normal trading activities are recorded at the rates in effect at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the year end are translated at the year-end exchange rate. Foreign currency gains and losses are credited or charged to the consolidated income statement as they arise.

The income statements of overseas subsidiary undertakings are translated into pounds sterling at average exchange rates and the year-end net assets of these companies are translated at year-end exchange rates.

Exchange differences arising from retranslation of the opening net assets and on foreign currency borrowings (to the extent that they hedge the Group’s investment in such operations) are reported in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and translated at the closing rate.

 

Share-based payments

The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments (including share options) to certain employees and accounts for these awards in accordance with IFRS 2 Share-Based Payment. Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value (excluding the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions) at the date of grant. Details regarding the fair value of equity settled share-based transactions are set out in notes 22 and 26.

The fair value determined at the grant date is recognised in the consolidated income statement as an expense on a straight-line basis over the relevant vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of the number of shares that will ultimately vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions.

 

New IFRS accounting pronouncements

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, the following Standards and Interpretations, which have not been applied in these financial statements, were in issue but not yet effective:

 

 

IFRS 7 (amended): Financial Instruments: Disclosures;

 

 

IFRS 9: Financial Instruments;

 

 

IFRS 10: Consolidated Financial Statements;

 

 

IFRS 11: Joint Arrangements;

 

 

IFRS 12: Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities;

 

 

IFRS 13: Fair Value Measurement;

 

 

IAS 1 (amended): Presentation of Financial Statements;

 

 

IAS 12 (amended): Income Taxes;

 

 

IAS 19 (amended): Employee Benefits;

 

 

IAS 27 (revised): Separate Financial Statements;

 

 

IAS 28 (revised): Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures; and

 

 

IAS 32 (amended): Financial Instruments: Presentation.

 

The Group does not consider that these Standards and Interpretations will have a significant impact on the financial statements of the Group except for additional disclosures when the relevant standards come into effect.

In the current year, the following Standards and Interpretations became effective:

 

 

IAS 24 (revised): Related Party Transactions;

 

 

IAS 32 (amended): Classification of Rights Issues;

 

 

IFRIC 14 (amended)/IAS 19 (amended): The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction; and

 

 

IFRIC 19: Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with Equity Instruments.

 

The adoption of these Standards and Interpretations has not led to any changes in the Group’s accounting policies.

 

Critical judgements in applying accounting policies

Management is required to make key decisions and judgements in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The most significant areas where such judgements have been necessary are revenue recognition, goodwill and other intangibles, acquisition reserves, taxation and accounting for pension liabilities. Where judgement has been applied, the key factors taken into consideration are disclosed in the accounting policies and the appropriate note in these financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

Consolidated income statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010, 2009

 

    Notes  

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Revenue

  2     10,021.8        9,331.0        8,684.3   

Direct costs

        (783.3     (770.5     (703.6

Gross profit

        9,238.5        8,560.5        7,980.7   

Operating costs

  3     (8,046.3     (7,587.5     (7,219.0

Operating profit

        1,192.2        973.0        761.7   

Share of results of associates

  4     66.1        55.2        57.0   

Profit before interest and taxation

        1,258.3        1,028.2        818.7   

Finance income

  6     97.3        81.7        150.4   

Finance costs

  6     (297.2     (276.8     (355.4

Revaluation of financial instruments

  6     (50.0     18.2        48.9   

Profit before taxation

        1,008.4        851.3        662.6   

Taxation

  7     (91.9     (190.3     (155.7

Profit for the year

        916.5        661.0        506.9   
                             

Attributable to:

                           

Equity holders of the parent

        840.1        586.0        437.7   

Non-controlling interests

        76.4        75.0        69.2   
          916.5        661.0        506.9   
                             

Earnings per share 1

                           

Basic earnings per ordinary share

  9     67.6p        47.5p        35.9p   

Diluted earnings per ordinary share

  9     64.5p        45.9p        35.3p   

 

Notes

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-44 form an integral part of this consolidated income statement.

1    

The calculations of the Group’s earnings per share are set out in note 9.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010, 2009

 

    

2011

£m

    2010
£m
   

2009

£m

 

Profit for the year

     916.5        661.0        506.9   

Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments

     (256.3     156.3        (155.6

Gain/(loss) on revaluation of available for sale investments

     11.3        (59.8     (13.5

Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension plans

     (72.0     (0.4     (7.2

Deferred tax on defined benefit pension plans

     0.1        0.2        (4.4

Other comprehensive (loss)/income relating to the year

     (316.9     96.3        (180.7

Total comprehensive income relating to the year

     599.6        757.3        326.2   
Attributable to:                         

Equity holders of the parent

     529.5        672.6        270.4   

Non-controlling interests

     70.1        84.7        55.8   
       599.6        757.3        326.2   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-44 form an integral part of this consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Consolidated cash flow statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010, 2009

 

    Notes    

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

    11        665.2        1,361.2        818.8   

Investing activities

                               

Acquisitions and disposals

    11        (469.8     (200.1     (118.4

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

            (216.1     (190.5     (222.9

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

            (37.1     (27.0     (30.4

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

            13.2        7.6        9.2   

Net cash outflow from investing activities

            (709.8     (410.0     (362.5

Financing activities

                               

Share option proceeds

            28.8        42.7        4.1   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

    11        (62.6     (15.1     (26.4

Share repurchases and buy-backs

    11        (182.2     (46.4     (9.5

Net increase/(decrease) in borrowings

    11        301.4        19.8        (426.3

Financing and share issue costs

            (11.9     (3.5     (18.8

Equity dividends paid

            (218.4     (200.4     (189.8

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

            (62.2     (66.7     (63.0

Net cash outflow from financing activities

            (207.1     (269.6     (729.7

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

            (251.7     681.6        (273.4

Translation differences

            (29.9     82.2        (98.7

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

            1,709.8        946.0        1,318.1   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

    11        1,428.2        1,709.8        946.0   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-44 form an integral part of this consolidated cash flow statement.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Consolidated balance sheet

 

At 31 December 2011, 2010

 

     Notes     

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

 

Non-current assets

                         

Intangible assets:

                         

Goodwill

     12         9,430.8        9,106.3   

Other

     12         1,859.9        1,904.5   

Property, plant and equipment

     13         728.3        708.4   

Interests in associates and joint ventures

     14         801.3        792.1   

Other investments

     14         190.8        173.7   

Deferred tax assets

     15         86.0        79.1   

Trade and other receivables

     17         309.1        323.5   
                13,406.2        13,087.6   

Current assets

                         

Inventory and work in progress

     16         333.9        366.0   

Corporate income tax recoverable

              88.5        82.9   

Trade and other receivables

     17         8,919.7        8,843.4   

Cash and short-term deposits

              1,946.6        1,965.2   
                11,288.7        11,257.5   

Current liabilities

                         

Trade and other payables

     18         (11,165.5     (11,703.6

Corporate income tax payable

              (113.4     (115.8

Bank overdrafts and loans

     20         (518.4     (255.4
                (11,797.3     (12,074.8

Net current liabilities

              (508.6     (817.3

Total assets less current liabilities

              12,897.6        12,270.3   

Non-current liabilities

                         

Bonds and bank loans

     20         (3,893.0     (3,598.2

Trade and other payables

     19         (553.1     (388.6

Corporate income tax payable

              (379.5     (481.8

Deferred tax liabilities

     15         (741.4     (750.7

Provision for post-employment benefits

     23         (282.3     (241.5

Provisions for liabilities and charges

     21         (154.0     (161.6
                (6,003.3     (5,622.4

Net assets

              6,894.3        6,647.9   

Equity

                         

Called-up share capital

     26         126.6        126.4   

Share premium account

              105.7        54.5   

Shares to be issued

              2.4        3.1   

Merger reserve

              (5,136.2     (5,136.8

Other reserves

     27         938.9        1,182.8   

Own shares

              (177.6     (144.8

Retained earnings

              10,803.5        10,361.4   

Equity share owners’ funds

              6,663.3        6,446.6   

Non-controlling interests

              231.0        201.3   

Total equity

              6,894.3        6,647.9   

 

Note

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-44 form an integral part of this consolidated balance sheet.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010, 2009

 

    Called-up
share
capital
£m
    Share
premium
account
£m
    Shares
to be
issued
£m
    Merger
reserve
£m
    Other
reserves 1
£m
   

Own

shares
£m

   

Retained

earnings
£m

   

Total
equity
share
owners’

funds

£m

   

Non-
controlling

interests

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Balance at 1 January 2009

    125.5        8.6        8.7        (5,138.8     1,250.5        (189.8     9,697.5        5,762.2        197.6        5,959.8   
Ordinary shares issued     0.1        4.0        (1.7     0.8                      0.3        3.5               3.5   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                                 (142.2                   (142.2     (13.4     (155.6
Net profit for the year                                               437.7        437.7        69.2        506.9   
Dividends paid                                               (189.8     (189.8     (63.0     (252.8
Transfer from goodwill                   (1.5                                 (1.5            (1.5
Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including stock options)                                               54.9        54.9               54.9   
Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts                                        45.3        (45.3                     
Treasury shares additions                                        (9.5            (9.5            (9.5
Actuarial loss on defined benefit plans                                               (7.2     (7.2            (7.2
Deferred tax on defined benefit plans                                               (4.4     (4.4            (4.4
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                                 (13.5                   (13.5            (13.5
Equity component of convertible bonds (net of deferred tax)                                 34.7                      34.7               34.7   
Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments                                 (36.4            5.5        (30.9            (30.9
Acquisition of subsidiaries                                                             (8.7     (8.7

Balance at 31 December 2009

    125.6        12.6        5.5        (5,138.0     1,093.1        (154.0     9,949.2        5,894.0        181.7        6,075.7   
Ordinary shares issued     0.8        41.9        (2.4     1.2                      0.9        42.4               42.4   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                                 146.6                      146.6        9.7        156.3   
Net profit for the year                                               586.0        586.0        75.0        661.0   
Dividends paid                                               (200.4     (200.4     (66.7     (267.1
Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including stock options)                                               70.4        70.4               70.4   
Tax adjustment on share-based payments                                               21.1        21.1               21.1   
Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts                                        9.2        (55.6     (46.4            (46.4
Actuarial loss on defined benefit plans                                               (0.4     (0.4            (0.4
Deferred tax on defined benefit plans                                               0.2        0.2               0.2   
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                                 (59.8                   (59.8            (59.8
Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments                                 2.9               0.9        3.8               3.8   
Acquisition of subsidiaries 2                                               (10.9     (10.9     1.6        (9.3
Balance at 31 December 2010     126.4        54.5        3.1        (5,136.8     1,182.8        (144.8     10,361.4        6,446.6        201.3        6,647.9   
Ordinary shares issued     0.6        30.4        (0.7     0.6                             30.9               30.9   
Share cancellations     (0.7                          0.7               (45.9     (45.9            (45.9
Treasury share additions                                        (29.8            (29.8            (29.8
Treasury share allocations                                        0.8        (0.8                     
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                                 (250.0                   (250.0     (6.3     (256.3
Net profit for the year                                               840.1        840.1        76.4        916.5   
Dividends paid                                               (218.4     (218.4     (62.2     (280.6
Scrip dividend     0.3        20.8                                    (21.1                     
Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including stock options)                                               78.8        78.8               78.8   
Tax adjustment on share-based payments                                               (11.7     (11.7            (11.7
Net movement in own shares held by ESOP Trusts                                        (3.8     (102.7     (106.5            (106.5
Actuarial loss on defined benefit plans                                               (72.0     (72.0            (72.0
Deferred tax on defined benefit plans                                               0.1        0.1               0.1   
Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments                                 11.3                      11.3               11.3   
Recognition/remeasurement of financial instruments                                 (5.9            33.8        27.9               27.9   
Acquisition of subsidiaries 2                                               (38.1     (38.1     21.8        (16.3
Balance at 31 December 2011     126.6        105.7        2.4        (5,136.2     938.9        (177.6     10,803.5        6,663.3        231.0        6,894.3   

 

Notes

The accounting policies on pages F-2 to F-7 and the accompanying notes on pages F-13 to F-44 form an integral part of this consolidated statement of changes in equity.

1    

Other reserves are analysed in note 27.

2    

Acquisition of subsidiaries represents movements in retained earnings and non-controlling interests arising from changes in ownership of existing subsidiaries and recognition of non-controlling interests on new acquisitions.

 

Total comprehensive income relating to the year ended 31 December 2011 was £599.6 million (2010: £757.3 million, 2009: £326.2 million).

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

1. General information

 

WPP plc is a company incorporated in Jersey. The address of the registered office is 22 Grenville Street, St Helier, Jersey, JE4 8PX and the address of the principal executive office is 6 Ely Place, Dublin 2, Ireland. The nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in note 2. These consolidated financial statements are presented in pounds sterling.

 

2. Segment information

 

The Group is a leading worldwide communications services organisation offering national and multinational clients a comprehensive range of communications services.

 

The Group is organised into four reportable segments – Advertising and Media Investment Management; Consumer Insight; Public Relations & Public Affairs; and Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications. This last reportable segment includes WPP Digital and direct, digital, promotional and relationship marketing.

 

IFRS 8 Operating Segments requires operating segments to be identified on the same basis as is used internally for the review of performance and allocation of resources by the Group chief executive. Provided certain quantitative and qualitative criteria are fulfilled, IFRS 8 permits the aggregation of these components into reportable segments for the purposes of disclosure in the Group’s financial statements. In assessing the Group’s reportable segments, the directors have had regard to the similar economic characteristics of certain operating segments, their shared client base, the similar nature of their products or services and their long-term margins, amongst other factors.

 

Operating sectors

Reported contributions were as follows:

 

     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
     Revenue 1      Headline
PBIT 2
     Headline
PBIT
margin
 
    

2011

£m

    

2011

£m

    

2011

%

    

2010

£m

    

2010

£m

    

2010

%

    

2009

£m

    

2009

£m

    

2009

%

 
Advertising and Media Investment Management      4,157.2         667.9         16.1         3,733.3         573.0         15.3         3,420.5         472.8         13.8   
Consumer Insight      2,458.0         258.7         10.5         2,430.2         234.8         9.7         2,297.1         196.9         8.6   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      885.4         142.9         16.1         844.5         133.1         15.8         795.7         122.1         15.3   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      2,521.2         359.5         14.3         2,323.0         287.8         12.4         2,171.0         225.4         10.4   
       10,021.8         1,429.0         14.3         9,331.0         1,228.7         13.2         8,684.3         1,017.2         11.7   

 

Notes

1  

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

2  

A reconciliation from profit before interest and taxation (PBIT) to headline PBIT is provided in note 31. PBIT is reconciled to profit before taxation in the consolidated income statement.

 

Other information    Share-based
payments
     Capital
additions 1
     Depreciation
and
amortisation 2
     Goodwill
impairment &
write-downs
     Share of
results of
associates
    

Interests in

associates and
joint ventures

 
     £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
2011                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      44.5         112.7         94.2                 36.4         549.9   
Consumer Insight      12.7         63.1         49.8                 16.3         101.3   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      3.9         15.4         15.8                 3.2         42.6   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      17.7         62.0         51.7                 10.2         107.5   
       78.8         253.2         211.5                 66.1         801.3   
2010                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      36.8         95.6         94.2         0.3         26.2         487.3   
Consumer Insight      13.7         58.9         49.8                 15.1         122.6   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      3.3         12.9         14.1         2.0         4.1         58.7   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      16.6         50.1         52.2         7.7         9.8         123.5   
       70.4         217.5         210.3         10.0         55.2         792.1   
2009                                                      
Advertising and Media Investment Management      23.1         166.5         99.7         33.3         30.7         445.9   
Consumer Insight      11.5         51.6         53.5                 16.9         114.5   
Public Relations & Public Affairs      4.4         19.2         15.2                 2.7         60.3   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      15.9         43.8         57.4         11.0         6.7         108.6   
       54.9         281.1         225.8         44.3         57.0         729.3   

 

Notes

 

1    

Capital additions include purchases of property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software).

2    

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment and amortisation of other intangible assets.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

2. Segment information (continued)

 

 

     Assets           Liabilities  
Balance sheet    Segment
assets
     Unallocated
corporate
assets 1
     Consolidated
total assets
          Segment
liabilities
   

Unallocated
corporate

liabilities 1

    Consolidated
total
liabilities
 
     £m      £m      £m           £m     £m     £m  
2011                                                         
Advertising and Media Investment Management      12,075.9                                (9,331.8                
Consumer Insight      3,525.3                                (1,058.2                
Public Relations & Public Affairs      1,825.0                                (411.4                
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      5,147.6                                (1,353.5                
       22,573.8         2,121.1         24,694.9              (12,154.9     (5,645.7     (17,800.6
2010                                                         
Advertising and Media Investment Management      11,795.7                                (9,553.6                
Consumer Insight      3,691.2                                (1,143.9                
Public Relations & Public Affairs      1,699.6                                (388.4                
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications      5,031.4                                (1,409.4                
       22,217.9         2,127.2         24,345.1              (12,495.3     (5,201.9     (17,697.2

 

Note

1  

Included in unallocated corporate assets and liabilities are corporate income tax, deferred tax and net interest-bearing debt.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

2. Segment information (continued)

 

Contributions by geographical area were as follows:

 

        2011
£m
     

2010

£m

      2009
£m
Revenue 1                        
North America 5       3,388.2       3,299.8       3,010.0
UK       1,183.5       1,087.6       1,029.0
Western Continental Europe 4   2,505.1       2,325.3       2,327.8
Asia Pacific, Latin America,                    
Africa & Middle East and                        
Central & Eastern Europe       2,945.0       2,618.3       2,317.5
        10,021.8       9,331.0       8,684.3
    Margin       Margin       Margin    
Headline PBIT 2                        
North America 5   15.5%   525.6   14.7%   484.6   13.2%   397.9
UK   14.0%   165.3   13.6%   147.9   12.8%   131.5
Western Continental Europe 4   11.3%   284.0   9.5%   221.6   8.3%   193.4
Asia Pacific, Latin America,                        
Africa & Middle East and                        
Central & Eastern Europe   15.4%   454.1   14.3%   374.6   12.7%   294.4
    14.3%   1,429.0   13.2%   1,228.7   11.7%   1,017.2
Non-current assets 3                        
North America 5       4,960.4       4,742.7        
UK       1,728.1       1,693.3        
Western Continental Europe 4   3,681.8       3,728.6        
Asia Pacific, Latin America,                    
Africa & Middle East and                        
Central & Eastern Europe       2,765.0       2,649.2        
        13,135.3       12,813.8        

Notes

1    

Intersegment sales have not been separately disclosed as they are not material.

2  

See note 31 for a reconciliation of headline PBIT to PBIT.

3    

Non-current assets excluding financial instruments and deferred tax.

4    

Western Continental Europe includes Ireland with revenue of £40.3 million (2010: £37.4 million, 2009: £43.4 million), headline PBIT of £1.1 million (2010: £ 2.0 million, 2009: £3.9 million) and non-current assets of £52.4 million (2010: £65.0 million).

5    

North America includes the US with revenues of £3,149.9 million (2010: £ 3,097.9 million, 2009: £2,835.8 million), headline PBIT of £490.2 million (2010: £448.7 million, 2009: £370.9 million) and non-current assets of £4,396.5 million (2010: £4,209.7 million).

 


3. Operating costs

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Staff costs (note 5)      5,872.5        5,438.7        5,117.0   
Establishment costs      674.1        659.2        691.6   
Other operating costs (net)      1,499.7        1,489.6        1,410.4   
Total operating costs      8,046.3        7,587.5        7,219.0   
Operating costs include:                         
Goodwill impairment (note 12)             10.0        44.3   
Investment write-downs      32.8        37.5        11.1   
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets (note 12)      172.0        170.5        172.6   
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 12)      25.7        25.4        30.5   
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment      178.7        178.3        189.9   
(Gains)/losses on sale of property, plant and equipment      (0.9     0.7        0.4   
Gains on disposal of investments      (0.4     (4.1     (31.1
Gains on re-measurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest      (31.6     (13.7       
Net foreign exchange losses      1.1        8.0        6.4   
Operating lease rentals:                         
Land and buildings      459.6        449.9        461.5   
Sublease income      (29.1     (32.8     (27.0
       430.5        417.1        434.5   
Plant and machinery      23.0        24.8        28.0   
       453.5        441.9        462.5   

 

3. Operating costs (continued)

 

 

In 2011, operating profit includes credits totalling £14.0 million (2010: £16.5 million, 2009: £19.4 million) relating to the release of excess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions completed prior to 2010. Further details of the Group’s approach to acquisition reserves, as required by IFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations, are given in note 28.

 

Investment write-downs of £32.8 million (2010: £37.5 million) relate to certain non-core minority investments in the US and Continental Europe where forecast financial performance and/or liquidity issues indicate a permanent decline in the recoverability of the Group’s investment.

 

All of the operating costs of the Group are related to administrative expenses.

 

Auditors’ remuneration:


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts      1.4         1.4         1.5   
The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation      15.3         14.8         15.0   
       16.7         16.2         16.5   
Other services pursuant to legislation      3.1         3.1         3.2   
Fees payable to the auditors pursuant to legislation      19.8         19.3         19.7   
Tax advisory services      2.3         2.7         2.6   
Tax compliance services      1.1         1.2         1.5   
       3.4         3.9         4.1   
Corporate finance services      0.5         0.2         0.2   
Other services 1      4.7         5.1         4.8   
Total non-audit fees      8.6         9.2         9.1   
Total fees      28.4         28.5         28.8   

Note

1    

Other services include audits for earnout purposes and services for expatriate employees.

 

Minimum committed annual rentals

Amounts payable in 2012 under the foregoing leases will be as follows:

 


     Plant and machinery

     Land and buildings

 
     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2012
£m
     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
In respect of operating leases which expire:                                                      
– within one year      5.5         4.8         4.1         27.4         32.7         43.1   
– within two to five years      13.2         14.8         14.6         190.7         163.4         145.2   
– after five years      0.5         0.2         1.1         143.6         159.7         143.7   
       19.2         19.8         19.8         361.7         355.8         332.0   

 

Future minimum annual amounts payable under all lease commitments in existence at 31 December 2011 are as follows:

 

     Minimum
rental
payments
£m
     Less
sub-
let
rentals
£m
    Net
payment
£m
 
Year ending 31 December                          
2012      380.9         (19.5     361.4   
2013      328.5         (11.6     316.9   
2014      282.0         (3.5     278.5   
2015      248.0         (3.0     245.0   
2016      204.2         (1.7     202.5   
Later years      931.9         (1.2     930.7   
       2,375.5         (40.5     2,335.0   

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 


4. Share of results of associates

 

Share of results of associates include:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Share of profit before interest and taxation      99.9        86.0        86.3   
Share of exceptional gains/(losses)      2.1        (0.3     (1.6
Share of interest and non-controlling interests      (2.5     (2.7     (0.7
Share of taxation      (33.4     (27.8     (27.0
       66.1        55.2        57.0   

 


5. Our people

 

Our staff numbers averaged 109,971 against 101,387 in 2010 and 105,318 in 2009, including acquisitions. Their geographical distribution was as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
North America      27,540         25,546         25,004   
UK      10,555         9,620         9,704   
Western Continental Europe      22,504         21,154         22,230   
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe      49,372         45,067         48,380   
       109,971         101,387         105,318   

 

Their operating sector distribution was as follows:

 

    2011     2010     2009  
Advertising and Media Investment Management     47,252        42,424        42,906   
Consumer Insight     29,204        28,167        28,325   
Public Relations & Public Affairs     7,869        7,364        7,325   
Branding & Identity, Healthcare and Specialist Communications     25,646        23,432        26,762   
      109,971        101,387        105,318   

 

At the end of 2011 staff numbers were 113,615 (2010: 104,052, 2009: 98,759). Including all employees of associated undertakings, this figure was approximately 158,000 at 31 December 2011 (2010: 146,000, 2009: 138,000).

 

Staff costs include:

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Wages and salaries      4,079.4         3,696.8         3,614.1   
Cash-based incentive plans      259.4         271.9         122.9   
Share-based incentive plans (note 22)      78.8         70.4         54.9   
Social security costs      499.3         450.1         442.5   
Pension costs (note 23)      135.4         120.6         116.4   
Other staff costs 1      820.2         828.9         766.2   
       5,872.5         5,438.7         5,117.0   
Staff cost to revenue ratio      58.6%         58.3%         58.9%   

Note

1    

Freelance and temporary staff costs are included in other staff costs.

 

Included above are charges of £7.3 million (2010: £7.7 million, 2009: £6.1 million) for share-based incentive plans in respect of key management personnel (who comprise the directors of the Group). Total compensation received by key management personnel in 2011 was £20.7 million (2010: £14.3 million, 2009: £5.7 million) of which £0.8 million (2010: £0.7 million, 2009: £0.7 million) were pension contributions.


6. Finance income, finance costs and revaluation of financial instruments

 

Finance income includes:

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Expected return on pension plan assets (note 23)      32.6         30.6         28.7   
Income from available for sale investments      0.6         9.3         10.2   
Interest income      64.1         41.8         111.5   
       97.3         81.7         150.4   

 

Finance costs include:

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Interest on pension plan liabilities (note 23)      43.8         45.9         46.1   
Interest on other long-term employee benefits      1.8         1.9         1.3   
Interest payable and similar charges 1      251.6         229.0         308.0   
       297.2         276.8         355.4   

 

Revaluation of financial instruments 2 include:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Movements in fair value of treasury instruments      (12.7     21.8        8.4   
Revaluation of put options over non-controlling interests      (30.9     (3.6     15.3   
Revaluation of payments due to vendors      (6.4              
Gains on termination of hedge accounting on repayment of TNS debt                    25.2   
       (50.0     18.2        48.9   

 

Notes

1    

Interest payable and similar charges are payable on bank overdrafts, bonds and bank loans held at amortised cost.

2    

Financial instruments are held at fair value through profit and loss.

 

The majority of the Group’s long-term debt is represented by $1,781 million of US dollar bonds at an average interest rate of 6.08% (prior to any interest rate swaps or cross-currency swaps), 1,850 million of Eurobonds at an average interest rate of 5.52% (prior to any interest rate or currency swaps) and £1,050 million of sterling bonds including convertible bonds at an average interest rate of 5.96%.

 

Average borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facilities (note 10) amounted to the equivalent of $711 million at an average interest rate of 0.92% inclusive of margin.

 


7. Taxation

 

In 2011, the tax rate on reported PBT was 9.1% (2010: 22.4%).

 

The tax rate decreased significantly due to the resolution of historic tax liabilities and deferred tax credits related to the accounting for acquired intangibles with definite lives. The release of prior year corporate tax provisions resulted from the resolution of a number of open matters.

 

Cash taxes paid in the year were £247.9 million (2010: £207.4 million).

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

7. Taxation (continued)

 

 

The tax charge is based on the profit for the year and comprises:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Corporation tax                         
Current year      310.3        276.2        209.8   
Prior years      (47.7     (1.0     (1.7
Release of prior year provisions      (106.1              
       156.5        275.2        208.1   
Deferred tax                         
Current year      4.5        (21.4     (16.1
Net credit in relation to the amortisation of acquired intangible assets and other goodwill items      (72.4     (37.5     (37.3
       (67.9     (58.9     (53.4
Prior years      3.3        (26.0     1.0   
       (64.6     (84.9     (52.4
Tax charge      91.9        190.3        155.7   

 

The tax charge for the year can be reconciled to profit before taxation in the consolidated income statement as follows:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Profit before taxation      1,008.4        851.3        662.6   
Tax at the corporation tax rate of 25% 1      252.1        212.8        165.7   
Tax effect of share of results of associates      (16.5     (13.8     (14.3
Tax effect of items that are not deductible/(taxable)      13.0        (7.8     (63.7
Effect of different tax rates of subsidiaries operating in other jurisdictions      9.2        15.4        23.7   
Losses carried forward and temporary differences not recognised      69.5        58.2        55.1   
Tax effect of utilisation or recognition of tax losses not previously recognised      (84.9     (47.5     (10.1
Release of prior year provisions in relation to acquired businesses      (21.4     (19.7     (19.3
Other prior year adjustments      (23.0     (7.3     18.6   
Release of prior year provisions      (106.1              
Tax charge      91.9        190.3        155.7   
Effective tax rate on profit before tax      9.1     22.4     23.5

 

Note

1    

Irish non-trading corporation tax rate.

 


8. Ordinary dividends

 

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:

 

     2011     2010     2009     2011      2010      2009  
Per share    Pence per share     £m      £m      £m  
2010 Second interim dividend      11.82     10.28     10.28     147.3         126.6         126.1   
2011 First interim dividend      7.46     5.97     5.19     92.2         73.8         63.7   
       19.28     16.25     15.47     239.5         200.4         189.8   

 

 

8. Ordinary dividends (continued)

 

 

The Company operates a scrip dividend scheme which enables share owners to receive new fully paid ordinary shares in the Company instead of cash dividends. Included in the £239.5 million dividends recognised in 2011 are cash dividends of £218.4 million and scrip dividends of £21.1 million.

 

Second interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2011:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
Per share    Pence per share  
2011 Second interim dividend      17.14     11.82     10.28

 

The payment of dividends will not have any tax consequences for the Group.

 


9. Earnings per share

 

Basic EPS

 

The calculation of basic EPS is as follows:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
Earnings 1 (£m)      840.1        586.0        437.7   
Average shares used in basic EPS calculation (m)      1,242.7        1,233.1        1,218.7   
EPS      67.6     47.5     35.9

Note

1    

Earnings is equivalent to profit for the year attributable to equity holders of the parent.

 

Diluted EPS

 

The calculation of diluted EPS is as follows:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
Diluted earnings (£m)      866.2        614.3        437.7   
Average shares used in diluted EPS calculation (m)      1,342.2        1,339.0        1,238.2   
Diluted EPS      64.5     45.9     35.3

 

Diluted EPS has been calculated based on the diluted earnings amounts above. On 19 May 2009 the Group issued £450 million 5.75% convertible bonds due May 2014. For the year ended 31 December 2011 these convertible bonds were dilutive and earnings were consequently increased by £26.1 million (2010: £28.3 million) for the purpose of the calculation of diluted earnings. For the year ended 31 December 2009 these convertible bonds were accretive to earnings and therefore excluded from this calculation. In addition, at 31 December 2011, options to purchase 4.0 million ordinary shares (2010: 11.6 million, 2009: 33.2 million) were outstanding, but were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share because the exercise prices of these options were greater than the average market price of the Group’s shares and, therefore, their inclusion would have been accretive.

 

A reconciliation between the shares used in calculating basic and diluted EPS is as follows:

 

     2011
m
    

2010

m

    

2009

m

 
Average shares used in basic EPS calculation      1,242.7         1,233.1         1,218.7   
Dilutive share options outstanding      4.5         6.7         2.1   
Other potentially issuable shares      18.5         22.7         17.4   
£450 million 5.75% convertible bonds      76.5         76.5           
Shares used in diluted EPS calculation      1,342.2         1,339.0         1,238.2   

 

At 31 December 2011 there were 1,266,373,821 ordinary shares in issue.

 

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 


10. Sources of finance

 

The following table summarises the equity and debt financing of the Group, and changes during the year:

 

           Shares                 Debt  
     2011
£m
    2010
£m
          2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Analysis of changes in financing                                       
Beginning of year      180.9        138.2              3,598.2        3,586.4   
Other ordinary shares issued      31.0        42.7                       
Share cancellations      (0.7                           
Scrip dividend      21.1                              
Net increase in drawings on bank loans, corporate bonds and convertible bonds                          301.4        19.8   
Net amortisation of financing costs included in debt                          7.6        13.6   
Debt acquired                          17.5          
Other movements                          (2.7     0.5   
Exchange adjustments                          (29.0     (22.1
End of year      232.3        180.9              3,893.0        3,598.2   

 

Note

The above table excludes bank overdrafts which fall within cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the consolidated cash flow statement.

 

Shares

At 31 December 2011, the Company’s share base was entirely composed of ordinary equity share capital and share premium of £232.3 million (2010: £180.9 million), further details of which are disclosed in note 26.

 

Debt

US$ bonds The Group has in issue $600 million of 8% bonds due September 2014. In November 2011, the Group issued $812 million of 4.75% bonds due November 2021. $312 million of these bonds were issued in exchange for $281 million of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014. Consequently the amount in issue of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014 has reduced to $369 million.

 

Eurobonds The Group has in issue 600 million of 4.375% bonds due December 2013, 500 million of 5.25% bonds due January 2015 and 750 million of 6.625% bonds due May 2016.

 

Sterling bonds The Group has in issue £400 million of 6% bonds due April 2017 and £200 million of 6.375% bonds due November 2020.

 

Revolving Credit Facilities The Group has a five-year Revolving Credit Facility of $1.05 billion and £375 million due November 2016, signed in November 2011. Prior to this the Group had a Revolving Credit Facility of $1.6 billion signed in August 2005. The Group’s borrowing under these facilities, which are drawn down predominantly in US dollars, euros, Canadian dollars and pounds sterling, averaged the equivalent of $711 million in 2011. The Group had available undrawn committed credit facilities of £972 million at December 2011 (2010: £1,145 million).

 

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facilities are governed by certain financial covenants based on the results and financial position of the Group.

 

US Commercial Paper Program

The Group operates a commercial paper program using the Revolving Credit Facility as a backstop. There was no US Commercial Paper outstanding at 31 December 2011.

 

Convertible bonds

The Group has in issue £450 million of 5.75% convertible bonds due May 2014. At the option of the holder, the bonds are convertible into 76,530,612 WPP ordinary shares at an initial share price of £5.88 per share.

 

The convertible bonds have a nominal value of £450 million at 31 December 2011. In accordance with IAS 39, these bonds have been split between a liability component and an equity component by initially valuing the liability component at fair value based on the present value of future cash flows and then holding it at amortised cost. This fair value has been calculated assuming redemption in May 2014 and using a discount rate of 8.25%, based on the estimated rate of interest that would have applied to a comparable bond issued at that time without the convertible option. The equity component represents the fair value, on initial recognition, of the embedded option to convert the liability into equity of the Group.

 

10. Sources of finance (continued)

 

 

The liability element is £424.1 million and the equity component is £44.5 million as at 31 December 2011.

 

The Group estimates that the fair value of the liability component of the convertible bonds at 31 December 2011 was approximately £448.9 million. This fair value has been calculated by discounting the future cash flows at the market rate.

 

The following table is an analysis of future anticipated cash flows in relation to the Group’s debt, on an undiscounted basis which, therefore, differs from the fair value and carrying value:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Within one year      (240.8     (209.4
Between one and two years      (722.2     (308.7
Between two and three years      (1,259.3     (721.1
Between three and four years      (524.7     (1,416.3
Between four and five years      (787.1     (509.8
Over five years      (1,304.1     (1,355.4
Debt financing under the Revolving Credit Facility and in relation to unsecured loan notes      (4,838.2     (4,520.7
Short-term overdrafts – within one year      (518.4     (255.4
Future anticipated cash flows      (5,356.6     (4,776.1
Effect of discounting/financing rates      945.2        922.5   
Debt financing      (4,411.4     (3,853.6

 

Analysis of fixed and floating rate debt by currency including the effect of interest rate and cross-currency swaps:

 


2011

Currency

   £m     Fixed
rate 1
    

Floating

basis

     Period
(months) 1
 
$    – fixed      1,494.1        6.00%         n/a         63   
     – floating      477.9        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
£    – fixed      550.0        6.07%         n/a         70   
     – floating      200.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
   – fixed      710.3        6.50%         n/a         50   
     – floating      354.0        n/a         EURIBOR         n/a   
¥    – fixed      75.4        2.07%         n/a         24   
$C 2    – floating      79.7        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
Other           (48.4     n/a         n/a         n/a   
            3,893.0                             

 

2010

Currency

   £m     Fixed
rate 1
    

Floating

basis

     Period
(months) 1
 
$    – fixed      1,338.0        6.54%         n/a         44   
     – floating      283.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
£    – fixed      550.0        6.07%         n/a         83   
     – floating      200.0        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
   – fixed      728.7        6.50%         n/a         63   
     – floating      363.1        n/a         EURIBOR         n/a   
¥    – fixed      71.1        2.07%         n/a         36   
$C 2    – floating      81.1        n/a         LIBOR         n/a   
Other           (16.8     n/a         n/a         n/a   
            3,598.2                             

Notes

1    

Weighted average. These rates do not include the effect of gains on interest rate swap terminations that are written to income over the life of the original instrument. At 31 December 2011 the amount still to be written to income was £1.2 million (2010: £1.7 million) in respect of US dollar swap terminations, to be written to income evenly until June 2014.

2    

Represents Canadian dollars.

 

The following table is an analysis of future anticipated cash flows in relation to the Group’s financial derivatives, which include interest rate swaps, cash flow hedges and other foreign exchange swaps:

 

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

10. Sources of finance (continued)

 

2011   Financial liabilities         Financial assets  
  Payable
£m
    Receivable
£m
        Payable
£m
    Receivable
£m
 
Within one year     60.5        52.3            167.5        214.3   
Between one and two years     328.1        233.3            771.7        869.8   
Between two and three years     356.5        284.9            785.1        867.6   
Between three and four years     478.5        353.2            537.4        633.9   
Between four and five years     1.1        0.6            4.2        37.4   
Over five years     26.1        25.5            227.3        237.4   
      1,250.8        949.8            2,493.2        2,860.4   

 

2010   Financial liabilities         Financial assets  
  Payable
£m
    Receivable
£m
        Payable
£m
    Receivable
£m
 
Within one year     74.1        46.3            160.0        205.4   
Between one and two years     36.6        29.2            85.7        123.5   
Between two and three years     335.2        241.1            758.8        847.0   
Between three and four years     368.7        291.0            804.8        877.8   
Between four and five years     480.6        355.8            556.5        656.4   
Over five years     27.1        27.1            457.3        488.4   
      1,322.3        990.5            2,823.1        3,198.5   

 

Included in these amounts are anticipated cash flows in relation to cash flow hedges.

 


11. Analysis of cash flows

 

The following tables analyse the items included within the main cash flow headings on page F-10.

 

Net cash from operating activities:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Profit for the year      916.5        661.0        506.9   
Taxation      91.9        190.3        155.7   
Revaluation of financial instruments      50.0        (18.2     (48.9
Finance costs      297.2        276.8        355.4   
Finance income      (97.3     (81.7     (150.4
Share of results of associates      (66.1     (55.2     (57.0
Adjustments for:                         
Non-cash share-based incentive plans (including share options)      78.8        70.4        54.9   
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment      185.8        184.9        195.3   
Impairment of goodwill             10.0        44.3   
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets      172.0        170.5        172.6   
Amortisation of other intangible assets      25.7        25.4        30.5   
Investment write-downs      32.8        37.5        11.1   
Gains on disposal of investments      (0.4     (4.1     (31.1
Gains on re-measurement of equity interest on acquisition of controlling interest      (31.6     (13.7       
(Gains)/losses on sale of property, plant and equipment      (0.9     0.7        0.4   
Decrease/(increase) in inventories and work in progress      32.7        (46.3     12.4   
Increase in receivables      (1.8     (850.8     (90.0
(Decrease)/increase in payables – short term      (618.5     1,135.7        (51.3
Increase in payables – long term      19.2        10.3        25.5   
(Decrease)/increase in provisions      (52.5     (23.4     1.3   
Corporation and overseas tax paid    (247.9)     (207.4)     (216.6)  
Interest and similar charges paid    (241.4)     (219.7)     (248.7)  
Interest received    63.2     50.7     99.6  
Investment income    0.6     4.2     1.4  
Dividends from associates    57.2     53.3     45.5  
Net cash inflow from operating activities    665.2     1,361.2     818.8  

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

11. Analysis of cash flows (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions and disposals:


    2011
£m
   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 
Initial cash consideration     (352.3     (138.6     (35.4
Cash and cash equivalents acquired (net)     98.8        57.0        1.3   
Earnout payments     (150.0     (113.3     (81.5
Loan note redemptions     (0.8     (5.1       
Purchase of other investments (including associates)     (68.1     (23.8     (53.3
Proceeds on disposal of investments     2.6        23.7        50.5   
Acquisitions and disposals     (469.8     (200.1     (118.4
Cash consideration for non-controlling interests     (62.6     (15.1     (26.4
Net cash outflow     (532.4     (215.2     (144.8
Share repurchases and buy-backs:                  
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Purchase of own shares by ESOP Trusts     (106.5     (46.4       
Share cancellations (excluding brokerage fees)     (45.9              
Shares purchased into treasury     (29.8            (9.5
Net cash outflow   (182.2)     (46.4)     (9.5)  
Net increase/(decrease) in borrowings:                  
    2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Proceeds from issue of $500 million bonds     319.5                 
Repayment of debt acquired     (18.1              
Increase/(decrease) in drawings on bank loans            19.8        (1,068.0
Proceeds from issue of $450 million bonds                   450.0   
Proceeds from issue of $600 million bonds                   367.4   
Repayment of TNS debt                   (175.7
Net cash inflow/(outflow)     301.4        19.8        (426.3
Cash and cash equivalents:                        
   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 
Cash at bank and in hand     1,833.5        1,877.1        1,570.5   
Short-term bank deposits     113.1        88.1        96.2   
Overdrafts 1     (518.4     (255.4     (720.7
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year     1,428.2        1,709.8        946.0   

Note

1    

Bank overdrafts are included in cash and cash equivalents because they form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of cash and cash equivalents approximates their fair value.

 


12. Intangible assets

 

Goodwill

 

The movements in 2011 and 2010 were as follows:

 

     £m  
Cost:         
1 January 2010      9,246.8   
Additions 1      164.3   
Revision of earnout estimates      82.0   
Exchange adjustments      185.7   
31 December 2010      9,678.8   
Additions 1      434.6   
Revision of earnout estimates      25.9   
Exchange adjustments      (150.8
31 December 2011      9,988.5   
Accumulated impairment losses and write-downs:         
1 January 2010      549.3   
Impairment losses for the year      8.3   
Exchange adjustments      14.9   
31 December 2010      572.5   
Exchange adjustments      (14.8
31 December 2011      557.7   
Net book value:         
31 December 2011      9,430.8   
31 December 2010      9,106.3   
1 January 2010      8,697.5   

 

Note

1    

Additions represent goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings including the effect of any revisions to fair value adjustments that had been determined provisionally at the immediately preceding balance sheet date, as permitted by IFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations. The effect of such revisions was not material in either year presented. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of associate undertakings is shown within interests in associates and joint ventures in note 14.

 

Cash-generating units with significant goodwill as at 31 December 2011 and 2010 are:

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
GroupM      2,037.7         2,105.0   
Kantar      1,791.2         1,740.0   
Wunderman      1,119.9         1,143.8   
Y&R Advertising      1,025.5         1,092.7   
Burson-Marsteller      489.8         545.9   
Other      2,966.7         2,478.9   
Total goodwill      9,430.8         9,106.3   

 

Other goodwill represents goodwill on a large number of cash-generating units, none of which is individually significant in comparison to the total carrying value of goodwill.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

12. Intangible assets (continued)

 

 

Other intangible assets

 

The movements in 2011 and 2010 were as follows:

 

    Brands
with an
indefinite
useful life
£m
    Acquired
intangibles
£m
    Other
£m
    Total
£m
 

Cost:

                               

1 January 2010

    1,013.2        1,297.0        211.8        2,522.0   

Additions

                  27.0        27.0   

Disposals

                  (14.2     (14.2

New acquisitions

           25.5        0.7        26.2   

Other movements

           1.1        4.0        5.1   

Exchange adjustments

    40.5        8.9        0.6        50.0   

31 December 2010

    1,053.7        1,332.5        229.9        2,616.1   

Additions

                  37.1        37.1   

Disposals

                  (11.7     (11.7

New acquisitions

           117.6        2.0        119.6   

Other movements 1

           21.2        1.5        22.7   

Exchange adjustments

    (17.3     (7.7     (5.0     (30.0

31 December 2011

    1,036.4        1,463.6        253.8        2,753.8   

Amortisation and impairment:

                               

1 January 2010

           377.5        143.8        521.3   

Charge for the year

           170.5        25.4        195.9   

Disposals

                  (14.0     (14.0

Other movements

           (2.4     2.3        (0.1

Exchange adjustments

           5.2        3.3        8.5   

31 December 2010

           550.8        160.8        711.6   

Charge for the year

           172.0        25.7        197.7   

Disposals

                  (11.3     (11.3

Other movements

           (2.6     (1.0     (3.6

Exchange adjustments

           2.0        (2.5     (0.5

31 December 2011

           722.2        171.7        893.9   

Net book value:

                               

31 December 2011

    1,036.4        741.4        82.1        1,859.9   

31 December 2010

    1,053.7        781.7        69.1        1,904.5   

1 January 2010

    1,013.2        919.5        68.0        2,000.7   

 

Note

1    

Other movements in acquired intangibles include revisions to fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings that had been determined provisionally at the immediately preceding balance sheet date, as permitted by IFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations.

 

Brands with an indefinite life are carried at historical cost in accordance with the Group accounting policy for intangible assets. The carrying values of the separately identifiable brands are not individually significant in comparison with the total carrying value of brands with an indefinite useful life.

 

12. Intangible assets (continued)

 

 

Acquired intangible assets at net book value at 31 December 2011 include brand names of £371.9 million (2010: £357.4 million), customer-related intangibles of £294. 1 million (2010: £327. 3 million), and other assets (including proprietary tools) of £75.4 million (2010: £97.0 million).

 

In accordance with the Group’s accounting policy, the carrying values of goodwill and intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the asset might be impaired.

 

The carrying values of brands with an indefinite useful life are assessed for impairment purposes by using the royalty and loyalty methods of valuation, both of which utilise the net present value of future cash flows associated with the brands.

 

The 2011 goodwill impairment review was initially undertaken as at 30 June 2011 and then updated as at 31 December 2011. The review assessed whether the carrying value of goodwill was supported by the net present value of future cash-flows, using a pre-tax discount rate of 9.50% (2010: 9.58%) and management forecasts for a projection period of up to five years, followed by an assumed annual long-term growth rate of 3.0% (2010: 3.0%) and no assumed improvement in operating margin. Management have made the judgement that this long-term growth rate does not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the industry.

 

There was no goodwill impairment charge recorded for the year ended 31 December 2011 (2010: £10.0 million). In 2010 the impairment charge related to certain under-performing businesses in the Group. In certain markets, the impact of local economic conditions and trading circumstances on these businesses was sufficiently severe to indicate impairment to the carrying value of goodwill.

 

Under IFRS, an impairment charge is required for both goodwill and other indefinite-lived assets when the carrying amount exceeds the ‘recoverable amount’, defined as the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use. Our approach in determining the recoverable amount utilises a discounted cash flow methodology, which necessarily involves making numerous estimates and assumptions regarding revenue growth, operating margins, appropriate discount rates and working capital requirements. These estimates will likely differ from future actual results of operations and cash flows, and it is possible that these differences could be material. In addition, judgements are applied in determining the level of cash-generating unit we identify for impairment testing and the criteria we use to determine which assets should be aggregated. A difference in testing levels could affect whether an impairment is recorded and the extent of impairment loss. Changes in our business activities or structure may also result in changes to the level of testing in future periods. Further, future events could cause the Group to conclude that impairment indicators exist and that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired. Any resulting impairment loss could have a material impact on the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

 

Historically our impairment losses have resulted from a specific event, condition or circumstance in one of our companies, such as the loss of a significant client. As a result, changes in the assumptions used in our impairment model have not had a significant effect on the impairment charges recognised and a reasonably possible change in assumptions would not lead to an impairment. The carrying value of goodwill and other intangible assets will continue to be reviewed at least annually for impairment and adjusted to the recoverable amount if required.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 


13. Property, plant and equipment

 

The movements in 2011 and 2010 were as follows:

 

    Land
£m
    Freehold
buildings
£m
    Lease-
hold
buildings
£m
   

Fixtures,
fittings
and
equip-

ment £m

   

Computer
equip-

ment

£m

    Total
£m
 

Cost:

                                               

1 January 2010

    12.4        73.2        619.1        362.6        535.4        1,602.7   

Additions

           0.7        71.5        35.6        82.7        190.5   

New acquisitions

                  2.1        2.6        4.4        9.1   

Disposals

           (0.5     (43.0     (37.0     (60.7     (141.2
Exchange adjustments                   23.0        12.2        19.3        54.5   

31 December 2010

    12.4        73.4        672.7        376.0        581.1        1,715.6   

Additions

           0.6        76.2        43.1        96.2        216.1   

New acquisitions

                  2.5        4.6        6.9        14.0   

Disposals

           (0.9     (33.2     (41.0     (57.8     (132.9
Exchange adjustments                   (4.3     (13.0     (14.2     (31.5

31 December 2011

    12.4        73.1        713.9        369.7        612.2        1,781.3   

Depreciation:

                                               

1 January 2010

           25.8        278.0        214.3        404.1        922.2   

Charge for the year

           2.7        58.2        42.9        81.1        184.9   

Disposals

           (0.5     (37.6     (35.9     (58.7     (132.7
Exchange adjustments                   13.1        7.0        12.7        32.8   

31 December 2010

           28.0        311.7        228.3        439.2        1,007.2   

Charge for the year

           3.2        58.3        42.9        81.4        185.8   

Disposals

           (0.3     (24.9     (37.7     (55.0     (117.9
Exchange adjustments            (1.4     (2.0     (7.9     (10.8     (22.1

31 December 2011

           29.5        343.1        225.6        454.8        1,053.0   

Net book value:

                                               

31 December 2011

    12.4        43.6        370.8        144.1        157.4        728.3   

31 December 2010

    12.4        45.4        361.0        147.7        141.9        708.4   

1 January 2010

    12.4        47.4        341.1        148.3        131.3        680.5   

 

At the end of the year, capital commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of property, plant and equipment were £127.4 million (2010: £40.7 million). The increase is due to a number of significant property development projects in North America.

 


14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments

 

The movements in 2011 and 2010 were as follows:

 

   

Net

assets of
associates
and joint
ventures
£m

   

Goodwill

and other
intangibles
of associates
and joint
ventures

£m

    Total
associates
and joint
ventures
£m
    Other
invest-
ments
£m
 

1 January 2010

    337.1        392.2        729.3        294.6   

Additions

    8.0               8.0        20.2   
Goodwill arising on acquisition of new associates            5.6        5.6          
Share of results of associate undertakings (note 4)     55.2               55.2          
Dividends and other movements     (52.7     (0.9     (53.6       

Exchange adjustments

    35.9        36.9        72.8        (24.0

Disposals

                         (22.0
Reclassification to subsidiaries     (8.5     (10.4     (18.9       
Revaluation of other investments                          (59.8

Goodwill impairment

           (1.7     (1.7       
Amortisation of other intangible assets            (2.4     (2.4       

Write-downs

    (2.2            (2.2     (35.3

31 December 2010

    372.8        419.3        792.1        173.7   

Additions

    39.3               39.3        29.3   
Goodwill arising on acquisition of new associates            3.4        3.4          
Share of results of associate undertakings (note 4)     66.1               66.1          
Dividends and other movements     (67.3     18.3        (49.0       

Exchange adjustments

    (0.7     (4.8     (5.5       

Reclassification (to)/from subsidiaries

    (16.0     (25.0     (41.0     7.3   
Revaluation of other investments                          11.3   
Amortisation of other intangible assets            (2.1     (2.1       

Write-downs

    (2.0            (2.0     (30.8

31 December 2011

    392.2        409.1        801.3        190.8   

 

The investments included above as ‘other investments’ represent investments in equity securities that present the Group with opportunity for return through dividend income and trading gains. They have no fixed maturity or coupon rate. The fair values of the listed securities are based on quoted market prices. For unlisted securities, where market value is not available, the Group has estimated relevant fair values on the basis of publicly available information from outside sources or on the basis of discounted cash flow models where appropriate.

 

The carrying values of the Group’s associates and joint ventures are reviewed for impairment in accordance with the Group’s accounting policies.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments (continued)

 

 

The Group’s principal associates and joint ventures at 31 December 2011 included:

 

     %
owned
     Country of
incorporation
 
Asatsu-DK      24.3         Japan   
CHI & Partners Limited      49.9         UK   
Chime Communications PLC 1      17.5         UK   
CTR Market Research Co., Ltd      46.0         China   
Dentsu, Young & Rubicam Inc      49.0         Japan   
GIIR, Inc      27.9         Korea   
High Co S.A.      34.1         France   
Ibope Latinoamericana SA      41.8         Brazil   
oOh!media Group Limited      23.8         Australia   
Scangroup Limited      31.8         Kenya   
Singleton, Ogilvy & Mather (Holdings) Pty Limited      33.3         Australia   
Smollan Holdings (Proprietary) Limited      33.0         South Africa   
STW Communications Group Limited      20.6         Australia   
The Grass Roots Group PLC      44.8         UK   
The Jupiter Drawing Room Pty Limited      49.0         South Africa   

 

Note

1    

Although the Group holds less than 20% of Chime Communications PLC, it is considered to be an associate as the Group exercises significant influence by virtue of a position on the Board of Directors.

 

The market value of the Group’s shares in its principal listed associate undertakings at 31 December 2011 was as follows: Asatsu-DK: £175.0 million, Chime Communications PLC: £20.8 million, High Co S.A.: £16.9 million, GIIR, Inc: £22.9 million, Scangroup Limited: £19.2 million, STW Communications Group Limited: £41.7 million and oOh!media Group Limited: £24.8 million (2010: Asatsu-DK: £180.9 million, Chime Communications PLC: £22.6 million, High Co S.A.: £30.0 million, GIIR, Inc.: £22.4 million, Scangroup Limited: £30.0 million, STW Communications Group Limited: £52.2 million and oOh!media Group Limited: £22.3 million).

 

The carrying value (including goodwill and other intangibles) of these equity interests in the Group’s consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 2011 was as follows: Asatsu-DK: £229.4 million, Chime Communications PLC: £29.4 million, High Co S.A.: £32.4 million, GIIR, Inc: £24.0 million, Scangroup Limited: £20.4 million, STW Communications Group Limited: £68.3 million and oOh!media Group Limited: £20.5 million (2010: Asatsu-DK: £220.7 million, Chime Communications PLC: £23.0 million, High Co S.A.: £30.9 million, GIIR, Inc: £18.7 million, Scangroup Limited: £17.1 million, STW Communications Group Limited: £69.4 million and oOh!media Group Limited: £17.9 million).

 

Where the market value of the Group’s listed associates is less than the carrying value, an impairment review is performed utilising the discounted cash flow methodology discussed in note 12.

 

The Group’s investments in its principal associate undertakings are represented by ordinary shares.

 

14. Interests in associates, joint ventures and other investments (continued)

 

 

Summarised financial information

The following tables present a summary of the aggregate financial performance and net asset position of the Group’s associate undertakings and joint ventures. These have been estimated and converted, where appropriate, to an IFRS presentation based on information provided by the relevant companies at 31 December 2011.

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Income statement                           
Revenue      2,127.2         2,142.3         1,968.9   
Operating profit      293.7         229.9         219.2   
Profit before taxation      316.5         245.1         237.0   
Profit for the year      190.5         179.1         166.0   

 


          2011
£m
    2010
£m
 
Balance sheet                      
Assets           4,388.2        4,355.7   
Liabilities           (2,191.8     (2,394.1
Net assets           2,196.4        1,961.6   

 

The application of equity accounting is ordinarily discontinued when the investment is reduced to zero and additional losses are not provided for unless the investor has guaranteed obligations of the investee or is otherwise committed to provide further financial support for the investee.

 

At the end of the year, capital commitments contracted, but not provided for in respect of interests in associates and other investments were £40.0 million (2010: £24.9 million).

 


15. Deferred tax

 

The Group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the end of each period in accordance with IAS 12. The recognition of deferred tax assets is determined by reference to the Group’s estimate of recoverability, using models where appropriate to forecast future taxable profits.

 

Deferred tax assets are recognised in relation to an element of the Group’s defined benefit pension provisions and share based payment schemes. Assets have only been recognised for territories where the Group considers that it is probable there would be sufficient taxable profits for the future deductions to be utilised.

 

Based on available evidence, both positive and negative, we determine whether it is probable that all or a portion of the deferred tax assets will be realised. The main factors that we consider include:

 

– the future earnings potential determined through the use of internal forecasts;

 

– the cumulative losses in recent years;

 

– the various jurisdictions in which the potential deferred tax assets arise;

 

– the history of losses carried forward and other tax assets expiring;

 

– the timing of future reversal of taxable temporary differences;

 

– the expiry period associated with the deferred tax assets; and

 

– the nature of the income that can be used to realise the deferred tax asset.

 

If it is probable that some portion of these assets will not be realised, then no asset is recognised in relation to that portion.

 

If market conditions improve and future results of operations exceed our current expectations, our existing recognised deferred tax assets may be adjusted, resulting in future tax benefits. Alternatively, if market conditions deteriorate further or future results of operations are less than expected, future assessments may result in a determination that some or all of the deferred tax assets are not realisable. As a result, all or a portion of the deferred tax assets may need to be reversed.

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

15. Deferred tax (continued)

 

 

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset as they relate to the same tax group. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances for financial reporting purposes:

 

     Gross
£m
    Offset
£m
    As
reported
£m
 
2011                         
Deferred tax assets      151.4        (65.4     86.0   
Deferred tax liabilities      (806.8     65.4        (741.4
       (655.4            (655.4
2010                         
Deferred tax assets      137.6        (58.5     79.1   
Deferred tax liabilities      (809.2     58.5        (750.7
       (671.6            (671.6

 

The following are the major gross deferred tax assets recognised by the Group and movements thereon in 2011 and 2010:

    Tax
losses
£m
    Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
    Deferred
comp-
ensation
£m
   

US
stock
plans

£m

    Other
short-term
temporary
differences
£m
    Total
£m
 
1 January 2010     8.2        12.4        7.3               47.7        75.6   
(Charge)/credit to income     (1.9     0.5        (1.8     30.6        18.0        45.4   
Credit to equity            0.2               19.0        0.2        19.4   
Exchange adjustments                                 3.3        3.3   
Transfer to current tax                                 (6.1     (6.1
31 December 2010     6.3        13.1        5.5        49.6        63.1        137.6   
Acquisition of subsidiaries     0.7                                    0.7   
Credit/(charge) to income     24.4               (5.0     (2.8     9.6        26.2   
Credit/(charge) to equity            0.5               (11.8     (0.3     (11.6
Exchange adjustments     0.2        (0.1     0.2        (0.3     (1.5     (1.5
31 December 2011     31.6        13.5        0.7        34.7        70.9        151.4   

 

Other short-term temporary differences comprise a number of items, none of which is individually significant to the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. At 31 December 2011 the balance related to temporary differences in relation to accounting provisions, tax credits, fixed assets, and tax deductible goodwill.

 

The Group incurred losses in certain jurisdictions in the current year. No deferred tax assets in excess of taxable temporary differences (2010: £10.5 million) have been recognised in these jurisdictions.

 

In addition the Group has recognised the following gross deferred tax liabilities and movements thereon in 2011 and 2010:

    Brands
and other
intangibles
£m
    Associate
earnings
£m
    Goodwill
£m
    Other
short-term
temporary
differences
£m
    Total
£m
 
1 January 2010     711.9        20.2        74.8        10.8        817.7   
Acquisition of subsidiaries     9.4                             9.4   
(Credit)/charge to income     (52.5     0.3        14.9        (2.2     (39.5
Exchange adjustments     19.3        0.7        2.7               22.7   
Transfer to current tax                          (1.1     (1.1
31 December 2010     688.1        21.2        92.4        7.5        809.2   
Acquisition of subsidiaries 1     44.9                             44.9   
(Credit)/charge to income     (60.8     1.3        17.7        3.4        (38.4
Exchange adjustments     (9.7     0.4        0.4               (8.9
31 December 2011     662.5        22.9        110.5        10.9        806.8   

Note

1    

Acquisition of subsidiaries includes deferred tax liabilities of £37.2 million for acquisitions completed in 2011 as well as adjustments of £7.7 million to deferred tax liabilities for acquisitions in the prior year.

 

15. Deferred tax (continued)

 

 

At the balance sheet date, the Group has gross tax losses and other temporary differences of £4,996.0 million (2010: £5,212.9 million) available for offset against future profits. Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of the tax benefit of £439.0 million (2010: £377.9 million) of such tax losses and other temporary differences. No deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of the remaining £4,557.0 million (2010: £4,834.9 million) of losses and other temporary differences as the Group considers that there will not be enough taxable profits in the entities concerned such that any additional asset could be considered recoverable. Included in the total unrecognised temporary differences are losses of £259.3 million that will expire by 2021, £222.8 million that will expire by 2023, £9.7 million that will expire by 2025, £13.4 million that will expire by 2027 and an additional £62.3 million that will expire by 2029. £2, 895.9 million of losses may be carried forward indefinitely.

 

At the balance sheet date, the aggregate amount of the temporary differences in relation to the investment in subsidiaries for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised was £12,728.3 million (2010: £11,462.1 million). No liability has been recognised in respect of these differences because the Group is in a position to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and the Group considers that it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

 


16. Inventory and work in progress

 

The following are included in the net book value of inventory and work in progress:

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Work in progress      327.0         362.6   
Inventory      6.9         3.4   
       333.9         366.0   

 


17. Trade and other receivables

 

The following are included in trade and other receivables:

 

Amounts falling due within one year:


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Trade receivables      6,305.1         6,280.6   
VAT and sales taxes recoverable      76.2         72.1   
Prepayments and accrued income 1      2,044.0         1,949.4   
Other debtors 1      494.4         541.3   
       8,919.7         8,843.4   

 

Note

1    

Comparative figures have been restated to be consistent with current year presentation.

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

17. Trade and other receivables (continued)

 

 

The ageing of trade receivables and other financial assets is as follows:

 


2011                     Past due but not impaired  
   

Carrying
amount at 31
December

2011

£m

    Neither
past due
nor
impaired
£m
    0-30
days
£m
    31-90
days
£m
    91-180
days
£m
   

181
days-
1 year

£m

   

Greater
than 1
year

£m

 
Trade receivables     6,305.1        3,887.3        1,624.5        648.8        119.5        6.2        18.8   
Other financial assets     489.8        330.2        51.8        42.4        8.7        22.2        34.5   
      6,794.9        4,217.5        1,676.3        691.2        128.2        28.4        53.3   

 

2010                     Past due but not impaired  
   

Carrying
amount at 31
December
2010

£m

    Neither
past due
nor
impaired
£m
    0-30
days
£m
    31-90
days
£m
    91-180
days
£m
   

181
days-

1 year
£m

   

Greater
than 1
year

£m

 
Trade receivables     6,280.6        3,502.2        1,926.4        695.3        131.7        12.0        13.0   
Other financial assets 1     570.9        411.4        76.4        37.7        5.9        7.0        32.5   
      6,851.5        3,913.6        2,002.8        733.0        137.6        19.0        45.5   

Note

1    

Comparative figures have been restated to be consistent with current year presentation.

 

Other financial assets are included in other debtors.

 

Past due amounts are not impaired where collection is considered likely.

 

Amounts falling due after more than one year:


    

2011

£m

    

2010

£m

 
Prepayments and accrued income      2.4         5.6   
Other debtors      121.8         123.2   
Fair value of derivatives      184.9         194.7   
       309.1         323.5   

 

Movements on bad debt provisions were as follows:


     2011
£m
    2010
£m
   

2009

£m

 
Balance at beginning of year      114.6        109.9        124.4   
New acquisitions      4.0        2.0        0.7   
Charged to operating costs      31.1        27.8        31.7   
Exchange adjustments      (1.9     2.2        (8.5
Utilisations and other movements      (22.1     (27.3     (38.4
Balance at end of year      125.7        114.6        109.9   

 

The allowance for bad and doubtful debts is equivalent to 2.0% (2010: 1.8%, 2009: 2.0%) of gross trade accounts receivable.

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates their fair value.

 


18. Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year

 

The following are included in trade and other payables falling due within one year:

 

     2011
£m
    

2010

£m

 
Trade payables      7,292.7         7,701.1   
Other taxation and social security      420.5         385.4   
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)      96.8         207.4   
Liabilities in respect of put option agreements with vendors      79.2         136.9   
Other creditors and accruals      2,274.0         2,196.9   
Deferred income      1,002.3         1,075.9   
       11,165.5         11,703.6   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates their fair value.

 


19. Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year

 

The following are included in trade and other payables falling due after more than one year:


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Payments due to vendors (earnout agreements)      137.3         67.9   
Liabilities in respect of put option agreements with vendors      89.1         34.1   
Fair value of derivatives      139.9         129.4   
Other creditors and accruals      186.8         157.2   
       553.1         388.6   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates their fair value.

 

The following tables set out payments due to vendors, comprising deferred consideration and the directors’ best estimates of future earnout-related obligations:

 


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Within one year      96.8         207.4   
Between one and two years      31.6         39.6   
Between two and three years      25.2         12.1   
Between three and four years      18.6         4.3   
Between four and five years      28.9         4.1   
Over five years      33.0         7.8   
       234.1         275.3   

 

     2011
£m
 
1 January 2011      275.3   
Earnouts paid      (150.0
New acquisitions (note 28)      80.4   
Revision of estimates taken to goodwill      25.9   
Revaluation of payments due to vendors (note 6)      6.4   

Exchange adjustments

     (3.9
31 December 2011      234.1   

 

As of 31 December 2011, the potential undiscounted amount of all future payments that could be required under the earnout agreements for acquisitions completed in the current year and for all earnout agreements range from £nil million to £256 million (2010: £nil million to £111 million) and £nil million to £931 million (2010: £nil million to £916 million), respectively.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


20. Bank overdrafts, bonds and bank loans

 

Amounts falling due within one year:


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Bank overdrafts      518.4         255.4   

 

The Group considers that the carrying amount of overdrafts and short-term borrowings approximates their fair value.

 

Amounts falling due after more than 1 year:


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Corporate bonds and bank loans      3,893.0         3,598.2   

 

The Group estimates that the fair value of convertible and corporate bonds is £4,232.6 million at 31 December 2011 (2010: £4,034.1 million). The Group considers that the carrying amount of bank loans approximates their fair value.

 

The corporate bonds, convertible bonds, bank loans and overdrafts included within liabilities fall due for repayment as follows:

 


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
Within one year      518.4         255.4   
Between one and two years      620.6         94.2   
Between two and three years      1,062.9         539.4   
Between three and four years      455.0         1,249.1   
Between four and five years      618.3         448.2   
Over five years      1,136.2         1,267.3   
       4,411.4         3,853.6   

 


21. Provisions for liabilities and charges

 

The movements in 2011 and 2010 were as follows:

 


     Property
£m
    Other
£m
    Total
£m
 
1 January 2010      65.7        87.2        152.9   
Charged to the income statement      9.1        16.5        25.6   
New acquisitions             1.2        1.2   
Utilised      (7.0     (10.9     (17.9
Released to the income statement      (6.6     (3.4     (10.0
Transfers      (3.7     10.2        6.5   
Exchange adjustments      0.9        2.4        3.3   
31 December 2010      58.4        103.2        161.6   
Charged to the income statement      11.8        16.5        28.3   
New acquisitions      4.3        15.5        19.8   
Utilised      (10.5     (13.3     (23.8
Released to the income statement      (6.3     (6.2     (12.5
Transfers      (9.6     (8.7     (18.3
Exchange adjustments      0.2        (1.3     (1.1
31 December 2011      48.3        105.7        154.0   

 

Provisions comprise liabilities where there is uncertainty about the timing of settlement, but where a reliable estimate can be made of the amount. These include provisions for vacant space, sub-let losses and other property-related liabilities. Also included are other provisions, such as certain long-term employee benefits and legal claims, where the likelihood of settlement is considered probable.

 

21. Provisions for liabilities and charges (continued)

 

 

The Company and various of its subsidiaries are, from time to time, parties to legal proceedings and claims which arise in the ordinary course of business. The directors do not anticipate that the outcome of these proceedings and claims will have a material adverse effect on the Group’s financial position or on the results of its operations.

 


22. Share-based payments

 

Charges for share-based incentive plans were as follows:

 


     2011
£m
     2010
£m
     2009
£m
 
Share-based payments      78.8         70.4         54.9   

 

Share-based payments comprise charges for stock options and restricted stock awards to employees of the Group.

 

As of 31 December 2011, there was £149.1 million (2010: £108.7 million) of total unrecognised compensation cost related to the Group’s restricted stock plans. That cost is expected to be recognised over a period of one to two years.

 

Further information on stock options is provided in note 26.

 

Restricted stock plans

The Group operates a number of equity-settled share incentive schemes, in most cases satisfied by the delivery of stock from one of the Group’s ESOP Trusts. The most significant current schemes are as follows:

 

Renewed Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan (Renewed LEAP) and Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III (LEAP III)

Under Renewed LEAP and LEAP III, the most senior executives of the Group, including certain executive directors, commit WPP shares (‘investment shares’) in order to have the opportunity to earn additional WPP shares (‘matching shares’). The number of matching shares which a participant can receive at the end of the fixed performance period of five years is dependent on the performance (based on the Total Share Owner Return (TSR)) of the Company over that period against a comparator group of other listed communications services companies. The maximum possible number of matching shares for each of the 2011, 2010, 2009, 2008 and 2007 grants is five shares for each investment share. The 2007 Renewed LEAP plan vested in March 2012 at a match of 2.31 shares for each investment share.

 

Performance Share Awards (PSA)

Grants of stock under PSA are dependent upon annual performance targets, typically based on one or more of: operating profit, profit before taxation and operating margin. Grants are made in the year following the year of performance measurement, and vest two years after grant date provided the individual concerned is continually employed by the Group throughout this time.

 

Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group

Stock option grants under the executive stock option plan were not significant in 2011, 2010 or 2009 as the Group made grants of restricted stock (to be satisfied by stock from one of the Group’s ESOP Trusts) to participants instead. Performance conditions include continued employment over the three-year vesting period.

 

Valuation methodology

For all of these schemes, the valuation methodology is based upon fair value on grant date, which is determined by the market price on that date or the application of a Black-Scholes model, depending upon the characteristics of the scheme concerned. The assumptions underlying the Black-Scholes model are detailed in note 26, including details of assumed dividend yields. Market price on any given day is obtained from external, publicly available sources.

 

Market/Non-market conditions

Most share-based plans are subject to non-market performance conditions, such as margin or growth targets, as well as continued employment. The Renewed LEAP and LEAP III schemes are subject to a number of performance conditions, including TSR, a market-based condition.

 

For schemes without market-based performance conditions, the valuation methodology above is applied and, at each year end, the relevant accrual for each grant is revised, if appropriate, to take account of any changes in estimate of the likely number of shares expected to vest.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

22. Share-based payments (continued)

 

 

For schemes with market-based performance conditions, the probability of satisfying these conditions is assessed at grant date through a statistical model (such as the Monte Carlo Model) and applied to the fair value. This initial valuation remains fixed throughout the life of the relevant plan, irrespective of the actual outcome in terms of performance. Where a lapse occurs due to cessation of employment, the cumulative charge taken to date is reversed.

 

Movement on ordinary shares granted for significant restricted stock plans:

 

   

Non-vested
1 January
2011
number

m

    Granted
number
m
    Lapsed
number
m
    Vested
number
m
   

Non-vested
31 December
2011

number

m

 
Renewed LEAP/LEAP III 1     3.9        3.1        (0.0     (2.5     4.5   
Performance Share Awards (PSA)     5.1        4.9        (0.3     (4.8     4.9   
Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group     12.8        4.3        (1.1     (5.1     10.9   
Weighted average fair value (pence per share):                                        
Renewed LEAP/LEAP III 1     593p        668p        540p        618p        633p   
Performance Share Awards (PSA)     451p        731p        677p        408p        757p   
Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group     538     616p        524p        356p        657p   

Note

1    

The number of shares granted represents the ‘investment shares’ committed by participants at grant date for the 2011 LEAP III plan in addition to the matched shares awarded on vest date for the 2006 Renewed LEAP plan which vested in March 2011. The actual number of shares that vest for each Renewed LEAP/LEAP III plan is dependent on the extent to which the relevant performance criteria are satisfied.

 

The total fair value of shares vested for all the Group’s restricted stock plans during the year ended 31 December 2011 was £76.5 million (2010: £61.8 million, 2009: £55.0 million).

 


23. Provision for post-employment benefits

 

Companies within the Group operate a large number of pension plans, the forms and benefits of which vary with conditions and practices in the countries concerned. The Group’s pension costs are analysed as follows:

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Defined contribution plans      114.7        101.5        95.5   
Defined benefit plans charge to operating profit      20.7        19.1        20.9   
Pension costs (note 5)      135.4        120.6        116.4   
Expected return on pension plan assets (note 6)      (32.6     (30.6     (28.7
Interest on pension plan liabilities (note 6)      43.8        45.9        46.1   
       146.6        135.9        133.8   

 

Defined benefit plans

The pension costs are assessed in accordance with the advice of local independent qualified actuaries. The latest full actuarial valuations for the various pension plans were carried out at various dates in the last three years. These valuations have generally been updated by the local independent qualified actuaries to 31 December 2011.

 

The Group’s policy is to close existing defined benefit plans to new members. This§has been implemented across a significant number of the pension plans.

 

Contributions to funded plans are determined in line with local conditions and practices. Contributions in respect of unfunded plans are paid as they fall due. The total contributions (for funded plans) and benefit payments (for unfunded plans) paid for 2011 amounted to £66.8 million (2010: £53.3 million, 2009: £47.7 million).

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

 

Employer contributions and benefit payments in 2012 are expected to be in the range of £60 million to £80 million depending on the performance of the assets.

 

(a) Assumptions

The main weighted average assumptions used for the actuarial valuations at 31 December are shown in the following table:

 

     2011
% pa
     2010
% pa
     2009
% pa
     2008
% pa
 
UK                                    
Discount rate 1      4.7         5.4         5.7         6.0   
Rate of increase in salaries      3.0         3.4         3.5         3.0   
Rate of increase in pensions in payment      4.0         4.0         4.2         3.9   
Inflation      2.5         3.2         3.5         2.8   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.5         7.5         7.5         7.3   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      3.6         4.5         4.8         4.9   
Expected rate of return on insured annuities      4.7         5.4         5.7         6.0   
Expected rate of return on property      6.9         6.9         6.9         6.9   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      3.9         4.0         4.4         4.9   
Weighted average return on assets      4.6         5.4         5.6         5.7   
North America                                    
Discount rate 1      4.4         5.1         5.7         6.3   
Rate of increase in salaries      3.0         3.0         3.0         3.0   
Inflation      2.5         2.5         2.5         2.5   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.9         7.9         7.9         7.9   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      4.1         4.3         4.7         5.1   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      3.9         6.4         6.6         3.4   
Weighted average return on assets      5.9         6.4         6.5         6.6   
Western Continental Europe                                    
Discount rate 1      4.8         5.3         5.5         5.7   
Rate of increase in salaries      2.7         2.7         2.7         2.8   
Rate of increase in pensions in payment      2.0         2.0         2.0         2.1   
Inflation      2.0         2.0         2.1         2.1   
Expected rate of return on equities      7.1         7.1         7.8         7.2   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      3.8         4.4         4.1         4.5   
Expected rate of return on property      6.1         6.1         6.5         6.0   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      4.3         4.6         4.6         5.3   
Weighted average return on assets      4.7         5.0         5.1         5.3   
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe                                    
Discount rate 1      4.8         4.0         4.2         3.4   
Rate of increase in salaries      5.7         4.4         4.2         3.9   
Inflation      4.8         5.1         4.9         4.5   
Expected rate of return on equities      n/a         10.0         10.1         10.0   
Expected rate of return on bonds 1      7.3         8.0         8.2         5.3   
Expected rate of return on cash and other      5.4         1.0         1.1         2.1   
Weighted average return on assets      5.8         3.4         3.6         3.1   

Note

1    

The assumptions used for the discount rates are based on high-quality corporate bond yields, whereas the assumptions used for the expected rate of return on bonds reflect the yield expected on actual bonds held.

 

There are a number of areas in pension accounting that involve judgments made by management. These include establishing the long-term expected rates of investment return on pension assets, mortality assumptions, discount rates, inflation, rate of increase in pensions in payment and salary increases.

 

For the Group’s pension plans, the plans’ assets are invested with the objective of being able to meet current and future benefit payment needs, while controlling balance sheet volatility and future contributions. Pension plan assets are invested with a number of investment managers, and assets are diversified among equities, bonds, insured annuities, property and cash or other liquid investments. The primary use of bonds as an investment class is to match the anticipated cash flows from the plans to pay pensions. Various insurance policies have also been bought

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

historically to provide a more exact match for the cash flows, including a match for the actual mortality of specific plan members. These insurance policies effectively provide protection against both investment fluctuations and longevity risks. The strategic target allocation varies among the individual plans.

 

Management considers the types of investment classes in which the pension plan assets are invested and the expected compound return that can reasonably be expected for the portfolio to earn over time, which reflects forward-looking economic assumptions. Management reviews the expected long-term rates of return on an annual basis and revises them as appropriate.

 

Management periodically commission detailed asset and liability studies performed by third-party professional investment advisors and actuaries, that generate probability-adjusted expected future returns on those assets. These studies also project the estimated future pension payments and evaluate the efficiency of the allocation of the pension plan assets into various investment categories. The studies performed at the time these assumptions were set support the reasonableness of the return assumptions based on the target allocation of investment classes and the then current market conditions.

 

At 31 December 2011, the life expectancies underlying the value of the accrued liabilities for the main defined benefit pension plans operated by the Group were as follows:

 

Years life expectancy

after age 65

   All
plans
     North
America
     UK      Western
Conti-
nental
Europe
     Other 1  

– current pensioners

(at age 65) – male

     20.9         19.7         22.5         20.3         19.3   

– current pensioners

(at age 65) – female

     22.8         21.6         24.0         23.5         24.7   
– future pensioners (current age 45) – male      22.4         21.2         23.7         22.7         19.3   
– future pensioners (current age 45) – female      24.0         22.5         25.1         25.4         24.7   

 

Note

1    

Includes Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe.

 

The life expectancies after age 65 at 31 December 2010 were 20.7 years and 22.7 years for male and female current pensioners (at age 65) respectively, and 22.3 years and 23.9 years for male and female future pensioners (current age 45), respectively.

 

In the determination of mortality assumptions, management uses the most up-to-date mortality tables available in each country.

 

For a 0.25% increase or decrease in the discount rate at 31 December 2011, the effect on the year-end 2011 pension deficit would be a decrease or increase, respectively, of approximately £27 million.

 

(b) Assets and liabilities

At 31 December, the fair value of the assets in the pension plans, and the assessed present value of the liabilities in the pension plans are shown in the following table:

 

    2011
£m
    %     2010
£m
    %     2009
£m
    %  
Equities     168.7        25.8        188.2        29.8        168.5        28.6   
Bonds     271.4        41.5        245.7        38.9        256.8        43.7   
Insured annuities     67.6        10.4        66.3        10.5        68.7        11.7   
Property     9.4        1.4        9.6        1.5        9.8        1.7   
Cash and other     136.6        20.9        121.5        19.3        84.3        14.3   
Total fair value of assets     653.7        100.0        631.3        100.0        588.1        100.0   
Present value of liabilities     (934.5             (871.2             (836.1        
Deficit in the plans     (280.8             (239.9             (248.0        
Irrecoverable surplus     (1.1             (0.9             (3.1        
Unrecognised past service cost     (0.4             (0.7             (0.7        
Net liability 1     (282.3             (241.5             (251.8        
Plans in surplus     5.6                2.8                0.7           
Plans in deficit     (287.9             (244.3             (252.5        

 

Note

1    

The related deferred tax asset is discussed in note 15.

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

 

The total fair value of assets, present value of pension plan liabilities and deficit in the plans were £550.4 million, £819.1 million and £268.7 million in 2008 and £504.0 million, £637.6 million and £133.6 million in 2007, respectively.

 

Deficit in plans by region    2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
UK      (1.6     (3.5     (22.0
North America      (172.5     (144.4     (140.9
Western Continental Europe      (84.5     (75.9     (73.9
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe      (22.2     (16.1     (11.2
Deficit in the plans      (280.8     (239.9     (248.0

 

Some of the Group’s defined benefit plans are unfunded (or largely unfunded) by common custom and practice in certain jurisdictions. In the case of these unfunded plans, the benefit payments are made as and when they fall due. Pre-funding of these plans would not be typical business practice.

 

The following table shows the split of the deficit at 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009 between funded and unfunded pension plans.

 

    2011
Deficit
£m
    2011
Present
value  of
liabilities
£m
    2010
Deficit
£m
    2010
Present
value of
liabilities
£m
    2009
Deficit
£m
    2009
Present
value of
liabilities
£m
 
Funded plans by region                                                
UK     (1.6     (327.8     (3.5     (305.5     (22.0     (293.5
North America     (93.1     (340.2     (66.8     (306.5     (65.2     (274.5
Western Continental Europe     (36.4     (108.0     (29.7     (103.8     (25.0     (119.9
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe     (2.3     (11.1     (5.6     (21.1     (3.7     (16.1
Deficit/liabilities in the funded plans     (133.4     (787.1     (105.6     (736.9     (115.9     (704.0
Unfunded plans by region                                                
UK                                          
North America     (79.4     (79.4     (77.6     (77.6     (75.7     (75.7
Western Continental Europe     (48.1     (48.1     (46.2     (46.2     (48.9     (48.9
Asia Pacific, Latin America, Africa & Middle East and Central & Eastern Europe     (19.9     (19.9     (10.5     (10.5     (7.5     (7.5
Deficit/liabilities in the unfunded plans     (147.4     (147.4     (134.3     (134.3     (132.1     (132.1
Deficit/liabilities in the plans     (280.8     (934.5     (239.9     (871.2     (248.0     (836.1

 

In accordance with IAS 19, plans that are wholly or partially funded are considered funded plans.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

(c) Pension expense

The following table shows the breakdown of the pension expense between amounts charged to operating profit, amounts charged to finance income and finance costs and amounts recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income (OCI):

 

     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Current service cost      23.7        23.3        22.0   
Past service income      (2.8     (0.6       
Gain on settlements and curtailments      (0.2     (3.6     (1.1
Charge to operating profit      20.7        19.1        20.9   
Expected return on pension plan assets      (32.6     (30.6     (28.7
Interest on pension plan liabilities      43.8        45.9        46.1   
Charge to profit before taxation for defined benefit plans      31.9        34.4        38.3   
(Loss)/gain on pension plan assets relative to expected return      (5.7     31.9        44.0   
Experience (loss)/gain arising on the plan liabilities      (3.9     3.4        (7.6
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of the plan liabilities      (62.2     (37.9     (42.7
Change in irrecoverable surplus      (0.2     2.2        (0.9
Actuarial loss recognised in OCI      (72.0     (0.4     (7.2

 

As at 31 December 2011 the cumulative amount of net actuarial losses recognised in equity since 1 January 2001 was £252.7 million (31 December 2010: £180.7 million, 31 December 2009: £180.3 million). Of this amount, a net loss of £151.6 million was recognised since the 1 January 2004 adoption of IAS 19.

 

(d) Movement in plan liabilities

The following table shows an analysis of the movement in the pension plan liabilities for each accounting period:


     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Plan liabilities at beginning of year      871.2        836.1        819.1   
Service cost      23.7        23.3        22.0   
Interest cost      43.8        45.9        46.1   
Actuarial loss      66.1        34.5        50.3   
Benefits paid      (59.5     (57.2     (52.9
(Gain)/loss due to exchange rate movements      (2.0     9.7        (50.5
Settlements and curtailments      (13.7     (26.4     (3.3
Other 1      4.9        5.3        5.3   
Plan liabilities at end of year      934.5        871.2        836.1   

Note

1    

Other includes disposals, acquisitions, plan participants’ contributions, plan amendments and reclassifications. The reclassifications represent certain of the Group’s defined benefit plans which are included in this note for the first time in the periods presented.

 

(e) Movement in plan assets

The following table shows an analysis of the movement in the pension plan assets for each accounting period:


     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
 
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year      631.3        588.1        550.4   
Expected return on plan assets      32.6        30.6        28.7   
Actuarial (loss)/gain on plan assets      (5.7     31.9        44.0   
Employer contributions      66.8        53.3        47.7   
Benefits paid      (59.5     (57.2     (52.9
(Loss)/gain due to exchange rate movements      (1.3     5.9        (28.3
Settlements      (13.5     (22.8     (2.2
Other 1      3.0        1.5        0.7   
Fair value of plan assets at end of year      653.7        631.3        588.1   
Actual return on plan assets      26.9        62.5        72.7   

 

23. Provision for post-employment benefits (continued)

 

 

Note

1    

Other includes disposals, acquisitions, plan participants’ contributions and reclassifications. The reclassifications represent certain of the Group’s defined benefit plans which are included in this note for the first time in the periods presented.

 

(f) History of experience gains and losses


     2011
£m
    2010
£m
    2009
£m
     
(Loss)/gain on pension plan assets relative to expected return:                             
Amount      (5.7     31.9        44.0       
Percentage of plan assets      (0.9 %)      5.1     7.5    
Experience (loss)/gain arising on the plan liabilities:                             
Amount      (3.9     3.4        (7.6    
Percentage of the present value of the plan liabilities      (0.4 %)      0.4     (0.9 %)     
Total loss recognised in OCI:                             
Amount      (72. 0)      (0.4     (7.2    
Percentage of the present value of the plan liabilities      (7.7 %)      (0.0 %)      (0.9 %)     

 

The experience (loss)/gain on pension plan assets and plan liabilities was (£93.7) million and £4.4 million in 2008 and (£6.0) million and £0.1 million in 2007, respectively.

 


 

24. Risk management policies

 

Foreign currency risk

The Group’s results in pounds sterling are subject to fluctuation as a result of exchange rate movements. The Group does not hedge this translation exposure to its earnings but does hedge the currency element of its net assets using foreign currency borrowings, cross-currency swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts.

 

The Group effects these currency net asset hedges by borrowing in the same currencies as the operating (or ‘functional’) currencies of its main operating units. The majority of the Group’s debt is therefore denominated in US dollars, pounds sterling and euros. Borrowings in these currencies represented 96.1% of the Group’s gross indebtedness at 31 December 2011 (at $3,058 million, £750 million and 1,274 million) and 96.2% of the Group’s average gross debt during the course of 2011 (at $2,792 million, £986 million and 1,274 million).

 

The Group’s operations conduct the majority of their activities in their own local currency and consequently the Group has no significant transactional foreign exchange exposures. Any significant cross-border trading exposures are hedged by the use of forward foreign-exchange contracts. No speculative foreign exchange trading is undertaken.

 

Interest rate risk

The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on both interest-bearing assets and interest-bearing liabilities. The Group has a policy of actively managing its interest rate risk exposure while recognising that fixing rates on all its debt eliminates the possibility of benefiting from rate reductions and similarly, having all its debt at floating rates unduly exposes the Group to increases in rates.

 

Including the effect of interest rate and cross-currency swaps, 75.8% of the year-end US dollar debt is at fixed rates averaging 6.00% for an average period of 63 months; 73.3% of the sterling debt is at a fixed rate of 6.07% for an average period of 70 months; and 66.7% of the euro debt is at fixed rates averaging 6.50% for an average period of 50 months.

 

Other than fixed rate debt, the Group’s other fixed rates are achieved principally through interest rate swaps with the Group’s bankers. The Group also uses forward rate agreements and interest rate caps to manage exposure to interest rate changes. At 31 December 2011 no forward rate agreements or interest rate caps were in place. These interest rate derivatives are used only to hedge exposures to interest rate movements arising from the Group’s borrowings and surplus cash balances arising from its commercial activities and are not traded independently. Payments made under these instruments are accounted for on an accruals basis.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

24. Risk management policies (continued)

 

 

Going concern and liquidity risk

In considering going concern and liquidity risk, the directors have reviewed the Group’s future cash requirements and earnings projections. The directors believe these forecasts have been prepared on a prudent basis and have also considered the impact of a range of potential changes to trading performance to factor in an uncertain economic environment. The directors have concluded that the Group should be able to operate within its current facilities and comply with its banking covenants for the foreseeable future and therefore believe it is appropriate to prepare the financial statements of the Group on a going concern basis.

 

At 31 December 2011, the Group has access to £4.8 billion of committed funding and bank facilities with maturity dates spread over the years 2012 to 2021 as illustrated below:

 

    £m     2012
£m
   

2013

£m

   

2014

£m

    2015
£m
    2016
£m
    2017
£m
    2018+
£m
 

US bond $812m

(4.75% ’21)

    523.8                                                        523.8   

£ bonds £200m

(6.375% ’20)

    200.0                                                        200.0   

£ bonds £400m

(6.0% ’17)

    400.0                                                400.0           
Bank revolver ($1,050m and £375m)     1,052.0                                        1,052.0                   
Eurobonds 750m (6.625% ’16)     626.7                                        626.7                   

Eurobonds 500m

(5.25% ’15)

    417.8                                417.8                           
£450m convertible bonds (5.75% ’14)     450.0                        450.0                                   

US bond $600m

(8.0% ’14)

    386.9                        386.9                                   

US bond $369m

(5.875% ’14)

    237.7                        237.7                                   
Eurobonds 600m (4.375% ’13)     501.4                501.4                                           
TNS private placements $55m     35.5        19.3                16.2                                   
Total committed facilities available     4,831.8        19.3        501.4        1,090.8        417.8        1,678.7        400.0        723.8   
Drawn down facilities at 31 December 2011     3,859.5        19.3        501.4        1,090.8        417.8        706.4        400.0        723.8   
Undrawn committed credit facilities     972.3                                                           

 

The Group’s borrowings are evenly distributed between fixed and floating rate debt. Given the strong cash generation of the business, its debt maturity profile and available facilities, the directors believe the Group has sufficient liquidity to match its requirements for the foreseeable future.

 

Treasury activities

Treasury activity is managed centrally from London, New York and Hong Kong, and is principally concerned with the monitoring of working capital, managing external and internal funding requirements and the monitoring and management of financial market risks, in particular interest rate and foreign exchange exposures.

 

The treasury operation is not a profit centre and its activities are carried out in accordance with policies approved by the Board of Directors and subject to regular review and audit.

 

The Group manages liquidity risk by ensuring continuity and flexibility of funding even in difficult market conditions. Undrawn committed borrowing facilities are maintained in excess of peak net-borrowing levels and debt maturities are closely monitored. Targets for debt and cash position are set on an annual basis and, to assist in meeting this, working capital targets are set for all the Group’s major operations.

 

Capital risk management

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to stakeholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance. The capital structure of the Group consists of debt, which includes the borrowings disclosed in note 10, cash and cash equivalents and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in the consolidated statement of changes in equity and in notes 26 and 27.

 

Credit risk

The Group’s principal financial assets are cash and short-term deposits, trade and other receivables and investments, the carrying values of which represent the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to financial assets, as shown in note 25.

 

24. Risk management policies (continued)

 

 

The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its trade receivables. The majority of the Group’s trade receivables are due from large national or multinational companies where the risk of default is considered low. The amounts presented in the consolidated balance sheet are net of allowances for doubtful receivables, estimated by the Group’s management based on prior experience and their assessment of the current economic environment. A relatively small number of clients make up a significant percentage of the Group’s debtors, but no single client represents more than 5% of total trade receivables as at 31 December 2011.

 

The credit risk on liquid funds and derivative financial instruments is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit-ratings assigned by international credit-rating agencies or banks that have been financed by their government.

 

A relatively small number of clients contribute a significant percentage of the Group’s consolidated revenues. The Group’s clients generally are able to reduce advertising and marketing spending or cancel projects at any time for any reason. There can be no assurance that any of the Group’s clients will continue to utilise the Group’s services to the same extent, or at all, in the future. A significant reduction in advertising and marketing spending by, or the loss of one or more of, the Group’s largest clients, if not replaced by new client accounts or an increase in business from existing clients, would adversely affect the Group’s prospects, business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Sensitivity analysis

The following sensitivity analysis addresses the effect of currency and interest rate risks on the Group’s financial instruments. The analysis assumes that all hedges are highly effective.

 

Currency risk

A 10% weakening of sterling against the Group’s major currencies would result in the following losses, which would be posted directly to equity. These losses would arise on the retranslation of foreign currency denominated borrowings and derivatives designated as effective net investment hedges of overseas net assets. These losses would be partially offset in equity by a corresponding gain arising on the retranslation of the related hedged foreign currency net assets. A 10% strengthening of sterling would have an equal and opposite effect. There are no other material foreign exchange exposures which would create gains or losses to the functional reporting currencies of individual entities in the Group.

 

     2011
£m
     2010
£m
 
US dollar      91.5         91.0   
Euro      71.8         73.7   

 

Interest rate risk

A one percentage point increase in market interest rates for all currencies in which the Group had cash and borrowings at 31 December 2011 would increase profit before tax by approximately £3.7 million (2010: £8.0 million). A one percentage decrease in market interest rates would have an equal and opposite effect. This has been calculated by applying the interest rate change to the Group’s variable rate cash and borrowings.

 


 

25. Financial instruments

 

Currency derivatives

The Group utilises currency derivatives to hedge significant future transactions and cash flows and the exchange risk arising on translation of the Group’s investments in foreign operations. The Group is a party to a variety of foreign currency derivatives in the management of its exchange rate exposures. The instruments purchased are primarily denominated in the currencies of the Group’s principal markets.

 

At 31 December 2011, the fair value of the Group’s currency derivatives is estimated to be a net liability of approximately £75.5 million (2010: £62.9 million). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date, comprising £57.9 million (2010: £60.4 million) assets included in trade and other receivables and £133.4 million (2010: £123.3 million) liabilities included in trade and other payables. The amounts charged to and deferred in equity during the year for currency derivatives that are designated and effective hedges were £1.9 million (2010: £27.9 million) for net investment hedges and £14.0 million (2010: £34.8 million) for cash flow hedges.

 

Changes in the fair value relating to the ineffective portion of the currency derivatives amounted to a gain of £3.1 million (2010: £11.7 million, 2009: £3.3 million) which is included in the revaluation of financial instruments for the year. This gain resulted from a £12.8 million loss on hedging instruments and a £15.9 million gain on hedged items.

 

F-30


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

The Group currently designates its foreign currency-denominated debt and cross-currency swaps as hedging instruments against the currency risk associated with the translation of its foreign operations.

 

At the balance sheet date, the total nominal amount of outstanding forward foreign exchange contracts not designated as hedges was £124.4 million (2010: £130.1 million). The Group estimates the fair value of these contracts to be a net asset of £2.6 million (2010: liability of £0.8 million).

 

These arrangements are designed to address significant exchange exposure and are renewed on a revolving basis as required.

 

Interest rate swaps

The Group uses interest rate swaps as hedging instruments in fair value hedges to manage its exposure to interest rate movements on its borrowings. Contracts with nominal values of 600 million have fixed interest receipts at 4.38% up until December 2013 and have floating interest payments averaging EURIBOR plus 0.56%. Contracts with a nominal value of 500 million have fixed interest receipts of 5.25% up until January 2015 and have floating interest payments averaging EURIBOR plus 0.80%. Contracts with a nominal value of 100 million have fixed interest payments of 5.56% until June 2014 and have floating rate receipts averaging EURIBOR plus 0.96%.

 

Contracts with a nominal value of £200 million have fixed interest receipts of 6.00% up until April 2017 and have floating rate payments averaging LIBOR plus 0.64%.

 

A contract with a nominal value of $45 million has fixed interest receipts averaging 6.29% until on average July 2013 and has floating rate payments averaging LIBOR plus 0.59%.

 

The fair value of interest rate swaps entered into at 31 December 2011 is estimated to be a net asset of approximately £121.0 million (2010: £129.0 million). These amounts are based on market values of equivalent instruments at the balance sheet date, comprising £127.5 million (2010: £133.4 million) assets included in trade and other receivables and £6.5 million (2010: £4.4 million) liabilities included in trade and other payables.

 

Changes in the fair value relating to the ineffective portion of interest rate swaps amounted to a loss of £9.5 million (2010: gain of £12.6 million, 2009: gain of £11.7 million) which is included in the revaluation of financial instruments for the year. This loss resulted from a £8.1 million loss on hedging instruments and a £1.4 million loss on hedged items.

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

An analysis of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities by accounting classification is set out below:

 

   

Derivatives

in

designated
hedge
relationships

    Held
for
trading
    Loans &
receivables
    Available
for sale
    Amortised
cost
    Carrying
value
 
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2011                                                
Other investments                          190.8               190.8   
Cash and short-term deposits                   1,946.6                      1,946.6   
Bank overdrafts and loans                                 (518.4     (518.4
Bonds and bank loans                                 (3,893.0     (3,893.0
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due within one year                   6,718.4                      6,718.4   
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due after more than one year                   76.5                      76.5   
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year                                 (7,376.7     (7,376.7
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year                                 (10.2     (10.2
Derivative assets     185.4        3.1                             188.5   
Derivative liabilities     (139.9     (0.5                          (140.4
Liabilities in respectof put options            (168.3                          (168.3
      45.5        (165.7     8,741.5        190.8        (11,798.3     (2,986.2

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

   

Derivatives

in
designated
hedge
relationships

    Held
for
trading
    Loans &
receivables
    Available
for sale
   

Amortised

cost

    Carrying
value
 
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2010                                                
Other investments                          173.7               173.7   
Cash and short-term deposits                   1,965.2                      1,965.2   
Bank overdrafts and loans                                 (255.4     (255.4
Bonds and bank loans                                 (3,598.2     (3,598.2
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due within one year 1                   6,774.2                      6,774.2   
Trade and other receivables: amounts falling due after more than one year                   77.3                      77.3   
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due within one year                                 (7,769.9     (7,769.9
Trade and other payables: amounts falling due after more than one year                                 (11.4     (11.4
Derivative assets     168.6        26.1                             194.7   
Derivative liabilities     (123.3     (6.1                          (129.4
Liabilities in respect of put options            (171.0                          (171.0
      45.3        (151.0     8,816.7        173.7        (11,634.9     (2,750.2

 

Note

1    

Comparative figure has been restated to be consistent with current year presentation.

 

The following table provides an analysis of financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, grouped into levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

 

Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

 

Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices);

 

Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

 

25. Financial instruments (continued)

 

 

     Level 1
£m
     Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
    Carrying
value
£m
 
2011                                  
Derivatives in designated hedge relationships                                  
Derivative assets              185.4               185.4   
Derivative liabilities              (139.9            (139.9
Held for trading                                  
Derivative assets              3.1               3.1   
Derivative liabilities              (0.5            (0.5
Liabilities in respect of put options                     (168.3     (168.3
Available for sale                                  
Other investments                     190.8        190.8   
               48.1        22.5        70.6   

 

     Level 1
£m
     Level 2
£m
    Level 3
£m
    Carrying
value
£m
 
2010                                  
Derivatives in designated hedge relationships                                  
Derivative assets              168.6               168.6   
Derivative liabilities              (123.3            (123.3
Held for trading                                  
Derivative assets              26.1               26.1   
Derivative liabilities              (6.1            (6.1
Liabilities in respect of put options                     (171.0     (171.0
Available for sale                                  
Other investments                     173.7        173.7   
               65.3        2.7        68.0   

 

Reconciliation of level 3 fair value measurements:

 

     Liabilities in
respect of
put options
£m
    Other
investments
£m
   

Carrying

value

£m

 
1 January 2010      (168.2     276.2        108.0   
Losses recognised in the income statement      (3.6     (35.3     (38.9
Losses recognised in other comprehensive income             (61.3     (61.3
Exchange adjustments      (3.1     (23.4     (26.5
Additions      (5.9     20.2        14.3   
Disposals             (2.7     (2.7
Settlements      9.8               9.8   
31 December 2010      (171.0     173.7        2.7   
Losses recognised in the income statement      (30.9     (30.8     (61.7
Gains recognised in other comprehensive income             11.3        11.3   
Exchange adjustments      5.7               5.7   
Additions      (29.6     36.6        7.0   
Settlements      57.5               57.5   
31 December 2011      (168.3     190.8        22.5   

 

The fair value of financial assets and liabilities are based on quoted market prices where available. Where the market value is not available, the Group has estimated relevant fair values on the basis of publicly available information from outside sources or on the basis of discounted cash flow models where appropriate.

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


26. Authorised and issued share capital

 

     Equity
ordinary
shares
    Nominal
value
£m
 
Authorised                 
1 January 2010      1,750,000,000        175.0   
31 December 2010      1,750,000,000        175.0   
31 December 2011      1,750,000,000        175.0   
                  
Issued and fully paid                 
1 January 2010      1,256,491,314        125.6   
Exercise of share options      7,899,907        0.8   
31 December 2010      1,264,391,221        126.4   
Exercise of share options      5,548,684        0.6   
Share cancellations      (6,955,523     (0.7
Scrip dividend      3,051,689        0.3   
Other      337,750          
31 December 2011      1,266,373,821        126.6   

 

Company’s own shares

The Company’s holdings of own shares are stated at cost and represent shares held in treasury and purchases by the Employee Share Ownership Plan (‘ESOP’) trusts of shares in WPP plc for the purpose of funding certain of the Group’s share-based incentive plans.

 

The trustees of the ESOP purchase the Company’s ordinary shares in the open market using funds provided by the Company. The Company also has an obligation to make regular contributions to the ESOP to enable it to meet its administrative costs. The number and market value of the ordinary shares of the Company held by the ESOP at 31 December 2011 was 20,599,871 (2010: 22,083,378), and £139.2 million (2010: £174.3 million) respectively. The number and market value of ordinary shares held in treasury at 31 December 2011 was 6,351,371 (2010: 2,172,126) and £42.9 million (2010: £17.1 million) respectively.

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

Share options

WPP Executive Share Option Scheme

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 4,900,445 and unexercised options over ADRs of 1,075,185 have been granted under the WPP Executive Share Option Scheme as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise dates  
12,195      3.414         2012 - 2018   
21,197      3.763         2006 - 2013   
372,697      4.210         2005 - 2012   
22,994      4.210         2005 - 2013   
84,311      4.438         2005 - 2012   
37,634      4.615         2007 - 2013   
2,000,000      5.490         2007 - 2014   
21,830      5.520         2008 - 2014   
1,051,407      5.535         2007 - 2014   
4,939      5.535         2007 - 2015   
1,185      5.535         2008 - 2014   
844,336      5.595         2006 - 2013   
10,614      5.595         2006 - 2014   
2,546      5.595         2007 - 2013   
2,902      5.725         2007 - 2014   
11,423      5.775         2009 - 2015   
15,814      5.818         2008 - 2015   
23,244      5.895         2008 - 2015   
14,938      5.903         2011 - 2018   
81,842      6.718         2009 - 2016   
45,153      7.180         2005 - 2012   
12,447      7.378         2014 - 2021   
192,285      7.550         2005 - 2012   
1,403      7.550         2006 - 2012   
11,109      7.723         2010 - 2017   

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise dates  
3,844      26.010         2012 - 2019   
1,662      30.080         2006 - 2013   
1,644      30.410         2011 - 2018   
206,692      33.200         2005 - 2012   
334,499      47.410         2006 - 2013   
1,548      48.450         2007 - 2014   
5,819      50.670         2008 - 2015   
373,602      50.800         2007 - 2014   
9,508      51.220         2007 - 2014   
7,069      53.030         2005 - 2012   
85,869      54.050         2005 - 2012   
4,488      55.740         2008 - 2015   
17,616      57.020         2008 - 2015   
13,686      58.460         2009 - 2016   
2,111      59.170         2011 - 2018   
1,250      63.900         2009 - 2020   
4,278      75.940         2010 - 2017   

 

F-33


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

WPP Worldwide Share Ownership Program

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 10,415,492 and unexercised options over ADRs of 1,537,128 have been granted under the WPP Worldwide Share Ownership Program as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise dates  
78,100      3.903         2006 - 2013   
1,400      3.903         2007 - 2013   
2,250      4.210         2005 - 2012   
625      4.210         2005 - 2013   
23,625      4.819         2011 - 2018   
123,175      5.435         2007 - 2014   
25,000      5.483         2012 - 2016   
1,315,538      5.483         2012 - 2019   
9,823      5.483         2012 - 2020   
236,607      5.483         2013 - 2019   
130,305      5.608         2012 - 2019   
2,125      5.775         2008 - 2015   
11,700      5.913         2011 - 2018   
53,375      5.917         2011 - 2018   
633,206      6.028         2011 - 2018   
256,650      6.195         2008 - 2015   
117,625      6.268         2014 - 2018   
2,884,980      6.268         2014 - 2021   
420,000      6.268         2015 - 2021   
4,000      6.668         2009 - 2017   
43,500      6.740         2009 - 2016   
433,575      6.938         2009 - 2016   
13,600      7.005         2010 - 2017   
16,375      7.113         2013 - 2017   
2,133,019      7.113         2013 - 2020   
274,539      7.113         2014 - 2020   
259,475      7.180         2005 - 2012   
5,125      7.180         2006 - 2012   
63,750      7.478         2011 - 2017   
86,575      7.543         2014 - 2020   
755,850      7.718         2010 - 2017   

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise dates  
21,520      30.800         2006 - 2013   
236,667      44.560         2012 - 2019   
427,081      49.230         2014 - 2021   
30,310      49.880         2007 - 2014   
18,010      53.030         2005 - 2012   
311,889      56.560         2013 - 2020   
168,376      59.500         2011 - 2018   
82,185      59.520         2008 - 2015   
108,625      60.690         2009 - 2016   
132,465      75.760         2010 - 2017   

 

The Grey Global Group, Inc 1994 Stock Incentive Plan

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ADRs of 5,459 have been granted under the Grey Global Group, Inc 1994 Stock Incentive Plan as follows:

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise dates  
1,827      28.300         2007 - 2012   
3,632      30.830         2007 - 2012   

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

24/7 Real Media, Inc 2002 Stock Incentive Plan

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ADRs of 43,783 have been granted under the 24/7 Real Media, Inc. 2002 Stock Incentive Plan as follows:

 

Number of ADRs

under option

   Exercise price
per ADR ($)
     Exercise
dates
 
8      1.340         2007 - 2013   
368      15.880         2007 - 2014   
427      17.150         2007 - 2014   
187      20.070         2007 - 2015   
12      20.840         2007 - 2014   
66      22.490         2007 - 2015   
79      23.180         2007 - 2015   
78      23.440         2007 - 2015   
19      23.820         2007 - 2014   
263      24.200         2007 - 2014   
50      25.150         2007 - 2014   
787      27.120         2007 - 2015   
12,091      27.500         2007 - 2015   
170      34.620         2007 - 2015   
82      35.060         2007 - 2015   
89      38.870         2007 - 2015   
21,607      40.650         2007 - 2015   
110      41.470         2007 - 2015   
110      45.290         2007 - 2016   
118      46.050         2007 - 2016   
69      46.620         2007 - 2016   
115      49.600         2007 - 2016   
314      49.670         2007 - 2016   
89      50.490         2007 - 2016   
236      50.750         2008 - 2017   
472      51.380         2008 - 2017   
156      52.590         2008 - 2017   
92      53.100         2006 - 2017   
157      53.480         2008 - 2017   
314      54.110         2007 - 2016   
944      54.240         2007 - 2016   
472      54.560         2007 - 2016   
314      55.260         2007 - 2016   
74      55.640         2007 - 2016   
59      55.760         2007 - 2016   
105      55.890         2007 - 2016   
157      56.270         2007 - 2016   
574      56.720         2007 - 2016   
235      58.940         2007 - 2017   
393      60.020         2007 - 2016   
78      61.230         2008 - 2017   
108      61.920         2007 - 2016   
314      62.050         2007 - 2016   
157      63.320         2008 - 2017   
708      63.890         2008 - 2017   
112      64.270         2007 - 2016   
54      64.650         2007 - 2016   
78      65.540         2007 - 2016   
112      67.580         2007 - 2016   

 

F-34


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

Taylor Nelson Sofres plc

2005 Long Term Incentive Plan

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 32,979 have been granted under the Taylor Nelson Sofres Plc 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise
dates
 
32,979              2012   

 

2008 New Share Plan

As at 31 December 2011 unexercised options over ordinary shares of 28,640 have been granted under the Taylor Nelson Sofres Plc 2008 New Share Plan as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise
dates
 
28,640              2012   

 

2005 Key Employee Equity Plan

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 4,274 have been granted under the Taylor Nelson Sofres Plc 2005 Key Employee Equity Plan as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise
dates
 
4,274              2012   

 

1999 Worldwide Employee Sharesave Plan

As at 31 December 2011, unexercised options over ordinary shares of 936,798 have been granted under the Taylor Nelson Sofres Plc 1999 Worldwide Employee Sharesave Plan as follows:

 

Number of ordinary

shares under option

   Exercise price
per share (£)
     Exercise
dates
 
784,223      1.730         2013 - 2015   
5,113      1.950         2011 - 2012   
2,648      2.560         2009 - 2012   
137,408      2.650         2012 - 2014   
7,406      3.000         2011 - 2013   

 

The aggregate status of the WPP Share Option Plans during 2011 was as follows:

 

Movements on options granted (represented in ordinary shares)

 

   

1

January
2011

    Granted     Exercised     Lapsed    

Outstanding

31
December

2011

   

Exercisable
31

December
2011

 
WPP   14,706,582     12,447     (3,946,384)     (496,275)     10,276,370     10,232,508  
WWOP     16,010,317        5,778,950        (992,659     (2,695,476     18,101,132        5,572,561   
Tempus     24,306               (24,306                     
Grey     192,560               (165,265            27,295        27,295   
24/7     270,100               (33,430     (17,755     218,915        171,685   
TNS     1,411,221               (386,640     (21,890     1,002,691        15,167   
      32,615,086        5,791,397        (5,548,684     (3,231,396     29,626,403        16,019,216   

 

Weighted-average exercise price for options over:

 

          Outstanding     Exercisable  
   

1

January
2011

    Granted     Exercised     Lapsed     31
December
2011
   

31

December
2011

 
Ordinary shares (£)                                           
WPP     5.489        7.540        5.232        6.551        5.510        5.510   
WWOP     6.218        6.311        6.197        6.782        6.463        6.706   
Tempus     4.920                                      
Grey     3.499                                      
TNS     1.836               2.024        2.232        1.755        2.569   
ADRs ($)                                                
WPP     45.814               38.185        46.409        46.836        46.910   
WWOP     56.457        49.230        48.992        56.097        54.569        61.742   
Grey     30.417               30.524        n/a        29.983        29.983   
24/7     38.610               34.982        45.749        38.585        38.018   

 

26. Authorised and issued share capital (continued)

 

 

Options over ordinary shares

Outstanding

 

Range of

exercise

prices

£

  

Weighted average

exercise price

£

   Weighted average
contractual life
Months
nil – 7.723    5.888    73

 

Options over ADRs

Outstanding

 

Range of

exercise

prices

$

  

Weighted average

exercise price

$

   Weighted average
contractual life
Months
1.340 – 75.940    48.103    66

 

As at 31 December 2011 there was £7.9 million (2010: £6.8 million) of total unrecognised compensation cost related to share options. That cost is expected to be recognised over a weighted average period of 17 months (2010: 21 months).

 

Share options are satisfied out of newly issued shares.

 

The weighted average fair value of options granted in the year calculated using the Black-Scholes model, was as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
Fair value of UK options (shares)      120.6p         144.5p         115.5p   
Fair value of US options (ADRs)    $ 9.20       $ 10.97       $ 8.95   
Weighted average assumptions:                           

UK Risk-free interest rate

     0.84%         1.76%         2.27%   

US Risk-free interest rate

     0.67%         1.05%         1.85%   

Expected life (months)

     48         48         48   

Expected volatility

     30%         30%         30%   

Dividend yield

     2.5%         2.5%         2.5%   

 

Options are issued at an exercise price equal to market value on the date of grant.

 

The weighted average share price of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2011 was £7.11 (2010: £6.78, 2009: £4.72) and the weighted average ADR price for the same period was $57.09 (2010: $52.51, 2009: $37.23).

 

Expected volatility is sourced from external market data and represents the historic volatility in the Group’s share price over a period equivalent to the expected option life.

 

Expected life is based on a review of historic exercise behaviour in the context of the contractual terms of the options, as described in more detail below.

 

Terms of share option plans

The Worldwide Share Ownership Program is open for participation to employees with at least two years’ employment in the Group. It is not available to those participating in other share-based incentive programs or to executive directors. The vesting period for each grant is three years and there are no performance conditions other than continued employment with the Group.

 

The Executive Stock Option Plan has historically been open for participation to WPP Group Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group. It is not currently offered to parent company executive directors. The vesting period is three years and performance conditions include achievement of various TSR (Total Share Owner Return) and EPS (Earnings per Share) objectives, as well as continued employment. In 2005, the Group moved away from the issuance of stock options for Leaders, Partners and High Potential Group and has since largely made grants of restricted stock instead (note 22).

 

The Group grants stock options with a life of 10 years, including the vesting period. The terms of stock options with performance conditions are such that if, after nine years and eight months, the performance conditions have not been met, then the stock option will vest automatically.

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


27. Other reserves

 

Other reserves comprise the following:

 

   

Capital
redemption
reserve

£m

   

Equity

reserve
£m

   

Revaluation
reserve

£m

   

Translation

reserve

£m

   

Total

other
reserves
£m

 
1 January 2009            (82.9     87.3        1,246.1        1,250.5   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          (142.2     (142.2
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                   (13.5            (13.5
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            (36.4                   (36.4
Equity component of convertible bonds (net of deferred tax)            34.7                      34.7   
31 December 2009            (84.6     73.8        1,103.9        1,093.1   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          146.6        146.6   
Loss on revaluation of available for sale investments                   (59.8            (59.8
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            2.9                      2.9   
31 December 2010            (81.7     14.0        1,250.5        1,182.8   
Exchange adjustments on foreign currency net investments                          (250.0     (250.0
Gain on revaluation of available for sale investments                   11.3               11.3   
Recognition and remeasurement of financial instruments            (5.9                   (5.9
Share cancellations     0.7                             0.7   
31 December 2011     0.7        (87.6     25.3        1,000.5        938.9   

 


 

28. Acquisitions

 

The Group accounts for acquisitions in accordance with IFRS 3 (revised) Business Combinations. IFRS 3 (revised) requires the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities (other than non-current assets or disposal groups held for sale) to be recognised at fair value at acquisition date. In assessing fair value at acquisition date, management make their best estimate of the likely outcome where the fair value of an asset or liability may be contingent on a future event. In certain instances, the underlying transaction giving rise to an estimate may not be resolved until some years after the acquisition date. IFRS 3 (revised) requires the release to profit of any acquisition reserves which subsequently become excess in the same way as any excess costs over those provided at acquisition date are charged to profit. At each period end management assess provisions and other balances established in respect of acquisitions for their continued probability of occurrence and amend the relevant value accordingly through the consolidated income statement or as an adjustment to goodwill as appropriate under IFRS 3 (revised).

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2011

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value
to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets      2.0        117.6        119.6   
Property, plant and equipment      14.4        (0.4     14.0   
Cash (net of overdrafts)      98.8               98.8   
Trade receivables due within one year      211.3        (1.3     210.0   
Other current assets      16.8        1.3        18.1   
Total assets      343.3        117.2        460.5   
Current liabilities      (283.1            (283.1
Trade and other payables due after one year      (5.7     (27.4     (33.1
Deferred tax liabilities             (37.2     (37.2
Provisions      (3.7     (16.1     (19.8
Bank loans      (17.5            (17.5
Total liabilities      (310.0     (80.7     (390.7
Net assets      33.3        36.5        69.8   
Non-controlling interests                      (20.7
Fair value of equity stake in associate undertakings before acquisition of controlling interest                      (72.6
Goodwill                      454.5   
Consideration                      431.0   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      350.6   
Payments due to vendors (note 19)                      80.4   

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and skilled staff to deliver services to our clients. Goodwill that is expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £126.0 million.

 

Non-controlling interests in acquired companies are measured at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquirees’ identifiable net assets.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material. There were no material acquisitions completed between 31 December 2011 and the date the financial statements have been authorised for issue.

 

F-36


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2010

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value
to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets      0.7        25.5        26.2   
Property, plant and equipment      9.1               9.1   
Cash      57.0               57.0   
Trade receivables due within one year      161.7               161.7   
Other current assets      56.2               56.2   
Total assets      284.7        25.5        310.2   
Current liabilities      (259.1            (259.1
Trade and other payables due after one year      (1.1     (3.4     (4.5
Deferred tax liabilities      (0.1     (9.3     (9.4
Provisions      (0.5     (0.7     (1.2
Total liabilities      (260.8     (13.4     (274.2
Net assets      23.9        12.1        36.0   
Non-controlling interests                      (0.5
Fair value of equity stake in associate undertakings before acquisition of controlling interest                      (32.6
Goodwill                      161.1   
Consideration                      164.0   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      131.2   
Payments due to vendors (note 19)                      32.8   

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and skilled staff to deliver services to our clients. Goodwill expected to be deductible for tax purposes is £14.3 million.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material.

 

28. Acquisitions (continued)

 

 

Acquisitions in 2009

The Group acquired a number of subsidiaries in the year. The following table sets out the book values of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired and their fair value to the Group. The fair value adjustments for certain acquisitions have been determined provisionally at the balance sheet date.

 

     Book
value at
acquisition
£m
    Fair value
adjustments
£m
    Fair
value to
Group
£m
 
Intangible assets             6.6        6.6   
Property, plant and equipment      2.6               2.6   
Current assets      17.0               17.0   
Total assets      19.6        6.6        26.2   
Current liabilities      (11.8     (0.1     (11.9
Trade and other payables due after one year      (1.2            (1.2
Deferred tax liabilities             (2.8     (2.8
Provisions      (0.1            (0.1
Total liabilities      (13.1     (2.9     (16.0
Net assets      6.5        3.7        10.2   
Non-controlling interest                      (2.4
Goodwill                      13.1   
Consideration                      20.9   
Consideration satisfied by:                         
Cash                      15.4   
Payments due to vendors                      4.6   
Capitalised acquisition costs                      0.9   

 

Goodwill arising from acquisitions represents the value of synergies with our existing portfolio of businesses and skilled staff to deliver services to our clients.

 

The contribution to revenue and operating profit of acquisitions completed in the year was not material.

 


29. Principal subsidiary undertakings

 

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Group are:

 

     Country of Incorporation
Grey Global Group, Inc    US
J. Walter Thompson Company, Inc    US
GroupM Worldwide, Inc    US
The Ogilvy Group, Inc    US
Young & Rubicam, Inc    US
TNS Group Holdings Ltd    UK

 

All of these subsidiaries are operating companies and are 100% owned by the Group.

 


30. Related party transactions

 

From time to time the Group enters into transactions with its associate undertakings. These transactions were not material for any of the years presented.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

Notes to the consolidated financial statements (continued)

 

 


31. Reconciliation of profit before interest and taxation to headline PBIT

 

Reconciliation of profit before interest and taxation to headline PBIT:


    

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

   

2009

£m

 
Profit before interest and taxation      1,258.3        1,028.2        818.7   
Amortisation and impairment of acquired intangible assets      172.0        170.5        172.6   
Goodwill impairment             10.0        44.3   
Gains on disposal of investments    (0.4)     (4.1)     (31.1)  
Gains on re-measurement of equity on acquisition of controlling interest      (31.6     (13.7       
Investment write-downs      32.8        37.5        11.1   
Share of exceptional (gains)/losses of associates      (2.1     0.3        1.6   
Headline PBIT      1,429.0        1,228.7        1,017.2   
Headline PBIT margin (as a percent of revenue)      14.3     13.2     11.7

 


32. Condensed consolidating financial information

 

In November 2011, WPP Finance 2010 issued $812 million of 4.75% bonds due November 2021, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as subsidiary guarantors. $312 million of these bonds were issued in exchange for $281 million of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014 which were issued by WPP Finance (UK). Consequently, the amount in issue of the 5.875% bonds due June 2014 has reduced to $369 million from the previous $650 million.

 

WPP Finance (UK) is the issuer of $369 million of 5.875% bonds due June 2014, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings as subsidiary guarantors, previously registered under the Securities Act of 1933. A Form 15 giving notice of termination of registration was filed with the SEC in relation to this security on 2 August 2006. In June 2009 WPP Finance (UK) issued $600 million of 8% bonds due September 2014, with WPP plc as parent guarantor and WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited as subsidiary guarantors.

 

The issuer and guarantors of the bonds are each subject to the reporting requirements under section 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Accordingly, condensed consolidating financial information containing financial information for WPP Finance (UK), WPP Finance 2010 and the guarantors is presented beginning on page F-39. Condensed consolidating financial information is prepared in accordance with IFRS, except to the extent that, in the parent company, subsidiary issuer and subsidiary guarantors columns investments in subsidiaries are accounted for under the equity method of accounting. Under the equity method, earnings of subsidiaries are reflected as “share of results of subsidiaries” in the income statement and as “investment in subsidiaries” in the balance sheet, as required by the SEC.

 

Although the $600 million and $812 million bonds do not have the identical subsidiary guarantor structure to the $369 million bonds, the exclusion of the financial information of Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings has no financial impact on the columns presented in the condensed consolidating financial information for the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009, as it is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of WPP Air 1 Limited with no operations or cash flows of its own and its sole assets are its interests in certain operating subsidiaries.

 

In the event that WPP Finance (UK) and WPP Finance 2010 fail to pay the holders of the securities, thereby requiring WPP plc, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings or WPP Air 1 Limited to make payment pursuant to the terms of its full and unconditional, and joint and several guarantee of those securities, there is no impediment to WPP plc, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited, Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings or WPP Air 1 Limited in obtaining reimbursement for any such payments from WPP Finance (UK) and WPP Finance 2010.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating income statement information

 

For the year ended 31 December 2011, £m

 

    

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —          —          —          —          10,021.8        —          10,021.8   

Direct costs

     —          —          —          —          (783.3     —          (783.3

Gross profit

     —          —          —          —          9,238.5        —          9,238.5   

Operating costs

     (5.5     (62.5     —          —          (7,978.3     —          (8,046.3

Operating profit/(loss)

     (5.5     (62.5     —          —          1,260.2        —          1,192.2   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     886.4        1,148.8        (1.9 )     —          —          (2,033.3     —     

Share of results of associates

     —          —          —          —          66.1        —          66.1   

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

     880.9        1,086.3        (1.9     —          1,326.3        (2,033.3     1,258.3   

Finance income

     —          60.8        3.9        0.8        31.8        —          97.3   

Finance costs

     (40.8     (268.5     (75.0     (2.7     89.8        —          (297.2

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —          4.7        —          —          (54.7     —          (50.0

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     840.1        883.3        (73.0     (1.9     1,393.2        (2,033.3     1,008.4   

Taxation

     —          3.1        —          —          (95.0     —          (91.9

Profit/(loss) for the year

     840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,298.2        (2,033.3     916.5   

Attributable to:

                                                        

Equity holders of the parent

     840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,221.8        (2,033.3     840.1   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —          76.4        —          76.4   
       840.1        886.4        (73.0     (1.9     1,298.2        (2,033.3     916.5   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, £m

    

WPP

plc

   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —          —          —          —           9,331.0        —          9,331.0   

Direct costs

     —          —          —          —           (770.5     —          (770.5

Gross profit

     —          —          —          —           8,560.5        —          8,560.5   

Operating costs

     (3.1     19.4        (0.1     —           (7,603.7     —          (7,587.5

Operating profit/(loss)

     (3.1     19.4        (0.1     —           956.8        —          973.0   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     626.8        734.7        —          —           —          (1,361.5     —     

Share of results of associates

     —          —          —          —           55.2        —          55.2   

Profit/(loss) before interest and taxation

     623.7        754.1        (0.1     —           1,012.0        (1,361.5     1,028.2   

Finance income

     —          94.6        18.3        —           (31.2     —          81.7   

Finance costs

     (37.7     (224.5     (57.6     —           43.0        —          (276.8

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —          0.7        —          —           17.5        —          18.2   

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     586.0        624.9        (39.4     —           1,041.3        (1,361.5     851.3   

Taxation

     —          1.9        —          —           (192.2     —          (190.3

Profit/(loss) for the year

     586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           849.1        (1,361.5     661.0   

Attributable to:

                                                              

Equity holders of the parent

     586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           774.1        (1,361.5     586.0   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           75.0        —          75.0   
       586.0        626.8        (39.4     —           849.1        (1,361.5     661.0   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-39


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating income statement information (continued)

 

For the year ended 31 December 2009, £m

     WPP
plc
   

Subsidiary

Guarantors 1

    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Revenue

     —          —          —          —           8,684.3        —          8,684.3   

Direct costs

     —          —          —          —           (703.6     —          (703.6

Gross profit

     —          —          —          —           7,980.7        —          7,980.7   

Operating costs

     (5.0     (100.4     —          —           (7,113.6     —          (7,219.0

Operating profit/(loss)

     (5.0     (100.4     —          —           867.1        —          761.7   

Share of results of subsidiaries

     465.5        733.6        —          —           —          (1,199.1     —     

Share of results of associates

     —          —          —          —           57.0        —          57.0   

Profit before interest and taxation

     460.5        633.2        —          —           924.1        (1,199.1     818.7   

Finance income

     —          165.8        14.6        —           (30.0     —          150.4   

Finance costs

     (22.8 )     (340.3     (42.5     —           50.2        —          (355.4

Revaluation of financial instruments

     —          6.0        —          —           42.9        —          48.9   

Profit/(loss) before taxation

     437.7        464.7        (27.9     —           987.2        (1,199.1     662.6   

Taxation

     —          0.8        —          —           (156.5     —          (155.7

Profit/(loss) for the year

     437.7        465.5        (27.9     —           830.7        (1,199.1     506.9   

Attributable to:

                                                         

Equity holders of the parent

     437.7        465.5        (27.9     —           761.5        (1,199.1     437.7   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           69.2        —          69.2   
       437.7        465.5        (27.9     —           830.7        (1,199.1     506.9   

 

Note

1  

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating cash flow statement information

 

For the year ended 31 December 2011, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK)

    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    

Consolidated

WPP plc

 
Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities      474.2        (404.7     155.3        (518.3     958.7        —           665.2   
Investing activities                                                          
Acquisitions and disposals      —          —          —          —          (469.8     —           (469.8
Purchases of property, plant and equipment      —          (5.0     —          —          (211.1     —           (216.1

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —          (37.1     —           (37.1
Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment      —          0.5       —          —          12.7        —           13.2   
Net cash outflow from investing activities      —          (4.5     —          —          (705.3     —           (709.8
Financing activities                                                          
Share option proceeds      28.8        —          —          —          —          —           28.8   
Cash consideration for non-controlling interests      —          —          —          —          (62.6     —           (62.6
Share repurchases and buy-backs      (75.7 )     —          —          —          (106.5     —           (182.2
Net increase/(decrease) in borrowings      —          —          (201.4 )     523.8        (21.0     —           301.4   
Financing and share issue costs      —          —          —          (5.5     (6.4     —           (11.9
Capital contribution (paid)/received      (554.9     475.1       —          —          79.8       —           —     
Equity dividends paid      (18.0     (121.0     —          —          (79.4 )     —           (218.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —          (62.2     —           (62.2
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities      (619.8     354.1        (201.4 )     518.3        (258.3     —           (207.1
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents      (145.6     (55.1     (46.1     —          (4.9     —           (251.7
Translation differences      (0.2     (29.2     3.7        —          (4.2     —           (29.9
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year      1.4        (2,839.2     722.0        —          3,825.6        —           1,709.8   
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year      (144.4     (2,923.5     679.6        —          3,816.5        —           1,428.2   

 

For the year ended 31 December 2010, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK)

   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
    

Consolidated

WPP plc

 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

     28.1        (395.6     (30.6     —           1,759.3        —           1,361.2   

Investing activities

                                                          

Acquisitions and disposals

     —          20.2        —          —           (220.3     —           (200.1

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     —          (3.9     —          —           (186.6     —           (190.5

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —           (27.0     —           (27.0

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     —          —          —          —           7.6        —           7.6   

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from investing activities

     —          16.3        —          —           (426.3     —           (410.0

Financing activities

                                                          

Share option proceeds

     42.7        —          —          —           —          —           42.7   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           (15.1     —           (15.1

Share repurchases and buy-backs

     —          —          —          —           (46.4     —           (46.4

Net increase in borrowings

     —          —          —          —           19.8        —           19.8   

Financing and share issue costs

     —          —          —          —           (3.5     —           (3.5

Capital contribution (paid)/received

     —          —          —          —           —          —           —     

Equity dividends paid

     (13.4     (187.0     —          —           —          —           (200.4

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —           (66.7     —           (66.7

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

     29.3        (187.0     —          —           (111.9     —           (269.6

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     57.4        (566.3     (30.6     —           1,221.1        —           681.6   

Translation differences

     0.1        (27.9     25.9        —           84.1        —           82.2   

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     (56.1     (2,245.0     726.7        —           2,520.4        —           946.0   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     1.4        (2,839.2     722.0        —           3,825.6        —           1,709.8   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating cash flow statement information (continued)

 

For the year ended 31 December 2009, £m

 

     WPP
plc
    Subsidiary
Guarantors 1
   

WPP

Finance

(UK)

   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications /
Eliminations
   

Consolidated

WPP plc

 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from operating activities

     (468.3     (223.6     (28.5     —           1,539.3        (0.1     818.8   

Investing activities

                                                         

Acquisitions and disposals

     —          —          —          —           (118.4     —          (118.4

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

     —          (2.1     —          —           (220.8     —          (222.9

Purchases of other intangible assets (including capitalised computer software)

     —          —          —          —           (30.4     —          (30.4

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

     —          —          —          —           9.2        —          9.2   

Net cash outflow from investing activities

     —          (2.1     —          —           (360.4     —          (362.5

Financing activities

                                                         

Share option proceeds

     4.1        —          —          —           —          —          4.1   

Cash consideration for non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           (26.4     —          (26.4

Share repurchases and buy-backs

     (9.5     —          —          —           —          —          (9.5

Net (decrease)/increase in borrowings

     450.0        (1,050.7     370.7        —           (196.3     —          (426.3

Financing and share issue costs

     (10.0     —          —          —           (8.8     —          (18.8

Capital contribution (paid)/received

     —          (111.7     —          —           111.7        —          —     

Equity dividends paid

     (22.3     (55.9     —          —           (111.7     0.1        (189.8

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests in subsidiary undertakings

     —          —          —          —           (63.0     —          (63.0

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities

     412.3        (1,218.3     370.7        —           (294.5     0.1        (729.7

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (56.0     (1,444.0     342.2        —           884.4        —          (273.4

Translation differences

     0.1        (207.8     (41.4     —           150.4        —          (98.7

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     (0.2     (593.2     425.9        —           1,485.6        —          1,318.1   

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     (56.1     (2,245.0     726.7        —           2,520.4        —          946.0   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

Condensed consolidating balance sheet information

 

At 31 December 2011, £m

 

   

WPP

plc

    Subsidiary
guarantors 1
    WPP
Finance
(UK)
    WPP
Finance
2010
    Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications/
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Non-current assets

                                                       

Intangible assets:

                                                       

Goodwill

    —          —          —          —          9,430.8        —          9,430.8   

Other

    —          —          —          —          1,859.9        —          1,859.9   

Property, plant and equipment

    —          8.0        —          —          720.3        —          728.3   

Investment in subsidiaries

    7,350.0        13,282.1        —          —          —          (20,632.1     —     

Interests in associates and joint ventures

    —          —          —          —          801.3        —          801.3   

Other investments

    —          —          —          —          190.8        —          190.8   

Deferred tax assets

    —          —          —          —          86.0        —          86.0   

Trade and other receivables

    —          128.9        —          —          180.2        —          309.1   
      7,350.0        13,419.0        —          —          13,269.3        (20,632.1     13,406.2   

Current assets

                                                       

Inventory and work in progress

    —          —          —          —          333.9        —          333.9   

Corporate income tax recoverable

    —          —          —          —          88.5        —          88.5   

Trade and other receivables

    —          109.4        2.1        0.2        8,808.0        —          8,919.7   

Cash and short-term deposits

    0.5        1,123.9        679.6        —          4,334.9        (4,192.3     1,946.6   
      0.5        1,233.3        681.7        0.2        13,565.3        (4,192.3     11,288.7   

Current Liabilities

                                                       

Trade and other payables

    (5.2     (87.5     (9.6     (4.0     (11,059.2     —          (11,165.5

Corporate income tax payable

    —          —          —          —          (113.4     —          (113.4

Bank overdrafts and loans

    (144.9 )     (4,047.4     —          —          (518.4     4,192.3        (518.4
      (150.1     (4,134.9     (9.6     (4.0     (11,691.0     4,192.3        (11,797.3

Net current (liabilities)/assets

    (149.6     (2,901.6     672.1        (3.8     1,874.3        —          (508.6

Total assets less current liabilities

    7,200.4        10,517.4        672.1        (3.8     15,143.6        (20,632.1     12,897.6   

Non-current liabilities

                                                       

Bonds and bank loans

    (424.0     (1,586.4     (621.9     (518.3     (742.4     —          (3,893.0

Trade and other payables

    —          (109.5     (2.0     —          (443.6     2.0        (553.1

Corporate income tax payable

    —          —          —          —          (379.5     —          (379.5

Deferred tax liabilities

    —          —          —          —          (741.4     —          (741.4

Provision for post-employment benefits

    —          —          —          —          (282.3     —          (282.3

Provisions for liabilities and charges

    —          —          —          —          (154.0     —          (154.0
      (424.0     (1,695.9     (623.9     (518.3     (2,743.2     2.0        (6,003.3

Net intercompany (payable)/receivable

    (113.1     (1,471.5     (206.9 )     520.1        1,271.4        —          —     

Net assets/(liabilities)

    6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,671.8        (20,630.1     6,894.3   

Attributable to:

                                                       

Equity share owners’ funds

    6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,440.8        (20,630.1     6,663.3   

Non-controlling interests

    —          —          —          —          231.0        —          231.0   

Total equity

    6,663.3        7,350.0        (158.7     (2.0     13,671.8        (20,630.1     6,894.3   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

 

32.    Condensed consolidating financial information (continued)

 

 

Condensed consolidating balance sheet information (continued)

 

At 31 December 2010, £m

 

    

WPP

plc

    Subsidiary
guarantors 1
    WPP
Finance
(UK)
   

WPP
Finance

2010

     Other
Subsidiaries
    Reclassifications/
Eliminations
    Consolidated
WPP plc
 

Non-current assets

                                                         

Intangible assets:

                                                         

Goodwill

     —          —          —          —           9,106.3        —          9,106.3   

Other

     —          —          —          —           1,904.5        —          1,904.5   

Property, plant and equipment

     —          4.6        —          —           703.8        —          708.4   

Investment in subsidiaries

     6,469.4        12,520.8        —          —           —          (18,990.2     —     

Interests in associates and joint ventures

     —          —          —          —           792.1        —          792.1   

Other investments

     —          —          —          —           173.7        —          173.7   

Deferred tax assets

     —          —          —          —           79.1        —          79.1   

Trade and other receivables

     —          126.2        —          —           197.3        —          323.5   
       6,469.4        12,651.6        —          —           12,956.8        (18,990.2     13,087.6   

Current assets

                                                         

Inventory and work in progress

     —          —          —          —           366.0        —          366.0   

Corporate income tax recoverable

     —          —          —          —           82.9        —          82.9   

Trade and other receivables

     0.3        50.1        2.8        —           8,790.2        —          8,843.4   

Cash and short-term deposits

     1.4        903.7        722.0        —           4,081.0        (3,742.9     1,965.2   
       1.7        953.8        724.8        —           13,320.1        (3,742.9     11,257.5   

Current Liabilities

                                                         

Trade and other payables

     (4.8     (72.6     (10.1     —           (11,616.1     —          (11,703.6

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —           (115.8     —          (115.8

Bank overdrafts and loans

     —          (3,742.9     —          —           (255.4     3,742.9        (255.4
       (4.8     (3,815.5     (10.1     —           (11,987.3     3,742.9        (12,074.8

Net current (liabilities)/assets

     (3.1     (2,861.7     714.7        —           1,332.8        —          (817.3

Total assets less current liabilities

     6,466.3        9,789.9        714.7        —           14,289.6        (18,990.2     12,270.3   

Non-current liabilities

                                                         

Bonds and bank loans

     (413.2     (1,608.8     (797.4     —           (778.8     —          (3,598.2

Trade and other payables

     —          (110.1     —          —           (278.5     —          (388.6

Corporate income tax payable

     —          —          —          —           (481.8     —          (481.8

Deferred tax liabilities

     —          —          —          —           (750.7     —          (750.7

Provision for post-employment benefits

     —          —          —          —           (241.5     —          (241.5

Provisions for liabilities and charges

     —          —          —          —           (161.6     —          (161.6
       (413.2     (1,718.9     (797.4     —           (2,692.9     —          (5,622.4

Net intercompany receivable/(payable)

     393.5        (1,601.6     —          —           1,208.1        —          —     

Net assets/(liabilities)

     6,446.6        6,469.4        (82.7     —           12,804.8        (18,990.2     6,647.9   

Attributable to:

                                                         

Equity share owners’ funds

     6,446.6        6,469.4        (82.7     —           12,603.5        (18,990.2     6,446.6   

Non-controlling interests

     —          —          —          —           201.3        —          201.3   

Total equity

     6,446.6        6,469.4        (82.7     —           12,804.8        (18,990.2     6,647.9   

 

Note

1    

Includes: WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited, WPP 2005 Limited and Young & Rubicam Brands US Holdings.

 

F-44


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

 

To the Board of Directors and Shareholder of WPP DAS Ltd

 

We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of WPP DAS Ltd (the “Trust”) as at 31 December 2011 and 2010 and the related cash flow statements and statement of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2011. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Trust’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Trust is not required to have an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing any opinion on the Trust’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such separate opinion. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

In our opinion, such financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Trust as at 31 December 2011 and 2010, and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2011, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2012

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Cash flow statement

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

 

     Notes   

2011

£m

   

2010

£m

    

2009

£m

 

Net cash inflow from operating activities

                           

Investing activities

                           

Financing activities

                           

Issue of ordinary shares

   3      79.4                111.7   

Dividends paid

   4      (79.4             (111.7

Net cash inflow from financing activities

                           

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

                           

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

                           

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

                           

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this cash flow statement.

 

Balance sheet

 

At 31 December 2011, 2010

 

    

2011

£m

  

2010

£m

Assets

     

Liabilities

     

Net assets

     

Equity

     

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this balance sheet.

 

Statement of changes in equity

 

For the years ended 31 December 2011, 2010 and 2009

 

     Notes     

Share
capital

£m

   

Distributable
Reserve

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 1 January 2009

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         167.6               167.6   

Capital reduction

     3         (167.6     167.6          

Dividends

     4                (167.6     (167.6

At 31 December 2009

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         187.0               187.0   

Capital reduction

     3         (187.0     187.0          

Dividends

     4                (187.0     (187.0

At 31 December 2010

                              

Issue of ordinary shares

     3         200.4                200.4   

Capital reduction

     3         (200.4     200.4           

Dividends

     4                (200.4     (200.4

At 31 December 2011

                              

Note

The accompanying notes form an integral part of this statement of changes in equity.

 

F-46


Table of Contents

Notes to the financial statements

 


1. The dividend access trust

 

WPP DAS Limited (the “Trust”) was established on 9 July 2008 by WPP plc to which the Trust issued a called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share with a nominal value of £1. The Trust is governed by the applicable laws of England and Wales and is a resident for tax purposes in the United Kingdom, WPP plc is a resident for tax purposes in the Republic of Ireland. The Trust is a wholly owned subsidiary of WPP 2008 Limited which is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of WPP plc.

 

WPP DAS Limited was formed as part of WPP’s Dividend Access Plan, which was primarily designed to ensure that WPP share owners may continue to receive UK dividends, meaning in particular that under the Dividend Access Plan, no Irish tax is required to be withheld from the payment of dividends to share owners. To facilitate WPP’s Dividend Access Plan, in April 2009 the Trust issued one non-voting dividend access share with a nominal value of £1 to the trustee. WPP share owners will not have any interest in the dividend access share and will not have any rights against the Trust as the issuer of the dividend access share. The only assets held in trust for the benefit of share owners will be dividends paid to the trustee in respect of the dividend access share.

 

To ensure compliance with UK trust law rules, the period during which the dividend access trust may continue is restricted. However, the dividend access trust under current law is able to continue for 80 years from inception.

 


2. Accounting policies

 

Basis of preparation

The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) as they apply to the financial statements of the Trust for the year ended 31 December 2011.

 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 30 April 2012.

 

Income statement and statement of comprehensive income

An income statement and a statement of comprehensive income are not presented with these financial statements because the Trust did not receive income, incur expense or recognise any gain or loss during the periods presented.

 

The directors received no remuneration for services to the Trust and the Trust had no employees during the periods presented. All operating expenses were borne by WPP 2005 Limited.

 

Functional currency

The functional currency of the Trust is pounds sterling.

 

Taxation

The Trust is not required to withhold at source any amount in respect of UK tax from dividend payments it makes under the Dividend Access Plan regardless of who the recipient of the payments is.

 


3. Share capital and distributable reserve

 

On 30 June 2009 the Trust issued 111,691,009 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 30 October 2009 the Trust issued a further 55,865,345 ordinary shares of £1 each and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 

On 25 March 2010 the Trust issued 117,301,956 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 28 October 2010 the Trust issued a further 69,706,978 ordinary shares of £1 each and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 

On 29 June 2011 the Trust issued 121,002,475 ordinary shares of £1 each to another Group company and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. On 8 November 2011 the Trust issued a further 79,370,302 ordinary shares of £1 each and on the same date a capital reduction was performed. As a result of this transaction the Trust remained with called-up share capital of 1 ordinary share of £1 and 1 dividend access share of £1.

 


4. Dividends

 

    

2011

£m

    

2010

£m

    

2009

£m

 
2008 second interim dividend of 10.28p per ordinary share                      111.7   
2009 first interim dividend of 5.19p per ordinary share 1                      55.9   
2009 second interim dividend of 10.28p per ordinary share 1              117.3           
2010 first interim dividend of 5.97p per ordinary share 1              69.7           
2010 second interim dividend of 11.82p per ordinary share 1      121.0                   
2011 first interim dividend of 7.46p per ordinary share      79.4                   
       200.4         187.0         167.6   

 

1    

This dividend was settled in cash by another Group company on behalf of the Trust.


 

F-47


Table of Contents

Exhibit Index

 

Exhibit No.

  

Exhibit Title

  1.1    Memorandum and Articles of Association of WPP plc, as amended 2 June 2011.
2.22    Agreement of Registrant to file, if requested by the Securities and Exchange Commission, instruments relating to $812.4 million of 4.75% Senior Notes due 2021.
4.16    WPP plc Restricted Stock Plan, as amended through 11 April 2011.
4.40    Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III, as amended through 12 November 2011.
4.41    Second Amendment, dated 22 June 2011, to Supplemental Retirement Agreement, dated as of 1 July 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc. and Paul Richardson.
  8.1    List of subsidiaries.
12.1    Certification of Group Chief Executive.
12.2    Certification of Group Finance Director.
13.1    Certification of Group Chief Executive under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.
13.2    Certification of Group Finance Director under 18 U.S.C. Section 1350.
14.1    Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP plc and subsidiaries).
14.2   

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (for WPP DAS Limited).

Exhibit 1.1

Composite copy

 

COMPANIES (JERSEY) LAW 1991

A PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES

MEMORANDUM

AND

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

OF

WPP PLC

(Adopted by Special Resolution passed on 30 September 2008 and amended by Special Resolution passed on 2 June 2011)

 

NO. 101749


 

 

 

 

CONTENTS

 

PRELIMINARY

     1   

1.

   Interpretation      1   

SHARE CAPITAL

     8   

2.

   Authorised share capital      8   

3.

   Register of holders      8   

4.

   Rights attached to shares      8   

5.

   Unissued shares      8   

6.

   Authority to allot relevant securities      9   

7.

   Pre-emption rights      9   

8.

   Dis-application of pre-emption rights      10   

9.

   Power to pay commission and brokerage      10   

10.

   Power to increase, consolidate, sub-divide and cancel shares      10   

11.

   Power to issue redeemable shares      11   

12.

   Power to purchase own shares      11   

13.

   Power to reduce capital      11   

14.

   Trusts not recognised      11   

15.

   Conversion of shares into stock      12   

UNCERTIFICATED SHARES - GENERAL POWERS

     12   

16.

   Uncertificated shares - general powers      12   

VARIATION OF RIGHTS

     13   

17.

   Variation of rights      13   

TRANSFERS OF SHARES

     14   

18.

   Right to transfer shares      14   

19.

   Transfers of uncertificated shares      14   

20.

   Transfers of certificated shares      14   

21.

   Other provisions relating to transfers      15   

22.

   Notice of refusal      15   

TRANSMISSION OF SHARES

     15   

23.

   Transmission on death      15   

24.

   Election of person entitled by transmission      15   

25.

   Rights of person entitled by transmission      16   

DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS IN SHARES

     16   

26.

   Disclosure of interests in shares      16   

27.

   Disclosures pursuant to the Disclosure and Transparency Rules      19   

GENERAL MEETINGS

     20   

28.

   Annual general meetings      20   

29.

   Convening of general meetings other than annual general meetings      20   

30.

   Members’ power to require circulation of resolutions for annual general meetings      20   

31.

   Members’ power to require circulation of statements      21   

32.

   Separate general meetings      23   

NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS

     23   

33.

   Length and form of notice      23   

34.

   Omission or non-receipt of notice      23   

PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS

     23   

35.

   Quorum      23   

36.

   Security      24   

37.

   Chairman      24   

 

  

 


 

 

 

38.

   Right to attend and speak      24   

39.

   Resolutions and amendments      24   

40.

   Adjournment      25   

41.

   Meeting at more than one place      25   

42.

   Method of voting and demand for poll      26   

43.

   How poll is to be taken      27   

44.

   Chairman’s casting vote      28   

VOTES OF MEMBERS

     29   

45.

   Voting rights      29   

46.

   Representation of bodies corporate      29   

47.

   Voting rights of joint holders      29   

48.

   Voting rights of members incapable of managing their affairs      29   

49.

   Voting rights suspended where sums overdue      30   

50.

   Objections to admissibility of votes      30   

PROXIES

     30   

51.

   Proxies      30   

52.

   Appointment of proxy      30   

53.

   Receipt of proxy      31   

54.

   Notice of revocation of authority      32   

55.

   ADR Depositary can appoint multiple proxies      32   

56.

   The ADR Depositary shall keep a Proxy Register      32   

57.

   Appointed Proxies can only attend general meetings if properly appointed      32   

58.

   Rights of Appointed Proxies      33   

59.

   Sending information to an Appointed Proxy      33   

60.

   The Proxy Register may be fixed at a certain date      33   

61.

   The nature of an Appointed Proxy’s interest      33   

62.

   Validity of the appointment of Appointed Proxies      34   

DIRECTORS

     34   

63.

   Number of directors      34   

64.

   Directors need not be members      34   

65.

   Age of directors      34   

ELECTION, APPOINTMENT, RETIREMENT AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS

     34   

66.

   Election of directors by the Company      34   

67.

   Separate resolutions for election of each director      35   

68.

   The board’s power to appoint directors      35   

69.

   Retirement of directors      35   

70.

   Removal of directors      35   

71.

   Vacation of office of director      35   

72.

   Executive directors      36   

ALTERNATE DIRECTORS

     36   

73.

   Power to appoint alternate directors      36   

ASSOCIATE DIRECTORS

     37   

74.

   Power to appoint associate directors      37   

REMUNERATION, EXPENSES AND PENSIONS

     37   

75.

   Directors’ fees      37   

76.

   Special remuneration      38   

77.

   Expenses      38   

78.

   Pensions and other benefits      38   

79.

   Payment for loss of office      38   

 

  

 


 

 

 

 

POWERS OF THE BOARD

     39   

80.

   General powers of the board to manage the Company's business      39   

81.

   Power to act notwithstanding vacancy      39   

82.

   Provisions for employees      40   

83.

   Power to borrow money      40   

DELEGATION OF BOARD’S POWERS

     43   

84.

   Delegation to individual directors      43   

85.

   Committees      44   

86.

   Local boards      44   

87.

   Powers of attorney      44   

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS

     44   

88.

   Directors’ interests other than in relation to transactions or arrangements with the Company      44   

89.

   Declaration of interests other than in relation to transactions or arrangements with the Company      45   

90.

   Declaration of interest in a proposed transaction or arrangement with the Company      45   

91.

   Declaration of interest in an existing transaction or arrangement with the Company      45   

92.

   Provisions applicable to declarations of interest      46   

93.

   Directors’ interests and voting      47   

PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD

     49   

94.

   Board and committee meetings      49   

95.

   Notice of board meetings      49   

96.

   Quorum      49   

97.

   Chairman or deputy chairman to preside      49   

98.

   Competence of board meetings      50   

99.

   Voting      50   

100.

   Telephone/electronic board meeting      50   

101.

   Resolutions without meetings      50   

102.

   Validity of acts of directors in spite of formal defect      51   

103.

   Minutes      51   

SECRETARY

     51   

104.

   Secretary      51   

SHARE CERTIFICATES

     51   

105.

   Issue of certificates      51   

106.

   Charges for and replacement of certificates      52   

LIEN ON SHARES

     52   

107.

   Lien on partly paid shares      52   

108.

   Enforcement of lien      52   

CALLS ON SHARES

     53   

109.

   Calls      53   

110.

   Interest on calls      53   

111.

   Sums treated as calls      53   

112.

   Power to differentiate      53   

113.

   Payment of calls in advance      53   

FORFEITURE OF SHARES

     54   

114.

   Notice of unpaid calls      54   

115.

   Forfeiture on non-compliance with notice      54   

116.

   Power to annul forfeiture or surrender      54   

117.

   Disposal of forfeited or surrendered shares      54   

118.

   Arrears to be paid notwithstanding forfeiture or surrender      55   

 

  

 


 

 

 

 

SEAL

     55   

119.

   Seal      55   

DIVIDENDS

     55   

120.

   Declaration of dividends by the Company      55   

121.

   Fixed and interim dividends      55   

122.

   Calculation and currency of dividends      56   

123.

   Method of payment      56   

124.

   Dividends not to bear interest      57   

125.

   Calls or debts or amounts required by law may be deducted from dividends      57   

126.

   Unclaimed dividends etc      57   

127.

   Uncashed dividends      57   

128.

   Dividends in specie      57   

129.

   Scrip dividends      58   

130.

   Dividend Access Arrangements      59   

CAPITALISATION OF RESERVES

     60   

131.

   Capitalisation of reserves      60   

132.

   Capitalisation of reserves - employee share schemes      61   

RECORD DATES

     62   

133.

   Fixing of record dates      62   

ACCOUNTS

     62   

134.

   Accounting records      62   

135.

   Summary financial statements      62   

COMMUNICATIONS

     63   

136.

   Communications to the Company      63   

137.

   Communications by the Company      63   

138.

   Communication by advertisement      65   

139.

   When communication is deemed received      65   

140.

   Nomination of persons to enjoy information rights      66   

141.

   Record date for communications      68   

142.

   Communication to person entitled by transmission      68   

UNTRACED MEMBERS

     68   

143.

   Sale of shares of untraced members      68   

144.

   Application of proceeds of sale      69   

DESTRUCTION OF DOCUMENTS

     69   

145.

   Destruction of documents      69   

WINDING UP

     70   

146.

   Winding up      70   

147.

   Powers to distribute in specie      70   

INDEMNITY AND INSURANCE, ETC

     71   

148.

   Directors’ indemnity, insurance and defence      71   

 

  

 


 

 

 

 

Company number

101749

COMPANIES (JERSEY) LAW 1991

A PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES

MEMORANDUM OF ASSOCIATION

OF

WPP PLC

( adopted by Special Resolution passed on 30 September 2008 )

 

1.

The name of the Company is WPP plc.

 

2.

The Company is a public company.

 

3.

The Company is a par value company.

 

4.

The share capital of the Company is £175,000,000 divided into 1,750,000,000 ordinary shares with a par value of £0.10 each.

 

5.

The liability of a member of the Company is limited to the amount unpaid (if any) on such member’s share or shares.

 

  

 


 

 

 

 

Company number

101749

COMPANIES (JERSEY) LAW 1991

A PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES

NEW

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

OF

WPP PLC

( adopted by Special Resolution passed on 30 September 2008 )

PRELIMINARY

 

1.

Interpretation

 

(1)

In these articles, unless the contrary intention appears:

 

  (a)

the following definitions apply:

 

address      ...      

includes any number or address used for the purposes of sending or receiving documents or information by electronic means;

ADR Depositary      ...      

means a custodian or other person approved by the directors who holds shares in the Company under arrangements where either the custodian or some other person issues American Depositary Shares or American Depositary Receipts;

American Depositary Receipts      ...      

means American Depositary Receipts which represent American Depositary Shares;

American Depositary

Shares

     ...      

means American Depositary Shares which represent shares in the Company and are evidenced by American Depositary Receipts;

 

  

 


 

2

 

 

these articles      ...      

means these articles of association, as from time to time altered;

auditors      ...      

means the auditors from time to time of the Company or, in the case of joint auditors, any one of them;

bankrupt      ...      

has the meaning given to it in the Interpretation (Jersey) Law 1954;

board      ...      

means the board of directors for the time being of the Company;

clear days      ...      

means, in relation to the period of a notice, that period excluding the day when the notice is given or deemed to be given and the day for which it is given or on which it is to take effect;

the Company      ...      

means WPP plc;

connected person      ...      

the following persons are connected with a director of the Company:

     

(i)          members of the director’s family;

     

(ii)        a body corporate with which the director is connected (as defined below);

     

(iii)       a person acting in his capacity as trustee of a trust:

     

(A)        the beneficiaries of which include the director or a person who by virtue of (i) or (ii) above is connected with him; or

     

(B)        the terms of which confer a power on the trustees that may be exercised for the benefit of the director or any such person,

     

other than a trust for the purposes of an employee share scheme or a pension scheme;

     

(iv)       a person acting in his capacity as partner: (A) of the director, or (B) of a person who, by virtue of paragraph (i), (ii) or (iii) above is connected with the director; and

     

(v)         a firm that is a legal person under the law by which it is governed and in which: (A) the director is a partner, (B) a partner is a person who, by virtue of paragraph (i), (ii) or (iii) above is connected with the director, or (C) a partner is a firm in which the director is a partner or in which there is a partner who, by virtue of paragraph (i), (ii) or (iii) above, is connected with the director.

     

For the purposes of paragraph (i) of this definition of connected person above:

     

I.           a director is connected with a body corporate if he and the persons connected with him together: (A) are interested in shares comprised in the equity share capital of that body corporate of a nominal value equal to at least 20% of that

 

  

 


 

3

 

 

     

              share capital; or (B) are entitled to exercise or control the exercise of more than 20% of the voting power at any general meeting of that body; and

     

II.          shares in a company held as treasury shares, and any voting rights attached to such shares, are disregarded;

Disclosure and

Transparency Rules

     ...      

means the rules and regulations made by the FSA in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority and contained in its publication of the same name;

disclosure notice      ...      

means a notice given to any person whom the Company knows or has reasonable cause to believe:

     

(i)          to be interested in the Company’s shares, or

     

(ii)        to have been so interested at any time during the three years immediately preceding the date on which the disclosure notice is issued;

DTR5      ...      

means Chapter 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules;

electronic

communication

     ...      

has the same meaning as in the Electronic Communications (Jersey) Law 2000;

electronic form      ...      

means information sent or supplied by electronic means (for example email or fax) or by any other means while in electronic form (for example, sending a list by post);

electronic signature      ...      

has the meaning given in article 1(1) of the Electronic Communications Act Jersey Law 2000;

employee share scheme      ...      

means any employee and/or executive incentive plan or scheme established for the benefit of employees and/or executives and their relations (as determined in accordance with such plans or schemes) of the Company and/or any of its direct or indirect subsidiaries (whether or not such plan or scheme is open to all employees, executives or relations or not) and which is operated either by the Company or any of its direct or indirect subsidiaries or by a third party on their behalf and under the terms of which employees and/or executives and their relations may acquire and/or benefit from shares or any interest therein, whether directly or pursuant to any option over shares granted to them or otherwise;

equity security      ...      

means a relevant share (other than a share shown in the Memorandum of Association to have been taken by a subscriber to the Memorandum of Association or a bonus share) or a right to subscribe for, or to convert securities into relevant shares in the Company;

FSA      ...      

means the Financial Services Authority of the United Kingdom;

hard copy form      ...      

means information sent or supplied in paper copy or similar form capable of being read;

 

  

 


 

4

 

 

holder      ...      

in relation to any share, means the member whose name is entered in the register as the holder of that share;

interest      ...      

means an interest of any kind whatsoever in relation to shares, including but not limited to:

     

(i)          an interest which arises as a result of entry into a contract for the purchase of the shares in question (whether for cash or other consideration);

     

(ii)        the interest a person has in shares of which he is not the registered holder, but for which he is entitled to exercise any right conferred by the holding of the shares or is entitled to control the exercise of any such right; and

     

(iii)       the interest a person has in shares if, otherwise than by virtue of having an interest under a trust: (A) he has a right to call for delivery of the shares to himself or to his order; or (B) he has a right to acquire an interest in shares or is under an obligation to take an interest in shares, whether in any case the right or obligation is conditional or absolute.

     

For the purposes of this definition of interest , persons having a joint interest are treated as each having that interest and a person is deemed to be entitled to exercise or control the exercise of any right conferred by the holding of shares if he:

     

I.           has a right (whether subject to conditions or not) the exercise of which would make him so entitled; or

     

II.          is under an obligation (whether so subject or not) the fulfilment of which would make him so entitled;

Jersey      ...      

means the Island of Jersey;

Law      ...      

means the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991;

Listing Rules      ...      

means the rules and regulations made by the FSA in its capacity as the UK Listing Authority and contained in its publication of the same name;

Memorandum of Association      ...      

means the document of the same name of the Company, as from time to time altered;

Office      ...      

means the registered office for the time being of the Company;

officer      ...      

includes, in relation to a body corporate, a director, manager or secretary;

Official List      ...      

means the official list of the FSA;

Operator      ...      

has the meaning given to “authorised operator” in the Uncertificated Securities Order;

ordinary resolution      ...      

means a resolution of the Company in general meeting passed by a simple majority of the votes cast at that meeting;

 

  

 


 

5

 

 

paid up      ...      

means paid up or credited as paid up;

person entitled by transmission      ...      

means a person whose entitlement to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member or of any other event giving rise to its transmission by operation of law has been noted in the register;

a proxy notification

address

     ...      

means the address or addresses specified in a notice of a meeting or in any other information issued by the Company in relation to a meeting (or, as the case may be, an adjourned meeting or a poll) for the receipt of proxy notices relating to that meeting (or adjourned meeting or poll) or, if no such address is specified, the Office;

qualifying person      ...      

means:

     

(i)          an individual who is a member of the Company;

     

(ii)        a person authorised to act as the representative of a body corporate in relation to the meeting; or

     

(iii)       a person appointed as proxy of a member in relation to the meeting;

register      ...      

means the register of members of the Company to be kept and maintained in Jersey pursuant to these articles and the Statutes;

relevant securities      ...      

means shares in the Company other than subscriber shares, or shares allotted pursuant to an employee share scheme, and any right to subscribe for or to convert any security into, shares in the Company. For the avoidance of doubt any reference to the allotment of relevant securities includes the grant of such a right but not the allotment of shares pursuant to such a right.

relevant share      ...      

means a share in the Company other than:

     

(i)          a share which, as respects dividends and capital, carries a right to participate only up to a specified amount in a distribution; and

     

(ii)        a share which is held by a person who acquired it in pursuance of an employee share scheme or, in the case of shares which have not been allotted, are to be allotted in pursuance of such a scheme or, in the case of shares held by the Company as treasury shares, are to be transferred in pursuance of such scheme;

relevant situation      ...      

means a situation which arises in which a director has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of the Company (including, without limitation, in relation to the exploitation of any property, information or opportunity, whether or not the Company could take advantage of it but excluding any situation which cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest);

 

  

 


 

6

 

 

             
relevant system      ...      

means any computer-based system and its related facilities and procedures that is provided by an Operator and by means of which title to units of a security can be evidenced and transferred, in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Order, without a written instrument

rights issue      ...      

means an offer or issue to or in favour of holders of ordinary shares on the register on a date fixed by the board where the equity securities respectively attributable to the interests of all those holders of ordinary shares are proportionate (as nearly as practicable) to the respective number of ordinary shares held by them on that date, but the board may make such exclusions or other arrangements as the board considers expedient in relation to fractional entitlements or legal or practical problems under the laws in any territory or the requirements of any relevant regulatory body or stock exchange;

seal      ...      

means any common seal of the Company or any official seal or securities seal which the Company may have or be permitted to have under the Statutes;

secretary      ...      

means the secretary of the Company or, if there are joint secretaries, any of the joint secretaries and includes an assistant or deputy secretary and any person appointed by the board to perform any of the duties of the secretary of the Company;

special resolution      ...      

means a special resolution defined in Article 90 of the Law;

Statutes      ...      

means the Law and every other statute, statutory instrument, regulation or order for the time being in force concerning companies registered under the Law including, for the avoidance of doubt, the Electronic Communications (Jersey) Law 2000 and the Uncertificated Securities Order;

treasury shares      ...      

means those shares held by the Company in treasury in accordance with article 58A of the Law;

UKLA      ...      

means the UK Listing Authority, a division of the FSA, acting in its capacity as the competent authority for the purposes of Part VI of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 of the United Kingdom; and

Uncertificated

Securities Order

     ...      

means the Companies (Uncertificated Securities) (Jersey) Order 1999, as amended from time to time, including any provisions of or under the Law which alter or replace such regulations;

United Kingdom      ...      

means the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

 

  (b)

any reference to an uncertificated share, or to a share being held in uncertificated form, means a share title to which may be transferred by means of a relevant system, and any reference to a certificated share means any share other than an uncertificated share;

 

  

 


 

7

 

 

  (c)

any other words or expressions defined in the Law or, if not defined in the Law, in any other of the Statutes (in each case as in force on the date of adoption of these articles) have the same meaning in these articles except that the word “company” includes any body corporate;

 

  (d)

any reference elsewhere in these articles to any statute or statutory provision includes a reference to any modification or re-enactment of it for the time being in force;

 

  (e)

words importing the singular number include the plural number and vice versa, words importing one gender include the other gender and words importing persons include bodies corporate and unincorporated associations;

 

  (f)

any reference to writing includes a reference to any method of reproducing words in a legible form, whether sent or supplied in electronic form or otherwise;

 

  (g)

any reference to a signature or to something being signed or executed includes a signature printed or reproduced by mechanical or other means or any stamp or other distinctive marking made by or with the authority of the person required to sign the document to indicate it is approved by such person or, in respect of communications in electronic form only, any other means of verifying the authenticity of a communication in electronic form which the board may from time to time specify or, where no means has otherwise been specified by the board, an electronic signature , provided that the Company has no reason to doubt the authenticity of that electronic signature;

 

  (h)

any reference to a document being sealed or executed under seal or under the common seal of any body corporate (including the Company) or any similar expression includes a reference to its being executed in any other manner which has the same effect as if it were executed under seal;

 

  (i)

any reference to a meeting shall not be taken as requiring more than one person to be present in person if any quorum requirement can be satisfied by one person;

 

  (j)

any reference to a show of hands includes such other method of casting votes as the board may from time to time approve;

 

  (k)

where the Company has a power of sale or other right of disposal in relation to any share, any reference to the power of the Company or the board to authorise a person to transfer that share to or as directed by the person to whom the share has been sold or disposed of shall, in the case of an uncertificated share, be deemed to include a reference to such other action as may be necessary to enable that share to be registered in the name of that person or as directed by him; and

 

  (l)

any reference to:

 

  (i)

rights attaching to any share;

 

  (ii)

members having a right to attend and vote at general meetings of the Company;

 

  (iii)

dividends being paid, or any other distribution of the Company’s assets being made, to members; or

 

  (iv)

interests in a certain proportion or percentage of the issued share capital, or any class of share capital,

 

  

 


 

8

 

 

shall, unless otherwise expressly provided by the Statutes, be construed as though any treasury shares held by the Company had to be cancelled.

 

(2)

Subject to the Statutes, a special resolution shall be effective for any purpose for which an ordinary resolution is expressed to be required under these articles.

 

(3)

Headings to these articles are inserted for convenience only and shall not affect construction.

 

(4)

The regulations constituting the Standard Table in the Companies (Standard Table) (Jersey) Order 1992 shall not apply to the Company.

SHARE CAPITAL

 

2.

Authorised share capital

The authorised share capital of the Company is as specified in the Memorandum of Association.

 

3.

Register of holders

The directors shall keep or cause to be kept at the Office or at such other place in Jersey where it is made up (but not, for the avoidance of doubt, at a place outside Jersey), as the directors may from time to time determine, a register of holders of shares in the manner required by the Statutes. The directors may rely upon the information provided to them from time to time by the Operator for the purposes of keeping the register up to date in accordance with the Statutes. In each year the directors shall prepare or cause to be prepared and filed an annual return containing the particulars required by the Law. No counterpart or branch of such register shall be maintained outside Jersey and no copy of such register, list, record or information in respect of the members of the Company kept or maintained outside Jersey shall constitute the register or any part of the register and the Company shall not be bound to recognise any interest or right in respect of any share by virtue of it being contained or recorded in such copy of the register or that list, record or information (as the case may be).

 

4.

Rights attached to shares

Subject to the Statutes and to the rights conferred on the holders of any other shares, any share may be issued with or have attached to it such preferred, deferred or other special rights or restrictions as the Company may by special resolution decide or, if no such resolution is in effect or so far as the resolution does not make specific provision, as the board may decide.

 

5.

Unissued shares

 

(1)

Subject to the Statutes, these articles and any resolution of the Company, the board may offer, allot (with or without conferring a right of renunciation), grant options over or otherwise deal with or dispose of any unissued shares (whether forming part of the original or any increased capital) to such persons, at such times and generally on such terms as the board may decide.

 

(2)

The Company may issue fractions of shares in accordance with, and subject to the provisions of, the Law, provided that:

 

  (a)

a fraction of a share shall be taken into account in determining the entitlement of a member as regards dividends or on a winding up; and

 

  

 


 

9

 

 

  (b)

a fraction of a share shall not entitle a member to a vote in respect thereof.

 

6.

Authority to allot relevant securities

The Company may, subject to articles 7 and 8, from time to time pass an ordinary resolution referring to this article and authorising the board to exercise all the powers of the Company to allot relevant securities and:

 

  (a)

on the passing of the resolution the board shall be generally and unconditionally authorised to allot relevant securities up to the nominal amount specified in the resolution; and

 

  (b)

unless previously revoked the authority shall expire on the day specified in the resolution (not being more than five years after the date on which the resolution is passed), but any authority given under this article shall allow the Company, before the authority expires, to make an offer or agreement which would or might require relevant securities to be allotted after it expires.

 

7.

Pre-emption rights

 

(1)

Subject to article 8, the Company shall not allot equity securities to a person on any terms unless:

 

  (a)

it has made an offer to each person who holds ordinary shares in the Company to allot to him on the same or more favourable terms a proportion of those securities that is as nearly practicable equal to the proportion in nominal value held by him of the ordinary share capital of the Company; and

 

  (b)

the period during which any such offer may be accepted has expired or the Company has received notice of the acceptance or refusal of every offer so made.

 

(2)

Equity securities that the Company has offered to allot to a holder of ordinary shares may be allotted to him, or anyone in whose favour he has renounced his right to their allotment, without contravening (1) above.

 

(3)

The offer made in this article may be made in either hard copy form or by electronic form.

 

(4)

The offer must state a period during which it may be accepted and the offer shall not be withdrawn before the end of that period.

 

(5)

The period referred to in paragraph (4) above must be a period of at least 21 days beginning:

 

  (a)

in the case of an offer made in hard copy form, with the date on which the offer is sent or supplied; or

 

  (b)

in the case of an offer made by way of electronic form, with the date on which the offer is sent.

 

(6)

The provisions of this article do not apply in relation to:

 

  (a)

the allotment of:

 

  (i)

bonus shares;

 

  

 


 

10

 

 

  (ii)

equity securities if these are, or are to be, wholly or partly paid up otherwise than in cash; and

 

  (iii)

equity securities which would, apart from any renunciation or assignment of the right to their allotment, be held under an employee share scheme; or

 

  (b)

the sale of shares in the Company which immediately before the sale are held by the Company as treasury shares.

 

8.

Dis-application of pre-emption rights

 

(1)

Subject (other than in relation to the sale of treasury shares) to the board being generally authorised to allot relevant securities in accordance with article 6 of these articles, the Company may from time to time resolve, by special resolution, that the board be given power to allot equity securities wholly for cash and, on the passing of the resolution, the board shall have power to allot (pursuant to that authority) equity securities wholly for cash as if article 7 did not apply to the allotment but that power shall be limited:

 

  (a)

to the allotment of equity securities in connection with a rights issue; and

 

  (b)

to the allotment (other than in connection with a rights issue) of equity securities having a nominal amount not exceeding in aggregate the sum specified in the special resolution,

and unless previously revoked, that power shall (if so provided in the special resolution) expire on the date specified in the special resolution of the Company. The Company may before the power expires make an offer or agreement which would or might require equity securities to be allotted after it expires.

 

9.

Power to pay commission and brokerage

The Company may in connection with the issue of any shares exercise all powers of paying commission and brokerage conferred or permitted by the Statutes.

 

10.

Power to increase, consolidate, sub-divide and cancel shares

 

(1)

The Company may by special resolution alter its Memorandum of Association to:

 

  (a)

increase its share capital by the creation of new shares of such amount as the resolution prescribes;

 

  (b)

consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into shares of a larger amount than its existing shares;

 

  (c)

sub-divide its shares, or any of them, into shares of smaller amount than is fixed by the Memorandum of Association or these articles, but so that the proportion between the amount paid up and the amount (if any) not paid up on each reduced share shall be the same as it was in the case of the share from which the reduced share is derived;

 

  (d)

cancel any shares which, at the date of the passing of the special resolution, have not been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its share capital by the amount of the shares so cancelled; and

 

  

 


 

11

 

 

  (e)

alter its share capital in any other manner permitted by the Law.

 

(2)

A special resolution by which any share is sub-divided may determine that, as between the holders of the shares resulting from the sub-division, one or more of the shares may have such preferred or other special rights, or may have such qualified or deferred rights or be subject to such restrictions, as compared with the other or others, as the Company has power to attach to new shares.

 

(3)

If as a result of any consolidation and division or sub-division of shares any members would become entitled to fractions of a share, the board may deal with the fractions as it thinks fit. In particular, the board may:

 

  (a)

(on behalf of those members) aggregate and sell the shares representing the fractions to any person (including, subject to the Statutes, the Company) and distribute the net proceeds of sale in due proportion among those members (except that any proceeds in respect of any holding less than a sum fixed by the board may be retained for the benefit of the Company); or

 

  (b)

subject to the Statutes, first, allot to a member credited as fully paid by way of capitalisation of any reserve account of the Company such number of shares as rounds up his holding to a number which, following consolidation and division or sub-division, leaves a whole number of shares.

 

(4)

For the purpose of a sale under paragraph (3)(a) above, the board may authorise a person to transfer the shares to, or as directed by, the purchaser, who shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase money and the title of the new holder to the shares shall not be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the sale.

 

11.

Power to issue redeemable shares

Subject to the Statutes, any share may be issued on terms that it is to be redeemed or is liable to be redeemed at the option of the Company or the holder.

 

12.

Power to purchase own shares

Subject to the Statutes, and to any rights conferred on the holders of any class of shares, the Company may purchase all or any of its shares of any class, including any redeemable shares. Subject to the Statutes, the Company may hold as treasury shares any shares purchased or redeemed by it.

 

13.

Power to reduce capital

Subject to the Statutes and to any rights conferred on the holders of any class of shares, the Company may by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve and any share premium account and any other non-distributable reserve in any way. Subject to the Statutes, the Company may make a distribution to its members from its share premium account or any other account other than its nominal capital account or capital redemption reserve

 

14.

Trusts not recognised

Except as required by law or these articles, no person shall be recognised by the Company as holding any share upon any trust and the Company shall not be bound by or required to recognise (even when having notice of it) any interest in or in respect of any share or (except only as by these articles or by law otherwise provided) any fraction of a share, except the holder’s absolute right to the entirety of the share.

 

  

 


 

12

 

 

15.

Conversion of shares into stock

 

(1)

The Company may by special resolution alter its memorandum of association to convert all or any of its paid up shares into stock and re-convert stock into paid up shares of any denomination.

 

(2)

When any shares have been converted into stock, a holder of stock may transfer his interest in it, or any part of his interest, in the same manner and subject to the same regulations and restrictions as would have applied to the shares from which the stock arose if they had not been converted, or as nearly as circumstances permit except that the board shall have discretion to decide whether to apply to have the stock registered as a participating security for the purposes of a relevant system. The board may from time to time fix the minimum amount of stock transferable, provided that the minimum does not exceed the nominal amount of the shares from which the stock arose.

 

(3)

A holder of stock shall, according to the amount of stock held by him, have the same rights, privileges and advantages in all respects as if he held the shares from which the stock arose but no such right, privilege or advantage (except participation in the dividends and profits of the Company and in the assets on a winding up) shall be conferred by an amount of stock which, if existing in shares, would not have conferred such right, privilege or advantage.

 

(4)

Subject to the preceding paragraphs of this article, these articles applicable to paid up shares shall apply to stock and references to shares shall be construed accordingly.

UNCERTIFICATED SHARES - GENERAL POWERS

 

16.

Uncertificated shares - general powers

 

(1)

Subject to the Law and the Uncertificated Securities Order, the board may permit any class of shares to be held in uncertificated form and to be transferred by means of a relevant system and may revoke any such permission.

 

(2)

In relation to any share which is for the time being held in uncertificated form:

 

  (a)

the Company may utilise the relevant system in which it is held to the fullest extent available from time to time in the exercise of any of its powers or functions under the Statutes or these articles or otherwise in effecting any actions and the board may from time to time determine the manner in which such powers, functions and actions shall be so exercised or effected;

 

  (b)

any provision in these articles which is inconsistent with:

 

  (i)

the holding of that share in uncertificated form or transfer of title to that share by means of a relevant system;

 

  (ii)

any other provision of the Statutes relating to shares held in uncertificated form; or

 

  (iii)

the exercise of any powers or functions by the Company or the effecting by the Company of any actions by means of a relevant system, shall not apply;

 

  (c)

subject to the Uncertificated Securities Order, the Company may, by notice to the holder of that share, require the holder to change the form of such share to certificated form within such period as may be specified in the notice;

 

  

 


 

13

 

 

  (d)

the Company may require that share to be converted into certificated form in accordance with the Statutes; and

 

  (e)

the Company shall not issue a certificate.

 

(3)

The Company may, by notice to the holder of any share in certificated form, direct that the form of such share may not be changed to uncertificated form for a period specified in such notice.

 

(4)

For the purpose of effecting any action by the Company, the board may determine that shares held by a person in uncertificated form shall be treated as a separate holding from shares held by that person in certificated form but shares of a class held by a person in uncertificated form shall not be treated as a separate class from shares of that class held by that person in certificated form.

 

(5)

Subject to the Statutes, the directors may lay down regulations not included in these articles which (in addition to, or in substitution for, any provisions in these articles):

 

  (a)

apply to the issue, holding or transfer of shares in uncertificated form;

 

  (b)

set out (where appropriate) the procedures for conversion and/or redemption of shares in uncertificated form; and/or

 

  (c)

the directors consider necessary or appropriate to ensure that these articles are consistent with the Uncertificated Securities Order and/or the Operator’s rules and practices.

 

(6)

Such regulations will apply instead of any relevant provisions in these articles which relate to the transfer, conversion and redemption of shares in uncertificated form or which are not consistent with the Uncertificated Securities Order, in all cases to the extent (if any) stated in such regulations. If the directors make any such regulations, paragraph (7) of this article will (for the avoidance of doubt) continue to apply, when read in conjunction with those regulations.

 

(7)

Any instruction given by means of a relevant system shall be a dematerialised instruction given in accordance with the Uncertificated Securities Order, the facilities and requirements of a relevant system and the Operator’s rules and practices.

VARIATION OF RIGHTS

 

17.

Variation of rights

 

(1)

Whenever the capital of the Company is divided into different classes of shares, all or any of the rights for the time being attached to any class of shares in issue may, subject to the Statutes, from time to time (whether or not the Company is being wound up) be varied in such manner as those rights may provide or (if no such provision is made) either with the consent in writing of the holders of two-thirds in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or with the authority of a special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of those shares.

 

(2)

The provisions of these articles relating to general meetings of the Company or to the proceedings at general meetings shall apply, mutatis mutandis , to every such separate general meeting, except that:

 

  (a)

the quorum at any such meeting (other than an adjourned meeting) shall be two persons holding or representing by proxy at least one-third in nominal amount of the issued shares of the class;

 

  

 


 

14

 

 

  (b)

at an adjourned meeting the quorum shall be one person holding shares of the class or his proxy;

 

  (c)

every holder of shares of the class shall, on a poll, have one vote in respect of every share of the class held by him; and

 

  (d)

a poll may be demanded by any one holder of shares of the class whether present in person or by proxy.

 

(3)

Unless otherwise expressly provided by the rights attached to any class of shares those rights shall not be deemed to be varied by the creation or issue of further shares ranking pari passu with them or by the purchase or redemption by the Company of any of its own shares.

TRANSFERS OF SHARES

 

18.

Right to transfer shares

Subject to the restrictions in these articles, a member may transfer all or any of his shares in any manner which is permitted by the Statutes and is from time to time approved by the board.

 

19.

Transfers of uncertificated shares

 

(1)

The Company shall register the transfer of any shares held in uncertificated form by means of a relevant system in accordance with the Statutes and the rules of the relevant system.

 

(2)

The board may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any transfer of an uncertificated share where permitted by these articles and the Statutes.

 

20.

Transfers of certificated shares

 

(1)

An instrument of transfer of a certificated share may be in any usual form or in any other form which the board may approve and shall be signed by or on behalf of the transferor and (except in the case of a fully paid share) by or on behalf of the transferee.

 

(2)

The board may, in its absolute discretion, refuse to register any instrument of transfer of a certificated share:

 

  (a)

which is not fully paid up but, in the case of a class of shares which has been admitted to official listing by the UKLA, not so as to prevent dealings in those shares from taking place on an open and proper basis;

 

  (b)

on which the Company has a lien; or

 

  (c)

to which articles 26(9) or 27(5) apply.

 

(3)

The board may also refuse to register any instrument of transfer of a certificated share unless it is:

 

  (a)

left at the Office, or at such other place as the board may decide, for registration;

 

  (b)

accompanied by the certificate for the shares to be transferred and such other evidence (if any) as the board may reasonably require to prove the title of the intending transferor or his right to transfer the shares; and

 

  

 


 

15

 

 

  (c)

in respect of only one class of shares.

 

(4)

All instruments of transfer which are registered may be retained by the Company, but any instrument of transfer which the board refuses to register shall (except in any case where fraud or any other crime involving dishonesty is suspected in relation to such transfer) be returned to the person presenting it.

 

21.

Other provisions relating to transfers

 

(1)

No fee shall be charged for registration of a transfer or other document or instruction relating to or affecting the title to any share.

 

(2)

The transferor shall be deemed to remain the holder of the share until the name of the transferee is entered in the register in respect of the share.

 

(3)

Subject to the Statutes, the board may refuse to register any transfer unless it is in respect of only one class of shares.

 

(4)

Nothing in these articles shall preclude the board from recognising a renunciation of the allotment of any share by the allottee in favour of some other person.

 

(5)

Subject to the Statutes, the registration of the transfer of any shares or of any class of shares may be suspended at such times and for such periods (not exceeding 30 days in any year) as the board may decide, except that the registration of the transfer of any shares or class of shares which are for the time being uncertificated shares may only be suspended as permitted by the Statutes.

 

(6)

Unless otherwise agreed by the board in any particular case, the maximum number of persons who may be entered on the register as joint holders of a share is four.

 

22.

Notice of refusal

If the board refuses to register a transfer of a share it shall, as soon as practicable and in any event within two months after the date on which the instrument of transfer was lodged or the Operator-instruction was received, give to the transferee notice of the refusal. The board shall provide the transferee with such further information about the reasons for the refusal as the transferee may reasonably request.

TRANSMISSION OF SHARES

 

23.

Transmission on death

If a member dies, the survivor where the deceased was a joint holder, and his personal representatives where he was a sole or the only surviving holder, shall be the only person or persons recognised by the Company as having any title to his shares; but nothing in these articles shall release the estate of a deceased holder from any liability in respect of any share held by him solely or jointly.

 

24.

Election of person entitled by transmission

 

(1)

Any guardian of an infant member, any curator bonis or guardian or other legal representative of a member under legal disability and any person becoming entitled to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member or of any other event giving rise to a transmission by operation of law may, on

 

  

 


 

16

 

 

 

producing such evidence as the board may require and subject as provided in this article, elect either to be registered himself as the holder of the share or to have some person nominated by him registered as the holder of the share.

 

(2)

If he elects to be registered himself, he shall give notice to the Company to that effect. If he elects to have another person registered, he shall execute a transfer of the share to that person or shall execute such other document or take such other action as the board may require to enable that person to be registered.

 

(3)

The provisions of these articles relating to the transfer of shares shall apply to the notice or instrument of transfer or other document or action as if it were a transfer effected by the person from whom the title by transmission is derived and the event giving rise to such transmission had not occurred.

 

25.

Rights of person entitled by transmission

 

(1)

A person becoming entitled to a share in consequence of a death or bankruptcy or of any other event giving rise to a transmission by operation of law shall have the right to receive and give a discharge for any dividends or other moneys payable in respect of the share and shall have the same rights in relation to the share as he would have if he were the holder except that, until he becomes the holder, he shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting of the Company.

 

(2)

The board may at any time give notice requiring any such person to elect either to be registered himself or to transfer the share and, if after 90 days the notice has not been complied with, the board may withhold payment of all dividends or other moneys payable in respect of the share until the requirements of the notice have been complied with.

DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS IN SHARES

 

26.

Disclosure of interests in shares

 

(1)

The Company may give a disclosure notice to any person whom the Company knows or has reasonable cause to believe:

 

  (a)

to be interested in the Company’s shares, or

 

  (b)

to have been so interested at any time during the three years immediately preceding the date on which the disclosure notice is issued.

 

(2)

The disclosure notice may require the person:

 

  (a)

to confirm that fact or (as the case may be) to state whether or not it is the case, and

 

  (b)

if he holds, or has during that time held, any such interest, to give such further information as may be required in accordance with the following provisions of this article.

 

(3)

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed to give particulars of his own present or past interest in the Company’s shares held by him at any time during the three year period mentioned in paragraph (1) above.

 

(4)

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where:

 

  (a)

his interest is a present interest and another interest in the shares subsists; or

 

  

 


 

17

 

 

  (b)

another interest in the shares subsisted during that three year period at a time when his interest subsisted, to give, so far as lies within his knowledge, such particulars with respect to that other interest as may be required by the notice.

 

(5)

The particulars referred to in paragraph (4) above include:

 

  (a)

the identity of persons interested in the shares in question; and

 

  (b)

whether persons interested in the same shares are or were parties to:

 

  (i)

an agreement to acquire interests in a particular company; or

 

  (ii)

an agreement or arrangement relating to the exercise of any rights conferred by the holding of the shares.

 

(6)

The notice may require the person to whom it is addressed, where his interest is a past interest, to give (so far as lies within his knowledge) particulars of the identity of the person who held that interest immediately upon his ceasing to hold it.

 

(7)

The information required by the notice must be given within such reasonable time as may be specified in the notice.

 

(8)

If a disclosure notice is given by the Company to a person appearing to be interested in any share, a copy shall at the same time be given to the holder of the relevant share, but the accidental omission to do so or the non-receipt of the copy by the holder of the relevant share shall not prejudice the operation of the following provisions of this article.

 

(9)

If the holder of, or any person appearing to be interested in, any share has been served with a disclosure notice and, in respect of that share (a default share ), has been in default for the relevant period in supplying to the Company the information required by the disclosure notice, the restrictions referred to below shall apply. Those restrictions shall continue until:

 

  (a)

the date seven days after the date on which the board is satisfied that the default is remedied; or

 

  (b)

the Company is notified that the default shares are the subject of an exempt transfer; or

 

  (c)

the board decides to waive those restrictions, in whole or in part.

 

(10)

The restrictions referred to in paragraph (9) above are as follows:

 

  (a)

if the default shares in which any one person is interested or appears to the Company to be interested represent less than 0.25 per cent. of the issued shares of the class, the holders of the default shares shall not be entitled, in respect of those shares, to attend or to vote, either personally or by proxy, at any general meeting or at any separate general meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company, or to exercise any other right conferred by membership in relation to meetings of the Company; or

 

  

 


 

18

 

 

  (b)

if the default shares in which any one person is interested or appears to the Company to be interested represent at least 0.25 per cent. of the issued shares of the class, the holders of the default shares shall not be entitled, in respect of those shares:

 

  (i)

to attend or to vote, either personally or by proxy, at any general meeting or at any separate general meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company, or to exercise any other right conferred by membership in relation to meetings of the Company; or

 

  (ii)

to receive any payment by way of dividend and no share shall be allotted in lieu of payment of a dividend; or

 

  (iii)

(subject to the Statutes) to transfer or agree to transfer any of those shares or any rights in them.

The restrictions in sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) above shall not prejudice the right of either the member holding the disclosure default shares or, if different, any person having a power of sale over those shares to sell or agree to sell those shares under an exempt transfer.

 

(11)

Any disclosure notice shall cease to have effect in relation to any shares transferred by the holder of such shares in accordance with the provisions in paragraph (10)(b)(iii) above.

 

(12)

If any dividend or other distribution is withheld under paragraph (10)(b) above, the member shall be entitled to receive it as soon as practicable after the restrictions contained in paragraph (10)(b) cease to apply.

 

(13)

If, while any of the restrictions referred to above apply to a share, another share is allotted in right of it (or in right of any share to which this paragraph applies), the same restrictions shall apply to that other share as if it were a disclosure default share. For this purpose, shares which the Company allots, or procures to be offered, pro rata (disregarding fractional entitlements and shares not offered to certain members by reason of legal or practical problems associated with issuing or offering shares outside the United Kingdom) to holders of shares of the same class as the disclosure default share shall be treated as shares allotted in right of existing shares from the date on which the allotment is unconditional or, in the case of shares so offered, the date of the acceptance of the offer.

 

(14)

For the purposes of this article:

 

  (a)

an exempt transfer in relation to any share is a transfer pursuant to:

 

  (i)

a sale of the share on a recognised investment exchange in the United Kingdom on which shares of that class are listed or normally traded; or

 

  (ii)

a sale of the whole beneficial interest in the share to a person whom the board is satisfied is unconnected with the existing holder or with any other person appearing to be interested in the share; or

 

  (iii)

acceptance of a takeover offer;

 

  (b)

the relevant period shall be, in a case falling within paragraph (10)(a) above, 28 days and, in a case falling within paragraph (10)(b) above, 14 days after the date of service of the disclosure notice;

 

  

 


 

19

 

 

  (c)

the percentage of the issued shares of a class represented by a particular holding shall be calculated by reference to the shares in issue at the time when the disclosure notice is given; and

 

  (d)

a person shall be treated as appearing to be interested in any share if the Company has given to the member holding such share a disclosure notice and either: (i) the member has named the person as being interested in the share; or (ii) (after taking into account any response to any disclosure notice and any other relevant information) the Company knows or has reasonable cause to believe that the person in question is or may be interested in the share.

 

27.

Disclosures pursuant to the Disclosure and Transparency Rules

 

(1)

Without limiting article 26, each holder of shares shall be under an obligation to make notifications in accordance with the provisions of this article.

 

(2)

If at any time the Company shall have a class of shares admitted to trading on the Official List, the provisions of DTR5 shall be deemed to be incorporated by reference into these articles and accordingly the vote holder and issuer notification rules set out in DTR5 shall apply to the Company and each holder of shares.

 

(3)

For the purposes of incorporation by reference of DTR5 into these articles and the application of DTR5 to the Company and each holder of shares, the Company shall (for the purposes of this article only) be deemed to be an “issuer”, as such term is defined in DTR5 (and not, for the avoidance of doubt, a “non-UK issuer”, as such term is defined in DTR5).

 

(4)

For the purposes of this article only, defined terms in DTR5 shall bear the meaning set out in DTR5, and if the meaning of a defined term is not set out in DTR5, the defined term shall bear the meaning set out in the glossary to the Handbook (in such case, read as the definition applicable to DTR5).

 

(5)

If the Company determines that a holder of shares (a Defaulting Shareholder ) has not complied with the provisions of DTR5, referred to above with respect to some or all of such shares held by such holder of shares (the Default Shares ), the Company shall have the right by delivery of notice to the Defaulting Shareholder (a Default Notice ) to:

 

  (a)

suspend the right of such Defaulting Shareholder to vote the Default Shares in person or by proxy at any meeting of the Company. Such a suspension shall have effect from the date on which the Default Notice is delivered by the Company to the Defaulting Shareholder until a date that is not more than seven (7) days after the Company has determined in its sole discretion that the Defaulting Shareholder has cured the non-compliance with the provisions of DTR5, provided however, that the Company may at any time by subsequent written notice cancel or suspend the operation of a Default Notice; and/or

 

  (b)

withhold, without any obligation to pay interest thereon, any dividend or other amount payable with respect to the Default Shares with such amount to be payable only after the Default Notice ceases to have effect with respect to the Default Shares; and/or

 

  (c)

render ineffective any election to receive shares of the Company instead of cash in respect of any dividend or part thereof; and/or

 

  

 


 

20

 

 

  (d)

(subject to the Statutes) prohibit the transfer of any shares of the Company held by the Defaulting Shareholder except with the consent of the Company or if the Defaulting Shareholder can provide satisfactory evidence to the Company to the effect that, after due inquiry, such stockholder has determined that the Shares to be transferred are not Default Shares.

 

(6)

The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to procure that persons discharging managerial responsibilities (as that term is defined in the Disclosure and Transparency Rules) comply with Chapter 3 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules.

GENERAL MEETINGS

 

28.

Annual general meetings

 

(1)

The board shall convene and the Company shall hold annual general meetings in accordance with the Statutes.

 

(2)

The Company must hold an annual general meeting within six months of the end of each financial year of the Company, in addition to any other general meeting held during that period.

 

29.

Convening of general meetings other than annual general meetings

 

(1)

The board may convene a general meeting other than an annual general meeting whenever it thinks fit.

 

(2)

A general meeting may also be convened in accordance with article 81.

 

(3)

A general meeting shall also be convened by the board on the requisition of members under the Statutes or, in default, may be convened by such requisitionists, as provided by the Statutes.

 

30.

Members’ power to require circulation of resolutions for annual general meetings

 

(1)

The members may require the Company to give, to members of the Company entitled to receive notice of the next annual general meeting, notice of a resolution which may properly be moved and is intended to be moved at that meeting.

 

(2)

A resolution may properly be moved at an annual general meeting unless:

 

  (a)

it would, if passed, be ineffective (whether by reason of inconsistency with the Statutes or the Company’s constitution or otherwise);

 

  (b)

it is defamatory of any person; or

 

  (c)

it is frivolous or vexatious.

 

(3)

The Company is required to give notice of a resolution once it has received requests to do so from:

 

  (a)

members representing at least 5 per cent. of the total voting rights of all the members who have a right to vote on the resolution at the annual general meeting to which the requests relate (excluding any voting rights attached to any shares in the Company held as treasury shares); or

 

  

 


 

21

 

 

  (b)

at least 100 members who have a right to vote on the resolution at the annual general meeting to which the requests relate and who hold shares in the Company on which there has been paid up an average sum, per member, of at least £100.

 

(4)

A request:

 

  (a)

may be in hard copy form or in electronic form;

 

  (b)

must identify the resolution of which notice is to be given;

 

  (c)

must be authenticated by the person or persons making it; and

 

  (d)

must be received by the Company not later than:

 

  (i)

6 weeks before the annual general meeting to which the requests relate, or

 

  (ii)

if later, the time at which notice is given of that meeting.

 

(5)

Subject to paragraph (7) below, the Company must send a copy of the notice referred to in paragraph (1) above to each member of the Company entitled to receive notice of the annual general meeting:

 

  (a)

in the same manner as notice of the meeting; and

 

  (b)

at the same time as, or as soon as reasonably practicable after, it gives notice of the meeting.

 

(6)

The expenses of the Company in complying with paragraph (5) above need not be paid by the members who requested the circulation of the resolution if requests sufficient to require the Company to circulate it are received before the end of the financial year preceding the relevant annual general meeting.

 

(7)

Unless paragraph (6) above applies:

 

  (a)

the expenses of the Company in complying with paragraph (5) above must be paid by the members who requested the resolution unless the Company resolves otherwise; and

 

  (b)

unless the Company has previously so resolved, it is not bound to comply with paragraph (5) above unless there is deposited with or tendered to it, not later than:

 

  (i)

six weeks before the annual general meeting to which the requests relate; or

 

  (ii)

if later, the time at which notice is given of that meeting,

a sum reasonably sufficient to meet its expenses in complying with that paragraph.

 

(8)

The business which may be dealt with at an annual general meeting includes a resolution of which notice is given in accordance with paragraph (1) above.

 

31.

Members’ power to require circulation of statements

 

(1)

The members of the Company may require the Company to circulate, to members of the Company entitled to receive notice of a general meeting, a statement of not more than 1,000 words with respect to:

 

  (a)

a matter referred to in a proposed resolution to be dealt with at that meeting; or

 

  

 


 

22

 

 

  (b)

any other business to be dealt with at that meeting.

 

(2)

The Company shall, unless the board determines that the rights under this article are being abused, be required to circulate a statement to members in accordance with paragraph (1) above once it has received requests to do so from:

 

  (a)

members representing at least 5 per cent. of the total voting rights of all the members who have a relevant right to vote (excluding any voting rights attached to any shares in the Company held as treasury shares); or

 

  (b)

at least 100 members who have a relevant right to vote and hold shares in the Company on which there has been paid up an average sum, per member, of at least £100.

 

(3)

For the purposes of paragraph (2) above, a relevant right to vote means:

 

  (a)

in relation to a statement with respect to a matter referred to in a proposed resolution, a right to vote on that resolution at the meeting to which the requests relate; and

 

  (b)

in relation to any other statement, a right to vote at the meeting to which the requests relate.

 

(4)

A request made by a member or members of the Company under paragraph (1) above:

 

  (a)

may be in hard copy form or by way of electronic communication;

 

  (b)

must identify the statement to be circulated;

 

  (c)

must be authenticated by the person or persons making it; and

 

  (d)

must be received by the Company at least one week before the meeting to which it relates.

 

(5)

A Company that is required under paragraph (2) above to circulate a statement must send a copy of it to each member of the Company entitled to receive notice of the meeting:

 

  (a)

in the same manner as the notice of the meeting; and

 

  (b)

at the same time as, or as soon as reasonably practicable after, it gives notice of the meeting.

 

(6)

The expenses of the Company in complying with this article need not be paid by the members who requested the circulation of the statement if:

 

  (a)

the meeting to which the requests relate is the annual general meeting of the Company; and

 

  (b)

requests sufficient to require the Company to circulate the statement are received before the end of the financial year preceding the relevant meeting.

 

(7)

Unless paragraph (6) above applies:

 

  (a)

the expenses of the Company in complying with this article must be paid by the members who requested the circulation of the statement unless the Company resolves otherwise; and

 

  

 


 

23

 

 

  (b)

unless the Company has previously so resolved, it is not bound to comply with this article unless there is deposited with or tendered to it, not later than one week before the meeting, a sum reasonably sufficient to meet its expenses in doing so.

 

32.

Separate general meetings

Subject to these articles and to any rights for the time being attached to any class of shares in the Company, the provisions of these articles relating to general meetings of the Company (including, for the avoidance of doubt, provisions relating to the proceedings at general meetings or to the rights of any person to attend or vote or be represented at general meetings or to any restrictions on these rights) shall apply, mutatis mutandis , in relation to every separate general meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company.

NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS

 

33.

Length and form of notice

 

(1)

An annual general meeting shall be called by not less than 21 clear days’ notice. All other general meetings shall be called by not less than 14 clear days’ notice.

 

(2)

The notice (including any notice given by means of a website) shall specify the place, day and time of the meeting, whether the meeting will be an annual general meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted. If the notice is made available by means of a website, it must be available until conclusion of the meeting. It shall also state in a reasonably prominent place that a member entitled to attend and vote can appoint one or more proxies (who need not be members) to attend, speak and vote instead of that member.

 

(3)

Notice of every general meeting shall be given to all members other than any who, under these articles or the terms of issue of the shares they hold, are not entitled to receive such notices from the Company, and also to the auditors (or, if more than one, each of them) and to each director.

 

34.

Omission or non-receipt of notice

The accidental omission to give notice of a general meeting to, or the non-receipt of notice by, any person entitled to receive the notice shall not invalidate the proceedings of that meeting.

PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS

 

35.

Quorum

 

(1)

No business shall be transacted at any general meeting unless the requisite quorum is present when the meeting proceeds to business.

 

(2)

Except as otherwise provided by these articles two qualifying persons entitled to vote shall be a quorum, unless each is a qualifying person only because he is appointed as proxy of a member in relation to the meeting, and they are proxies of the same member.

 

(3)

If within 15 minutes from the time fixed for holding a general meeting a quorum is not present, the meeting, if convened on the requisition of members, shall be dissolved. In any other case, it shall stand

 

  

 


 

24

 

 

 

adjourned to the same day in the next week (or, if that day is a holiday, to the next working day) and at the same time and place as the original meeting, or, subject to article 40(4), to such other day, and at such other time and place, as the board may decide.

 

(4)

If at an adjourned meeting a quorum is not present within 15 minutes from the time fixed for holding the meeting, the meeting shall be dissolved.

 

36.

Security

The board may make any security arrangements which it considers appropriate relating to the holding of a general meeting of the Company including, without limitation, arranging for any person attending a meeting to be searched and for items of personal property which may be taken into a meeting to be restricted. A director or the secretary may:

 

  (a)

refuse entry to a meeting to any person who refuses to comply with any such arrangements; and

 

  (b)

eject from a meeting any person who causes the proceedings to become disorderly.

 

37.

Chairman

At each general meeting, the chairman of the board (if any) or, if he is absent or unwilling, the deputy chairman (if any) of the board or (if more than one deputy chairman is present and willing) the deputy chairman who has been longest in such office shall preside as chairman of the meeting. If neither the chairman nor deputy chairman is present and willing, one of the other directors selected for the purpose by the directors present or, if only one director is present and willing, that director, shall preside as chairman of the meeting. If no director is present within 15 minutes after the time fixed for holding the meeting or if none of the directors present is willing to preside as chairman of the meeting, the members present and entitled to vote shall choose one of their number to preside as chairman of the meeting.

 

38.

Right to attend and speak

 

(1)

A director shall be entitled to attend and speak at any general meeting of the Company whether or not he is a member.

 

(2)

The chairman may invite any person to attend and speak at any general meeting of the Company if he considers that such person has the appropriate knowledge or experience of the Company’s business to assist in the deliberations of the meeting.

 

39.

Resolutions and amendments

 

(1)

Subject to the Statutes, a resolution may only be put to the vote at a general meeting if the chairman of the meeting in his absolute discretion decides that the resolution may properly be regarded as within the scope of the meeting.

 

(2)

In the case of a resolution to be proposed as a special resolution no amendment may be made, at or before the time at which the resolution is put to the vote, to the form of the resolution as set out in the notice of meeting, except to correct a patent error or as may otherwise be permitted by law.

 

  

 


 

25

(3)

In the case of a resolution to be proposed as an ordinary resolution no amendment may be made, at or before the time at which the resolution is put to the vote, unless:

 

  (a)

in the case of an amendment to the form of the resolution as set out in the notice of meeting, notice of the intention to move the amendment is received at the Office no later than 48 hours before the time fixed for the holding of the relevant meeting; or

 

  (b)

in any case, the chairman of the meeting in his absolute discretion otherwise decides that the amendment or amended resolution may properly be put to the vote.

The giving of notice under subparagraph (a) above shall not prejudice the power of the chairman of the meeting to rule the amendment out of order.

 

(4)

With the consent of the chairman of the meeting, a person who proposes an amendment to a resolution may withdraw it before it is put to the vote.

 

(5)

If the chairman of the meeting rules a resolution or an amendment to a resolution admissible or out of order (as the case may be), the proceedings of the meeting or on the resolution in question shall not be invalidated by any error in his ruling. Any ruling by the chairman of the meeting in relation to a resolution or an amendment to a resolution shall be final and conclusive.

 

40.

Adjournment

 

(1)

With the consent of any general meeting at which a quorum is present the chairman of the meeting may (and shall if so directed by the meeting) adjourn the meeting from time to time and from place to place.

 

(2)

In addition, the chairman of the meeting may at any time without the consent of the meeting adjourn the meeting (whether or not it has commenced or a quorum is present) to another time and/or place if, in his opinion, it would facilitate the conduct of the business of the meeting to do so.

 

(3)

Nothing in this article shall limit any other power vested in the chairman of the meeting to adjourn the meeting.

 

(4)

Whenever a meeting is adjourned for 30 days or more or sine die , at least 14 clear days’ notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given in the same manner as in the case of the original meeting but otherwise no person shall be entitled to any notice of an adjourned meeting or of the business to be transacted at an adjourned meeting.

 

(5)

No business shall be transacted at any adjourned meeting other than the business which might have been transacted at the meeting from which the adjournment took place.

 

41.

Meeting at more than one place

 

(1)

A general meeting may be held at more than one place if:

 

  (a)

the notice convening the meeting specifies that it shall be held at more than one place; or

 

  (b)

the board resolves, after the notice convening the meeting has been given, that the meeting shall be held at more than one place; or


 

26

 

 

  (c)

it appears to the chairman of the meeting that the place of the meeting specified in the notice convening the meeting is inadequate to accommodate all persons entitled and wishing to attend.

 

(2)

A general meeting held at more than one place is duly constituted and its proceedings are valid if (in addition to the other provisions of these articles relating to general meetings being satisfied) the chairman of the meeting is satisfied that facilities (whether by electronic means or otherwise) are available to enable each person present at each place to participate in the business of the meeting.

 

(3)

Each person present at each place who would be entitled to count towards the quorum in accordance with the provisions of article 36 shall be counted in the quorum for, and shall be entitled to vote at, the meeting. The meeting is deemed to take place at the place at which the chairman of the meeting is present.

 

42.

Method of voting and demand for poll

 

(1)

At a general meeting an ordinary resolution or any other question (other than a special resolution) put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a show of hands, unless (before, or immediately after the declaration of the result of, the show of hands or on the withdrawal of any other demand for a poll) a poll is demanded by:

 

  (a)

the chairman of the meeting; or

 

  (b)

at least five members present in person or by proxy having the right to vote on the resolution; or

 

  (c)

a member or members present in person or by proxy representing in aggregate not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all the members having the right to vote on the resolution (excluding any voting rights attached to any shares in the Company held as treasury shares); or

 

  (d)

a member or members present in person or by proxy holding shares conferring the right to vote on the resolution on which an aggregate sum has been paid up equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right (excluding shares in the Company conferring a right to vote on the resolution which are held as treasury shares);

and a demand for a poll by a person as proxy for a member shall be as valid as if the demand were made by the member himself.

 

(2)

No poll may be demanded on the appointment of a chairman of the meeting.

 

(3)

A demand for a poll may, before the poll is taken, be withdrawn but only with the consent of the chairman of the meeting and the demand so withdrawn shall not be taken to have invalidated the result of a show of hands declared before the demand was made. If a poll is demanded before the declaration of the result of a show of hands and the demand is duly withdrawn, the meeting shall continue as if the demand had not been made.

 

(4)

Unless a poll is demanded (and the demand is not withdrawn), a declaration by the chairman of the meeting that a resolution has been carried, or carried unanimously, or has been carried by a particular majority, or lost, or not carried by a particular majority, shall be conclusive, and an entry to that effect in the minutes of the meeting shall be conclusive evidence of that fact, without proof of the number or proportion of the votes recorded in favour of or against the resolution.

 

  

 


 

27

 

 

(5)

The demand for a poll shall not prevent the continuance of a meeting for the transaction of any business other than the question on which a poll has been demanded.

 

(6)

All special resolutions shall be decided on a poll.

 

43.

How poll is to be taken

 

(1)

If a poll is demanded (and the demand is not withdrawn), it shall be taken at such time (either at the meeting at which the poll is demanded or within thirty days after the meeting), at such place and in such manner (including electronically) as the chairman of the meeting shall direct and he may appoint scrutineers (who need not be members).

 

(2)

A poll demanded on a question of adjournment shall be taken at the meeting without adjournment.

 

(3)

It shall not be necessary (unless the chairman of the meeting otherwise directs) for notice to be given of a poll whether taken at or after the meeting at which it was demanded.

 

(4)

On a poll votes may be given either personally or by proxy and a member entitled to more than one vote need not use all his votes or cast all the votes he uses in the same way.

 

(5)

The result of the poll shall be deemed to be a resolution of the meeting at which the poll was demanded.

 

(6)

The members of the Company may require the board to obtain an independent report on any poll taken, or to be taken, at a general meeting of the Company.

 

(7)

The board is required to obtain an independent report if it receives requests to do so from:

 

  (a)

members representing not less than five per cent. of the total voting rights of all the members who have a right to vote on the matter to which the poll relates (excluding any voting rights attached to any shares in the Company held as treasury shares); or

 

  (b)

not less than 100 members who have a right to vote on the matter to which the poll relates and hold shares in the Company on which there has been paid up an average sum, per member, of not less than £100.

 

(8)

Where the requests relate to more than one poll, paragraph (7) above must be satisfied in relation to each of them. A request under paragraph (7) above:

 

  (a)

may be in hard copy form or by way of electronic communication;

 

  (b)

must identify the poll or polls to which it relates;

 

  (c)

must be authenticated by the person or persons making it; and

 

  (d)

must be received by the Company not later than one week after the date on which the poll is taken.

 

(9)

Where the board is required to obtain an independent report on a poll or polls under paragraph (7) above, the board must appoint an independent assessor to prepare a report for the Company on that poll or polls. The appointment of the independent assessor must be made within one week after the requirement to

 

  

 


 

28

 

 

 

obtain the report has arisen. The independent assessor appointed by the board in accordance with this paragraph (9) must not have another role in relation to any poll on which he is to report (including, in particular, a role in connection with collecting or counting votes or with the appointment of proxies) and must otherwise be independent in relation to the poll, as determined by the board.

 

(10)

The report of the independent assessor appointed under paragraph (9) above must state the name of the independent assessor and his opinion (including reasons therefor) whether:

 

  (a)

the procedures adopted in connection with the poll or polls were adequate;

 

  (b)

the votes cast (including proxy votes) were fairly and accurately recorded and counted;

 

  (c)

the validity of members’ appointments of proxies was fairly assessed; and

 

  (d)

whether the relevant requirements of these articles and the Statutes were complied with.

 

(11)

Where an independent assessor has been appointed to report on a poll in accordance with this article, he is entitled to:

 

  (a)

attend the meeting at which the poll may be taken and any subsequent proceedings in connection with the poll;

 

  (b)

be provided by the Company with a copy of the notice of the relevant meeting and any other communication provided by the Company in connection with the meeting to persons who have a right to vote on the matter to which the poll relates; and

 

  (c)

have access to the Company’s records relating to any poll on which he is to report and the meeting at which the poll or polls may be, or were, taken, and to require anyone who at any material time was a director, secretary, employee, member or agent of the Company, to provide him with information or explanations for the purpose of preparing his report.

 

(12)

Where an independent assessor has been appointed to report on a poll in accordance with this article, the Company must ensure that the following information is made available on a website:

 

  (a)

the fact of the independent assessor’s appointment;

 

  (b)

his identity;

 

  (c)

the text of the resolution or, as the case may be, a description of the subject matter of the poll to which his appointment relates; and

 

  (d)

a copy of the independent assessor’s report prepared in accordance with paragraph (10) above.

 

44.

Chairman’s casting vote

In the case of an equality of votes, either on a show of hands or on a poll, the chairman of the meeting at which the show of hands takes place, or at which the poll is demanded, as the case may be, shall be entitled to a further or casting vote in addition to any other vote or votes to which he may be entitled.

 

  

 


 

29

 

 

VOTES OF MEMBERS

 

45.

Voting rights

 

(1)

Subject to these articles and to any special rights or restrictions as to voting for the time being attached to any class of shares in the Company:

 

  (a)

on a show of hands, every qualifying person present shall have one vote; and

 

  (b)

on a poll, every member who is present in person or by a duly appointed proxy (other than an Appointed Proxy (as defined in article 55(1)) shall have one vote for each share of which he is the holder and an Appointed Proxy shall have such number of votes as equals his Appointed Number of shares (as defined in article 55(2)).

 

(2)

For the purposes of determining which persons are entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting, and how many votes such persons may cast, the Company may specify in the notice of the meeting a time, not more than 48 hours before the time fixed for the meeting, by which a person must be entered on the register in order to have the right to attend or vote at the meeting. Changes to entries on the register after the time so specified shall be disregarded in determining the rights of any person to attend or vote at the meeting, notwithstanding any provisions in the Statutes or these articles to the contrary.

 

46.

Representation of bodies corporate

Any body corporate which is a member of the Company may, by resolution of its board or other governing body, authorise any person to act as its representative at any general meeting of the Company. For the purposes of these articles, a body corporate shall be deemed to be present in person at any general meeting of the Company if its representative is present at that meeting. The board or any director or the secretary may (but shall not be bound to) require evidence of the authority of any such representative.

 

47.

Voting rights of joint holders

If more than one of the joint holders of a share tenders a vote on the same resolution, whether in person or by proxy, the vote of the senior who tenders a vote shall be accepted to the exclusion of the vote(s) of the other joint holder(s); and for this purpose seniority shall be determined by the order in which the names stand in the register in respect of the relevant share.

 

48.

Voting rights of members incapable of managing their affairs

A member in respect of whom an order has been made by any court having jurisdiction (whether in Jersey or elsewhere) in matters concerning mental disorder may vote, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, by his attorney, receiver, curator bonis or other person in the nature of a receiver or curator bonis appointed by that court, and the attorney, receiver, curator bonis or other person may vote by proxy. Evidence to the satisfaction of the board of the authority of the person claiming the right to vote must be received at the Office (or at such other address as may be specified for the receipt of proxy appointments) not later than the last time by which a proxy appointment must be received in order to be valid for use at the meeting or adjourned meeting or on the holding of the poll at or on which that person proposes to vote and, in default, the right to vote shall not be exercisable.

 

  

 


 

30

 

 

49.

Voting rights suspended where sums overdue

Unless the board otherwise decides, a member shall not be entitled to vote, either in person or by proxy, at any general meeting of the Company in respect of any share held by him unless all calls and other sums presently payable by him in respect of that share have been paid.

 

50.

Objections to admissibility of votes

No objection shall be raised as to the admissibility of any vote except at the meeting or adjourned meeting or poll at which the vote objected to is or may be given or tendered, and every vote not disallowed at such meeting or poll shall be valid for all purposes. Any such objection made in due time shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting, whose decision shall be final and conclusive.

PROXIES

 

51.

Proxies

 

(1)

A proxy need not be a member of the Company and a member may appoint more than one proxy in relation to a meeting, provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights attached to a different share or shares held by him.

 

(2)

The appointment of a proxy shall not preclude a member from attending and voting in person at the meeting or on the poll concerned.

 

(3)

The appointment of a proxy shall only be valid for the meeting mentioned in it and any adjournment of that meeting (including on any poll demanded at the meeting or any adjourned meeting).

 

(4)

A proxy is entitled to speak at general meetings.

 

(5)

Proxies may also be appointed to attend, speak and vote at general meetings in the circumstances and in the manner provided for in articles 55, 57, 58 and 60 and articles 51 to 54 should be read subject to the provisions of those articles.

 

52.

Appointment of proxy

 

(1)

The appointment of a proxy may be in such form as is usual or common or in such other form as the board may from time to time approve and shall be signed by the appointor, or his duly authorised agent, or, if the appointor is a body corporate, shall either be executed under its common seal or be signed by an agent or officer authorised for that purpose. The signature need not be witnessed.

 

(2)

Without limiting the provisions of these articles, the board may from time to time in relation to uncertificated shares: (i) approve the appointment of a proxy by means of a communication sent in electronic form in the form of an “uncertificated proxy instruction” (a properly authenticated dematerialised instruction and/or other instruction or notification, which is sent by means of the relevant system and received by such participant in that system acting on behalf of the Company as the board may prescribe, in such form and subject to such terms and conditions as the board may from time to time prescribe (subject always to the facilities and requirements of the relevant system)); and (ii) approve supplements to, or amendments or revocations of, any such uncertificated proxy instruction by the same means. In addition, the board may prescribe the method of determining the time at which any such

 

  

 


 

31

 

 

 

uncertificated proxy instruction is to be treated as received by the Company or such participant and may treat any such uncertificated proxy instruction which purports to be or is expressed to be sent on behalf of a holder of a share as sufficient evidence of the authority of the person sending that instruction to send it on behalf of that holder.

 

53.

Receipt of proxy

 

(1)

A proxy appointment:

 

  (a)

must be received at a proxy notification address not less than 48 hours before the time fixed for holding the meeting at which the appointee proposes to vote; or

 

  (b)

in the case of a poll taken more than 48 hours after it is demanded or in the case of an adjourned meeting to be held more than 48 hours after the time fixed for holding the original meeting, must be received at a proxy notification address not less than 24 hours before the time fixed for the taking of the poll or, as the case may be, the time fixed for holding the adjourned meeting; or

 

  (c)

in the case of a poll which is not taken at the meeting at which it is demanded but is taken 48 hours or less after it is demanded, or in the case of an adjourned meeting to be held 48 hours or less after the time fixed for holding the original meeting, must be received:

 

  (A)

at a proxy notification address in accordance with (a) above;

 

  (B)

by the chairman of the meeting or the secretary or any director at the meeting at which the poll is demanded or, as the case may be, at the original meeting; or

 

  (C)

at a proxy notification address and by such time as the chairman of the meeting may direct at the meeting at which the poll is demanded.

 

(2)

In the case of a proxy appointment signed by an agent of a member who is not a body corporate, the authority under which the appointment is signed or a copy of it certified in such manner as shall be specified in the notice of the relevant meeting or in any other information issued by the Company in relation to the relevant meeting, or such other information as shall be so specified must also be received by the Company in the manner set out in paragraph (1) above.

 

(3)

In the case of a proxy appointment signed by an officer or other agent of a body corporate, the board may also require the receipt, in the manner set out in paragraph (1) above, of the authority under which the appointment is signed or a copy of it certified in such manner as shall be specified in the notice of the relevant meeting or in any other information issued by the Company in relation to the relevant meeting, or of such other authorities or information as shall be so specified.

 

(4)

Subject to the Statutes, the board may, but shall not be bound to, require such further evidence as it thinks fit of the authenticity or integrity of any signature on a proxy appointment and, if the signatory is an agent or, where the appointor is a body corporate, an officer, of his authority.

 

(5)

The board may decide, either generally or in any particular case, to treat a proxy appointment as valid notwithstanding that the appointment or any of the information required under paragraphs (2), (3) or (4) above has not been received in accordance with the requirements of this article.

 

  

 


 

32

 

 

(6)

Subject to paragraph (5) above, if the proxy appointment and any of the information required under paragraphs (2), (3) or (4) above are not received in the manner required above, the appointee shall not be entitled to vote in respect of the shares in question.

 

(7)

If two or more valid but differing proxy appointments are received in respect of the same share for use at the same meeting or on the same poll, the one which is last received (regardless of its date or of the date of its execution) shall be treated as replacing and revoking the others as regards that share and if the Company is unable to determine which was last received, none of them shall be treated as valid in respect of that share.

 

54.

Notice of revocation of authority

A vote given or poll demanded by proxy or by a representative of a body corporate shall be valid notwithstanding the previous termination of the authority of the person voting or demanding a poll or (until entered in the register) the transfer of the share in respect of which the appointment of the relevant person was made unless notice of the termination was received at a proxy notification address not less than six hours before the time fixed for holding the relevant meeting or adjourned meeting or, in the case of a poll not taken on the same day as the meeting or adjourned meeting, before the time fixed for taking the poll.

ADR DEPOSITARY ARRANGEMENTS

 

55.

ADR Depositary can appoint multiple proxies

 

(1)

The ADR Depositary can appoint more than one person to be its proxy (each person validly so appointed being referred to as an Appointed Proxy ) and the provisions of articles 51 to 54 shall apply to any such appointment(s).

 

(2)

The appointment shall set out the number of shares in relation to which an Appointed Proxy is appointed (the Appointed Number ). The Appointed Number of shares of all Appointed Proxies, when added together, must not be more than the total number of shares registered in the name of the ADR Depositary.

 

56.

The ADR Depositary shall keep a Proxy Register

 

(1)

The ADR Depositary shall keep a register of the names and addresses of all the Appointed Proxies (the Proxy Register ). The Proxy Register shall set out the Appointed Number of shares of each Appointed Proxy. This may be shown by setting out the number of American Depositary Receipts which each Appointed Proxy holds and stating that the Appointed Number of shares can be ascertained by multiplying the said number of American Depositary Receipts by such number which for the time being is equal to the number of shares which any one American Depositary Receipt represents.

 

(2)

The ADR Depositary shall allow anyone whom the board nominates to inspect the Proxy Register during usual business hours on any week day (Saturdays and public holidays excepted) at the registered office of the ADR Depositary. The ADR Depositary shall also provide, as soon as possible, any information contained in the Proxy Register which may be requested by the Company or its agents.

 

57.

Appointed Proxies can only attend general meetings if properly appointed

An Appointed Proxy may only attend a general meeting if he provides the Company with written evidence of his appointment by the ADR Depositary for that general meeting. This shall be in a form agreed between the board and the ADR Depositary.

 

  

 


 

33

 

 

58.

Rights of Appointed Proxies

Subject to the Statutes and providing the total number of shares registered in the name of the ADR Depositary is sufficient to include an Appointed Proxy’s Appointed Number:

 

  (a)

at a general meeting which an Appointed Proxy is entitled to attend, he is entitled to exercise the same rights in relation to his Appointed Number of shares as the ADR Depositary would have been entitled to exercise if it has been present in person at that meeting; and

 

  (b)

an Appointed Proxy can himself appoint another person to be his proxy in relation to his Appointed Number of shares and the provisions of articles 51 to 54 shall apply to such appointment as if the Appointed Proxy was the registered holder of such shares and the appointment was made by him in that capacity.

 

59.

Sending information to an Appointed Proxy

The Company may send to an Appointed Proxy at his address in the Proxy Register all or any of the documents which are sent to members.

 

60.

The Proxy Register may be fixed at a certain date

 

(1)

In order to determine which persons are entitled as Appointed Proxies to:

 

  (a)

exercise the rights conferred by article 58; and

 

  (b)

receive documents sent pursuant to article 59,

and the Appointed Number of shares in respect of which a person is to be treated as Appointed Proxy for such purpose, the ADR Depositary may determine that the persons who are entitled are those persons entered in the Proxy Register at the close of business on a date (a Record Date ) determined by the ADR Depositary in consultation with the Company.

 

(2)

When a Record Date is determined for a particular purpose:

 

  (a)

the Appointed Number of shares of an Appointed Proxy will be treated as the number appearing against his name in the Proxy Register as at the close of business on the Record Date (this may be shown by setting out the number of American Depositary Receipts which each Appointed Proxy holds and stating that the number of shares can be ascertained by multiplying the said number of American Depositary Receipts by such number which for the time being is equal to the number of shares which any one American Depositary Receipt represents); and

 

  (b)

changes to entries in the Proxy Register after the close of business on the Record Date will be ignored in determining the entitlement of any person for the purpose concerned.

 

61.

The nature of an Appointed Proxy’s interest

Except as required by the Statutes, no Appointed Proxy will be recognised by the Company as holding any interest in shares upon any trust. The Company is entitled to treat a person entered in the Proxy Register as an Appointed Proxy as the only person entitled to exercise the rights conferred by article 58 in respect of the shares in respect of which the Appointed Proxy has been appointed.

 

  

 


 

34

 

 

62.

Validity of the appointment of Appointed Proxies

 

(1)

If any question arises at or in relation to a general meeting as to whether any particular person has been validly appointed as or by an Appointed Proxy to vote (or exercise any other right) in respect of any shares, the question will be determined by the chairman of the general meeting. His decision (which may include declining to recognise a particular appointment as valid) will, if made in good faith, be final and binding on all persons interested.

 

(2)

If a question of the type described in paragraph (1) above arises in any circumstances other than at or in relation to a general meeting, the question will be determined by the board. Its decision (which can include declining to recognise a particular appointment as valid) will also, if made in good faith, be final and binding on all persons interested.

DIRECTORS

 

63.

Number of directors

The directors (other than alternate directors) shall not, unless otherwise determined by an ordinary resolution of the Company, be less than six in number.

 

64.

Directors need not be members

A director need not be a member of the Company.

 

65.

Age of directors

No person shall be disqualified from being appointed a director, and no director shall be required to vacate that office, by reason only of the fact that he has attained the age of 70 years or any other age nor shall it be necessary by reason of his age to give special notice of any resolution.

ELECTION, APPOINTMENT, RETIREMENT AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS

 

66.

Election of directors by the Company

 

(1)

Subject to these articles, the Company may by ordinary resolution elect any person who is willing to act to be a director, either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director, but so that the total number of directors shall not exceed any maximum number fixed by or in accordance with these articles.

 

(2)

No person (other than a director retiring in accordance with these articles) shall be elected or re-elected a director at any general meeting unless:

 

  (a)

he is recommended by the board; or

 

  (b)

not less than seven nor more than 42 days before the date appointed for the meeting there has been given to the Company, by a member (other than the person to be proposed) entitled to vote at the meeting, notice of his intention to propose a resolution for the election of that person, stating the particulars which would, if he were so elected, be required to be included in the Company’s register of directors and a notice executed by that person of his willingness to be elected.

 

  

 


 

35

 

 

67.

Separate resolutions for election of each director

Every resolution of a general meeting for the election of a director shall relate to one named person and a single resolution for the election of two or more persons shall be void, unless a resolution that it shall be so proposed has been first agreed to by the meeting without any vote being cast against it.

 

68.

The board’s power to appoint directors

The board may appoint any person who is willing to act to be a director, either to fill a vacancy or by way of addition to their number, but so that the total number of directors shall not exceed any maximum number fixed by or in accordance with these articles.

 

69.

Retirement of directors

 

(1)

At each annual general meeting every director shall retire from office. A retiring director shall be eligible for re-election and a director who is re-elected will be treated as continuing in office without a break. 1

 

(2)

A retiring director shall (unless he is removed from office or his office is vacated in accordance with these articles) retain office until the close of the meeting at which he retires or (if earlier) when a resolution is passed at that meeting not to fill the vacancy or to elect another person in his place. 2

 

(3)

If the Company, at any meeting at which a director retires in accordance with these articles, does not fill the office vacated by such director, the retiring director, if willing to act, shall be deemed to be re-elected, unless at the meeting a resolution is passed not to fill the vacancy or to elect another person in his place or unless the resolution to re-elect him is put to the meeting and lost.

 

70.

Removal of directors

 

(1)

The Company may by ordinary resolution remove any director before his period of office has expired notwithstanding anything in these articles or in any agreement between him and the Company.

 

(2)

A director may also be removed from office by giving him notice to that effect signed by or on behalf of all the other directors.

 

(3)

Any removal of a director under this article shall be without prejudice to any claim which such director may have for damages for breach of any agreement between him and the Company.

 

71.

Vacation of office of director

Without prejudice to the provisions of these articles for retirement or removal the office of a director shall be vacated if:

 

  (a)

he is prohibited by law or the Listing Rules from being a director; or

 

 

  (b)

he becomes bankrupt or he makes any arrangement or composition with his creditors generally; or

 

  (c)

a registered medical practitioner who has examined him gives a written opinion to the Company stating that he has become physically or mentally incapable of acting as a director and may remain

 

1  

Amended by a special resolution passed on 2 June 2011.

 

2  

Amended by a special resolution passed on 2 June 2011.

 

  

 


 

36

 

 

 

so for more than three months; or by reason of his mental health a court makes an order which wholly or partly prevents him from personally exercising any powers or rights which he would otherwise have and, in either case, the board resolves that his office be vacated; or

 

  (d)

for more than six months he is absent (whether or not an alternate director attends in his place), without special leave of absence from the board, from board meetings held during that period and the board resolves that his office be vacated; or

 

  (e)

the conduct of the director (whether or not concerning the affairs of the Company) is the subject of an investigation by the Jersey Financial Services Commission or any successor body or equivalent body in any foreign jurisdiction and the directors resolve it is undesirable in the interest of the Company that he remains a director of the Company; or

 

  (f)

he gives to the Company notice of his wish to resign, in which event he shall vacate that office on the receipt of that notice by the Company or at such later time as is specified in the notice.

 

72.

Executive directors

 

(1)

The board may appoint one or more directors to hold any executive office under the Company (including that of chairman, chief executive or managing director) for such period (subject to the Statutes) and on such terms as it may decide and may revoke or terminate any appointment so made without prejudice to any claim for damages for breach of any contract of service between the director and the Company.

 

(2)

The remuneration of a director appointed to any executive office shall be fixed by the board and may be by way of salary, commission, participation in profits or otherwise and either in addition to or inclusive of his remuneration as a director.

 

(3)

A director appointed as executive chairman, chief executive or managing director shall automatically cease to hold that office if he ceases to be a director but without prejudice to any claim for damages for breach of any contract of service between him and the Company.

ALTERNATE DIRECTORS

 

73.

Power to appoint alternate directors

 

(1)

Each director may appoint another director or any other person who is willing to act as his alternate and may remove him from that office. The appointment as an alternate director of any person who is not himself a director shall be subject to the approval of a majority of the directors or a resolution of the board.

 

(2)

An alternate director shall be entitled to receive notice of all board meetings and of all meetings of committees of which the director appointing him is a member, to attend and vote at any such meeting at which the director appointing him is not personally present and at the meeting to exercise and discharge all the functions, powers and duties of his appointor as a director and for the purposes of the proceedings at the meeting these articles shall apply as if he were a director.

 

(3)

Every person acting as an alternate director shall (except as regards power to appoint an alternate and remuneration) be subject in all respects to these articles relating to directors and shall alone be responsible to the Company for his acts and defaults and shall not be deemed to be the agent of the director

 

  

 


 

37

 

 

 

appointing him. An alternate director may be paid expenses and shall be entitled to be indemnified by the Company to the same extent as if he were a director but shall not be entitled to receive from the Company any fee in his capacity as an alternate director.

 

(4)

Every person acting as an alternate director shall have one vote for each director for whom he acts as alternate, in addition to his own vote if he is also a director, but he shall count as only one for the purpose of determining whether a quorum is present.

 

(5)

Any person appointed as an alternate director shall vacate his office as alternate director if the director by whom he has been appointed vacates his office as director (otherwise than by retirement at a general meeting of the Company at which he is re-appointed) or removes him by notice to the Company or on the happening of any event which, if he is or were a director, causes or would cause him to vacate that office.

 

(6)

Every appointment or removal of an alternate director shall be made by notice and shall be effective (subject to paragraph (1) above) on receipt by the secretary of the notice.

ASSOCIATE DIRECTORS

 

74.

Power to appoint associate directors

The directors may at any time and from time to time appoint any person (not being a director) to be an associate director, and the following provisions with regard to associate directors shall have effect:

 

  (a)

a person so appointed shall not be required to be a member of the Company and shall hold office until removed by resolution of the directors;

 

  (b)

the number of associate directors shall not at any time exceed six;

 

  (c)

the remuneration of the associate directors shall be such as from time to time be determined by the directors and may be of any description; and

 

  (d)

associate directors shall not have any right to attend or vote at meetings of the directors, and they shall not be directors within the meaning of that word as used in these articles. If invited to attend and express their views at meetings of the directors, they shall do so only on the same footing as other officials and members of the staff of the Company.

REMUNERATION, EXPENSES AND PENSIONS

 

75.

Directors’ fees

 

(1)

The directors shall be paid fees not exceeding in aggregate £1,500,000 3  per annum (or such larger sum as the Company may, by ordinary resolution, determine) as the board may decide to be divided among them in such proportion and manner as they may agree or, failing agreement, equally. Any fee payable under this article shall be distinct from any remuneration or other amounts payable to a director under other provisions of these articles and shall accrue from day to day.

 

(2)

The board (or any duly authorised committee of the board) may make arrangements for such proportion of the fees payable to any director under the provisions of this article as the board or such committee may from time to time decide, to be provided in the form of fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company by applying the relevant amount in the purchase or subscription of such shares on behalf of

 

3  

Increased to £2,000,000 per annum pursuant to an ordinary resolution passed on 2 June 2011.

 

  

 


 

38

 

 

 

such director. In the case of a subscription of shares, for the purposes of this article, the subscription price for such shares shall be deemed to be the closing middle market price as published in the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List on the day of such subscription.

 

76.

Special remuneration

 

(1)

The board may grant special remuneration to any director who performs any special or extra services to or at the request of the Company.

 

(2)

Such special remuneration may be paid by way of lump sum, salary, commission, participation in profits or otherwise as the board may decide in addition to any remuneration payable under or pursuant to any other of these articles.

 

77.

Expenses

A director shall be paid out of the funds of the Company all travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by him in and about the discharge of his duties, including his expenses of travelling to and from board meetings, committee meetings, general meetings and separate general meetings of the holders of any class of shares in the Company. Subject to the Statutes and any guidelines and procedures established from time to time by the board, a director may also be paid out of the funds of the Company all expenses incurred by him in obtaining professional advice in connection with the affairs of the Company or the discharge of his duties as a director.

 

78.

Pensions and other benefits

The board may exercise all the powers of the Company to pay, provide or procure the grant of pensions or other retirement or superannuation benefits and death, disability or other benefits, allowances or gratuities to any person who is or has been at any time a director of the Company or in the employment or service of the Company or of any company which is or was a subsidiary of or associated with the Company or of the predecessors in business of the Company or any such subsidiary or associated company or the relatives or dependants of any such person. For that purpose the board may procure the establishment and maintenance of, or participate in, or contribute to, any non-contributory or contributory pension or superannuation fund, scheme or arrangement and pay any insurance premiums.

 

79.

Payment for loss of office

 

(1)

The Company shall not make a payment for loss of office to a director of the Company unless the payment has been approved by an ordinary resolution of the Company.

 

(2)

A resolution approving a payment for loss of office under this article must not be passed unless a memorandum setting out particulars of the proposed payment (including its amount) is made available for inspection by the members of the Company at:

 

  (a)

the Office for not less than 15 days ending with the date that the proposed resolution is put to the members; and

 

  (b)

at the meeting at which the proposed resolution is put to the members.

 

  

 


 

39

(3)

For the purposes of this article, payment for loss of office means a payment made to a director or past director of the Company:

 

  (a)

by way of compensation for loss of office as director of the Company;

 

  (b)

by way of compensation for loss, while director of the Company or in connection with his ceasing to be a director of it, of:

 

  (i)

any other office or employment in connection with the management of the affairs of the Company; or

 

  (ii)

any office (as director or otherwise) or employment in connection with the management of the affairs of any subsidiary of the Company;

 

  (c)

as consideration for or in connection with his retirement from his office as director of the Company; or

 

  (d)

as consideration for or in connection with his retirement, while director of the Company or in connection with his ceasing to be a director of it, from:

 

  (i)

any other office or employment in connection with the management of the affairs of the Company; or

 

  (ii)

any office (as director or otherwise) or employment in connection with the management of the affairs of any subsidiary of the Company, where, for the purposes of this definition of payment for loss of office, references to compensation and consideration include benefits otherwise than in cash and references and references to a payment to the director include payment to a person connected with a director, or payment to any person at the direction of, or for the benefit of, a director or a person connected with him.

POWERS OF THE BOARD

 

80.

General powers of the board to manage the Company’s business

 

(1)

The business of the Company shall be managed by the board which may exercise all the powers of the Company, subject to the Statutes, these articles and any ordinary resolution of the Company. No ordinary resolution or alteration of these articles shall invalidate any prior act of the board which would have been valid if the resolution had not been passed or the alteration had not been made.

 

(2)

The powers given by this article shall not be limited by any special authority or power given to the board by any other article or any resolution of the Company.

 

81.

Power to act notwithstanding vacancy

The continuing directors or the sole continuing director at any time may act notwithstanding any vacancy in their number; but, if the number of directors is less than the minimum number fixed by or in accordance with these articles, they or he may act for the purpose of filling up vacancies or calling a general meeting of the Company, but not for any other purpose. If no director is able or willing to act, then any two members may summon a general meeting for the purpose of appointing directors.


 

40

 

 

82.

Provisions for employees

The board may exercise any of the powers conferred by the section 247 of the Companies Act 2006 of the United Kingdom to make provision for the benefit of any persons employed or formerly employed by the Company or any of its subsidiaries in connection with the cessation or the transfer to any person of the whole or part of the undertaking of the Company or any of its subsidiaries as if the Company were a company incorporated in England and Wales

 

83.

Power to borrow money

 

(1)

The board may exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow money and to mortgage or charge all or any part of its undertaking, property and assets (both present and future) and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities, whether outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligation of the Company or of any third party.

 

(2)

The board shall restrict the borrowings of the Company and exercise all voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by the Company in relation to its subsidiaries (if any) so as to secure (but as regards subsidiaries only so far as by such exercise it can secure) that the aggregate principal amount outstanding at any time in respect of all borrowings by the Group (exclusive of any borrowings which are owed by one Group company to another Group company) after deducting the amount of cash deposited will not, without the previous authority of the Company in general meeting, exceed:

 

  (a)

an amount equal to 2.5 times adjusted capital and reserves; or

 

  (b)

any higher limit fixed by ordinary resolution of the Company which is applicable at the relevant time.

 

(3)

In this article:

 

  (a)

adjusted capital and reserves means the aggregate of:

 

  (I)

the amount paid up on the allotted share capital of the Company; and

 

  (II)

the amounts standing to the credit of the reserves of the Group (including share premium account and capital redemption reserve, but excluding any currency translation reserve), after adding or deducting any balance standing to the credit or debit of the Group’s profit and loss account,

all as shown in the relevant balance sheet but unless the directors determine otherwise, after:

 

  (i)

making such adjustments as may be appropriate in respect of:

 

  (A)

any variation in the amount of the paid up share capital, the share premium account or capital redemption reserve since the date of the relevant balance sheet and so that for this purpose if any proposed allotment of shares by the Company for cash has been underwritten or agreed to be subscribed then these shares shall be deemed to have been allotted and the amount (including any premium) of the subscription moneys payable (not being moneys payable later than six months after the date of allotment) shall be deemed to have been paid up on the date when the issue of the

 

  

 


 

41

 

 

 

shares was underwritten or agreed to be subscribed (or if the underwriting or subscription agreement was conditional, the date on which it became unconditional);

 

  (B)

any undertaking which was not a subsidiary at the date of the relevant balance sheet but which would be a subsidiary if group accounts were prepared as at the relevant time (and as if such time were the end of the Company’s financial year) or any undertaking which was a subsidiary but which would no longer be so if group accounts were to be so prepared at the relevant time; and

 

  (C)

any variation in the interest of the Company in another Group company since the date of the relevant balance sheet;

 

  (ii)

excluding (so far as not already excluded) minority and other outside interests in any subsidiary;

 

  (iii)

deducting to the extent included in the above:

 

  (A)

the book values of intangible assets except goodwill shown in the relevant balance sheet (as adjusted pursuant to the above provisions of this paragraph); and

 

  (B)

the amount of any distribution declared, recommended or made by any Group company to a person other than another Group company out of profits accrued up to and including the date of (and to the extent not provided for in) the relevant balance sheet;

 

  (iv)

after adding back the amount of any investment in own shares that has been deducted in arriving at total equity; and

 

  (v)

making such other adjustments (if any) as the board may consider appropriate or necessary and as are approved by the auditors;

 

  (b)

borrowings include the following except in so far as otherwise taken into account:

 

  (I)

the principal amount of any debenture (whether secured or unsecured) of a Group company;

 

  (II)

the outstanding amount raised by acceptances under an acceptance credit or bills facility opened by a bank or acceptance house on behalf of or in favour of a Group company, excluding acceptances of trade bills relating to goods purchased in the ordinary course of trading;

 

  (III)

the nominal amount of any share capital and the principal amount of any debenture or borrowing, the beneficial interest in which is not owned by a Group company, to the extent that their payment or repayment is the subject of a guarantee or indemnity by a Group company;

 

  (IV)

any fixed or minimum premium payable on final repayment of any borrowing or deemed borrowing; and

 

  

 


 

42

 

 

  (V)

any fixed amount in respect of a finance lease payable by any Group company which would be shown at the relevant time as an obligation in a balance sheet and prepared in accordance with the accounting principles used in the preparation of the relevant balance sheet and for this purpose “finance lease” means a contract between a lessor and a Group company as lessee or sub-lessee where substantially all the risks and rewards of the ownership of the asset leased or sub-leased are to be borne by the lessee or sub-lessee,

but exclude the following:

 

  (i)

borrowings incurred by a Group company for the purpose of repaying within six months of the borrowing all or part of any borrowings made by it or another Group company, pending their application for that purpose during that period;

 

  (ii)

borrowing incurred by a Group company to finance a contract where a part of the price receivable under the contract by that or another Group company is guaranteed or insured by any government, governmental agency or body or by a person (not being a Group company) carrying on the business of providing credit insurance up to an amount equal to that part of the price which is guaranteed or insured;

 

  (iii)

a proportionate amount of the borrowings of a Group company which is not a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company corresponding to the minority or outside interest in it;

 

  (iv)

borrowings of an undertaking which was not a subsidiary at the date of the relevant balance sheet, to the extent that those borrowings do not exceed its borrowings outstanding on the date when it became a Group company but only until six months after the date on which the undertaking became a subsidiary; and

 

  (v)

amounts payable under any hire-purchase agreement, credit sale agreement, operating lease or similar agreement which is not a finance lease for the purposes of paragraph (b)(V) above;

 

  (c)

cash deposited means an amount equal to the aggregate for the time being of all cash deposits with any bank or other person (not being a Group company), (whether on current account or otherwise), the realisable value of certificates of governments and companies or other readily realisable deposits owned by any Group company except that in the case of any such items owned by a Group company which is not a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company, there shall be excluded a proportionate amount of those items corresponding to the minority or outside interests in it;

 

  (d)

Group means the Company and its subsidiaries from time to time;

 

  (e)

Group company means any undertaking in the Group; and

 

  (f)

relevant balance sheet means the audited consolidated balance sheet dealing with the state of affairs of the Company and its subsidiaries comprised in the latest Group accounts; and if the Company should prepare its audited consolidated balance sheet on the basis of one accounting convention and a supplementary balance sheet on the basis of another, the audited consolidated balance sheet shall be taken as the relevant balance sheet.

 

  

 


 

43

 

 

(4)

For the purposes of any calculation under this article:

 

  (a)

a borrowing denominated or repayable or any cash deposited, in a currency other than sterling shall be translated into sterling:

 

  (i)

at the London exchange rate for the date as at which the calculation is being made; or

 

  (ii)

if it would result in a lower figure, at the London exchange rate on the date of the relevant balance sheet,

and for this purpose the “London exchange rate” for any date is the spot rate of exchange, quoted at or about 11.00 a.m. on the business day before that date by a bank in London selected by the board; and

 

  (b)

where under the terms of any borrowing the amount of money that would be required to discharge its principal amount in full if it fell to be repaid (at the option of the borrower or by reason of default) on the date as at which the calculation is being made is less than the amount that would otherwise be taken into account in respect of that borrowing for the purpose of this article, the amount of the borrowing to be taken into account shall be the lesser amount.

 

(5)

The limit imposed under paragraph (2) above shall be deemed not to have been breached until the amount of borrowings has exceeded that limit for 30 consecutive days. This paragraph overrides all other provisions of this article.

 

(6)

A certificate or report by the Company’s auditors:

 

  (a)

as to the amount of adjusted capital and reserves or the amount of borrowings; or

 

  (b)

to the effect that the limit imposed under this article was not exceeded or breached at a particular date,

shall be conclusive evidence as to that amount or fact.

 

(7)

If the Company has joint auditors, references in this article to the Company’s auditors are to any of the joint auditors.

 

(8)

No lender or other person dealing with any Group company need enquire whether the limit imposed under paragraph (2) above has been or will be complied with.

 

(9)

A borrowing or security resulting in a breach of the limit shall not be void nor shall it be voidable at the instance of the Company or any other Group company.

DELEGATION OF BOARD’S POWERS

 

84.

Delegation to individual directors

The board may entrust to and confer upon any director any of its powers, authorities and discretions (with power to sub-delegate) on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit and may revoke or vary all or any of them, but no person dealing in good faith shall be affected by any revocation or variation.

 

  

 


 

44

 

 

85.

Committees

 

(1)

The board may delegate any of its powers, authorities and discretions (with power to sub-delegate) to any committee consisting of such person or persons (whether directors or not) as it thinks fit, provided that the majority of the members of the committee are directors and that no meeting of the committee shall be quorate for the purpose of exercising any of its powers, authorities or discretions unless a majority of those present are directors. The board may make any such delegation on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit and may revoke or vary any such delegation and discharge any committee wholly or in part, but no person dealing in good faith shall be affected by any revocation or variation. Any committee so formed shall, in the exercise of the powers, authorities and discretions so delegated, conform to any regulations that may be imposed on it by the board.

 

(2)

The proceedings of a committee with two or more members shall be governed by any regulations imposed on it by the board and (subject to such regulations) by these articles regulating the proceedings of the board so far as they are capable of applying.

 

86.

Local boards

 

(1)

The board may establish any local or divisional board or agency for managing any of the affairs of the Company and may appoint any persons to be members of a local or divisional board, or to be managers or agents, and may fix their remuneration, provided that meetings of any such local or divisional board or agency take place outside the United Kingdom.

 

(2)

The board may delegate to any local or divisional board, manager or agent any of its powers, authorities and discretions (with power to sub-delegate) and may authorise the members of any local or divisional board or any of them to fill any vacancies and to act notwithstanding vacancies.

 

(3)

Any appointment or delegation under this article may be made on such terms and subject to such conditions as the board thinks fit and the board may remove any person so appointed, and may revoke or vary any delegation, but no person dealing in good faith shall be affected by the revocation or variation.

 

87.

Powers of attorney

The board may by power of attorney or otherwise appoint any person to be the agent of the Company on such terms (including terms as to remuneration) as it may decide and may delegate to any person so appointed any of its powers, authorities and discretions (with power to sub-delegate). The board may remove any person appointed under this article and may revoke or vary the delegation, but no person dealing in good faith shall be affected by the revocation or variation.

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS

 

88.

Directors’ interests other than in relation to transactions or arrangements with the Company

 

(1)

If a relevant situation arises the following provisions shall apply if the conflict of interest does not arise in relation to a transaction or arrangement with the Company:

 

  (a)

if the relevant situation arises from the appointment or proposed appointment of a person as a director of the Company, the directors (other than the director in question, and any other director with a similar interest, who shall not be counted in the quorum at the meeting and shall not vote on the resolution) may resolve to authorise the appointment of the director and the relevant situation on such terms as they may determine;

 

  

 


 

45

 

 

  (b)

if the relevant situation arises in circumstances other than in paragraph (a) above, the directors (other than the director and any other director with a similar interest who shall not be counted in the quorum at the meeting and shall not vote on the resolution) may resolve to authorise the relevant situation and the continuing performance by the director of his duties on such terms as they may determine.

 

(2)

Any reference in paragraph (1) above to a conflict of interest includes a conflict of interest and duty and a conflict of duties.

 

(3)

Any terms determined by directors under paragraphs (1)(a) or (1)(b) above may be imposed at the time of the authorisation or may be imposed or varied subsequently and may include (without limitation):

 

  (a)

whether the interested directors may vote (or be counted in the quorum at a meeting) in relation to any resolution relating to the relevant situation;

 

  (b)

the exclusion of the interested directors from all information and discussion by the Company of the relevant situation; and

 

  (c)

(without prejudice to the general obligations of confidentiality) the application to the interested directors of a strict duty of confidentiality to the Company for any confidential information of the Company in relation to the relevant situation.

 

(4)

An interested director must act in accordance with any terms determined by the directors under paragraphs (1)(a) or (1)(b) above.

 

(5)

Except as specified in paragraph (1) above, any proposal made to the directors and any authorisation by the directors in relation to a relevant situation shall be dealt with in the same way as any other matter may be proposed to and resolved upon by the directors in accordance with the provisions of these articles.

 

(6)

Any authorisation of a relevant situation given by the directors under paragraph (1) above may provide that, where the interested director obtains (other than through his position as a director of the Company) information that is confidential to a third party, he will not be obliged to disclose it to the Company or to use it in relation to the Company’s affairs in circumstances where to do so would amount to a breach of that confidence.

 

89.

Declaration of interests other than in relation to transactions or arrangements with the Company

A director shall declare the nature and extent of his interest in a relevant situation within article 88(1) to the other directors.

 

90.

Declaration of interest in a proposed transaction or arrangement with the Company

If a director is in any way, directly or indirectly, interested in a proposed transaction or arrangement with the Company or any of its subsidiaries, he must declare the nature and extent of that interest to the other directors.

 

91.

Declaration of interest in an existing transaction or arrangement with the Company

Where a director is in any way, directly or indirectly, interested in a transaction or arrangement that has been entered into by the Company or any of its subsidiaries, he must declare the nature and extent of his interest to the other directors, unless the interest has already been declared under article 90 above.

 

  

 


 

46

 

 

92.

Provisions applicable to declarations of interest

 

(1)

Subject at all times to the Statutes, the declaration of interest must (in the case of article 91) and may, but need not (in the case of article 89 or 90) be made:

 

  (a)

at a meeting of the directors; or

 

  (b)

by notice to the directors which is either:

 

  (i)

notice of that director’s interest in relation to a specific matter or entity; or

 

  (ii)

general notice of that director’s interest, whereby the director is to be regarded as interested in that matter or entity from the date of the giving of the notice.

 

(2)

If a declaration of interest proves to be, or becomes, inaccurate or incomplete, a further declaration must be made.

 

(3)

Any declaration of interest required by article 89 above must be made as soon as is reasonably practicable. Failure to comply with this requirement does not affect the underlying duty to make the declaration of interest.

 

(4)

Any declaration of interest required by article 90 above must be made before the Company enters into the transaction or arrangement.

 

(5)

Any declaration of interest required by article 91 above must be made as soon as is reasonably practicable. Failure to comply with this requirement does not affect the underlying duty to make the declaration of interest.

 

(6)

A declaration in relation to an interest of which the director is not aware, or where the director is not aware of the transaction or arrangement in question, is not required. For this purpose, a director is treated as being aware of matters of which he ought reasonably to be aware.

 

(7)

Subject to the Statues, a director need not declare an interest:

 

  (a)

if it cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest;

 

  (b)

if, or to the extent that, the other directors are already aware of it (and for this purpose the other directors are treated as aware of anything of which they ought reasonably to be aware) unless a declaration is required by Law; or

 

  (c)

if, or to the extent that, it concerns terms of his service contract that have been or are to be considered:

 

  (i)

by a meeting of the directors; or

 

  (ii)

by a committee of the directors appointed for the purpose under the articles.

 

  

 


 

47

 

 

93.

Directors’ interests and voting

 

(1)

Subject to the Law and to declaring his interest in accordance with article 89, 90 or 91 above (as the case may be) a director may:

 

  (a)

enter into or be interested in any transaction or arrangement with the Company, either with regard to his tenure of any office or position in the management, administration or conduct of the business of the Company or as vendor, purchaser or otherwise;

 

  (b)

hold any other office or place of profit with the Company (except that of auditor) in conjunction with his office of director for such period (subject to the Statutes) and upon such terms as the board may decide and be paid such extra remuneration for so doing (whether by way of salary, commission, participation in profits or otherwise) as the board may decide, either in addition to or in lieu of any remuneration under any other provision of these articles;

 

  (c)

act by himself or his firm in a professional capacity for the Company (except as auditor) and be entitled to remuneration for professional services as if he were not a director;

 

  (d)

be or become a member or director of, or hold any other office or place of profit under, or otherwise be interested in, a holding company or subsidiary of that holding company or any other company in which the Company may be interested. The board may cause the voting rights conferred by the shares in any other company held or owned by the Company or exercisable by them as directors of that other company to be exercised in such manner in all respects as it thinks fit (including the exercise of voting rights in favour of any resolution appointing the directors or any of them as directors or officers of the other company or voting or providing for the payment of any benefit to the directors or officers of the other company); and

 

  (e)

be or become a director of any other company in which the Company does not have an interest if that cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest at the time of his appointment as a director of that other company.

 

(2)

A director shall not, by reason of his holding office as director (or of the fiduciary relationship established by holding that office), be liable to account to the Company for any remuneration, profit or other benefit resulting from:

 

  (a)

any relevant situation authorised under article 88(1); or

 

  (b)

any interest permitted under paragraph (1) above,

and no contract shall be liable to be avoided on the grounds of any director having any type of interest authorised under article 88(1) or permitted under paragraph (1)(a) above.

 

(3)

A director shall not vote (or be counted in the quorum at a meeting) in respect of any resolution concerning his own appointment (including fixing or varying its terms), or the termination of his own appointment, as the holder of any office or place of profit with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested but, where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying its terms), or the termination of the appointment, of two or more directors to offices or places of profit with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested, those proposals may be divided and a separate resolution may be put in relation to each

 

  

 


 

48

 

 

 

director and in that case each of the directors concerned (if not otherwise debarred from voting under this article) shall be entitled to vote (and be counted in the quorum) in respect of each resolution unless it concerns his own appointment or the termination of his own appointment.

 

(4)

A director shall also not vote (or be counted in the quorum at a meeting) in relation to any resolution relating to any transaction or arrangement or other proposal in which he has an interest which (together with any interest of any connected person of his) is to his knowledge a direct or indirect interest and may reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest and, if he purports to do so, his vote shall not be counted, but this prohibition shall not apply and a director may vote (and be counted in the quorum) in respect of any resolution concerning any one or more of the following matters:

 

  (a)

any transaction or arrangement in which he is interested by virtue of an interest in shares, debentures or other securities of the Company or otherwise in or through the Company;

 

  (b)

the giving of any guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of:

 

  (i)

money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of, or for the benefit of, the Company or any of its subsidiaries; or

 

  (ii)

a debt or obligation of the Company or any of its subsidiaries for which he himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part (either alone or jointly with others) under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security;

 

  (c)

(subject to the Statutes) indemnification (including loans made in connection with it) by the Company in relation to the performance of his duties on behalf of the Company or of any of its subsidiaries;

 

  (d)

any issue or offer of shares, debentures or other securities of the Company or any of its subsidiaries in respect of which he is or may be entitled to participate in his capacity as a holder of any such securities or as an underwriter or sub-underwriter;

 

  (e)

any transaction or arrangement concerning any other company in which he does not hold directly or indirectly as shareholder, or through his direct or indirect holdings of financial instruments (within the meaning of DTR 5) voting rights representing one per cent. or more of any class of shares in the capital of that company;

 

  (f)

any arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company or any of its subsidiaries which does not accord to him any privilege or benefit not generally accorded to the employees to whom the arrangement relates; and

 

  (g)

the purchase or maintenance of insurance for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons including directors.

 

(5)

In the case of an alternate director, an interest of his appointor shall be treated as an interest of the alternate in addition to any interest which the alternate otherwise has.

 

(6)

If any question arises at any meeting as to whether an interest of a director (other than the chairman of the meeting) may reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest or as to the entitlement of any director (other than the chairman of the meeting) to vote in relation to a transaction or arrangement with the Company and the question is not resolved by his voluntarily agreeing to abstain from voting, the

 

  

 


 

49

 

 

 

question shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting and his ruling in relation to the director concerned shall be final and conclusive except in a case where the nature or extent of the interest of the director concerned, so far as known to him, has not been fairly disclosed. If any question shall arise in respect of the chairman of the meeting and is not resolved by his voluntarily agreeing to abstain from voting, the question shall be decided by a resolution of the board (for which purpose the chairman shall be counted in the quorum but shall not vote on the matter) and the resolution shall be final and conclusive except in a case where the nature or extent of the interest of the chairman of the meeting, so far as known to him, has not been fairly disclosed.

 

(7)

Subject to the Statutes, the Company may by ordinary resolution suspend or relax the provisions of this article to any extent or ratify any transaction or arrangement not duly authorised by reason of a contravention of this article.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD

 

94.

Board and committee meetings

 

(1)

The board may meet for the despatch of business, adjourn and otherwise regulate its meetings as it thinks fit. A director at any time may, and the secretary at the request of a director at any time shall, summon a board meeting.

 

(2)

Board and committee meetings shall not be held in the United Kingdom and no director or committee member (as the case may be) shall participate in any meeting if he is physically present in the United Kingdom at any time during the meeting. Any decision reached or resolution passed by the directors or a committee (as the case may be) at any meeting which is held in the United Kingdom or at any meeting in respect of which any director or committee member (as the case may be) participating in the meeting is physically present in the United Kingdom during the meeting shall be invalid and of no effect.

 

95.

Notice of board meetings

Notice of a board meeting may be given to a director personally or by word of mouth or given in hard copy form or in electronic form to him at such address as he may from time to time specify for this purpose (or if he does not specify an address, at his last known address). A director may waive notice of any meeting either prospectively or retrospectively.

 

96.

Quorum

The quorum necessary for the transaction of the business of the board may be fixed by the board and, unless so fixed at any other number, shall be two. Subject to these articles, any director who ceases to be a director at a board meeting may continue to be present and to act as a director and be counted in the quorum until the end of the board meeting if no other director objects and if otherwise a quorum of directors would not be present.

 

97.

Chairman or deputy chairman to preside

 

(1)

The board may appoint a chairman and one or more deputy chairman or chairmen and may at any time revoke any such appointment.

 

(2)

The chairman, or failing him any deputy chairman (the longest in office taking precedence, if more than one is present), shall, if present and willing, preside at all board meetings but, if no chairman or deputy

 

  

 


 

50

 

 

 

chairman has been appointed, or if he is not present within five minutes after the time fixed for holding the meeting or is unwilling to act as chairman of the meeting, the directors present shall choose one of their number to act as chairman of the meeting.

 

98.

Competence of board meetings

A board meeting at which a quorum is present shall be competent to exercise all the powers, authorities and discretions for the time being vested in or exercisable by the board.

 

99.

Voting

Questions arising at any board meeting shall be determined by a majority of votes. In the case of an equality of votes the chairman of the meeting shall have a second or casting vote.

 

100.

Telephone/electronic board meeting

 

(1)

A board meeting may consist of a conference between directors some or all of whom are in different places provided that each director may participate in the business of the meeting whether directly, by telephone or by any other means (whether electronically or otherwise) which enables him:

 

  (a)

to hear (or otherwise receive real time communications made by) each of the other participating directors addressing the meeting; and

 

  (b)

if he so wishes, to address all of the other participating directors simultaneously (or otherwise communicate in real time with them),

provided that each such director complies with article 94(2) at all times.

 

(2)

A quorum is deemed to be present if at least the number of directors required to form a quorum, subject to the provisions of article 81, may participate in the manner specified above in the business of the meeting.

 

(3)

A board meeting held in this way is deemed to take place at the place where the chairman of the meeting is physically present.

 

101.

Resolutions without meetings

A resolution which is signed or approved by all the directors entitled to vote on that resolution shall be as valid and effectual as if it had been passed at a board meeting duly called and constituted. The resolution may be contained in one document or communication in electronic form or in several documents or communications in electronic form (in like form), each signed or approved by one or more of the directors concerned, provided that it is signed or approved by each such director at a place outside the United Kingdom and that evidence of the place where such signature or approval is made accompanies that signature or approval (as the case may be). For the purpose of this article:

 

  (a)

the signature or approval of an alternate director (if any) shall suffice in place of the signature of the director appointing him; and

 

  (b)

the approval of a director or alternate director shall be given in hard copy form or in electronic form.

 

  

 


 

51

 

 

102.

Validity of acts of directors in spite of formal defect

All acts bona fide done by a meeting of the board, or of a committee, or by any person acting as a director or a member of a committee, shall, notwithstanding that it is afterwards discovered that there was some defect in the appointment of any member of the board or committee or of the person so acting, or that they or any of them were disqualified or had vacated office or were not entitled to vote, be as valid as if every such person had been duly appointed and qualified to be a director and had continued to be a director or member of the committee and had been entitled to vote.

 

103.

Minutes

The board shall cause minutes to be made in books kept for the purpose in relation to the following matters (and such minutes shall be kept at the Office or some other place outside of the United Kingdom for a period of not less than ten years following the date of the relevant matter):

 

  (a)

of all appointments of officers made by the board;

 

  (b)

of the names of all the directors present at each meeting of the board and of any committee; and

 

  (c)

of all resolutions and proceedings of all meetings of the Company and of any class of members, and of the board and of any committee.

SECRETARY

 

104.

Secretary

The secretary shall be appointed by the board for such term, at such remuneration and on such conditions as it thinks fit, and the board may remove from office any person so appointed (without prejudice to any claim for damages for breach of any contract between him and the Company). The board may appoint one of more deputy or assistant secretaries.

SHARE CERTIFICATES

 

105.

Issue of certificates

 

(1)

A person whose name is entered in the register as the holder of any certificated shares shall be entitled (unless the conditions of issue otherwise provide) to receive one certificate for those shares, or one certificate for each class of those shares and, if he transfers part of the shares represented by a certificate in his name, or elects to hold part in uncertificated form, to receive a new certificate for the balance of those shares.

 

(2)

In the case of joint holders, the Company shall not be bound to issue more than one certificate for all the shares in any particular class registered in their joint names, and delivery of a certificate for a share to any one of the joint holders shall be sufficient delivery to all.

 

(3)

A share certificate may be issued under seal (by affixing the seal to, or printing the seal or a representation of it on, the certificate) or executed or authenticated in such manner as the board may from time to time determine, either generally or in any particular case (which may include any signature being applied mechanically or electronically or by any one director in the presence of a witness who attests the signature). A share certificate shall specify the number and class of the shares to which it relates and the

 

  

 


 

52

 

 

 

amount or respective amounts paid up on the shares. Any certificate so issued shall, as against the Company, be prima facie evidence of the title of the person named in that certificate to the shares comprised in it.

 

(4)

A share certificate may be given to a member in accordance with the provisions of these articles on notices.

 

106.

Charges for and replacement of certificates

 

(1)

Except as expressly provided to the contrary in these articles, no fee shall be charged for the issue of a share certificate.

 

(2)

Any two or more certificates representing shares of any one class held by any member may at his request be cancelled and a single new certificate issued.

 

(3)

If any member surrenders for cancellation a certificate representing shares held by him and requests the Company to issue two or more certificates representing those shares in such proportions as he may specify, the board may, if it thinks fit, comply with the request on payment of such fee (if any) as the board may decide.

 

(4)

If a certificate is damaged or defaced or alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, a new certificate representing the same shares may be issued on compliance with such conditions as to evidence, indemnity and security for such indemnity as the board may think fit and on payment of any exceptional expenses of the Company incidental to its investigation of the evidence and preparation of the indemnity and security and, if damaged or defaced, on delivery up of the old certificate.

 

(5)

In the case of joint holders of a share a request for a new certificate under any of the preceding paragraphs of this article may be made by any one of the joint holders unless the certificate is alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed.

LIEN ON SHARES

 

107.

Lien on partly paid shares

 

(1)

The Company shall have a first and paramount lien on every share (not being a fully paid share) for all amounts payable (whether or not due) in respect of that share. The lien shall extend to every amount payable in respect of that share.

 

(2)

The board may at any time either generally or in any particular case declare any share to be wholly or partly exempt from this article. Unless otherwise agreed, the registration of a transfer of a share shall operate as a waiver of the Company’s lien (if any) on that share.

 

108.

Enforcement of lien

 

(1)

The Company may sell any share subject to a lien in such manner as the board may decide if an amount payable on the share is due and is not paid within 14 clear days after a notice has been given to the holder or any person entitled by transmission to the share demanding payment of that amount and giving notice of intention to sell in default.

 

(2)

To give effect to any sale under this article, the board may authorise some person to transfer the share sold to, or as directed by, the purchaser. The purchaser shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase money nor shall the title of the new holder to the share be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the sale.

 

  

 


 

53

 

 

(3)

The net proceeds of the sale, after payment of the costs, shall be applied in or towards satisfaction of the amount due and any residue shall (subject to a like lien for any amounts not presently due as existed on the share before the sale), on surrender of the certificate for the shares sold, be paid to the holder or person entitled by transmission to the share immediately before the sale.

CALLS ON SHARES

 

109.

Calls

 

(1)

Subject to the terms of allotment, the board may make calls on the members in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares (whether in respect of nominal amount or premium) and each member shall (subject to his receiving at least 14 clear days’ notice in writing specifying when and where payment is to be made) pay to the Company as required by the notice the amount called on his shares together with any interest pursuant to article 110. A call may be revoked or postponed as the board may decide.

 

(2)

Any call may be made payable in one sum or by instalments and shall be deemed to be made at the time when the resolution of the board authorising that call is passed.

 

(3)

A person on whom a call is made shall remain liable for it notwithstanding the subsequent transfer of the share in respect of which the call is made.

 

(4)

The joint holders of a share shall be jointly and severally liable for the payment of all calls in respect of that share.

 

110.

Interest on calls

If a call is not paid before or on the due date for payment, the person from whom it is due shall pay interest on the amount unpaid, from the due date for payment to the date of actual payment, at such rate as the board may decide, but the board may waive payment of the interest, wholly or in part.

 

111.

Sums treated as calls

A sum which by the terms of allotment of a share is payable on allotment, or at a fixed time, or by instalments at fixed times, shall for all purposes of these articles be deemed to be a call duly made and payable on the date or dates fixed for payment and, in case of non-payment, these articles shall apply as if that sum had become payable by virtue of a call.

 

112.

Power to differentiate

On any issue of shares the board may make arrangements for a difference between the allottees or holders of the shares in the amounts and times of payment of calls on their shares.

 

113.

Payment of calls in advance

The board may, if it thinks fit, receive all or any part of the moneys payable on a share beyond the sum actually called up on it if the holder is willing to make payment in advance and, on any moneys so paid in advance, may (until they would otherwise be due) pay interest at such rate as may be agreed between the board and the member paying the sum in advance.

 

  

 


 

54

 

 

FORFEITURE OF SHARES

 

114.

Notice of unpaid calls

 

(1)

If the whole or any part of any call or instalment remains unpaid on any share after the due date for payment, the board may serve a written notice on the holder requiring him to pay so much of the call or instalment as remains unpaid, together with any accrued interest.

 

(2)

The notice shall state a further day, being not less than 14 clear days from the date of the notice, on or before which, and the place where, payment is to be made and shall state that, in the event of non-payment on or before the day and at the place appointed, the share in respect of which the call was made or instalment is payable will be liable to be forfeited.

 

(3)

The board may accept a surrender of any share liable to be forfeited.

 

115.

Forfeiture on non-compliance with notice

 

(1)

If the requirements of a notice given under the preceding article are not complied with, any share in respect of which it was given may (before the payment required by the notice is made) be forfeited by a resolution of the board. The forfeiture shall include all dividends declared and other moneys payable in respect of the forfeited share and not actually paid before the forfeiture.

(2)

If a share is forfeited, notice of the forfeiture shall be given to the person who was the holder of the share or (as the case may be) the person entitled to the share by transmission, and an entry that notice of the forfeiture has been given, with the relevant date, shall be made in the register; but no forfeiture shall be invalidated by any omission to give such notice or to make such entry.

 

116.

Power to annul forfeiture or surrender

The board may, at any time before the forfeited or surrendered share has been sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of, annul the forfeiture or surrender upon payment of all calls and interest due on or incurred in respect of the share and on such further conditions (if any) as it thinks fit.

 

117.

Disposal of forfeited or surrendered shares

 

(1)

Every share which is forfeited or surrendered shall become the property of the Company and (subject to the Statutes) may be sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of, upon such terms and in such manner as the board shall decide either to the person who was before the forfeiture the holder of the share or to any other person and whether with or without all or any part of the amount previously paid up on the share being credited as so paid up. The board may for the purposes of a disposal authorise some person to transfer the forfeited or surrendered share to, or in accordance with the directions of, any person to whom the same has been disposed of.

 

(2)

A statutory declaration or an affidavit by a director or the secretary that a share has been forfeited or surrendered on a specified date shall, as against all persons claiming to be entitled to the share, be conclusive evidence of the facts stated in it and shall (subject to the execution of any necessary transfer) constitute a good title to the share. The person to whom the share has been disposed of shall not be bound to see to the application of the consideration for the disposal (if any) nor shall his title to the share be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings connected with the forfeiture, surrender, sale, re-allotment or disposal of the share.

 

  

 


 

55

 

 

118.

Arrears to be paid notwithstanding forfeiture or surrender

A person any of whose shares have been forfeited or surrendered shall cease to be a member in respect of the forfeited or surrendered share and shall surrender to the Company for cancellation any certificate for the share forfeited or surrendered, but shall remain liable (unless payment is waived in whole or in part by the board) to pay to the Company all moneys payable by him on or in respect of that share at the time of forfeiture or surrender, together with interest from the time of forfeiture or surrender until payment at such rate as the board shall decide, in the same manner as if the share had not been forfeited or surrendered. He shall also be liable to satisfy all the claims and demands (if any) which the Company might have enforced in respect of the share at the time of forfeiture or surrender. No deduction or allowance shall be made for the value of the share at the time of forfeiture or surrender or for any consideration received on its disposal.

SEAL

 

119.

Seal

 

(1)

The Company may exercise the powers conferred by the Statutes with regard to having official seals and those powers shall be vested in the board.

 

(2)

The board shall provide for the safe custody of every seal of the Company.

 

(3)

A seal shall be used only by the authority of the board or a duly authorised committee but that authority may consist of an instruction or approval given in hard copy form or in electronic form by a majority of the directors or of the members of a duly authorised committee.

 

(4)

The board may determine who shall sign any instrument to which a seal is applied, either generally or in relation to a particular instrument or type of instrument, and may also determine, either generally or in any particular case, that such signatures shall be dispensed with.

 

(5)

Unless otherwise decided by the board:

 

  (a)

certificates for shares, debentures or other securities of the Company issued under seal need not be signed; and

 

  (b)

every other instrument to which a seal is applied shall be signed by at least one director and the secretary or by at least two directors or by one director in the presence of a witness who attests the signature.

DIVIDENDS

 

120.

Declaration of dividends by the Company

Subject to the provisions of the Law, the Company may, by ordinary resolution, declare a dividend to be paid to the members, according to their respective rights and interests in the profits, and may fix the time for payment of such dividend, but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the board.

 

121.

Fixed and interim dividends

Subject to the provisions of the Law, the board may pay such interim dividends as appear to the board to be justified by the financial position of the Company and may also pay any dividend payable at a fixed

 

  

 


 

56

 

 

rate at intervals settled by the board whenever the financial position of the Company, in the opinion of the board, justifies its payment. If the board acts in good faith, none of the directors shall incur any liability to the holders of shares conferring preferred rights for any loss such holders may suffer in consequence of the lawful payment of an interim dividend on any shares having non-preferred or deferred rights.

 

122.

Calculation and currency of dividends

 

(1)

Except insofar as the rights attaching to, or the terms of issue of, any share otherwise provide:

 

  (a)

all dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up on the shares in respect of which the dividend is paid, but no amount paid up on a share in advance of calls shall be treated for the purposes of this article as paid up on the share;

 

  (b)

all dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up on the shares during any portion or portions of the period in respect of which the dividend is paid;

 

  (c)

any amount paid by the Company by way of dividend will be deemed to include any amount that the Company may be compelled by law to withhold or deduct; and

 

  (d)

dividends may be declared or paid in any currency.

 

(2)

The board may agree with any member that dividends which may at any time or from time to time be declared or become due on his shares in one currency shall be paid or satisfied in another, and may agree the basis of conversion to be applied and how and when the amount to be paid in the other currency shall be calculated and paid and for the Company or any other person to bear any costs involved.

 

123.

Method of payment

 

(1)

The Company may pay any dividend or other sum payable in respect of a share:

 

  (a)

by cheque or dividend warrant payable to the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, the holder whose name stands first in the register in respect of the relevant share) or to such other person as the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, all the joint holders) may notify to the Company for the purpose; or

 

  (b)

by a bank or other funds transfer system or by such other electronic means (including, in the case of an uncertificated share, a relevant system) to such account as the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, all the joint holders) may notify to the Company for the purpose; or

 

  (c)

in such other way as may be agreed between the Company and the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, all such holders).

 

(2)

Any such cheque or dividend warrant may be sent by post to the registered address of the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, to the registered address of that person whose name stands first in the register in respect of the relevant share) or to such other address as the holder (or, in the case of joint holders, all the joint holders) may notify to the Company for the purpose.

 

(3)

Every cheque or warrant is sent, and payment in any other way is made, at the risk of the person or persons entitled to it and the Company will not be responsible for any sum lost or delayed when it has

 

  

 


 

57

 

 

 

sent or transmitted the sum in accordance with these articles. Clearance of a cheque or warrant or transmission of funds through a bank or other funds transfer system or by such other electronic means as is permitted by these articles shall be a good discharge to the Company.

 

(4)

Any joint holder or other person jointly entitled to any share may give an effective receipt for any dividend or other sum paid in respect of the share.

 

(5)

Any dividend or other sum payable in respect of any share may be paid to a person or persons entitled by transmission to that share as if he or they were the holder or joint holders of that share and his address (or the address of the first named of two or more persons jointly entitled) noted in the register were the registered address.

 

124.

Dividends not to bear interest

No dividend or other moneys payable by the Company on or in respect of any share shall bear interest as against the Company unless otherwise provided by the rights attached to the share.

 

125.

Calls or debts or amounts required by law may be deducted from dividends

The board may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable to any person (either alone or jointly with another) on or in respect of a share all such sums as may be due from him (either alone or jointly with another) to the Company on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares of the Company.

 

126.

Unclaimed dividends etc

All unclaimed dividends, interest or other sums payable may be invested or otherwise made use of by the board for the benefit of the Company until claimed. All dividends unclaimed for a period of 12 years after having become due for payment shall be forfeited and cease to remain owing by the Company. The payment of any unclaimed dividend, interest or other sum payable by the Company on or in respect of any share into a separate account shall not constitute the Company a trustee in respect of it.

 

127.

Uncashed dividends

If:

 

  (a)

a payment for a dividend or other sum payable in respect of a share sent by the Company to the person entitled to it in accordance with these articles is left uncashed or is returned to the Company and, after reasonable enquiries, the Company is unable to establish any new address or, with respect to a payment to be made by a funds transfer system, a new account, for that person; or

 

  (b)

such a payment is left uncashed or returned to the Company on two consecutive occasions,

the Company shall not be obliged to send any dividends or other sums payable in respect of that share to that person until he notifies the Company of an address or, where the payment is to be made by a funds transfer system, details of the account, to be used for the purpose.

 

128.

Dividends in specie

 

(1)

With the authority of an ordinary resolution of the Company and on the recommendation of the board, payment of any dividend may be satisfied wholly or in part by the distribution of specific assets and in particular of paid up shares or debentures of any other company.

 

  

 


 

58

 

 

(2)

Where any difficulty arises with the distribution, the board may settle the difficulty as it thinks fit and, in particular, may issue fractional certificates (or ignore fractions), fix the value for distribution of the specific assets or any part of them, determine that cash payments be made to any members on the basis of the value so fixed in order to secure equality of distribution and vest any of the specific assets in trustees on such trusts for the persons entitled to the dividend as the board may think fit.

 

129.

Scrip dividends

 

(1)

The board may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer any holders of ordinary shares the right to elect to receive further shares (whether or not of that class), credited as fully paid, instead of cash in respect of all (or some part) of any dividend specified by the ordinary resolution (a scrip dividend ) in accordance with the following provisions of this article.

 

(2)

The ordinary resolution may specify a particular dividend (whether or not already declared) or may specify all or any dividends declared within a specified period, but such period may not end later than five years after the date of the meeting at which the ordinary resolution is passed.

 

(3)

The basis of allotment shall be decided by the board so that, as nearly as may be considered convenient, the value of the further shares, including any fractional entitlement, is equal to the amount of the cash dividend which would otherwise have been paid (disregarding the amount of any associated tax credit).

 

(4)

For the purposes of paragraph (3) above the value of the further shares shall be:

 

  (a)

equal to the average middle-market quotation for a fully paid share of the relevant class, adjusted if necessary for the proposed dividend, as shown in the daily official list of the London Stock Exchange or as established from such other source as the board considers appropriate for the five business days immediately preceding or following the announcement of the cash dividend to which the scrip dividend relates, as the board may decide; or

 

  (b)

calculated in such manner as may be determined by or in accordance with the ordinary resolution.

 

(5)

The board shall give notice to the holders of ordinary shares of their rights of election in respect of the scrip dividend and shall specify the procedure to be followed in order to make an election.

 

(6)

The dividend or that part of it in respect of which an election for the scrip dividend is made shall not be paid and instead further shares shall be allotted in accordance with elections duly made and the board shall capitalise a sum equal to the aggregate nominal amount of the shares to be allotted out of such sums available for the purpose as the board may consider appropriate.

 

(7)

The further shares so allotted shall rank pari passu in all respects with the fully paid shares of the same class then in issue except as regards participation in the relevant dividend.

 

(8)

The board may decide that the right to elect for any scrip dividend shall not be made available to members resident in any territory where, in the opinion of the board, compliance with local laws or regulations would be unduly onerous.

 

(9)

The board may do all acts and things as it considers necessary or expedient to give effect to the provisions of a scrip dividend election and the issue of any shares in accordance with the provisions of this article, and may make such provisions as it thinks fit for the case of shares becoming distributable in fractions (including provisions under which, in whole or in part, the benefit of fractional entitlements accrues to the

 

  

 


 

59

 

 

 

Company rather than to the members concerned). To the extent that the entitlement of any holder of ordinary shares in respect of any dividend is less than the value of one new share (as determined for the basis of any scrip dividend) the board may also from time to time establish or vary a procedure for such entitlement to be accrued and aggregated with any similar entitlement for the purposes of any subsequent scrip dividend.

 

(10)

The board may from time to time establish or vary a procedure for election mandates, under which a holder of ordinary shares may, in respect of any future dividends for which a right of election pursuant to this article is offered, elect to receive shares in lieu of such dividend on the terms of such mandate.

 

(11)

The board shall not make a scrip dividend available unless the Company has sufficient unissued shares and undistributed profits or reserves to give effect to elections which could be made to receive that scrip dividend.

 

130.

Dividend Access Arrangements

 

(1)

Where any cash amount announced or declared and paid by way of dividend by a subsidiary of the Company is received by the Dividend Access Trustee on behalf of Elected Shareholders, the entitlement of such Elected Shareholders to be paid any dividend announced or declared pursuant to these Articles will be reduced by the corresponding amount that has been paid to the Dividend Access Trustee in respect of such Elected Shareholder.

 

(2)

If a dividend is announced or declared pursuant to these articles and the entitlement of any Elected Shareholder to be paid its pro rata share of such dividend is not fully extinguished on the relevant payment date by virtue of such a payment made to the Dividend Access Trustee, the Company has a full and unconditional obligation to make payment in respect of the outstanding part of such dividend entitlement.

 

(3)

For the purposes of this article, the amount that is paid to the Dividend Access Trustee in respect of any Elected Shareholder in respect of any particular dividend paid by a subsidiary of the Company (a specified dividend ) will be deemed to include:

 

  (a)

any amount that the Dividend Access Trustee may be compelled by law to withhold;

 

  (b)

a pro rata share of any tax that the company paying the specified dividend is obliged to withhold or to deduct from the same; and

 

  (c)

a pro rata share of any tax that is payable by the Dividend Access Trustee in respect of the specified dividend.

 

(4)

For the purposes of this article, the Dividend Access Trustee is to be treated as having been paid an amount in respect of an Elected Shareholder if a cheque, warrant or similar financial instrument in respect of that amount is properly despatched to the Dividend Access Trustee (or to such persons as the Dividend Access Trustee nominates), in respect of that Elected Shareholder or if a payment is made through CREST, bank transfer or other electronic means.

 

(5)

Any member who holds 100,000 or fewer ordinary shares in the Company, and who has not lodged a Withdrawal Notice with the Company’s registrar, will be deemed to be an Elected Shareholder and will be bound by the rules governing the dividend access arrangements as put in place by the Company from time to time.

 

  

 


 

60

 

 

(6)

The directors may vary the rules governing the dividend access arrangements as and when they consider appropriate. The Company shall notify a Regulatory Information Service of any such variation unless in the opinion of the directors the variation is of a minor nature or of a formal or technical nature only and does not materially prejudice the interests of Elected Shareholders, in which event written notice shall be given as soon as practicable after the variation has been made.

 

(7)

The directors may as and when they consider it appropriate suspend or terminate the dividend access arrangements by notifying Elected Shareholders in writing and notifying a Regulatory Information Service.

 

(8)

For the purposes of this article:

 

  (a)

CREST means the system for the paperless settlement of trades in securities and the holding of uncertificated securities currently operated by Euroclear UK & Ireland Limited.

 

  (b)

Dividend Access Trustee means the trustee of any trust established for the purposes of receiving, on trust for Elected Shareholders, amounts paid by way of dividend to such trust by a subsidiary of the Company;

 

  (c)

Elected Shareholder means any member who has elected (or is deemed to have elected) to receive dividends from the Dividend Access Trustee paid to such Trustee by a subsidiary of the Company pursuant to any arrangement or plan determined for such purpose by the board;

 

  (d)

Regulatory Information Service means a regulatory information service that is approved by the FSA; and

 

  (e)

Withdrawal Notice means a notice in the form specified in the rules governing the dividend access arrangements as put in place by the Company from time to time, by which an Elected Shareholder or a member holding 100,000 or fewer shares in the Company can notify the Company of his wish not to participate in the dividend access arrangements;

CAPITALISATION OF RESERVES

 

131.

Capitalisation of reserves

 

(1)

The board may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution of the Company:

 

  (a)

resolve to capitalise any sum standing to the credit of any reserve account of the Company (including share premium account and capital redemption reserve) or any sum standing to the credit of profit and loss account not required for the payment of any preferential dividend (whether or not it is available for distribution); and

 

  (b)

appropriate that sum as capital to the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the nominal amount of the ordinary share capital held by them respectively and apply that sum on their behalf in paying up in full any unissued shares or debentures of the Company of a nominal amount equal to that sum and allot the shares or debentures credited as fully paid to those members, or as they may direct, in those proportions or in paying up the whole or part of any amounts which are unpaid in respect of any issued shares in the Company held by them respectively, or otherwise deal with such sum as directed by the resolution provided that the share premium account and the capital redemption reserve and any sum not available for distribution in accordance with the Statutes may only be applied in paying up unissued shares to be allotted credited as fully paid up.

 

  

 


 

61

 

 

(2)

Where any difficulty arises in respect of any distribution of any capitalised reserve or other sum, the board may settle the difficulty as it thinks fit and in particular may make such provisions as it thinks fit in the case of shares or debentures becoming distributable in fractions (including provisions under which, in whole or in part, the benefit of fractional entitlements accrues to the Company rather than the members concerned) or ignore fractions and may fix the value for distribution of any fully paid up shares or debentures and may determine that cash payments be made to any members on the basis of the value so fixed in order to secure equality of distribution, and may vest any shares or debentures in trustees upon such trusts for the persons entitled to share in the distribution as the board may think fit.

 

(3)

The board may also authorise any person to sign on behalf of the persons entitled to share in the distribution a contract for the acceptance by those persons of the shares or debentures to be allotted to them credited as fully paid under a capitalisation and any such contract shall be binding on all those persons.

 

132.

Capitalisation of reserves - employee share schemes

 

(1)

This article (which is without prejudice to the generality of the provisions of the immediately preceding article) applies:

 

  (a)

where a person is granted pursuant to an employee share scheme a right to subscribe for shares in the Company in cash at a subscription price less than its nominal value; and

 

  (b)

where, pursuant to an employee share scheme, the terms on which any person is entitled to subscribe in cash for shares in the Company are adjusted as a result of a capitalisation issue, rights issue or other variation of capital so that the subscription price is less than their nominal value.

 

(2)

In any such case the board:

 

  (a)

shall transfer to a reserve account a sum equal to the deficiency between the subscription price and the nominal value of the shares (the cash deficiency ) from the profits or reserves of the Company which are available for distribution and not required for the payment of any preferential dividend; and

 

  (b)

(subject to paragraph (4) below) shall not apply that reserve account for any purpose other than paying up the cash deficiency upon the allotment of those shares.

 

(3)

Whenever the Company is required to allot shares pursuant to such a right to subscribe, the board shall (subject to the Statutes) appropriate to capital out of the reserve account an amount equal to the cash deficiency applicable to those shares, apply that amount in paying up the deficiency on the nominal value of those shares and allot those shares credited as fully paid to the person entitled to them.

 

(4)

If any person ceases to be entitled to subscribe for shares as described above, the restrictions on the reserve account shall cease to apply in relation to such part of the account as is equal to the amount of the cash deficiency applicable to those shares.

 

(5)

No right shall be granted under any employee share scheme under paragraph (1)(a) above and no adjustment shall be made as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) above unless there are sufficient profits or reserves of the Company available for distribution and not required for the payment of any preferential dividend to permit the transfer to a reserve account in accordance with this article of an amount sufficient to pay up the cash deficiency applicable to the shares concerned.

 

  

 


 

62

 

 

RECORD DATES

 

133.

Fixing of record dates

 

(1)

Notwithstanding any other provision of these articles, but without prejudice to any rights attached to any shares, the Company or the board may fix a date as the record date by reference to which a dividend will be declared or paid or a distribution, allotment or issue made, and that date may be before, on or after the date on which the dividend, distribution, allotment or issue is declared, paid or made.

 

(2)

In the absence of a record date being fixed, entitlement to any dividend, distribution, allotment or issue shall be determined by reference to the date on which the dividend is declared or the distribution, allotment or issue is made.

ACCOUNTS

 

134.

Accounting records

 

(1)

The board shall cause accounting records of the Company to be kept in accordance with the Statutes.

 

(2)

No member (as such) shall have any right of inspecting any account, book or document of the Company, except as conferred by law or authorised by the board or by any ordinary resolution of the Company.

 

135.

Summary financial statements

 

(1)

The Company may send summary financial statements to any member of the Company who has requested to receive such statements in accordance with paragraph (2) below instead of copies of its full accounts and reports (being the consolidated accounts prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles adopted by the Company from time to time that are prepared for the purposes of the Listing Rules or the Disclosure and Transparency Rules). Where a person has been nominated by a member to enjoy information rights by virtue of Article 140 and is accordingly entitled to receive copies of such full accounts and reports, the Company may send summary financial statements to any such nominated person instead of copies of its full accounts and reports if that member has requested to receive such statements in accordance with paragraph (2) below.

 

(2)

A member may elect to receive summary financial statements by notice in writing to the Company and such election shall become effective on receipt by the Company provided that if such election is received by the Company later than 28 days before the first date on which copies of its full accounts required to be sent to that member are sent out, the directors may determine that such election shall not become effective until the following year.

 

(3)

The Company may notify members that, unless they notify the Company in writing to the contrary within a reasonable period of time (being not less than 21 days after service of notice), they will be deemed to have elected to receive summary financial statements pursuant to paragraph (2) above, and members who fail to make such notification to the Company shall be deemed to have so elected, save to the extent they subsequently elect to receive copies of the Company’s full accounts and reports pursuant to paragraph (4) below.

 

(4)

Where a member has (or is deemed to have) elected to receive summary financial statements, a member may elect to receive full accounts and reports by notice in writing to the Company and such election shall become effective on receipt by the Company, provided that if such election is received by the Company

 

  

 


 

63

 

 

 

later than 28 days before the first date on which copies of its summary financial statements to be sent to that member are sent out, the directors may determine that such election shall not become effective until the following year.

 

(5)

Each summary financial statement must comply with the content requirements required by section 428 of the UK Companies Act 2006 and any regulations made under section 428(2) from time to time as if the Company were incorporated in the United Kingdom (but with such amendments as may, in the board’s opinion, be necessary or appropriate as a result of the Company not being incorporated in the United Kingdom).

 

(6)

The Company may, in its sole discretion, elect not to produce a summary financial statement in any particular year in which case any election or deemed election to receive summary financial statements shall not apply in that year.

COMMUNICATIONS

 

136.

Communications to the Company

 

(1)

Subject to the Statutes and except where otherwise expressly stated in these articles, any document or information to be sent or supplied to the Company (whether or not such document or information is required or authorised under the Statutes) shall be in hard copy form or, subject to paragraph (2), be sent or supplied in electronic form or by means of a website.

 

(2)

Subject to the Statutes, a document or information may be given to the Company in electronic form only if it is given in such form and manner and to such address as may have been specified by the board from time to time for the receipt of documents in electronic form. The board may prescribe such procedures as it thinks fit for verifying the authenticity or integrity of any such document or information given to it in electronic form.

 

(3)

A communication sent to the Company by electronic means shall not be treated as received by the Company if it is rejected by computer virus protection arrangements.

 

137.

Communications by the Company

 

(1)

A document or information may be sent or supplied in hard copy form by the Company to any member either personally or by sending or supplying it by post addressed to the member at his registered address or by leaving it at that address.

 

(2)

Subject to the Statutes, a document or information may be sent or supplied by the Company in electronic form to any member who has agreed (generally or specifically) that a document or information may be sent or supplied in electronic form and has not revoked that agreement. Where a document or information is sent or supplied by electronic means, it may only be sent or supplied to an address specified for that purpose by the member.

 

(3)

A document or information may be sent or supplied by the Company to a member by being made available on a website if the member has agreed (generally or specifically), or pursuant to paragraph (7) below is deemed to have agreed, that documents or information can be sent or supplied to the member in that form and has not revoked such agreement.

 

  

 


 

64

 

 

(4)

A document or information sent or supplied by means of a website must be made available in a form, and by a means, that the Company reasonably considers will enable the recipient: (i) to read it, and (ii) to retain a copy of it. For this purpose, a document or information can be read only if: (i) it can be read with the naked eye, or (ii) to the extent that it consists of images (for example photographs) it can be seen with the naked eye.

 

(5)

If a document or information is sent or supplied by means of a website, the Company must notify the intended recipient of: (i) the presence of the document or information on the website, (ii) the address of the website, (iii) the place on the website where it may be accessed, and (iv) how to access the document or information.

 

(6)

Any document or information made available on a website will be maintained on the website for the period of 28 days beginning with the date on which notification is given under paragraph (5) above, or such shorter period as may be decided by the board. A failure to make a document or information available on a website throughout the period mentioned in this paragraph (6) shall be disregarded if: (i) it is made available on the website for part of that period, and (ii) the failure to make it available throughout that period is wholly attributable to circumstances that it would not be reasonable for the Company to prevent or avoid.

 

(7)

If a member has been asked individually by the Company to agree that the Company may send or supply documents or information generally or specific documents or information to the member by means of a website and the Company does not receive a response within a period of 28 days beginning with the date on which the Company’s request was sent (or such longer period as the board may specify), such member will be deemed to have agreed to receive such documents or information by means of a website in accordance with paragraph (3) above (save in respect of any documents or information as may be required to be sent in hard copy form pursuant to the Law). A member can revoke any such deemed election in accordance with paragraph (8) below.

 

(8)

Any amendment or revocation of a notification given to the Company or agreement (or deemed agreement) under this article shall only take effect if in writing, signed (or authenticated by electronic means) by the member and on actual receipt by the Company thereof.

 

(9)

Where these articles require or permit a document to be authenticated by a person by electronic means, to be valid it must incorporate the electronic signature or personal identification details of that person, in such form as the directors may approve, or be accompanied by such other evidence as the directors may require to satisfy themselves that the document is genuine.

 

(10)

In the case of joint holders of a share, any document or information sent or supplied by the Company in any manner permitted by these articles to the joint holder who is named first in the register in respect of the joint holding shall be deemed to be given to all other holders of the share.

 

(11)

A member whose registered address is not within Jersey, the Republic of Ireland or the United Kingdom shall not be entitled to receive any notice from the Company unless:

 

  (a)

the Company is able, in accordance with the Statutes, to send notice to him by electronic means; or

 

  (b)

he gives to the Company a postal address within Jersey, the Republic of Ireland or the United Kingdom at which notices may be given to him.

 

  

 


 

65

 

 

138.

Communication by advertisement

If at any time by reason of the suspension or curtailment of postal services within Jersey, the Republic of Ireland or the United Kingdom the Company is unable effectively to convene a general meeting, the Company may convene a general meeting by:

 

  (a)

a notice advertised on its website and in at least one newspaper with a national circulation in the United Kingdom; and

 

  (b)

by giving notice by electronic means to those members to whom, in accordance with the Statutes, the Company is able to give notice by electronic means.

In any such case the Company shall send confirmatory copies of the notice (or, as the case may be, the notification of the website notice) by post to those members to whom notice (or notification) cannot be given by electronic means if at least six clear days before the meeting the posting of notices (and notifications) to addresses throughout Jersey, the Republic of Ireland or the United Kingdom again becomes practicable.

 

139.

When communication is deemed received

 

(1)

Any document or information, if sent by first class post, shall be deemed to have been received on the day following that on which the envelope containing it is put into the post, or, if sent by second class post, shall be deemed to have been received on the second day following that on which the envelope containing it is put into the post and in proving that a document or information has been received it shall be sufficient to prove that the letter, envelope or wrapper containing the document or information was properly addressed, prepaid and put into the post.

 

(2)

Any document or information not sent by post but left at a registered address or address at which a document or information may be received shall be deemed to have been received on the day it was so left.

 

(3)

Any document or information, if sent or supplied by electronic means shall be deemed to have been received on the day on which the document or information was sent or supplied by or on behalf of the Company. In the case of any document or information sent or supplied by the Company by means of a relevant system, that document or information shall be deemed to have been received when the Company or any sponsoring system-participant acting on its behalf sends the issuer’s instruction relating to the document or other information.

 

(4)

If the Company receives a delivery failure notification following a communication by electronic means in accordance with paragraph (3) above, the Company shall send or supply the document or information in hard copy or electronic form (but not by electronic means) to the member either personally or by post addressed to the member at his registered address or by leaving it at that address. This shall not affect when the document or information was deemed to be received in accordance with paragraph (3) above.

 

(5)

Where a document or information is sent or supplied by means of a website, it shall be deemed to have been received:

 

  (a)

when the material was first made available on the website; or

 

  (b)

if later, when the recipient was deemed to have received notice of the fact that the material was available on the website.

 

  

 


 

66

 

 

(6)

Where, in accordance with article 137 and 138, notice is given by way of website notice and newspaper advertisement, such notice shall be deemed to have been given to each member or person entitled to so receive it at the later of:

 

  (a)

the time the notice is available on the website; and

 

  (b)

12.00 p.m. on the day when the advertisement appears (or, if it appears on different days, at 12.00 p.m. on the first of the days when it appears).

 

(7)

A member present, either in person or by proxy, at any meeting of the Company or class of members of the Company shall be deemed to have received notice of the meeting and, where requisite, of the purposes for which the meeting was convened.

 

(8)

Every person who becomes entitled to a share shall be bound by every notice (other than a notice in accordance with article 26) in respect of that share which before his name is entered in the register was given to the person from whom he derives his title to the share.

 

(9)

Proof that a notice contained in an electronic communication was sent in accordance with guidance issued by the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators shall be conclusive evidence that the notice was given.

 

(10)

Any document or other information sent or supplied by the Company by any other means authorised in writing by the member concerned shall be deemed to have been received when the Company has carried out the action it has been authorised to take for that purpose.

 

140.

Nomination of persons to enjoy information rights

 

(1)

A member who holds shares on behalf of another person, pursuant to the Uncertificated Securities Order, may nominate that person to enjoy information rights in accordance with this article.

 

(2)

The Company need not act on a nomination purporting to relate to certain information rights only.

 

(3)

If the person to be nominated in accordance with (1) above wishes to receive hard copy communications, he must, prior to the nomination being made:

 

  (a)

request the member making the nomination to notify the Company of that fact; and

 

  (b)

provide an address to which such copies may be sent.

 

(4)

If having received such a request the member making the nomination:

 

  (a)

notifies the Company that the nominated person wishes to receive hard copy communications; and

 

  (b)

provides the Company with that address,

the right of the nominated person is to receive hard copy communications accordingly.

 

(5)

If the nominated person does not provide an address to the Company for delivery of the information under this article, then he is taken to have agreed that documents or information may be sent or supplied to him by the Company by means of a website.

 

  

 


 

67

 

 

(6)

The agreement in paragraph (5) above:

 

  (a)

may be revoked by the nominated person by sending details of his address to the Company; and

 

  (b)

does not affect the nominated person’s right to require the Company to provide him with a hard copy version of a document or information provided in any other form.

 

(7)

The nomination may be terminated at the request of the member or of the nominated person.

 

(8)

The nomination ceases to have effect in any of the following situations relating to the nominated person:

 

  (a)

in the case of an individual, his death or bankruptcy;

 

  (b)

in the case of a body corporate, its dissolution or the making of an order for, or the passing of a resolution for its, winding up of the body otherwise than for the purposes of reconstruction;

 

  (c)

where there are more nominated persons than the member has shares in the Company;

 

  (d)

where the relevant member holds different classes of shares with different information rights and where there are more nominated persons than he has shares conferring a particular right; and

 

  (e)

where the Company enquires of a nominated person whether he wishes to retain his information rights and the Company does not receive a response from the nominated person within the period of 28 days beginning with the date on which the Company’s enquiry was sent.

 

(9)

Where the Company sends a copy of a notice of a meeting to a person nominated in accordance with this article, the copy of the notice must be accompanied by a statement that:

 

  (a)

he may have a right under an agreement between him and the member by whom he was nominated to be appointed, or to have someone else appointed, as a proxy for the meeting, and

 

  (b)

if he has no such right or does not wish to exercise it, he may have a right under such an agreement to give instructions to the member as to the exercise of voting rights, and the copy of the notice of the meeting shall not contain a statement of the member’s rights to appoint a proxy.

 

(10)

The rights conferred on the nominated person under this article are in addition to the rights of the member himself.

 

(11)

Any provision of the Statutes and any provision of the Company’s articles, having effect in relation to communications with members has a corresponding effect (subject to any necessary adaptations) in relation to communications with the nominated person.

 

(12)

A failure to give effect to the rights conferred by the nomination does not affect the validity of anything done by or on behalf of the Company.

 

(13)

For the purposes of this article, information rights means:

 

  (a)

the right to receive a copy of all communications that the Company sends to its members generally or to any class of its members that includes the member making the nomination;

 

  

 


 

68

 

 

  (b)

the right to receive one copy of the Company’s last annual accounts, the last directors’ remuneration report, the last directors’ report and the auditor’s report on those accounts (including the report on the directors’ remuneration report and on the directors’ report);

 

  (c)

the right to receive one copy of the summary financial statements of the Company; and

 

  (d)

the right to receive one copy of any document or information, in hard copy form, which has been provided to the members, by the Company, by means of electronic communication.

 

141.

Record date for communications

 

(1)

For the purposes of giving notices of meetings, or of sending or supplying other documents or other information, whether under the Statutes, any other applicable law or regulation, a provision in these articles or any other instrument, the Company may determine that persons entitled to receive such notices, documents or other information are those persons entered on the register at the close of business on a day determined by it.

 

(2)

The day determined by the Company under paragraph (1) above may not be more than 21 days before the day that the notice of the meeting, document or other information is given.

 

142.

Communication to person entitled by transmission

Where a person is entitled by transmission to a share, any notice or other communication shall be given to him, as if he were the holder of that share and his address noted in the register were his registered address. In any other case, any notice or other communication given to any member pursuant to these articles shall, notwithstanding that the member is then dead or bankrupt or that any other event giving rise to the transmission of the share by operation of law has occurred and whether or not the Company has notice of the death, bankruptcy or other event, be deemed to have been properly given in respect of any share registered in the name of that member as sole or joint holder.

UNTRACED MEMBERS

 

143.

Sale of shares of untraced members

 

(1)

The Company may sell, in such manner as the board may decide and at the best price it considers to be reasonably obtainable at that time, any share of a member, or any share to which a person is entitled by transmission if:

 

  (a)

during a period of 12 years at least three cash dividends have become payable in respect of the share to be sold and have been sent by the Company in accordance with these articles;

 

  (b)

during that period of 12 years no cash dividend payable in respect of the share has been claimed, no cheque, warrant, order or other payment for a dividend has been cashed, no dividend sent by means of a funds transfer system has been paid and no communication has been received by the Company from the member or the person entitled by transmission to the share;

 

  (c)

on or after the expiry of that period of 12 years the Company has published advertisements both in a national newspaper and in a newspaper circulating in the area in which the last known address of the member or person entitled by transmission to the share or the address at which notices may be given in accordance with these articles is located, in each case giving notice of its intention to sell the share; and

 

  

 


 

69

 

 

  (d)

during the period of three months following the publication of those advertisements and after that period until the exercise of the power to sell the share, the Company has not received any communication from the member or the person entitled by transmission to the share.

 

(2)

The Company’s power of sale shall extend to any further share which, on or before the date of publication of the first of any advertisement pursuant to subparagraph (1)(c) above, is issued in right of a share to which paragraph (1) applies (or in right of any share to which this paragraph applies) if the conditions set out in subparagraphs (1)(b) to (d) are satisfied in relation to the further share (but as if the references to a period of 12 years were references to a period beginning on the date of allotment of the further share and ending on the date of publication of the first of the advertisements referred to above).

 

(3)

To give effect to any sale, the board may authorise some person to transfer the share to, or as directed by, the purchaser, who shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase money; nor shall the title of the new holder to the share be affected by any irregularity in, or invalidity of, the proceedings relating to the sale.

 

144.

Application of proceeds of sale

 

(1)

The Company shall account to the person entitled to the share at the date of sale for a sum equal to the net proceeds of sale and shall be deemed to be his debtor, and not a trustee for him, in respect of them.

 

(2)

Pending payment of the net proceeds of sale to such person, the proceeds may either be employed in the business of the Company or invested in such investments (other than shares of the Company or its holding company, if any) as the board may from time to time decide.

 

(3)

No interest shall be payable in respect of the net proceeds and the Company shall not be required to account for any moneys earned on the net proceeds.

DESTRUCTION OF DOCUMENTS

 

145.

Destruction of documents

 

(1)

Subject to the Statutes and the provisions of articles 103 and 134 the board may authorise or arrange the destruction of documents held by the Company as follows:

 

  (a)

at any time after the expiration of ten years from the date of registration, all instruments of transfer of shares and all other documents transferring or purporting to transfer shares or representing or purporting to represent the right to be registered as the holder of shares on the faith of which entries have been made in the register;

 

  (b)

at any time after the expiration of one year from the date of cancellation, all registered share certificates which have been cancelled;

 

  (c)

at any time after the expiration of two years from the date of recording them, all dividend mandates and notifications of change of address; and

 

  (d)

at any time after the expiration of one year from the date of actual payment, all paid dividend warrants and cheques.

 

  

 


 

70

 

 

(2)

It shall conclusively be presumed in favour of the Company that:

 

  (a)

every entry in the register purporting to have been made on the basis of an instrument of transfer or other document so destroyed was duly and properly made;

 

  (b)

every instrument of transfer so destroyed was a valid and effective instrument duly and properly registered;

 

  (c)

every share certificate so destroyed was a valid certificate duly and properly cancelled;

 

  (d)

every other document mentioned in paragraph (1) above so destroyed was a valid and effective document in accordance with the particulars of it recorded in the books and records of the Company; and

 

  (e)

every paid dividend warrant and cheque so destroyed was duly paid.

 

(3)

The provisions of paragraph (2) above shall apply only to the destruction of a document in good faith and without notice of any claim (regardless of the parties to it) to which the document might be relevant.

 

(4)

Nothing in this article shall be construed as imposing on the Company or the board any liability in respect of the destruction of any document earlier than as stated in paragraph (1) above or in any other circumstances in which liability would not attach to the Company or the board in the absence of this article.

 

(5)

References in this article to the destruction of any document include references to its disposal in any manner.

WINDING UP

 

146.

Winding up

Subject to any particular rights or limitations for the time being attached to any shares, as may be specified in these articles or upon which such shares may be issued, if the Company is wound up, the assets available for distribution among the members shall be distributed to the members pro rata to the number of shares held by each member at the time of the commencement of the winding up. If any share is not fully paid up, that share shall only carry the right to receive a distribution calculated on the basis of the proportion that the amount paid up on that share bears to the issue price of that share.

 

147.

Powers to distribute in specie

If the Company is in liquidation, the liquidator may, with the authority of a special resolution of the Company and any other authority required by the Statutes:

 

  (a)

divide among the members in specie the whole or any part of the assets of the Company and, for that purpose, value any assets and determine how the division shall be carried out as between the members or different classes of members; or

 

  (b)

vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of members as the liquidator, with the like sanction, shall think fit but no member shall be compelled to accept any assets upon which there is any liability.

 

  

 


 

71

 

 

INDEMNITY AND INSURANCE, ETC

 

148.

Directors’ indemnity, insurance and defence

As far as the legislation allows, the Company may:

 

  (a)

indemnify any director of the Company (or of an associated body corporate) against any liability;

 

  (b)

indemnify a director of a company that is a trustee of an occupational pension scheme for employees (or former employees) of the Company (or of an associated body corporate) against liability incurred in connection with the company’s activities as trustee of the scheme;

 

  (c)

purchase and maintain insurance against any liability for any director referred to in (a) or (b) above; and

 

  (d)

provide any director referred to in (a) or (b) above with funds (whether by loan or otherwise) to meet expenditure incurred or to be incurred by him in defending any criminal, regulatory or civil proceedings or in connection with an application for relief (or to enable any such director to avoid incurring such expenditure).

The powers given by this article shall not limit any general powers of the Company to grant indemnities, purchase and maintain insurance or provide funds (whether by way of loan or otherwise) to any person in connection with any legal or regulatory proceedings or applications for relief.

 

  

 

Exhibit 2.22

WPP plc

6 Ely Place

Dublin 2, Ireland

30 April 2012

Securities and Exchange Commission

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, D.C. 20549

Dear Sir or Madam:

On November 2, 2011, WPP Finance 2010, a subsidiary of WPP plc (the “Company”), issued U.S. $812,400,000 of 4.75% Senior Notes due 2021 (the “Senior Notes”). The Senior Notes were issued with guarantees from the Company and its subsidiaries WPP Air 1 Limited, WPP 2008 Limited and WPP 2005 Limited.

The Company hereby agrees, pursuant to instruction 2(b)(i) to the Exhibits to Form 20-F, to furnish the Securities and Exchange Commission with a copy of the instruments relating to the Senior Notes upon request.

 

Very truly yours,

 

WPP PLC

By:   /s/ Paul W.G. Richardson
  Paul W.G. Richardson
  Group Finance Director

Exhibit 4.16

 

WPP PLC 1

 

   

RESTRICTED STOCK PLAN

Approved by the Board of Directors of WPP Group plc on 30th August 2005 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 27 th  October 2005 and amended by written resolution on 11 th  November 2005 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 21 st  February 2006 and amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee on 27 th  April 2007 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 9 th  August 2007 and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 24 th  October 2007.

As approved by shareholders of WPP Group plc on 30 th  October 2008 prior to the introduction of a new holding company by a scheme of arrangement under Part 26 of the Companies Act 2006.

Approved by the shareholders of WPP plc on 30 th  September 2008 and adopted by the Board of Directors of WPP plc on 30 th  September 2008; amended by written resolution of the Compensation Committee on 17 th  December 2008, amended by resolutions of the Compensation Committee on 3 rd  March 2009 and 11 th  May 2010 and amended by written resolution on 2 nd  June 2011 signed by Mark Linaugh pursuant to the delegated authority given to him by the Compensation Committee on 11 th  April 2011

 

   

 

 

1  

Amended by written resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax:     +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.33-7


CONTENTS

 

1       PURPOSE

   2

2       INTERPRETATION

   2

3       ELIGIBILITY

   5

4       AWARDS

   5

5       CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

   7

6       VARIATION OF CAPITAL

   8

7       CHANGE OF CONTROL

   8

8       DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

   10

9       MISSTATEMENT

   10

10     MISCELLANEOUS

   11

11     AMENDMENT

   13

APPENDIX 1

   14

APPENDIX 2

   16

APPENDIX 3

   17

APPENDIX 4

   18

APPENDIX 5

   18

APPENDIX 6

   18

APPENDIX 7

   18

APPENDIX 8

   19

APPENDIX 9

   19

 

i


1

    PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to motivate and reward selected employees of the Group.

 

2

    INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in the Rules of the Plan and in the Schedule:

Act ” means the Companies Act 1985 as amended.

ADR ” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 ordinary shares in the capital of the Company deposited with Citibank NA as depository under the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA as of 19 November 2008 or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company. 2

Award ” means an award or grant made to an Eligible Person subject to and on the terms of the Plan.

Award Period ” means the period of 42 days commencing on:

 

  (a)

the date of adoption of the Plan by the board of directors of the Company;

 

  (b)

any day on which the Company releases its results for any period; or

 

  (c)

the date of commencement of Employment of an Eligible Person (but only in respect of that Eligible Person).

Bad Leaver ” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of the proper termination by a Group Company of his Employment (which shall include a termination which is not a proper termination only by virtue of a procedural error in the termination) where that Participant:

 

  (a)

shall have committed any act or omission which entitles a Group Company to terminate his contract of employment without notice; or

 

  (b)

shall have committed any serious breach or repeated or continued breach (after warning in writing) of his obligations under his contract of employment including, without limitation, ceasing to work full time for the Group without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company except in circumstances where the Participant retires (but does not take early retirement other than with the prior consent of the Company); or

 

  (c)

shall have become prohibited by law from being a director or employee of a Group Company as a result of his own act, omission or misfeasance; or

 

  (d)

shall have been convicted of any criminal offence which is punishable by a custodial sentence or involves dishonesty or violence,

provided that a Participant shall not be a Bad Leaver if he shall have been found to have been constructively dismissed by the Group (in which case the Participant shall be regarded as an Other Leaver). 3

 

2  

Amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

3  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

 

2


Basic Salary ” means an Eligible Person’s basic annual salary for a particular year. In the event of any dispute, such basic annual salary will be as determined by the Compensation Committee.

Change of Control Date ” means the date on which a person or persons obtains Control of the Company as described in Rule 7.1(a) or 7.1(b).

Company ” means:

 

  (a)

in relation to any period before the Effective Date, Old WPP; and

 

  (b)

in relation to any period on or after the Effective Date, New WPP. 4

Company Secretary ” means the company secretary of the Company from time to time.

Compensation Committee ” means the compensation committee for the time being of the board of directors of the Company.

Control ” has the same meaning as in section 840 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988.

Effective Date ” means the date on which the Scheme becomes effective, expected to be 12 November 2008. 5

Eligible Person ” means any employee (including an executive director) of a Group Company.

Employment ” means employment as a director or employee of any Group Company.

ESOP ” means any of the WPP Group plc Grantor Trust, the WPP Group plc ROW ESOP, the WPP Group plc UK ESOP and any other employee benefit trust in existence at the date of adoption of the Plan or as may otherwise be nominated from time to time by the Compensation Committee to operate in conjunction with the Plan.

Good Leaver ” means a Participant whose termination of Employment is as a result of:

 

  (a)

death;

 

  (b)

permanent disability;

 

  (c)

serious long-term illness preventing the Participant from carrying out his duties of employment; or

 

  (d)

retirement on a basis agreed with the Company. 6

Group ” means the Company and all of its subsidiaries (as defined in section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991). 7

Group Company ” means any member of the Group.

 

 

4  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

5  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

6  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

7  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

3


New WPP ” means WPP plc incorporated in Jersey under the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 with registered number 101479. 8

Old WPP ” WPP Group plc a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales with registered number 05537577. 9

Original Accounts ” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is or was satisfied. 10

Other Leaver ” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of:

 

  (a)

the voluntary leaving or giving notice voluntarily to leave Employment with the Group or voluntarily resigning as a director of any Group Company including, for the avoidance of doubt, taking early retirement without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company;

 

  (b)

the wrongful termination by that Participant of his contract of employment with any Group Company;

 

  (c)

any other reason not referred to in the definition of Good Leaver or Bad Leaver.

Participant ” means a person who holds an Award including, if relevant, his legal personal representatives.

Performance Related Remuneration ” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares and including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Award) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition. 11

Plan ” means the WPP plc 12 Restricted Stock Plan as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of the Rules.

Relevant Performance Condition ” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, the Group or any business (or any part of any business) or company within the Group. 13

Share ” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes ADRs.

 

 

8

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

9

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

10

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

11

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

12

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 17 December 2008

13

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

4


Trading Day ” means a day (excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays) on which clearing banks are generally open for business in the City of London and in New York.

Treasury Shares ” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991. 14

UK Listing Authority ” means the United Kingdom Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority.

Vesting Date ” means the day after the end of the Vesting Period unless the Company is prohibited from discharging the Award on that date in which case the Vesting Date will be the first available Trading Day when the Company is no longer prohibited from discharging that Award.

Vesting Period ” means the period of two calendar years commencing on the date on which an Award is granted or such other period as may be specified by the Compensation Committee at the time an Award is granted.

 

2.2

Words importing the singular shall include the plural and vice versa and words importing the masculine shall include the feminine.

 

2.3

Any reference, express or implied, to an enactment includes references to:

 

  (a)

that enactment as amended, extended or applied by or under any other enactment; and

 

  (b)

any enactment which that enactment re-enacts (with or without modification).

 

2.4

Any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules.

 

3

    ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan or any other means, to participate as of right in the Plan through the grant of an Award and consequently the receipt of an Award shall in no circumstances give or imply any right to received any further award and any further right that is in fact granted to the same Participant may be on the same or on different terms. 15

 

3.2

The Compensation Committee will decide from time to time when to grant Awards under the Plan and 16 which Eligible Persons may participate and the extent of their participation in the Plan.

 

4

    AWARDS

 

4.1

The Compensation Committee may decide, following the end of a financial year, or at such other time as the Compensation Committee may determine, to grant an Award to an Eligible Person, that the grant of an Award may be subject to such terms (including performance conditions) as it determines provided that no such terms may be applied to any Award that is or

 

14  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

15  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

16  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

5


 

is to be granted to a director of the Company that would result in the Plan being a Long Term Incentive Scheme for the purposes of the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority or which could result in the issue of new Shares by the Company or to the transfer of Treasury Shares by the Company. Where such terms are inconsistent with the other terms of the Plan, the terms specified by the Compensation Committee shall take precedence. For the avoidance of doubt, there is no restriction on the grant of Awards to Participants who are not directors of the Company relating to whether the Award is in the form of a deferred bonus.

In cases where the Compensation Committee grants an award under this Rule 4.1 by reference to the value of Shares to be comprised in an Award rather than by reference to the number of Shares to be comprised in an Award, the number of Shares comprised in the Award will be calculated:

 

  (a)

in the case of an Award over ordinary shares in the capital of the Company, by converting the value of the Award into GB pounds (if specified in a currency other than GB pounds) by applying the London closing conversion rate provided by Bloomberg for the date of grant of that Award, and using the lower of the two prices for Shares on the date of grant plus one quarter of the difference between them (as derived from the Daily Official List or other reputable market source that is able to provide the relevant information at a more appropriate time, even though that source may not be able to guarantee that the information provided will be identical to that subsequently published in the Daily Official List); and

 

  (b)

in the case of an Award over ADRs, by converting the value of the Award into US dollars (if specified in a currency other than US dollars) by applying the London closing conversion rate provided by Bloomberg for the date of grant of that Award, and using the fair market value of an ADR as quoted on the NASDAQ National Market System at the close of the market on the date of grant of that Award. 17

 

4.2

The maximum Award to any Participant in respect of a particular financial year shall be 200% (two hundred per cent) of that Participant’s Basic Salary or such other percentage as the Compensation Committee may from time to time determine.

 

4.3

Awards will normally be made during an Award Period, but exceptionally may be made at other times.

 

4.4

The Compensation Committee may determine that an Award may be satisfied by the trustees of an ESOP (with the agreement of the trustees) or otherwise as it considers appropriate, provided that in no circumstances shall an Award be satisfied through the issue of new Shares or the transfer of Treasury Shares.

 

4.5

Subject to Rule 5 a Participant shall become entitled to receive the number of Shares comprised in an Award on the Vesting Date only if the Participant continues in Employment throughout the Vesting Period until the Vesting Date.

 

4.6

An Award is personal to a Participant and cannot be transferred, assigned, used as security or otherwise charged or turned to account. Any breach of the terms of this Rule 4.6 shall result in the immediate lapse of the Award.

 

4.7

An Award shall lapse if the Participant commits an act of bankruptcy or enters into any arrangement with his creditors under any formal insolvency procedure.

 

17  

Amended by Written Resolution dated 2 June 2011 signed by Mark Linaugh pursuant to the delegated authority given to him by the Compensation Committee on 11 April 2011

 

6


4.8

The receipt of an Award shall not confer on the Participant (unless otherwise provided in the terms of the Award) any right to the transfer of a specified number of Shares from any particular transferor. The discharge of the Award shall be in accordance with Rule 8.

 

4.9

When an Award is granted the Compensation Committee may determine that 18 the Participant shall, subject to Rule 4.10, be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award a transfer of that number of Shares which could have been purchased if:

 

 

  (a)

the dividends which would have been paid on such Shares during the Vesting Period had been reinvested in Shares on the date each dividend is paid after the date that the Award is made; and

 

  (b)

the dividends which would have been paid on Shares which would have been held pursuant to that reinvestment in Shares had those dividends been further reinvested in Shares, again on the date each dividend is paid during the Vesting Period.

 

4.10

If a Participant is a Bad Leaver any right to receive additional Shares under 4.9 shall, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, lapse on the date of termination of Employment.

 

4.11

For the avoidance of doubt a Participant shall not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of Shares to be transferred in respect of an Award until those Shares are actually transferred to the Participant.

 

5

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

5.1

Subject to Rules 5.2 and 5.4, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date of an Award, that Award shall lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

5.2

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver then except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse and shall (subject to Rule 5.7) be discharged at the time that the Award would have been discharged but for the cessation of Employment, being the original Vesting Date except that (subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise) the number of Shares comprised in an Award shall be reduced on a pro-rata basis to reflect the proportion of the Vesting Period between the grant of an Award and the date of cessation of employment. Where the grant of an Award was preceded by a period during which performance targets were measured as a pre-cursor to the granting of the Award, then the Vesting Period (subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise) shall be taken for the purpose of the time pro-rata calculation referred to in this Rule 5.2 only as beginning at the start of the earlier period during which the performance target was measured. 19

 

5.3

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Bad Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately.

 

5.4

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is an Other Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately unless the Compensation

 

18  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2005

19  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

 

7


 

Committee determines that the Award shall not lapse and/or shall be discharged early and/or shall be reduced in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines. 20

 

5.5

Subject to any relevant legal or regulatory requirements prevailing in any relevant jurisdiction, for the purposes of this Rule a woman who ceases to be in Employment due to pregnancy or confinement will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the date on which she indicates that she does not intend to return to work. In the absence of such indication and if she has not already returned to work she will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the last day on which she is entitled to return to work. A woman who exercises her statutory right or any equivalent contractual right to return to work following pregnancy or confinement shall not be treated as having ceased to be in Employment.

 

5.6

If a Participant who has ceased to be in Employment breaches any contractual obligation owed to any Group Company relating to restrictions on that Participant following the termination of his Employment the Participant’s Award shall be forfeited unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

5.7

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver due to leaving by reason of death, then the provisions of Rule 5.2 shall apply except that the discharge of the Award shall (except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise) take place as soon as practicable following the death of the Participant. 21

 

6

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

6.1

In the event of any increase or variation in the capital of the Company arising out of or in connection with a capitalisation issue, an offer to the holders of Shares, a rights issue, a subdivision, consolidation or reduction of capital, special dividend, demerger, or other variation of capital, the terms of outstanding Awards may be adjusted in such manner and on such terms as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. An adjustment shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the adjustment is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding.

 

6.2

Participants shall be notified of any adjustment made under this Rule.

 

7

CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

7.1

Subject to Rule 7.3:

 

  (a)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company as a result or in consequence of making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued share capital of the Company which is made subject to a condition such that if satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company, or

 

  (b)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company other than as a result of or in consequence of making such general offer but the offeror is bound by Rule 5 of the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers to make a general offer for the minority,

then in relation to all outstanding Awards the Vesting Period shall be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date.

 

20  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 October 2005

21  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007

 

8


7.2

If:

 

  (a)

under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies; or

 

  (b)

a resolution is passed for the winding up of the Company for the purposes of or in connection with a reconstruction or division of the Company or its business;

 

the terms of outstanding Awards will be varied in such manner as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. A variation shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding. 22

 

7.3

If any company (the “Acquiring Company”) obtains Control of the Company in accordance with Rule 7.1 and:

 

  (a)

the Acquiring Company also obtains Control of another company (the “Target Company”) within such period as the Compensation Committee may determine and, as a consequence of obtaining such Control, the Company and the Target Company become subsidiaries of the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (b)

the shareholders of the Company and the Target Company before the Acquiring Company obtained Control of the Company and the Target Company are the same persons who substantially comprise the shareholders of the Acquiring Company after the Acquiring Company obtained such Control,

then in relation any outstanding Awards the Compensation Committee may determine that the Vesting Period shall not be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date under Rule 7.1 and it may determine (with the agreement of the Acquiring Company) that a Participant is required to release any outstanding Awards in consideration of the grant to the Participant by the Acquiring Company of an equivalent award.

 

 

7.4

For the purpose of Rule 7.3 an award granted pursuant to Rule 7.3 is an equivalent award to an Award if, but only if:

 

  (a)

the shares to which it relates are in the Acquiring Company, and it is subject to the provisions of the Plan in the same manner as the Award immediately prior to its release;

 

  (b)

the shares to which it relates are of an equivalent value to the value of the Shares which were subject to the Award immediately prior to the release, and for this purpose the Compensation Committee shall determine such equivalent value provided that the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award under Rule 7.3 shall not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the equivalent value is fair and reasonable and such confirmation shall be final and binding; and

 

  (c)

such Award is subject to the performance conditions as the original Award (if any) or such other performance conditions that the Compensation Committee determines are substantially no more and no less onerous than those performance conditions.

 

22  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 29 September 2008

 

9


7.5

With effect from the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award pursuant to Rule 7.3 the Plan will be construed as if:

 

  (a)

the equivalent award had been granted at the same time as the Award it replaces;

 

  (b)

references to the Company in the Rules were references to the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (c)

references to Shares were references to shares in the Acquiring Company,

and the Compensation Committee may make such amendments as may be necessary to give effect to Rule 7.3.

 

7.6

Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Rule 7, in any circumstances where Awards (other than Awards made to directors of the Company) would otherwise have been receivable before the end of the Vesting Period by reason this Rule 7, the Compensation Committee may determine (the determination to apply equally to all such Awards outstanding at the time) that the provisions of the Rule 7 will neither cause such Awards to become receivable nor to lapse at different times than would otherwise be the case, if the Compensation Committee considers that the Awards will continue to be appropriate notwithstanding the changed circumstances, or that the position of Participants can and will be adequately preserved by the grant to them of some other right or rights in substitution for or addition to the existing rights. The Compensation Committee may alternatively specify that such Awards may become receivable before the end of the Vesting Period on the basis of being reduced on pro-rata time basis to take account of the reduced part of the Vesting Period that has elapsed.

 

8

DISCHARGE OF AWARDS

 

8.1

Subject to any adjustment to an Award under Rule 9.3 23 and to Rule 8.3 Awards will be discharged by the transfer of Shares to the Participant (or as he may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs) from an ESOP or otherwise as the Company may determine.

 

8.2

Any transfer of Shares to a Participant (or as he may direct or to a depository in the case of ADRs) in respect of an Award is subject to the Compensation Committee being satisfied that the transfer would be lawful in any relevant jurisdiction.

 

8.3

The transfer of Shares under the Plan is subject to obtaining any approval or consent required under the Listing Rules published by the UK Listing Authority, the Rules of the London Stock Exchange, the Admission and Disclosure Standards of the London Stock Exchange, and otherwise complying with the provision of City Code on Take-overs and Mergers and any other applicable regulations or enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas). The Participant shall do all things necessary to obtain, or obviate the need for, such approval or consent.

 

9

MISSTATEMENT 24

 

9.1

The provisions of 9.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Company;

 

23  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

24  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

10


  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts,

and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

9.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 9.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee shall be entitled, but in no circumstances shall be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 9.3 below.

 

9.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Award is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Shares comprised in an Award will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 9.3 may be operated in respect of Awards where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 9.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Award or another plan.

 

10

MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1

The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation Committee whose decision on any matter concerning the Plan shall be final and binding unless it is a matter in respect of which the Rules provide that the decision of the auditors or any other adviser is final and binding. In particular the Compensation Committee may establish such procedures and regulations for the administration and implementation of the Plan as it thinks fit. Notwithstanding the provisions of Rule 11.3 and without prejudice to the generality of the other provisions of this Rule 10.1, such procedures and regulations that relate to securities laws and exchange control compliance may affect the operation of Awards granted before the establishment of such procedures and regulations. 25

 

10.2

The Compensation Committee or any committee or agent that they may from time to time delegate authority to, shall approve all documents required in connection with Awards.

 

10.3

The Compensation Committee may establish arrangements under which the cash value of an Award may be paid to an Eligible Person in lieu of the discharge of the Award under Rule 8.

 

10.4

The cost of establishing and operating the Plan (including but not limited to stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax arising on a transfer of Shares pursuant to Rule 8, if any) shall be borne by the Company but may be recharged to the relevant Group Companies on such arm’s length basis as is considered appropriate from time to time.

 

25  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

11


10.5

Any notice given under the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post in the case of the Company to its registered office from time to time marked for the attention of the Company Secretary (or to such other address and person as may be specified by the Company from time to time) 26 and in the case of a Participant, the address which he shall have given to the Company for the purpose or which shall be known to the Company to be his address from time to time.

 

10.6

Any notice served shall be deemed to have been received:

 

  (a)

at the time of delivery if delivery is by hand; or

 

  (b)

at the time the email is sent, if delivery is by email; or 27

 

  (c)

in the case of pre-paid post, on the fifth Trading Day after the date of posting.

 

10.7

Evidence that the notice was properly addressed, stamped and put in the post shall be conclusive evidence of posting.

 

10.8

Participation in the Plan is a matter separate from any contract of employment or other agreement and any benefit conferred by the Plan shall not be regarded as salary or 28 counted for pension or any other purpose. Participation in the Plan by any individual is entirely at the discretion of the Board and in no circumstances shall the fact that an individual has received an Award or Awards in the past give that individual any right to receive a further Award or Awards. 29

 

10.9

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of his office or employment with any Group Company will not be affected by his participation in the Plan and the Plan does not form part of any contract of employment between any individual and any Group Company.

 

10.10

A Participant shall have no entitlement by way of compensation or damages resulting from the termination of the office or employment (for any reason and whether lawful or not) by virtue of which he is or may be eligible to participate in the Plan or for the loss or reduction of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which he might otherwise have enjoyed whether the compensation is claimed for wrongful dismissal or otherwise.

 

10.11

The Plan is intended to operate on a worldwide basis and, accordingly, the Compensation Committee may adopt any rate of exchange for converting any currency into any other currency as it decides at any time and from time to time for any purpose in connection with the Plan.

 

10.12

No obligation to transfer Shares shall arise, nor shall there be any obligation to do any other thing in relation to a Participant under or in connection with the Plan or the making or vesting of any Award unless and until the Compensation Committee is satisfied in its discretion that either:

 

  (a)

the Participant has made payment or has made arrangements (which may include where specified at the date of grant of an Award by the Compensation Committee, validly electing for the Participant to be liable directly for any employer’s National Insurance contributions) satisfactory to the Compensation Committee for the payment to the relevant Group Company or other person of such sum as is, in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee, sufficient to settle any liability for any tax and/or, unless the Compensation Committee otherwise determines, social security contributions (which,

 

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

27  

Amended by Written Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 November 2006

28  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

29  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 21 February 2006

 

12


 

within the UK shall include employees’ National Insurance contributions, and where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award, employer’s National Insurance contributions and which outside the UK shall only include taxes which are equivalent to UK employer’s National Insurance Contributions where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award) or the like (in any jurisdiction) which are or may be recovered from such person in connection with the Plan or any Award and in respect of which the relevant Group Company or other person is or may be liable to account for or pay in any jurisdiction; or

 

  (b)

the Participant has entered into an agreement satisfactory to the Compensation Committee to ensure that such a payment will be made by the Participant.

 

10.13

Receipt of an Award shall authorise the Company or any person nominated by the Company at its sole discretion to sell such number of Shares due to be transferred to a Participant as it may estimate as being necessary to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the liabilities referred to in Rule 10.12 and account to the relevant Group Company or other person and/or the relevant authorities in respect of such tax and/or social security liabilities (in any jurisdiction) at the appropriate time provided that any excess sum generated by such sale that is not required shall be accounted for to the Participant.

 

10.14

If a Participant owes a debt or other monetary obligation to a Group Company, the relevant Group Company has a charge over the Participant’s interest in the Plan. Satisfaction of an Award may be withheld until the Participant has discharged, to the satisfaction of the Compensation Committee, the debt or other monetary obligation.

 

10.15

The Plan and any Award shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any Eligible Persons who do not become Participants) shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

11

AMENDMENT

 

11.1

Subject to Rules 11.2 and 11.3, the Compensation Committee may at any time alter or add to all or any provisions of the Plan, or the terms of all or any Awards made under it, in any respect.

 

11.2

No alteration or addition shall be made under Rule 11.1 that would or might result in new Shares being issued in respect of the Plan or that would or might result in Treasury Shares being transferred in respect of the Plan or which would result in the Plan becoming a Long Term Incentive Scheme as defined in the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority, in each case without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

11.3

No alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of any Award made prior to the date of the alteration or addition which would adversely affect a Participant’s interest in that Award in any material respect without the consent of the relevant Participant.

 

13


APPENDIX 1 30

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to Participants who are or may become subject to French taxation (i.e. income tax and/or social security contributions) as a result of an Award made under this Plan. Awards to such Participants will be subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix and in the event of any difference or conflict between the terms of this Appendix and the Rules, the terms of this Appendix will prevail.

 

1

The grant of an Award to Eligible Persons is made under the same conditions as those set forth by Articles L225-197-1 to L225-197-5 of the French Commercial Code. The grant of an Award is notably authorised by the corporate structure, which is qualified to make decisions regarding Company share capital.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan:

 

2.1

Awards for the purpose of this Appendix mean a conditional right to receive, free of charge, at the Vesting Date, Shares (which for this purpose shall not include ADRs);

 

2.2

for the purposes of this Appendix, Eligible Persons shall mean current salaried employees, as defined by French labour law or mandataire social as listed in Article L225-197-1, II of the French Commercial Code;

 

2.3

Awards may only be satisfied with Shares;

 

2.4

the Company may only offer Awards to employees of its French subsidiaries whose share capital (or voting rights) are held as to at least 10% directly or indirectly by Company;

 

2.5

no Award may be granted to any Eligible Person who owns more than 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being;

 

2.6

the number of Shares comprised in Awards under the Plan cannot exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at the time of grant of the Awards. Once the 10% threshold is met, no additional Awards can thereafter be granted by the Company;

 

2.7

subject to paragraph 2.12 below, the Vesting Period must not be less than two years and the Award must not therefore be satisfied for a period of at least two years after the date on which the Award is granted;

 

2.8

subject to paragraph 2.13 below, the Participant must hold the Shares received on the Vesting Date for at least two years;

 

2.9

during the Vesting Period, the Participant is not the beneficial or legal owner of the Shares in respect of which the Award has been made and at the end of the Vesting Period the Participant shall only become entitled to receive the number of Shares comprised in his Award. A Participant is not entitled under Rule 4.9 or otherwise to any voting rights, dividends or any extra Shares that the Participant would have been able to buy with the dividends that he would have received had he actually held the Shares during the Vesting Period;

 

30  

Amended by Resolutions of the Compensation Committee dated 27 April 2007 and 9 August 2007

 

14


2.10

once a Participant is free to dispose of the Shares comprised in an Award at the end of the holding period specified in paragraph 2.8, the Participant may still not sell those Shares within the periods set forth in Article L225-197-1, I of the French Commercial Code;

 

2.11

a mandataire social shall be required to retain (either in his own name or deposited with a nominee on his behalf) a proportion of the Shares awarded under the Plan as determined by the Compensation Committee until he ceases his role as a mandataire social. If no other proportion is determined when the relevant Award is granted, the proportion required to be retained will be 10%;

 

2.12

as an exception to the minimum two-year Vesting Period (specified at paragraph 2.7 above) if a Participant’s employment terminates as a result of death, the number of Shares in respect of which the Award was granted shall be receivable in full without any pro-rated reduction provided that the Participant’s heirs formally request distribution of the Shares within six months of the death of the Participant;

 

2.13

if a Participant’s employment terminates as a result of death or disability within the meaning corresponding to the second and third category of Article L341-4 of the Social Security Code, the minimum two-year holding period (specified at paragraph 2.8 above) shall not apply;

 

2.14

Shares underlying the Awards can be exchanged for shares (without any other additional compensation) in the event of a merger or spin-off operation performed during the Vesting Period. In addition Shares can be exchanged for shares (without any other additional compensation) in the event of a public offer, a merger, a spin-off, a stock-split or a reverse stock-split operation performed during the holding period described in paragraph 2.8 above, such holding period remains applicable to the shares received in exchange for the time period remaining at the date of the exchange;

 

2.15

an Award may only be granted under this Appendix within the period of 10 years beginning with the date on which the Plan was approved by the board of Directors of the Company (30 August 2005).

 

15


APPENDIX 2 31

Taxpayers Subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code

The plan will apply to participants who are taxpayers subject to Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code (“Section 409A”), with the following modifications:

 

1

The plan shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with Section 409A. Any discretion afforded to any person or entity under the plan the existence of which itself would cause a participant to be taxed under Section 409A is hereby removed from the plan.

 

2

Notwithstanding any provision of the plan to the contrary, if a participant is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Section 409A, any payment otherwise required to be made pursuant to the plan as a result of the participant’s “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A shall be delayed for 6 months following the date of the participant’s separation, if necessary to prevent the participant from being taxed under Section 409A. On the earliest date on which such payments can be made without violating the foregoing requirements of Section 409A, there shall (subject to Rules 10.12 32 and 10.13 33 ) be paid to the participant, in a single cash lump sum, an amount equal to the aggregate amount of all payments delayed pursuant to the preceding sentence.

 

3

In Rule 5.1, delete “except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.”

 

4

In Rule 5.2, delete “except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise” and “(subject to the exercise of the discretion of the Compensation Committee to determine otherwise)”.

 

5

In Rule 5.4, substitute the following “If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is an Other Leaver the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall lapse immediately, unless the Compensation Committee determines that the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse in which case the Award shall be paid in accordance with Rule 5.2.”

 

6

In Rule 5.7, delete “(except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise) take place as soon as practicable” and add “take place within 90 days”.

 

7

Add the following as Rule 7.1(A):

“Notwithstanding the foregoing, Rule 7.1 shall apply only if the transaction or circumstances by which any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company would constitute a “change in the ownership or effective control of the [Company], or in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the [Company]” within the meaning of Section 409A, and if Rule 7.1 does apply, Awards will be discharged by the later of (i) the December 31st immediately following the end of the Vesting Period, or (ii) two and one-half months following the end of the Vesting Period.”

 

8

Notwithstanding the foregoing, any award under the plan shall not be subject to the provisions of this Appendix 2 to the extent such award is earned and vested prior to January 1, 2005.

 

31  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 9 August 2007

32  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

33  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

16


APPENDIX 3 34

 

1

The Compensation Committee may grant awards under the terms of the Plan but subject to the modifications set out in this Appendix 3 (provided that the provisions of Rule 11.2 35 shall continue to apply).

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan:

 

2.1

sub-paragraph (h) of the definition of “Good Leaver” shall be amended by the addition of the words “but retirement will include ceasing to work in all sectors in which any Group Company operates” after the words “agreed with the Company”;

 

2.2

Rule 4.5 will be amended by the addition of the words “or cash” after the words “the number of Shares”;

 

2.3

Rule 5.2 will be amended to read as follows:

“If a Participant ceases to be in Employment during the Vesting Period and is a Good Leaver then the Award applicable to that Vesting Period shall not lapse and shall (subject to Rule 5.7) be discharged at the time that the Award would have been discharged but for the cessation of Employment, being the original Vesting Date.”;

 

2.4

if the Award is to be satisfied in cash rather than Shares (which will be specified at the time the Award is granted) the Participant shall also be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award an amount equivalent to interest as if it had accrued at a rate to be determined by the Compensation Committee during the Vesting Period, which interest will be paid when the Award is discharged provided that if the Award lapses the right to this additional payment will also lapse;

 

2.5

if the Award is to be satisfied in Shares (which will be specified at the time the Award is granted), the Participant shall also be entitled to receive at the time of the discharge of the Award a transfer of that number of Shares which could have been purchased if the dividends which would have been paid on such Shares during the Vesting Period had been reinvested in further Shares on the Vesting Date provided that if the Award lapses, the right to the further Shares will also lapse;

 

2.6

Rule 8.1 will be amended by the addition of the words “or in cash if the Participant has elected to receive the Award in cash” at the end of the Rule.

 

 

34  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 24 October 2007

35  

Numbering amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

17


APPENDIX 4 36

Australia

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Australia with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Australia within 12 months of the Vesting Date relating to such Shares and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 5

Canada

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Canada with the following modification:

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Canada at any time and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

APPENDIX 6

Hong Kong

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Hong Kong with the following modifications:

 

1

Any Shares acquired by a Participant pursuant to this Plan cannot be traded within Hong Kong within 6 months of the Vesting Date relating to such Shares and, by receiving such Shares, each Participant shall be taken to have agreed to observe this restriction.

 

2

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan the grant of Awards under and the operation of the Plan does not constitute an offer or invitation to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance or the Securities and Futures Ordinance.

APPENDIX 7

India

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in India (which shall include for the purposes of the paragraph below Participants in respect of whose Award a liability to Indian Fringe Benefit Tax arises) with the following modification:

For the avoidance of doubt any Fringe Benefit Tax which is payable in respect of any Awards will be recoverable from the relevant Participants in the same way as if it were a tax liability of those Participants unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise at the time of grant of such Awards.

 

36  

Appendices 4 to 9 inclusive inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 3 March 2009

 

18


APPENDIX 8

Mexico

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Mexico with the addition of the following rules:

 

1

Interests under the Plan have not and will not be registered with the National Registry of Securities maintained by the National Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico and therefore may not be publicly offered in Mexico.

 

2

Any Award is a private offering under Article 8 paragraph III of the Securities Law of Mexico. Any such offering is limited to employees or groups of employees of companies issuing interests under any employee stock plan or program (including any other program where interests are awarded with or without consideration to such employee or employees), or of the companies which are controlled by such issuer, as defined under the Securities Law and applicable regulations of Mexico in effect.

APPENDIX 9

Russia

The Plan will apply to Awards granted to residents in Russia with the following modification:

For the purposes of the securities laws of Russia, all transactions carried out and contracts entered into in connection with the Plan and any Shares acquired by Participants will be carried out or entered into outside Russia.

 

19

Exhibit 4.40

 

WPP PLC

 

 

 

LEADERSHIP EQUITY ACQUISITION PLAN III

 

 

Approved by the Company in General Meeting on 2 June 2009 and

adopted by the board of directors of the Company on 12 May 2009

and amended by resolution of the Compensation Committee on 11

May 2010 and 12 November 2011

Squire Sanders (UK) LLP

7 Devonshire Square

London

EC2M 4YH

United Kingdom

DX 136546 Bishopsgate 2

Office: +44 (0)20 7655 1000

Fax: +44 (0)20 7655 1001

Reference WPP.2-1426

 

 


CONTENTS

 

1         PURPOSE

     1   

2         INTERPRETATION

     1   

3         ELIGIBILITY

     8   

4         ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     8   

5         PLAN LIMITS

     9   

6         AWARDS

     9   

7         COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

     11   

8         PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

     12   

9         CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

     12   

10      VARIATION OF CAPITAL

     13   

11      CHANGE OF CONTROL

     14   

12      SATISFACTION OF AWARDS

     16   

13      MISSTATEMENT

     17   

14      MISCELLANEOUS

     18   

15      AMENDMENT

     19   

16      DURATION

     19   

SCHEDULE 1

     20   

SCHEDULE 2

     24   

 

i


1

PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to incentivise those executive directors of the Company and operating company executives whose contributions transcend their day-to-day role.

 

2

INTERPRETATION

 

2.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in the Rules and in Schedule 1 and Schedule 2:

“Act” means the Companies Act 2006 as amended.

“ADR” means an American Depository Receipt representing, for the time being, 5 ordinary shares in the capital of the Company deposited with Citibank NA as depository under the Deposit Agreement between the Company and Citibank NA dated as of 19 November 2008 as amended from time to time or any other American depository receipt arrangement sponsored by the Company.

“Annual Earnings” means an Eligible Person’s annual earnings for the time being, comprising their basic salary, directorship fee (if applicable) and Target Bonus for a particular year as determined by the Compensation Committee. 1

“Award” means an award or grant made to an Eligible Person subject to and on the terms of this Plan.

“Award Period” means the period of 42 days commencing on:

 

  (a)

the date of approval of the Plan by the shareholders of the Company;

 

  (b)

any day on which the Company releases its results for any financial period; or

 

  (c)

the date of commencement of Employment of an Eligible Person (but only in respect of that Eligible Person).

“Bad Leaver” means a Participant whose Employment terminates as a result of:

 

  (a)

termination by a Group Company of their Employment where that Participant:

 

  (i)

has, in the opinion of the Compensation Committee, committed any act or omission which entitles a Group Company to terminate their contract of employment without notice; or

 

  (ii)

has, in the opinion of the Compensation Committee, committed any serious breach or repeated or continued breach (after warning in writing) of their obligations under their contract of employment including, without limitation, ceasing to work full time for the Group without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company except in circumstances where the Participant retires with the prior consent of the Company; or

 

 

1  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

1


  (iii)

has become prohibited by law from being a director or employee of a Group Company as a result of their own act, omission or misfeasance; or

 

  (iv)

has been convicted of any criminal offence which is punishable by a custodial sentence or involves dishonesty or violence; or

 

  (v)

has, otherwise than at the request of the relevant Group Company, resigned as a director or employee of the Group; or

 

  (b)

the voluntary leaving or giving notice voluntarily to leave Employment with the Group or voluntarily resigning as a director of any Group Company including, for the avoidance of doubt, taking retirement without the prior consent of the relevant Group Company; or

 

  (c)

the wrongful termination by that Participant of their contract of employment with any Group Company unless the Company has agreed in writing that such termination will not constitute the Participant a Bad Leaver;

provided that a Participant will not be a Bad Leaver if they have been found to have been constructively dismissed by any Group Company.

“Bonus Deferral Programme” means the WPP plc Annual Bonus Deferral Programme adopted by the Company on 30 September 2008.

“Change of Control Date” means the date on which a person obtains or persons obtain Control of the Company as described in Rule 11.1(a) or 11.1(b).

“Close Family” means, in relation to a person, that person’s spouse, civil partner, children and siblings and any other persons as may be agreed to be Close Family from time to time by the Compensation Committee.

“Company” means WPP plc a public limited company incorporated in Jersey under the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 with registered number 101749.

“Company Secretary” means the company secretary of the Company from time to time.

“Compensation Committee” means the compensation committee for the time being of the board of directors of the Company.

“Control” has the same meaning as in section 1124 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010. 2

“Eligible Person” means any employee (including an executive director) of a Group Company.

“Employment” means employment as a director or employee of any Group Company.

“Encumbrance” means any mortgage, charge, assignment or assignation by way of security, guarantee, debenture, hypothecation, pledge, declaration of trust, lien, right of set-off or any other encumbrance (including any conditionality or forfeiture right) or security interest

 

2  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

2


whatsoever, howsoever created or arising provided that the Compensation Committee may determine that any particular encumbrance or security interest will not be an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition and, for the avoidance of doubt any Shares which are committed as Investment Shares or any Investment Option committed to an existing Award under the Plan will be treated as being subject to an Encumbrance for the purposes of this definition except in relation to the Award to which they are committed.

“ESOP” means any employee benefit trust nominated by the Compensation Committee to operate in conjunction with the Plan. 3

“Good Leaver” means a Participant whose termination of Employment does not constitute them a Bad Leaver, including by reason of their ceasing to be in Employment as a result of:

 

  (a)

death;

 

  (b)

wrongful dismissal (being a termination by a Group Company without notice or payment in lieu of notice in circumstances where that Group Company was not entitled to terminate the Employment of that Participant summarily) or constructive dismissal;

 

  (c)

permanent disability;

 

  (d)

Serious Illness 4 ; or

 

  (e)

retirement on a basis agreed with the Company;

provided that a Participant will cease to be treated as a Good Leaver if within six months of the date of cessation of their Employment they take up an employment or engagement with another company, business or organisation which the Compensation Committee considers to be a competitor of any part of the Group.

“Group” means the Company and all of its subsidiaries (as defined in section 736 of the Act or, as the context may require, articles 2 and 2A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991). 5

“Group Company” means any member of the Group.

“I&P Period” means the investment and performance period which is the period commencing on a date specified by the Compensation Committee and ending on 31 December in the 5th year from the commencement of the I&P Period.

“Interested” has the meaning set out in Rules 2.2 and 2.3.

“Investment Option” means an option to purchase Shares the terms of which are consistent with any terms specified by the Compensation Committee at the relevant time and which is committed to the Plan by an Eligible Person to qualify for an Award in accordance with Rule 7 and which becomes exercisable following the end of the I&P Period.

“Investment Option Shares” means Shares that are the subject of an Investment Option.

“Investment Shares” means Shares committed to the Plan by an Eligible Person to qualify for an Award in accordance with Rule 7.

 

3  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

4  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

5  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

3


“IO Commitment Date” means the date by which a Participant must:

 

  (a)

agree to commit Investment Shares; and

 

  (b)

commit an Investment Option (if applicable);

to the Plan to be eligible for an Award which will be a date determined by the Compensation Committee, provided that the Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, decide to extend the date by which agreement to commit Investment Shares must be received and/or by which an Investment Option (if applicable) must be committed to the Plan to a later date, either for all Eligible Persons invited to apply for an Award or any one or more of them provided that the IO Commitment Date must be before the relevant Awards are granted. 6

“IRC” means the United States’ Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

“IS Commitment Date” means the date by which Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to be eligible for an Award which will be a date determined by the Compensation Committee provided that the Compensation Committee may, in its discretion, decide to extend the date by which Investment Shares must be committed to the Plan to a later date either for all Eligible Persons invited to apply for an Award or any one or more of them. 7

“ITEPA” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003.

“LSE” means the London Stock Exchange being the principal London exchange for equity and bond trading. 8

“Matching Shares” means the Shares that are comprised in an Award in accordance with Rule 6.3.

“NASDAQ” means the US screen-based system for the quotation and transfer of equity securities. 9

“Official List” means the Daily Official List of the UKLA.

“Original Accounts” means any accounts or other data used to assess the extent to which a Relevant Performance Condition is or was satisfied. 10

“Participant” means a person who holds an Award including, if relevant, that person’s legal representatives.

“Performance Conditions” means the conditions set out in Schedule 1 or Schedule 2, or such other conditions as may be determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee pursuant to Rule 8.

“Performance Related Remuneration” means any element of the Participant’s remuneration (payable in cash or shares and including any Vested Matching Shares paid or payable under the Plan) where the payment, or the extent of the payment, of that remuneration is determined, at least in part, by reference to a Relevant Performance Condition. 11

 

6  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

7  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

8  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

9  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

10  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

11  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

4


“Plan” means the WPP plc Leadership Equity Acquisition Plan III as from time to time amended in accordance with the provisions of these Rules.

“Relevant Event” means the earlier of:

 

  (a)

the date on which an Employment terminates in circumstances where the Participant is a Good Leaver; or

 

  (b)

the Change of Control Date.

“Relevant Performance Condition” means a condition or term which affects the amount of any remuneration of a Participant (for the avoidance of doubt, payable in cash or shares) that vests, is exercisable or receivable and which depends on any measure of performance including the financial performance of the Company, the Group or any business (or any part of any business) or company within the Group. 12

“Relevant Proportion” means the proportion that the length of the period from the start of an I&P Period to the occurrence of the Relevant Event bears to the length of that I&P Period (calculated in days).

“Rules” means the rules of the Plan.

“Schedule 1” means Schedule 1 to these Rules.

“Schedule 2” means Schedule 2 to these Rules. 13

“Serious Illness” means a serious long-term illness that prevents the Participant from carrying out their duties of employment. 14

“Share” means an ordinary share in the capital of the Company and includes ADRs.

“Share Requirement” means the number of Shares or Treasury Shares which have in the previous ten years been or are to be issued or (in the case of Treasury Shares) transferred to satisfy outstanding Awards under any employee share scheme of the Company (including the Plan). 15

“Target Bonus” means, in relation to any particular year, the target bonus which may be payable to an Eligible Person in relation to that particular year and which is paid in cash or in Shares to be received either immediately or on a deferred basis.

“Tax Liability” means any liability for any tax and/or, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, social security contributions (which, where determined by the Compensation Committee at the time of the grant of the Award, include employer’s social security contributions) or the like arising in any jurisdiction in connection with the Plan or any Award which the Company, relevant Group Company or other person is or may be liable to account for or pay in any jurisdiction. 16

 

 

12  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

13  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

14  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

15  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

16  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

5


“Trading Day” means a day on which Shares can be traded on the LSE and NASDAQ. 17

“Treasury Shares” means any Shares which are purchased by the Company in accordance with Article 57 of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 and held by the Company as treasury shares pursuant to Article 58A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991.

“UKLA” means the United Kingdom Listing Authority. 18

“Value” means:

 

  (a)

in the case of Shares, the average of:

 

  (i)

in the case of an ordinary share in the capital of the Company, the middle-market quotation of a Share on the Official List 19 ; and

 

  (ii)

in the case of ADRs, the average of the highest and lowest price of an ADR on a Trading Day on NASDAQ or on any other trading market that is for the time being the principal trading market for the ADR;

in either case taken over the five Trading Days before the date on which that value is to be determined; and

 

  (b)

in the case of an Investment Option, the price payable to acquire the Investment Option.

“Vested Matching Shares” means the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which is determined as at the end of the I&P Period as being the number of Matching Shares which vest in accordance with paragraph 5 of Schedule 1 or Schedule 2 as applicable.

“Vesting Date” means the date determined by the Compensation Committee to be the date on which restrictions attaching to Vested Matching Shares are to be released or Vested Matching Shares are to be transferred or issued (pursuant to the exercise of an option or otherwise) to a Participant, or as the Participant may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs, to satisfy an Award which will, in any event, be no later than 15 March in the year following the end of the I&P Period unless the Company is prohibited from discharging the Award on that date in which case the Vesting Date will be the first available Trading Day when the Company is no longer prohibited from discharging that Award.

 

2.2

An Eligible Person or Participant will be treated as Interested in Shares if those Shares are held by:

 

  (a)

the Eligible Person or Participant beneficially;

 

  (b)

a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family beneficially;

 

  (c)

a family trust or pension trust (not including a pension scheme of any Group Company) in which the Eligible Person or Participant or a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family is interested;

 

 

17  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

18  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

19  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

6


  (d)

a private company in which the Eligible Person or Participant or a member of their Close Family is interested as to more than 25% of the voting power, income and capital on a winding up;

 

  (e)

a nominee for any of the above; or

 

  (f)

an ESOP, but only in a case where the Participant’s entitlement to receive those Shares under an Award is not subject to any outstanding employment or performance-related conditions and the Participant has agreed with the Company to defer receipt of those Shares until a date after the first date on which those Shares could have first been delivered to the Participant;

and not (save with the written consent of the Compensation Committee) subject to any Encumbrance provided that any Shares which are the subject of a Basic Share Award or a Basic Share Right will be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested but, for the avoidance of doubt, any Shares which are issued as Bonus Share Awards or pursuant to Bonus Shares Rights pursuant to the Bonus Deferral Programme will not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person is Interested prior to:

 

  (a)

in the case of a Bonus Share Award, any contingency attaching to such award lapsing; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Bonus Share Right, the option to acquire Shares pursuant to the rights being validly exercised;

and, also for the avoidance of doubt, any unexercised options where the option price is more than a nominal amount will also not be treated as Shares in which an Eligible Person or Participant is Interested.

 

2.3

An Eligible Person or Participant will be treated as Interested in an Investment Option if that Investment Option is a subsisting Investment Option held by:

 

  (a)

the Eligible Person or Participant beneficially;

 

  (b)

a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family beneficially;

 

  (c)

a family trust or pension trust (not including a pension scheme of any Group Company) in which the Eligible Person or Participant is interested or a member of the Eligible Person’s or Participant’s Close Family is interested;

 

  (d)

a private company in which the Eligible Person or Participant or their Close Family is interested as to more than 25% of the voting power, income and capital on a winding up; or

 

  (e)

a nominee for any of the above;

and not (save with the written consent of the Compensation Committee) subject to any Encumbrance.

 

2.4

The terms Basic Share Award, Basic Share Right, Bonus Share Award and Bonus Shares Right have the same meanings as they have in the rules of the Bonus Deferral Programme as amended from time to time.

 

7


2.5

Words importing the singular include the plural and vice versa.

 

2.6

Any reference, express or implied, to an enactment includes references to:

 

  (a)

that enactment as amended, extended or applied by or under any other enactment; and

 

  (b)

any enactment which that enactment re-enacts (with or without modification).

 

2.7

Any reference to a Rule is a reference to one of these Rules.

 

3

ELIGIBILITY

 

3.1

No person is entitled, by virtue of the provisions of the Plan, to participate as of right in the Plan.

 

3.2

The Compensation Committee may decide from time to time which Eligible Persons may participate and the extent of their participation in the Plan.

 

4

ACQUISITION OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

 

4.1

In order to participate in the Plan and to be eligible to receive and retain an Award an Eligible Person must:

 

  (a)

agree to commit to the Plan Shares in which that Eligible Person is Interested and, where agreed between the Compensation Committee and the Participant, acquire an Investment Option in which that Eligible Person is Interested on or before the IO Commitment Date which the Compensation Committee has specified in relation to that Award;

 

  (b)

be Interested in that number of Investment Shares which are committed to the Plan in accordance with Rule 7 on or before the IS Commitment Date; and

 

  (c)

remain Interested in that number of Investment Shares from the IS Commitment Date and in the Investment Option from the IO Commitment Date (if applicable) to the end of the I&P Period.

 

4.2

Subject to Rule 4.3 the maximum aggregate Value of Shares together with, if applicable, the Value of Investment Options (in both cases being the Value determined as at the date of the letter from the Company to an Eligible Person inviting them to receive an Award) which an Eligible Person may commit as Investment Shares and Investment Options (in aggregate) over:

 

  (a)

all Awards made to that Eligible Person under the Plan shall be 500 per cent. of the Eligible Person’s Annual Earnings; and

 

  (b)

all Awards made to that Eligible Person under the Plan in respect of a particular I&P Period shall be 100% per cent of the Eligible Person’s Annual Earnings;

provided that in respect of any particular Award, the Compensation Committee may prescribe a maximum aggregate Value of Investment Shares for that Award and (if applicable) the associated Investment Option lower than the aggregate Values necessary to reach these limits.

 

8


4.3

The maximum Value of an Investment Option for any particular Award must not exceed one-third of the Value of the Investment Shares in respect of that Award. In respect of any particular Award, the Compensation Committee may prescribe a maximum Value of an Investment Option lower than one-third of the Value of the Investment Shares in respect of that Award.

 

4.4

If, by the IS Commitment Date, a Participant has failed to commit the number of Investment Shares which it has been determined they should commit in relation to an Award, then, except in those exceptional circumstances that the Compensation Committee may from time to time determine, that Award will lapse. In those exceptional circumstances, the Compensation Committee may determine that an Award will not lapse but will be adjusted in any manner that the Compensation Committee decide, including adjustments to:

 

  (a)

specify a later date by which the Investment Shares must be committed and Investment Option (if applicable) acquired;

 

  (b)

reduce the number of Investment Shares to be committed;

 

  (c)

allow a different Investment Option (if applicable) to be committed;

 

  (d)

reduce the number of Investment Option Shares (if applicable) comprised in the Award; and/or

 

  (e)

reduce the number of Matching Shares comprised in the Award.

 

4.5

Neither the Company nor any Group Company will grant, be a party to or negotiate any Investment Option.

 

5

PLAN LIMITS

The Share Requirement must not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company for the time being. 20

 

6

AWARDS

 

6.1

The Compensation Committee may decide, from time to time, that the grant of an Award may be subject to the satisfaction of any conditions it determines and notifies to an Eligible Person at the time that the Eligible Person is invited to participate.

 

6.2

By agreeing to participate in the Plan (having been invited to do so) and by agreeing to commit Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) by the Commitment Date in accordance with Rule 4, an Eligible Person will be eligible to receive an Award granted by the Compensation Committee. Awards will normally be made during an Award Period, but exceptionally may be made at other times.

 

6.3

An Award will relate to that number of Matching Shares as the Compensation Committee may determine not exceeding five Matching Shares per Participant for each Investment Share and (if applicable) each Investment Option Share, in both cases, committed by the Participant in question. Subject to Rules 11.2 and 12.7, the number of Matching Shares which become Vested Matching Shares will be determined at the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which the Performance Conditions or other conditions as referred to in Rule 8 are satisfied.

 

20  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

9


6.4

The Compensation Committee will determine the form in which the Award is made and its full terms. In particular, the Award may take the form of any one or more of the following, provided that the terms of the Award are consistent with the Plan:

 

  (a)

an award of Matching Shares, subject to restrictions, or a promise of Matching Shares;

 

  (b)

an option to acquire the Matching Shares exercisable for a nil or a nominal consideration; or

 

  (c)

any other form which the Compensation Committee considers has a substantially similar economic purpose or effect;

and the Compensation Committee may determine that an Award may be satisfied by a Group Company or the trustees of an ESOP (with the agreement of such Group Company or trustees, as appropriate) or otherwise as it considers appropriate.

 

6.5

A Participant will become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) the number of Vested Matching Shares comprised in an Award in accordance with the form of the Award under Rule 6.4 on the Vesting Date, only if both the following conditions are met:

 

  (a)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise:

 

  (i)

the Participant remains Interested in the relevant number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) until the end of the I&P Period; or

 

  (ii)

if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, the Participant remains Interested in all of the relevant Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) until the Vesting Date; and

 

  (b)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, if the Participant continues in Employment throughout the I&P Period and until the Vesting Date.

 

6.6

The Participant will cease to have any rights in respect of the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which are not Vested Matching Shares with effect from the end of the I&P Period, and will cease to have any rights in respect of all the Matching Shares comprised in an Award which will lapse with effect from the earliest of:

 

  (a)

subject to Rules 9 and 11, the cessation of Employment;

 

  (b)

unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, the Participant’s failure to remain Interested in accordance with Rule 6.5 in that number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) that relates to that Award;

 

  (c)

subject to Rule 6.7, the date on which a Participant transfers, assigns, uses as security or otherwise charges an Award or turns an Award to account, or attempts or purports to do any of the same;

 

  (d)

the date on which an Award lapses under Rule 6.8; and

 

10


  (e)

the date on which Rule 9.8 applies.

 

6.7

An Award is personal to a Participant and cannot be transferred, assigned, used as security or otherwise charged or turned to account except that the Award may be transferred if, immediately after the transfer, the Participant would be Interested in the Award within the meaning of Rule 2.2 if when applying the provisions of Rule 2.2 the word Shares in that Rule were replaced by the word Award (and making such further changes to the wording of Rule 2.2 as are required to give effect to this Rule) but only for so long as the Participant remains so Interested.

 

6.8

An Award will lapse if the Participant commits an act of bankruptcy or enters into any arrangement with their creditors under any formal insolvency procedure.

 

6.9

The receipt of an Award will not confer on the Participant (unless otherwise provided in the terms of the Award) any right to the allotment of a specified number of Shares by the Company or to the transfer of a specified number of Shares from any particular transferor. The satisfaction of the Award will be in accordance with Rule 12.

 

6.10

If an Award is made in a form that does not confer on the Participant the right to receive dividends on the relevant Vested Matching Shares from the date the Award is made, the Compensation Committee may provide that the Participant will, subject to Rule 6.11, be entitled to receive at the time of the satisfaction of the Award to which the entitlement relates an issue or transfer of, or a release of restrictions in respect of, that number of Shares which could have been purchased if:

 

  (a)

the dividends which would have been paid on such Vested Matching Shares (had the form of the Award conferred the right to receive dividends) been reinvested in Shares on the date each dividend is paid after the date that the Award is made and during the I&P Period; and

 

  (b)

the dividends which would have been paid on Shares which would have been held pursuant to that reinvestment in Shares had those dividends been further reinvested in Shares, again on the date each dividend is paid during the I&P Period.

 

6.11

If a Participant is a Bad Leaver any right to receive additional Shares under Rule 6.10 will, unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, lapse on the date of termination of Employment.

 

6.12

For the avoidance of doubt a Participant will not be entitled to any voting rights in respect of Shares to be issued or transferred or released from restrictions pursuant to Rule 6.10 until those Shares are actually issued or transferred or released from those restrictions to the Participant. 21

 

7

COMMITMENT OF INVESTMENT SHARES AND INVESTMENT OPTIONS

 

7.1

Any Shares or Investment Option in which an Eligible Person is or becomes Interested for the purposes of Rule 4 will be committed to the Plan and held under arrangements approved by the Compensation Committee so as to constitute Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) of the Participant for a particular Award.

 

21  

Rule 6.13 removed by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

11


7.2

The Compensation Committee will be entitled to rely on a declaration in a form satisfactory to it that an Eligible Person or Participant is or continues to be (respectively) Interested in the required number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable).

 

7.3

A Participant is required to immediately notify the Company Secretary if they cease to be Interested in the number of Investment Shares required to be committed (or any of them) and/or the Investment Option (if applicable).

 

7.4

The commitment of Shares to the Plan as Investment Shares will not of itself affect any right of the Eligible Person to dividends or other rights attaching to those Shares.

 

7.5

An Investment Option will cease to be committed at the end of the I&P Period and from the end of the I&P Period the Participant will be entitled to release the Investment Option, exercise it or continue to hold it in accordance with its terms as the Participant may determine.

 

8

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

8.1

Subject to Rule 9.6, the number of Matching Shares comprised in an Award which become Vested Matching Shares will be determined as soon as practicable following the end of the I&P Period and will depend on the extent to which such Performance Conditions or other conditions as the Compensation Committee will, from time to time determine on the making of an Award, are satisfied.

 

8.2

In the absence of a determination by the Compensation Committee to the contrary under Rule 8.1 above, the Performance Conditions set out in Schedule 1 will apply to Awards granted under the Plan in 2009 and 2010 and the Performance Conditions set out in Schedule 2 will apply to Awards granted in 2011. 22

 

8.3

If the Compensation Committee determines that exceptional circumstances have occurred or have prevailed at any time during the I&P Period applicable to an Award, the Compensation Committee will have the power to determine that the number of Matching Shares which may become Vested Matching Shares at the end of an I&P Period, in respect of all Awards having the same I&P Period, will be varied by such number as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate.

 

9

CESSATION OF EMPLOYMENT

 

9.1

Subject to Rules 9.3 and 9.4, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date of an Award, that Award will lapse except to the extent and on such terms and conditions that the Compensation Committee determines.

 

9.2

For the avoidance of doubt, Rule 9.1 applies where a Participant is a Bad Leaver.

 

9.3

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment in the first year of an I&P Period and is a Good Leaver the Award applicable to that I&P Period will lapse except to the extent that the Compensation Committee determines otherwise.

 

9.4

Subject to Rule 9.3, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment prior to the Vesting Date and is a Good Leaver, Rule 6 will apply as if:

 

  (a)

the number of Matching Shares which the Participant could become entitled to acquire at the end of the I&P Period, depending on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at the end of the I&P Period under Rule 8; and

 

22  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

12


  (b)

the number of Shares which the Participant could become entitled to pursuant to Rule 6.10;

were reduced to the Relevant Proportion of the number of Matching Shares and Shares respectively to which the Participant would have been entitled if their Employment had not terminated.

 

9.5

In consequence of Rule 9.4:

 

  (a)

Rule 6.5(b) will cease to apply; and

 

  (b)

the Participant will become entitled to acquire, receive or retain (depending on the form of the Award) on the date determined pursuant to Rule 12:

 

  (i)

a number of Matching Shares; and

 

  (ii)

the Shares issued, transferred or retained pursuant to Rule 6.10;

(reduced in either case to the Relevant Proportion in accordance with Rule 9.4), and dependent, in both cases, on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied.

 

9.6

Unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, if a Participant ceases to be in Employment due to death or Serious Illness, the I&P Period of the Participant’s outstanding Award will be treated as ending on the date of cessation of Employment and the number of Matching Shares to be treated as Vested Matching Shares will be based upon the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied as at the date of cessation. 23

 

9.7

Subject to any relevant legal or regulatory requirements prevailing in any relevant jurisdiction, for the purposes of this Rule a woman who ceases to be in Employment following maternity or adoption leave (or the equivalent in any relevant jurisdiction) (“ Leave ”) will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the date on which she indicates that she does not intend to return from Leave to work. In the absence of such indication and if she has not already returned to work she will be regarded as having ceased Employment on the last day on which she is entitled to return to work. A woman who exercises her statutory right or any equivalent contractual right to return to work following Leave will not be treated as having ceased to be in Employment. Where a male in any relevant jurisdiction has the legal right to family related leave similar to Leave then the wording above will apply to that male. 24

 

9.8

If a Participant who has ceased to be in Employment breaches any contractual obligation owed to any Group Company relating to restrictions on that Participant following the termination of their Employment the Participant’s Award(s) will be forfeited.

 

10

VARIATION OF CAPITAL

 

10.1

In the event of any increase or variation in the capital of the Company arising out of or in connection with a capitalisation issue, an offer to the holders of Shares, a rights issue, a subdivision, consolidation or reduction of capital, special dividend, demerger, or other variation of capital, the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares and an Investment Option (if applicable) have been committed to the Plan may be adjusted in such manner and on such terms as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. An

 

23  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

24  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

13


 

adjustment will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the adjustment is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding.

 

10.2

Participants will be notified of any adjustment made under this Rule.

 

11

CHANGE OF CONTROL

 

11.1

Subject to Rule 11.4:

 

  (a)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company as a result or in consequence of making a general offer to acquire the whole of the issued share capital of the Company which is made subject to a condition such that if satisfied the person making the offer will have Control of the Company; or

 

  (b)

if any person (and/or persons acting in concert) obtains Control of the Company other than as a result of or in consequence of making such general offer but the offeror is bound by Rule 9 of the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers to make a general offer for the minority;

then:

 

  (i)

in relation to all outstanding Awards the I&P Period will be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date;

 

  (ii)

the number of Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire will be determined as at the Change of Control Date dependent on the extent to which the Performance Conditions are satisfied at that date, having regard to Rules 11.2 and 11.3 below and subject to Rule 8.3; and

 

  (iii)

on the Change of Control Date the Participant will cease to have any rights in respect of outstanding Awards except in relation to the Vested Matching Shares under Rule 11.1(b)(ii).

 

11.2

For the purpose of Rule 11.1 in determining TSR of the Company and the Comparator Group Companies, the End Period (as defined in Schedule 1 and Schedule 2) will be deemed to be a period ending on the Change of Control Date.

 

11.3

The number of Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to on a Change of Control will be the number of Vested Matching Shares determined by the application of Rules 11.1 and 11.2 reduced to the Relevant Proportion of the number of Matching Shares to which the Participant would have been potentially entitled if the Change of Control had not occurred.

 

11.4

If the value (as determined pursuant to Section 280G of IRC) of the Vested Matching Shares which a Participant may become entitled to acquire pursuant to Rules 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 upon a person or persons obtaining Control of the Company when aggregated with any other amounts which the Participant becomes entitled to receive or acquire upon that person or persons obtaining Control and which in either case must be aggregated for the purposes of calculating the imposition of any excise tax pursuant to Section 4999 of IRC is equal to or exceeds by 20% or less three times the “base amount” (as defined in Section 280G(b)(3) of IRC) for that Participant the number of Vested Matching Shares will be reduced, but only if the Participant would be better off by such reduction after taking into account all arrangements

 

14


 

between the Participant and the Company, by such number as is necessary to avoid the imposition of the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of IRC on the amounts which the Participant is entitled to acquire or receives upon that person or persons obtaining Control of the Company.

 

11.5

If:

 

  (a)

under Part 18A of the Companies (Jersey) Law 1991 the Court sanctions a compromise or arrangement for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation with any other company or companies; or

 

  (b)

a resolution is passed for the winding up of the Company for the purposes of or in connection with a reconstruction or division of the Company or its business;

the terms of outstanding Awards and the terms on which Investment Shares and Investment Options (if applicable) have been committed to the Plan will be varied in such manner as the Compensation Committee considers appropriate. A variation will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not as arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the variation is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding.

 

11.6

If any company (the “Acquiring Company”) obtains Control of the Company in accordance with Rule 11.1 and:

 

  (a)

the Acquiring Company also obtains Control of another company (the “Target Company”) within such period as the Compensation Committee may determine and, as a consequence of obtaining such Control, the Company and the Target Company become subsidiaries of the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (b)

the shareholders of the Company and the Target Company before the Acquiring Company obtained Control of the Company and the Target Company are the same persons who substantially comprise the shareholders of the Acquiring Company after the Acquiring Company obtained such Control,

then in relation any outstanding Awards the Compensation Committee may determine that the I&P Period will not be deemed to end on the Change of Control Date under Rule 11.1(b)(i) and it may determine (with the agreement of the Acquiring Company) that a Participant is required to release any outstanding Awards in consideration of the grant to the Participant by the Acquiring Company of an equivalent award.

 

11.7

For the purpose of Rule 11.6 an award granted pursuant to Rule 11.6 is an equivalent award to an Award if, but only if:

 

  (a)

the shares to which it relates are in the Acquiring Company, and it is subject to the provisions of the Plan in the same manner as the Award immediately prior to its release;

 

  (b)

the shares to which it relates are of an equivalent value to the value of the Shares which were subject to the Award immediately prior to the release, and for this purpose the Compensation Committee will determine such equivalent value provided that the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award under Rule 11.4 will not have effect unless the auditors or other advisers appointed by the Compensation Committee acting as experts and not arbitrators confirm that in their opinion the equivalent value is fair and reasonable and such confirmation will be final and binding;

 

15


  (c)

such award is subject to the Performance Conditions or such other performance conditions that the Compensation Committee determines are substantially no more and no less onerous than the Performance Conditions; and

 

  (d)

the Participant continues to be Interested in the relevant number of Investment Shares and the Investment Option (if applicable) in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines provided that and so far as reasonably possible, the terms on which Investment Shares and the Investment Option are committed to Awards are substantially no more and no less onerous than before the Change of Control.

 

11.8

With effect from the release of an Award and the grant of an equivalent award pursuant to Rule 11.6 the Plan will be construed as if:

 

  (a)

the equivalent award had been granted at the same time as the Award it replaces;

 

  (b)

references to the Company in the Rules were references to the Acquiring Company; and

 

  (c)

references to Shares were references to shares in the Acquiring Company;

and the Compensation Committee may make such amendments to these Rules and to the terms of existing awards as may be necessary to give effect to Rule 11.6.

 

12

SATISFACTION OF AWARDS

 

12.1

The manner in which an Award is satisfied on the Vesting Date will depend on the form of the Award determined by the Compensation Committee under Rule 6.4.

 

12.2

Awards will be satisfied by the transfer or issue of or the release of restrictions relating to the number of Vested Matching Shares to the Participant (or as the Participant may direct, or to a depository in the case of ADRs) normally from an ESOP or from Treasury Shares held by the Company.

 

12.3

Following the end of the last financial year of the I&P Period, the Compensation Committee will determine the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied. That determination will be made at least one week before the Vesting Date.

 

12.4

Subject to Rule 12.7, once the Compensation Committee has determined the extent to which the Performance Conditions have been satisfied in relation to an Award (including after having taken account of the provisions of Rule 13.3, if relevant 25 ) and, subject to the Participant being in Employment on the Vesting Date (or if the Participant has been a Good Leaver and the provisions of Rule 9.4 apply or if the Compensation Committee has otherwise exercised its discretion under Rule 9), the Compensation Committee will procure that the Award is satisfied on the Vesting Date in accordance with Rule 12.2.

 

12.5

Any transfer or issue of or release of restrictions relating to Vested Matching Shares to a Participant (or as the Participant may direct or to a depository in the case of ADRs) is subject to the Compensation Committee being satisfied that the transfer, issue or release would be lawful in any relevant jurisdiction.

 

12.6

The transfer or issue of, or release of restrictions relating to, Shares under the Plan is subject to obtaining any approval or consent required under the Listing Rules published by the UKLA, the Rules of the LSE, the Admission and Disclosure Standards of the LSE, and otherwise complying

 

25  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010.

 

16


 

with the provision of City Code on Take-overs and Mergers and any other applicable regulations or enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas). The Participant will do all things necessary to obtain, or obviate the need for, such approval or consent.

 

12.7

If a Participant ceases to be in Employment due to death or Serious Illness, Rule 9.6 will apply and:

 

  (a)

the date upon which the Participant’s Award will be satisfied will be within 6 months of the Participant ceasing to be in Employment; and

 

  (b)

in the case of a Participant’s death, the Participant’s Award will be satisfied in favour of their personal representatives prior to the Vesting Date. 26

 

13

MISSTATEMENT 27

 

13.1

The provisions of 13.2 will apply if:

 

  (a)

a Participant has committed an act of fraud, dishonesty or deceit in relation to a Group Company;

 

  (b)

as a result of the actions or omissions of a Participant, any Original Accounts are required to be materially corrected, or any accounts or other data for a later period include write downs, adjustments or other items; or

 

  (c)

a Participant knew or ought reasonably to have known, given that Participant’s role and position in the Group, that the relevant financial performance or other data by reference to which a Relevant Performance Condition was measured was materially different than shown in the Original Accounts;

and the Compensation Committee considers that the quantum of any Performance Related Remuneration of that Participant would have been affected if the circumstance or circumstances referred to in (a), (b) or (c) above had been known of, acted upon or otherwise taken into account at the relevant time.

 

13.2

In the event that the Compensation Committee determines that it would be clear to a reasonable, objective assessor that one of the events as detailed in Rule 13.1 above has occurred the Compensation Committee will be entitled, but in no circumstances will be obliged, to take action as described in Rule 13.3 below.

 

13.3

The Compensation Committee may determine that:

 

  (a)

an Award is cancelled in its entirety; or

 

  (b)

the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of an Award determined in accordance with paragraph 5 of Schedule 1 or Schedule 2 as applicable will be reduced by such amount and/or in such manner as the Compensation Committee determines.

For the avoidance of doubt, this Rule 13.3 may be operated in respect of Awards where the event or events in respect of which the Compensation Committee has made a determination under Rule 13.2 relates to Performance Related Remuneration under another Award or another plan.

 

 

26  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

27  

Inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 11 May 2010

 

17


14

MISCELLANEOUS

 

14.1

The Plan will be administered by the Compensation Committee whose decision on any matter concerning the Plan will be final and binding unless it is a matter in respect of which the Rules provide that the decision of the auditors or any other adviser is final and binding.

 

14.2

The Compensation Committee or any committee or agent that they may from time to time delegate authority to, will approve all documents required in connection with Awards.

 

14.3

The Compensation Committee may establish arrangements under which the cash value of an Award may be paid to an Eligible Person in lieu of the satisfaction of the Award under Rule 12.

 

14.4

The cost of establishing and operating the Plan (including but not limited to stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax, if any, arising on a transfer of Shares pursuant to Rule 12) will be borne by the Company but may be recharged to the relevant Group Companies on such arm’s length basis as is considered appropriate from time to time.

 

14.5

Any notice or other communication under or in connection with the Plan may be given by personal delivery, delivery by email or by sending the same by post, in the case of a company to its registered office (or to such other address and person as may be specified by that company from time to time), and in the case of an individual to their last known address, or, where the individual is a director or employee of a Group Member, either to their last known address or to the address of the place of business at which the individual performs the whole or substantially the whole of the duties of their office or employment or of any such office or employment.

 

14.6

Evidence that the notice was properly addressed, stamped and put in the post will be conclusive evidence of posting.

 

14.7

Participation in the Plan is a matter separate from any contract of employment or other agreement and any benefit conferred by the Plan will not be counted for pension or any other purpose.

 

14.8

The rights and obligations of any individual under the terms of their office or employment with any Group Company will not be affected by their participation in the Plan and the Plan does not form part of any contract of employment between any individual and any Group Company.

 

14.9

A Participant will not have any entitlement by way of compensation or damages resulting from the termination of the office or employment (for any reason and whether lawful or not) by virtue of which they are or may be eligible to participate in the Plan or for the loss or reduction of any right or benefit or prospective right or benefit under the Plan which they may otherwise have enjoyed whether the compensation is claimed for wrongful dismissal or otherwise.

 

14.10

The Plan is intended to operate on a worldwide basis and, accordingly, the Compensation Committee may adopt any rate of exchange for converting any currency into any other currency as it decides at any time and from time to time for any purpose in connection with the Plan.

 

14.11

The Participant must make payment, or arrangements (which are satisfactory to the Compensation Committee) for payment, to the relevant Group Company or other person of such sum as is sufficient, in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee, to settle any Tax Liability. Unless the Compensation Committee determines otherwise, there will be no obligation to satisfy an Award until the Participant has done so. 28

 

28  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

18


14.12

Receipt of an Award will authorise the Company or any person nominated by the Company at its sole discretion to sell such number of Vested Matching Shares as it may estimate as being necessary to produce a cash sum sufficient to meet the Tax Liability and account to the relevant Group Company or other person and/or the relevant authorities in respect of such Tax Liability at the appropriate time. 29

 

14.13

If a Participant owes a debt or other monetary obligation to a Group Company, the relevant Group Company has a charge over the Participant’s interest in the Plan (but not over the Participant’s Investment Shares). Satisfaction of an Award may be withheld until the Participant has discharged, to the satisfaction of the Compensation Committee, the debt or other monetary obligation.

 

14.14

The Plan and any Award will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales and the Company and the Participants (together with any Eligible Persons who do not become Participants) submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of England and Wales.

 

15

AMENDMENT

 

15.1

Subject to Rules 15.2 and 15.4, the Compensation Committee may at any time alter or add to all or any provisions of the Plan, or the terms of all or any Awards made under it, in any respect.

 

15.2

No alteration or addition to the advantage of Eligible Persons or Participants can be made under Rule 15.1 without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting, other than a minor amendment to benefit the administration of the Plan, to take account of a change in legislation or to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for Eligible Persons, Participants or Group Companies.

 

15.3

The Compensation Committee may make such amendments and modifications to all or any provisions of the Plan as are necessary or required in order to take account of laws and regulations in any jurisdiction which enable non-UK resident Eligible Persons to participant in the Plan including the establishment of separate plans in any such jurisdictions which replicate in all substantial respects the provisions of the Plan.

 

15.4

No alteration or addition can be made to the terms of any Award made prior to the date of the alteration or addition which would adversely affect a Participant’s interest in that Award in any material respect without the consent of the relevant Participant.

 

16

DURATION

No Award may be granted under the Plan after 31 December 2013 without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

29  

Amended by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

19


SCHEDULE 1

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee shall from time to time determine should be the Comparator Group (which shall be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which shall be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (JP:4324), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Market Capitalisation” means the average daily closing price, calculated in a common currency, of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of each Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the average number of ordinary shares or units of common stock in issue during the Start Period, provided that the Compensation Committee may decide that the market capitalisation of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be determined using alternative appropriate data sources (including, but not limited to data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream).

“Market Capitalisation Weighting” means the proportion, expressed as a percentage, that the Market Capitalisation of a particular Comparator Group Company bears to the Market Capitalisation Sum.

“Market Capitalisation Sum” means the sum of the Market Capitalisations of the Comparator Group (which, for the avoidance of doubt, does not include the Company).

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and Investment Option Shares, in both cases, committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which shall determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, the Matching Factor will not be greater than 500% and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

“Start Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period.

“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

20


  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.2) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is a comparison of the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for the Company, and each Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period shall be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

  End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding.
  Start Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding.
  End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
  Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares.

 

21


3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1 the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company shall be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value shall be construed accordingly.

 

3.3

The End Value and the Start Value for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be calculated in the same currency.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

The TSR of the Company will then be compared to the TSR of the Comparator Group Companies.

 

4.4

The sum of the Market Capitalisation Weightings of the Comparator Group Companies whose TSR is less than the TSR of the Company is then calculated (the “MCW Aggregate” ).

 

4.5

The Matching Factor will be determined by the application (consecutively) of the following two calculations:

 

  (a)

an amount will be calculated (the “Adjusted MCW Aggregate” ) by applying the following formula:

Adjusted MCW Aggregate = MCW Aggregate + ((TSR W -TSR B ) / (TSR A -TSR B ) x MCF)

where:

TSR A = the TSR of the company ranked above the Company

TSR B = the TSR of the company ranked below the Company

TSR W = the TSR of the Company

MCF = Market Capitalisation Weighting of the company whose TSR ranked above the Company

 

  (b)

the Matching Factor is then calculated by the application of the following formula:

Matching Factor = Match B + ((Adjusted MCW Aggregate-MCW B ) x (Match A -Match B ) / (MCW A -MCW B ))

where

Match A = the Match (derived from the table set out below (the “Table” ) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

 

22


Match B = Match (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW A = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW B = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

and where the Matching Factors associated with distinct percentile steps are defined as follows (and the term “Percentile Step” shall be construed accordingly):

 

PERCENTILE    MATCH
90th percentile    500%
80th percentile    420%
70th percentile    330%
60th percentile    240%
50th percentile    150%
40th percentile    0%
30th percentile    0%
20th percentile    0%
10th percentile    0%
Bottom    0%

Provided that:

 

  (c)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is less than 50% the Matching Factor will be zero;

 

  (d)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is more than 90% the Matching Factor will be 500%;

 

  (e)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is exactly equal to 50%, 60%, 70% or 90%, the Matching Factor shall be determined directly from the Table; and

 

  (f)

if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment shall materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and the number of Investment Option Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation shall be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

23


SCHEDULE 2 30

 

1

DEFINITIONS

 

1.1

The following words and expressions have the following meanings in this Schedule.

“Comparator Group” means the group of companies which the Compensation Committee from time to time determine should be the Comparator Group (which will be set out in the documentation granting the Award) and which will be, at the date of adoption of the Plan the companies listed below (the ticker numbers for the following companies are those used on the companies’ respective domestic exchanges):

Aegis Group plc (GB:965756), Arbitron Inc (US:ARB), Dentsu Inc (JP:4324), GfK AG (DE:587530), Havas SA (FR:12188), Interpublic Group of Companies Inc (US:IPG), Ipsos SA (FR:7329), Nielsen Holdings NV (US:NLSN), Omnicom Group Inc (US:OMC) and Publicis Groupe SA (FR:13057).

“Comparator Group Company” means a company in the Comparator Group.

“End Period” means a period of 6 months, ending on the last day of the I&P Period.

“Market Capitalisation” means the average daily closing price, calculated in a common currency, of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of each Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the average number of ordinary shares or units of common stock in issue during the Start Period, provided that the Compensation Committee may decide that the market capitalisation of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be determined using alternative appropriate data sources (including, but not limited to data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream).

“Market Capitalisation Weighting” means the proportion, expressed as a percentage, that the Market Capitalisation of a particular Comparator Group Company bears to the Market Capitalisation Sum.

“Market Capitalisation Sum” means the sum of the Market Capitalisations of the Comparator Group (which, for the avoidance of doubt, does not include the Company).

“Matching Factor” means the factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule which is to be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and Investment Option Shares, in both cases, committed to the Plan in respect of an Award which will determine the extent to which Matching Shares become Vested Matching Shares in relation to that Award under the terms of the Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, the Matching Factor will not be greater than 500% and will not, in any circumstances, be less than 0.

“Start Period” means:

 

  (a)

other than in respect of Nielsen Holdings NV, a period of 6 months ending on the day before the start of the relevant I&P Period; and

 

  (b)

in respect of Nielsen Holdings NV, a period of 6 months ending on 30 June 2011.

 

30  

Schedule 2 inserted by Resolution of the Compensation Committee dated 12 November 2011.

 

24


“TSR” means the total return to the holders of ordinary shares or units of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as appropriate) based on:

 

  (a)

share price appreciation; and

 

  (b)

the assumed reinvestment of dividends,

calculated in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

2

PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

 

2.1

Subject to the Compensation Committee determining otherwise (pursuant to Rule 8.2) the Performance Condition that will apply to Awards under the Plan will be the TSR Condition.

 

2.2

The TSR Condition is a comparison of the TSR of the Company over the I&P Period to the TSR of the respective Comparator Group Companies over the same period determined in accordance with paragraph 4 below.

 

3

CALCULATION OF TSR

 

3.1

The TSR for the Company, and each Comparator Group Company over the I&P Period will be calculated as follows:

TSR = (End Value / Start Value) - 1

where:

 

  End Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the End Period, multiplied by the End Shareholding.
  Start Value =    the average daily closing price of an ordinary share or unit of common stock in the capital of the Company or Comparator Group Company (as ascertained from the Official List or other relevant exchange on which that share or unit of common stock is quoted and as determined from time to time by the Compensation Committee) during the Start Period, multiplied by the Start Shareholding.
  End Shareholding =    the Start Shareholding increased by that number of notional shares that could be acquired using dividends paid during the course of the I&P Period. For this purpose, dividends are assumed to be paid without any deduction or withholding in respect of tax on the Start Shareholding and the notional shares acquired from previous dividend payments during the I&P Period and on the basis that dividends are assumed to be reinvested in full in notional shares at the closing price of a Share on the ex-dividend date relative to each such dividend. For the avoidance of doubt, the number of notional shares may include fractions of one share.
  Start Shareholding =    1,000 shares.

 

25


3.2

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.1 the Compensation Committee may determine that the TSR of the Company and/or any Comparator Group Company will be performed using appropriate alternative data sources (including, but not limited to “total-return” data supplied by Bloomberg or Datastream). In this case, references to End Value and Start Value will be construed accordingly.

 

3.3

The End Value and the Start Value for the Company and each Comparator Group Company shall be calculated in the same currency.

 

4

CALCULATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

 

4.1

At the end of the I&P Period the TSR for the Company and each Comparator Group Company will be determined in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Schedule.

 

4.2

The Comparator Group Companies will then be ranked according to the TSR of each of them with the Comparator Group Company with the highest TSR ranking first.

 

4.3

The TSR of the Company will then be compared to the TSR of the Comparator Group Companies.

 

4.4

The sum of the Market Capitalisation Weightings of the Comparator Group Companies whose TSR is less than the TSR of the Company is then calculated (the “MCW Aggregate” ).

 

4.5

The Matching Factor will be determined by the application (consecutively) of the following two calculations:

 

  (a)

an amount will be calculated (the “Adjusted MCW Aggregate” ) by applying the following formula:

Adjusted MCW Aggregate = MCW Aggregate + ((TSR W -TSR B ) / (TSR A -TSR B ) x MCF)

where:

TSR A = the TSR of the company ranked above the Company

TSR B = the TSR of the company ranked below the Company

TSR W = the TSR of the Company

MCF = Market Capitalisation Weighting of the company whose TSR ranked above the Company

 

  (b)

the Matching Factor is then calculated by the application of the following formula:

Matching Factor = Match B + ((Adjusted MCW Aggregate-MCW B ) x (Match A -Match B ) / (MCW A -MCW B ))

where:

Match A = the Match (derived from the table set out below (the “Table” ) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

 

26


Match B = Match (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW A = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step above the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

MCW B = the percentile (derived from the Table) associated with the Percentile Step below the Adjusted MCW Aggregate

and where the Matching Factors associated with distinct percentile steps are defined as follows (and the term “Percentile Step” will be construed accordingly):

 

PERCENTILE    MATCH
90th percentile    500%
80th percentile    420%
70th percentile    330%
60th percentile    240%
50th percentile    150%
40th percentile    0%
30th percentile    0%
20th percentile    0%
10th percentile    0%
Bottom    0%

Provided that:

 

  (c)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is less than 50% the Matching Factor will be zero;

 

  (d)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is more than 90% the Matching Factor will be 500%;

 

  (e)

if the Adjusted MCW Aggregate is exactly equal to 50%, 60%, 70% or 90%, the Matching Factor will be determined directly from the Table; and

 

  (f)

if the Comparator Group Companies relevant to any particular Award are determined by the Compensation Committee to be different to those set in the definition of that term, the Compensation Committee may amend this table or any part of it as it considers appropriate but on the basis that no such amendment will materially advantage any Participants in respect of any existing Awards without the prior approval of the Company in general meeting.

 

5

APPLICATION OF THE MATCHING FACTOR

The Matching Factor determined pursuant to paragraph 4 of this Schedule will be multiplied by the number of Investment Shares and the number of Investment Option Shares relevant to an Award and the result of that calculation will be the number of Vested Matching Shares in respect of that Award.

 

27

Exhibit 4.41

SECOND AMENDMENT TO

SUPPLEMENTAL RETIREMENT AGREEMENT

SECOND AMENDMENT made effective as of the twelve month anniversary of the date written below, to the Supplemental Retirement Agreement (the “Supplemental Retirement Agreement”) made and entered into as of the 1 st day of July, 2008, by and between WPP Group USA, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and Paul Richardson (the “Executive”).

WHEREAS, as of the date written below, the Executive elects to change the date on which payment of his Deferral Account Balance commences in accordance with Section 6(c) of the Supplemental Retirement Agreement;

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, the parties hereto agree that the Supplemental Retirement Agreement is hereby amended as follows:

1.     Section 6(a) of the Supplemental Retirement Agreement is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows: “ Commencement. The Deferral Account Balance shall be paid to the Executive commencing in 2018 (no later than April 15, 2018) except as otherwise provided in this Section 6 but shall not be paid sooner than the earliest date permitted without violating Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.”

2.     Section 6(b)(i) of the Supplemental Retirement Agreement is hereby amended to read in its entirety as follows: “50% of the Deferral Account Balance as of December 31, 2017 shall be paid to the Executive as soon as practicable in 2018, but no later than April 15, 2018; and”.

2.     Except as modified in Section 1 of this Amendment, all of the terms and provisions of the Supplemental Retirement Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.

3.     This Amendment may be signed in counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument.

[Remainder of this page intentionally left blank]


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Amendment on the 22 day of June, 2011.

 

WPP GROUP USA, INC.
By:   LOGO
Name and Title: Assistant Secretary

 

EXECUTIVE
LOGO
Home address:   721 5th Ave, NY, NY 10022
Office address:   100 Park Ave NY NY 10017

Exhibit 8.1

Our principal subsidiaries as of December 31, 2011, are listed below. All other subsidiaries, if considered in the aggregate, would not constitute a significant subsidiary under Rule 1-02(w) of Regulation S-X.

 

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER
WHICH
ORGANISED

 

United States

  

24/7 Media US, Inc.

   Delaware

24/7 Media, Inc.

   Delaware

A. Eicoff & Company, Inc.

   Delaware

Burson-Marsteller, LLC

   Delaware

G2 Worldwide Inc.

   New York

Glover Park Group LLC

   Delaware

Grey Global Group Inc.

   Delaware

Grey Healthcare Group Inc.

   New York

Group M Worldwide, Inc.

   Delaware

I-Behavior Inc.

   Delaware

J. Walter Thompson Company

   Delaware

J. Walter Thompson U.S.A., Inc.

   Delaware

KnowledgeBase Marketing Inc.

   Delaware

Landor Ohio LLC

   Delaware

Landor, LLC

   Delaware

Lightspeed Online Research LLC

   Delaware

Marketing and Planning Systems LLC

   Delaware

Maxus Communications LLC

   Delaware

Mediacom Worldwide Inc.

   Delaware

Mediaedge:CIA LLC

   Delaware

Millward Brown, Inc.

   Illinois

Mindshare USA, LLC

   New York

Ogilvy CommonHealth Worldwide LLC

   Delaware

Ogilvy Healthworld, LLC

   Delaware

Ogilvy Public Relations Worldwide, Inc.

   Delaware

OgilvyOne, LLC

   Delaware

Possible Worldwide Inc

   California

Public Strategies, Inc

   Texas

Sudler & Hennessey, LLC

   Delaware

TeamDetroit, Inc.

   Delaware

The Ogilvy Group, Inc.

   Delaware

TNS Custom Research, Inc

   Pennsylvania

VML, Inc.

   Missouri

WPP Finance Square LLC

   Delaware

WPP Group U.S. Finance Corp.

   Delaware

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER
WHICH
ORGANISED

WPPIH 2001, Inc

   Delaware

Wunderman Worldwide, LLC

   Nevada

Young & Rubicam Inc

   Delaware

 

Non-US

  

Mediacom Australia Pty Limited

   Australia

WPP Group Services SNC

   Belgium

J Walter Thompson Publicidade Ltda

   Brazil

Newdesign Participações Ltda

   Brazil

Y&R Propaganda Ltda

   Brazil

Mediacom Canada

   Canada

GroupM (Shanghai) Advertising Co. Ltd

   China

J.Walter Thompson Bridge Advertising Co. Ltd.

   China

Kinetic Advertising (Shanghai) Co. Ltd

   China

Kantar SAS

   France

KR MEDIA France SAS

   France

Taylor Nelson Sofres SAS

   France

Advanced Techniques Group (ATG) GmbH

   Germany

Commarco GmbH

   Germany

Kantar Health GmbH

   Germany

MEC GmbH

   Germany

MediaCom Agentur für Media-Beratung GmbH

   Germany

MindShare GmbH

   Germany

TNS Infratest GmbH

   Germany

MindShare Communications Limited

   Hong Kong

GroupM Media India Pvt Ltd

   India

Hindustan Thompson Associates Private Limited

   India

Ogilvy & Mather Pvt Ltd

   India

CIA Medianetwork Club Srl

   Italy

CIA Medianetwork Milano Srl

   Italy

Mediacom Italia Srl

   Italy

Mindshare SpA

   Italy
 

 

1


COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER WHICH
ORGANISED

WPP Luxembourg Gamma Four Sarl

   Luxembourg

WPP Luxembourg Gamma Sarl

   Luxembourg

WPP Luxembourg Sarl

   Luxembourg

JWT México, S.R.L. de C.V.

   Mexico

Berkeley Square Holding BV

   Netherlands

GroupM B.V.

   Netherlands

Luxembourg Finance Gamma CV

   Netherlands

MindShare B.V.

   Netherlands

Taylor Nelson Sofres BV

   Netherlands

Kantar Media S.A.

   Spain

Mediacom Iberia SA

   Spain

Mindshare Spain SA

   Spain

Vinizius Young & Rubicam SL

   Spain

Mediaedge:cia Taiwan Ltd.

   Taiwan

Allan Burrows Limited

   United Kingdom

Enduring Organisation

   United Kingdom

Enduring Organisation Three

   United Kingdom

Flexible Organisation

   United Kingdom

Group Activation Ltd

   United Kingdom

J. Walter Thompson Group Limited

   United Kingdom

Kantar Media UK Ltd

   United Kingdom

Kinetic Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Lightspeed Research Ltd

   United Kingdom

MediaCom UK Limited

   United Kingdom

COMPANY NAME

  

JURISDICTION
UNDER WHICH
ORGANISED

Mediaedge:CIA Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Millward Brown UK Limited

   United Kingdom

Mindshare Media UK Limited

   United Kingdom

Ogilvy & Mather Group (Holdings) Limited

   United Kingdom

Ogilvyone Worldwide Limited

   United Kingdom

Premiere Group Holdings Limited

   United Kingdom

Prophaven Limited

   United Kingdom

RLM Finsbury Limited

   United Kingdom

TNS Group Holdings Limited

   United Kingdom

TNS UK Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP 2005 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP 2008 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP ATTICUS

   United Kingdom

WPP Finance (UK)

   United Kingdom

WPP Finance Co. Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Marketing Communications Spain

   United Kingdom

WPP No. 2337 Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Pearls Limited

   United Kingdom

WPP Unicorn Limited

   United Kingdom

Young & Rubicam Group Limited

   United Kingdom
 

 

2

Exhibit 12.1

Certification

I, Sir Martin Sorrell, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of WPP plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: 30 April 2012

 

/s/ Sir Martin Sorrell

Sir Martin Sorrell

Group Chief Executive

(principal executive officer)

Exhibit 12.2

Certification

I, Paul Richardson, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of WPP plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: 30 April 2012

 

/s/ Paul W.G. Richardson

Paul W.G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

(principal financial officer)

EXHIBIT 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906

OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of WPP plc (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the period ending 31 December 2011 (the “Report”), I, Sir Martin Sorrell, Group Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

Date: 30 April 2012

 

/s/ Sir Martin Sorrell

Sir Martin Sorrell

Group Chief Executive

EXHIBIT 13.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906

OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of WPP plc (the “Company”) on Form 20-F for the period ending 31 December 2011 (the “Report”), I, Paul Richardson, Group Finance Director of the Company, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the Company’s financial position and results of operations.

Date: 30 April 2012

 

/s/ Paul W.G. Richardson

Paul W.G. Richardson

Group Finance Director

EXHIBIT 14.1

 

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

We consent to the incorporation by reference in these Registration Statements No. 333-06378, No. 333-40516, No. 333-103888, No. 333-108149, No. 333-119949, No. 333-129640, No. 333-129733, No. 333-145041, No. 333-152662 and No. 333-157729, each on Form S-8, and Registration Statement No. 333-158262 and 333-159691 each on Form F-3 of our reports relating to the consolidated financial statements of WPP plc and subsidiaries (the “Company”) the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting dated 30 April 2012, appearing in the Annual Report on Form 20-F of WPP plc for the year ended 31 December 2011.

 

/s/ Deloitte LLP

DELOITTE LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2012

EXHIBIT 14.2

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in these Registration Statements No. 333-06378, No. 333-40516, No. 333-103888, No. 333-108149, No. 333-119949, No. 333-129640, No. 333-129733, No. 333-145041, No. 333-152662 and No. 333-157729, each on Form S-8, and Registration Statement No. 333-158262 and 333-159691 each on Form F-3 of our reports relating to the financial statements of WPP DAS Limited dated 30 April 2012 appearing in the Annual Report on Form 20-F of WPP plc for the year ended 31 December 2011.

/s/ Deloitte LLP

DELOITTE LLP

London, United Kingdom

30 April 2012